2233000-100 Rev 18 MINItrace Service Manual - Maintenance

GE Healthcare
MINItrace
Service Manual – Maintenance
Class A
Direction 2233000-100
Revision 18
GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace SERVICE MANUAL – MAINTENANCE
REVISION 18 DIRECTION 2233000-100
REVISION HISTORY
Rev Date Reason for change
18 August 26, Sec 19-2-2: Baud rate changed.

2019 Sec 19-3: Reference to release note added . [PCR 18-453]
17 May 28, 2019 Sec 3-4-2, 3-5, 4, 7-3-6-2: List of Cyclotron Service Tools and references removed. [PCR 17-
108]
Sec 3-5-6: Wording improved.
Sec 3-8: Reference information for consumables list added. [PCR 16-206]
Sec 3-9-2, 3-9-11: Tables updated. [PCR 16-195]
Sec 7: New information added for GCU:s with the new external PS solution. [PCR 16-045]
Sec 7-3: The term "Hyperterminal" is replaced by "a terminal communication software
(terminal emulation)". Any specific information regarding Hyperterminal is rewritten to fit
the use of any terminal. [PCR 16-076]
Sec 7-3-1: Figure 7-20 removed. [PCR 17-024, 18-024]
Sec 7-3-1-3: Table 7-17 updated. [PCR 17-024]
Sec 7-3-8: Table 7-24 updated. [PCR 17-024]
Sec 10-7-1: Information added to use the slot in the door when opening the magnet yoke.
Fig 10-6, 10-7: Layout changed to point out the slot in the door.
Sec 11-4: Updated with PSARC model PS/GEMS02A. [PCR 18-024]
Sec 11-12: Table 11-11 updated. [PCR 18-024]
Sec 12-2-2-1, 12-2-2-2: Replaced with reference to Sec 10-7-1 (duplicate information).
Sec 12-2-3: Updated with PSMC model MPS 9700. [PCR 17-024]
Sec 19-2: System requirements removed. [PCR 14-309]
App A: Obsolete links removed. [PCR 16-238]
16 March 31, 2015 Sec 3-7: Cyclotron job safety section updated. [PCR 14-263]
Sec 3-10-2: Warning and note added to sequence #8. [PCR 14-263]
Sec 9-2-2: Restructured. EVR-CA and CRA112 added in addition to EVR (TIDUR). [PCR 15-
029]
Sec 9-5-4: New section added for replacing temperature controllers. [PCR 15-029]
15 December 17, Chapter 1: Product name change information added.

2014 Table 3-1: Helium detector removed [PCR 08-081]. Software table updated.
Sec 3-7: New section with cyclotron job safety added. [PCR 13-158]
References to MINItrace Reference Manual (dir. 2232996-100) and MINItrace Service Man-
ual – Health and Safety (dir. 2232998-100) removed and/or replaced with updated references
to relevant sections and/or manuals throughout.
Sec 3-10-10: Note added.
Sec 15-1: Note added.
Sec 15-3: Updated.
Sec 15-5-1: Note added.
Sec 15-6-5-3: Fill volume updated for the 18F- Nb 25 target.
Revision history 3
MINItrace SERVICE MANUAL – MAINTENANCE GE HEALTHCARE
DIRECTION 2233000-100 REVISION 18
14 July 11, 2014 Sec 3-9-3: New values added. [PCR 14-109]
Sec 3-9-17: Values updated.
Sec 7-3-2-4: Backup procedure for MSS ver. 2 added. [PCR 14-148]
Sec 9-5-3: New “Target water cooling” section added.
Sec 10-9-11-1: Oil drainage updated. [PCR 13-079]
Ch 11: Note added about DD4 being removed from S/N 28791. [PCR 14-109, 14-148]
Fig 11-4, Fig 11-9, Fig 11-10 and Fig 11-11: Updated with note and new measurements.
[PCR 14-109, 14-148]
Sec 11-4: New section with PSARC model PS/GEMS-01 added. [PCR 13-263]
Sec 11-9-4-2: Step tables updated. [PCR 14-109, 14-148]
Sec 11-9-8-1: Values updated.
Sec 11-9-8-2: Values updated.
Sec 13-6-12: New cable part numbers added. [PCR 13-137]
Sec 15-6-1: Spare parts removed and replaced with reference to MINItrace Spare Parts
Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
Sec. 15-6-3: New “Targets” section added. [PCR 14-148]
Sec. 15-6-7: New “Water cooling” section added. [PCR 14-148]
Sec 15-7: New cable part number added. [PCR 13-137]
Ch 19: New chapter with information on the MSS software version 2.0 released 2014.
[PCR 14-148]
New appendix B: General radiation safety aspects. [PCR 13-158]
New appendix C: MINItrace radiation safety aspects. [PCR 13-158]
The previous chapters 19 and 20 moved to new appendix D. (Information on the MSS
software version that was discontinued in 2014.) Values updated in tables D-8, D-19, D-
22 and D-28.
13 September 23, Ch 6: Updated with more information about the control system structure. [PCR 13-157]
2013 Sec 17-7: Ladder and climbing safety updated. [PCR 13-200]
4 Revision history
12 September 4, All chapters: Reference added to LOTO procedures section. [PCR 13-129]
2013 Ch 2: New chapter with safety information. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 2-1: Reference to Safety Risk Assessment added. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 3-1: Reference added to MT Operator Guide for PM schedule. [PCR 08-198]
Sec 3-2: Safety information added. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 3-2-1: Reference to Safety Risk Assessment added. [PCR 13-129]
Table 3-1: Ladder added. [PCR 13-129]
Table 3-6, 3-7, 3-11, 3-12: LOTO added/updated. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 3-9-1: Fall hazard warning added. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 3-9-2: Pinch hazard warning added in seq. 7. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 3-9-13: LOTO added/updated. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 3-9-14: LOTO added/updated. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 7-2: Updated [PCR 13-157]
Sec 10-1: Warnings added [PCR 13-158]
Sec 10-9-15: Heavy object-warning updated. [PCR 12-082]
Sec 13-6-1: List added with spare parts requiring safety test. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 15-4, 15-5: Helium cooling figures updated. [PCR 12-337]
Sec 15-6-6: Heavy object-warning added. [PCR 12-082]
Sec 17-1: Fall hazard warning added. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 17-2: Pinch hazard warning updated. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 17-7: Ladder and climbing safety section added. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 18-5: Spare parts note added. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 18-5-2: Warning updated. [PCR 13-129]
Sec 18-5-4: Warning updated. [PCR 13-129]
New appendix A: New Safety Risk Assessment appendix added. [PCR 13-129]
11 October 19, Sec 2-8-3: Values J and M updated. [PCR 12-127]

2012 Sec 2-8-14: Instructions for how to test the ground stick added. [PCR 12-134]
Sec 6-3-5-4: V+24V_SM removed. [PCR 09-079]
Table 9-3: DUO 20 information updated. [PCR 09-197]
Sec 9-8-4: Text and figure updated with DUO 20 information. [PCR 09-197]
Sec 9-9-10: Text updated with DUO 20 information. [PCR 09-197]
Sec 9-9-12: Text updated with DUO 20 information. [PCR 09-197]
Fig 10-7: Values J and M updated. [PCR 12-127]
Sec 12-6: Table 12-21 updated. [PCR 11-057]
10 October 19, Sec 2-8: Test of safety interlocks and warning lights added. [PCR 09-231]
2010 Sec 12-2-4-6: Test panel updated with TPSU door interlock.
Ch 17: Extensive tests of the safety interlock system added (radiation safety, RFPG interlocks
and warning lights). [PCR 09-219, 09-231, 09-232]
Revision history 5
9 July 7, 2010 Table 2-1: Softwares updated.

Sec 2-4: Slightly updated to harmonize with PETtrace.
Sec 2-5: Section outline removed.
Sec 3-2: Section removed.
Sec 4-2: Table slightly updated.
Sec 6-3-7: PC Lynx added.
Sec 7-4: 208 V AC removed as site power option. [PCR 05-010]
Table 10-1 updated.
Sec 10-9: Section outline removed.
Sec 12-6-5: Beryllium oxide warning added. [PCR 09-230]
Ch 18: Slightly restructured.
8 November 30, Ch 15:

2009 Sec 15-3-1-4: Section on replacing collimators added.
Sec 15-3-1-5: Section on replacing isolators added. [PCR 09-207]
7 May 12, 2009 Ch 12:

Sec 12-3-2: Information on SCU Gen II added.
Sec 12-3-3: Anode current values updated. [PCR 09-072]
Sec 12-3-4: Anode current values updated. [PCR 09-072]
Sec 12-5-1: Information on SCU Gen I.
Sec 12-5-2: RFPG SCU Gen II measurement readout section added.
Sec 12-6-3-3: Drawing CAC222-31011 updated. Notes added to instruction that old systems
might not include a spark gap bracket to dismount/remount/adjust. [PCR 09-072]
6 December 8, Ch 2:
2008 Sec 2-8-16: Table for SCU web interface values added.
Sec 2-8-17: He cooling pressure changed. [PCR 08-196]
Ch 10:
Sec 10-9-6, step 49: Note updated.
Ch 12:
Sec 12-2-3: Reference changed. [PCR 08-243]
Sec 12-2-4-6: Table 12-9 and 12-11 updated.
Sec 12-2-4-6, 12-6-10-3: Log files information added.
Sec 12-2-4-7–8: Tube controller changed to software. “Flaps”, “delta”, “tuning motors”
corrected.
Sec 12-6-9-4: Updated with MINItrace data.
Sec 12-6-9, 12-6-10: Screen voltage to 750 V. [PCR 08-243]
Sec 12-6-10: Battery recycling instruction updated. [PCR 08-191]
Sec 12-6-10-7: Updated with MINItrace data.
Sec 12-6-11: Information on low-pass filters added. [PCR 08-243];
RF tuning instruction updated. [PCR 08-243];
SCU/RFPG tuning: “at 35 kV” added;
Table 12-24 updated.
6 Revision history
5 September 2, General
2008 Spare Part Booklet renamed to Spare Parts Catalog (same dir. no.).
New layout.
Ch 2:
Sec 2-5-2: Picture caa000-38030-00 replaced.
Sec 2-5-6: LOTO procedures for MINItrace added (SNO 5145415-100).
Sec 2-7: Clarification made: The customer is responsible for providing all consumables and
parts needed for planned maintenance, unless otherwise stipulated in contract agreement.
Sec 2-8-14: Table updated, grounding (SNO 5136522-100).
Sec 2-8-15: RF Board table updated (SNO 5136522-100).
Sec 2-8-16: PM instruction for SCU Gen II added.
Ch 12:
Sec 12-2: Restructured section.
Sec 12-2-2: Introduction to SCU Gen I and Gen II.
Sec 12-2-3: Information on SCU Gen I.
Sec 12-6-9: Board replacement in SCU Gen I added.
Sec 12-6-10: Instructions for replacing spare parts in SCU Gen II.
Sec 12-6-11: Instructions for replacing SCU Gen I with SCU Gen II.
Ch 14:
Sec 14-5, 14-6: Target maintenance and assembly removed.
4 June 04, 2007 General: All fonts changed to GEinspira.

GE Medical Systems/GEMS PET Systems changed to GE Healthcare.
New cover pages.
Minor layout improvements.
Ch 2:
Sec 2-8-1: Table updated with serial no. [SPR 06-169].
Sec 2-8-13: Voltage check on GCU type Gen II added.
Sec 2-8-14: Check TPSU terminal screws added (PQR 13103700).
Ch 4:
Sec 4-2: Error messages for GCU type Gen II added.
Ch 6:
Sec 6-2: Switch settings on DIO, AI and AO boards changed [SPR 04-132].
Sec 6-3: New section describing the GCU type Gen II. Pin configuration list added.
Ch 9:
Sec 9-6-1: Values in table for programming TPG-300 corrected.
Ch 19:
Table 94: Foil lifetime changed to 2.0 mAh (PQR 13107320).
Revision history 7
3 June 14, 2005 General: The words “FRU” and “Renewal Part” changed to “Spare Part”.
Minor layout improvements.
Page 16: Internet link to CDL (GE Common Documentation Library) introduced [SPR 04–202].
Ch 2:
Page 22: (Section 2-3-2) LOTO Spare Parts (three kits) added to Table 2 “On site tools not
included in product”.
Page 29–56: (Section 2-5) New LOTO Spare Parts (three kits) section is introduced, describing
three LOTO kits [SPR 03–196] (main reason for manual upgrade!).
Ch 9:
Page 190: (Section 9-6-1) The “Reprogramming the VCU” instructions corrected (lines 25–30
added).
Ch 12:
Page 302: (Section 12-6-8) Resistor color coding corrected in Illustration 85 “New compo-
nents on RF Circuit Board, Spare Part 2378410”.
2 March 12, 2004 Ch 1:

Section 1-2 Associated Documents updated.
Ch 2:
IS distance E (in table) changed to 15.5 mm.
IS distance K (in table) changed to 4.2 mm.
Ch 8:
Updated photos (CSC Water Cooling Components in sections 8-2 and 8-7) [SPR 04-008].
Ch 10:
IS distance E (Illustration 61) changed to 15.5 mm.
The whole IS Maintenance section thoroughly revised.
Ch 13:
Section 1-5-6 Overhaul of 18F-F- target: Dwg Gen II target added. Note added: Gen II target
expected to be more active than 6/3.9 mm.
Section 14-5-6-4 Cleaning the 18F-F- target: Cleaning procedure modified [SPR 04-030, SPR
04-024].
Section 14-7 How to add an 18F target option to MINItrace: Item 32 “Test of the target gas
system“ and item 33 “Leak test of MINItrace F18 option” updated (replaced by one longer
item 32) [SPR 04-031, SPR 04-025].
Ch 15:
New information in paragraph “Check readout of target current” in section 15-3-4 Checking
the Targets.
Ch 19:
Section 19-2-5, second paragraph: Info about multi-meter added.
Section 19-2-12: Parameters for Gen II-target added.
1C July 8, 2003 Ch 6: Sec 6-2 Lock-out and Tag-out warning rephrased.

Ch 9: Sec 9-9-16 Diff pump heating elements attachment procedure (FRU 2372519) up-
graded.
Ch 14: Sec 14-7 How to add an 18F target option to MINItrace added.
8 Revision history
1B June 14, 2003 Ch 2: FRUs removed/added. Cyclotron tools added.

Ch 3: The whole chapter removed (replaced by direction 2380006-100 MINItrace FRU
Booklet).
Ch 6: LOTO text updated.
Ch 7, Sec 7-2: 250V changed to 400V. Sec 7-3: Reference to Compressed Air Moisture Trap
introduced. LOTO text updated. Sec 7-4-2: Info re phase sensitive equipment introduced.
Sec 7-7: Information added.
Ch 8: LOTO text updated. Sec 8-5-2: Info re Water Cooling Pump Types introduced.
Ch 9: Sec 9-9-16 Diff pump heating elements attachment procedure (FRU 2372519) added.
Ch 10: Text adjustments.
Ch 11: LOTO text updated. Layout updated.
Ch 12: LOTO text updated. Sec 12-2-2 RFPG SCU functions upgraded (coding strip etc).
Drawing CAC222-31011-03-3 added to sec 12-6-3-3.
Sec 12-6-6 GSPU (Grid Screen Power Unit) added.
Sec 12-6-7 Anode Current Monitor Board added.
Sec 12-6-8 RF Circuit Board and SKQ/SKR low pass filter added.
Ch 13: Drawings updated.
Ch 14: Drawings updated. Sec 14-6-2 Text adjusted.
Ch 15: Sec 15-1: Text revised. Sections 15-3-1-2 Resize the Collimator opening and 15-3-
1-3 Install the Collimator and Resize the Opening introduced.
1A January 14, Table 2: Dose Monitor (Rem version) added.

2002 2–6–1: Table Vacuum during prod. moved to 2–6–10.
2–6–2: Ion Source Distances slightly altered.
2–6–8: Page ref re 1/16" tubing introduced.
2–6–10: PUMP time table altered.
3–4: O-ring set 2220623 moved from Vacuum System.
3–8–1: O-ring set removed, 2319420 Plug introduced.
3–10: He Filter FRU 2223087 replaced with2153534.
8–2: Cooling Water Shunt adjustments introduced.
10–9: Ion Source Central Region measures altered.
12–2–2: RF Extension Board caution introduced.
14-5-7: Tefzel tube replacement instructions introduced.
14-7: Document references extended.
1 December 14, Ch 2, 3, 4, 10, 12, 14 updated.

2001
0H October 10, A few improvements:

2001 Ch 2 Prev Maint: Table 1 and 3 modified.
Ch 3 Renewal parts: Some information updated.
Ch 14 Targets and Radiochemistry System (layout corrected, Sections 14-6-6, 14-6-7, 14-
6-8 and 14-6-9 modified).
Revision history 9
0G September 13, A number of chapters thoroughly updated:

2001 Ch 2 Preventive Maintenance
Ch 3 Renewal parts
Ch 4 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Ch 6 General Control Unit
Ch 7 Cyclotron Support Cabinet, CSC (Power/Water/Vacuum)
Ch 8 Cooling Water System
Ch 9 Vacuum System
Ch 10 Ion Source and Central Region
Ch 11 Magnet System
Ch 12 RF System
Ch 14 Targets and Radiochemistry System:
Ch 15 Beam Diagnostics
Ch 16 Radiation Shield
Ch 17 Safety System
0F February 14, Ch 2 Preventive Maintenance: Updated.

2001
0E February 8, Radiation Safety information moved to direction 2232998 MINItrace Service Manual –
2001 Health and Safety.
Ch 2 Preventive Maintenance: Updated.
Ch 3 Renewal parts: Illustrations updated.
Ch 8 Cooling Water System: Updated.
Ch 10 Ion Source: Updated.
Ch 13 Extraction System: Updated.
Ch 14 Targets and Radiochemistry System: Updated.
0D September 28, Ch 4 – to be Field Validated.

2000 Ch 5 Some drawings need to be upgraded.
Ch 8 GCU Planned Maintenance added.
Ch 10 partly reviewed, but some questions remain.
Ch 16 partly reviewed, but some questions remain. Helium Cooling System Lead check
added.
Ch 17 Collimator PM issues added.
0C August 13, Ch 4 is still just a draft – to be reviewed.

2000 Ch 5 updated due to reduced FRU list. Some drawings need to be updated.
10 Revision history
0B June 30, 2000 Ch 4 Preventive Maintenance added (to be reviewed).

Ch 5 is to be updated due to reduced FRU list.
Ch 10 Cooling Water System PM instructions introduced.
Ch 12 Ion Source and Central Region PM instructions introduced. To be reviewed regarding
FRU numbers.
Ch 15 Extraction System Disassembly/Reassembly instructions added.
Ch 16 Overhaul of Helium Cooling System introduced.
0A June 14, 2000 Ch 3 MINItrace Radiation Safety Aspects: Illustrations added.

Ch 11 Vacuum System: Updated.
0 June 1, 2000 Initial document release.
Revision history 11
INTERNET UPDATES: COMMON DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY
Manuals are also available for viewing and downloading via Internet.
Please regularly check the GE Common Documentation Library (CDL) website for updates:
1 Click Radiopharmacy.
2 Select product.
3 Select manual type.
4 Click Search.
URL:
http://apps.gehealthcare.com/servlet/ClientServlet?REQ=Enter%2bDocumentation%2bLibrary
Internet updates: Common Documentation Library 13

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 25
1-1 Contents of this manual ................................................................................................................ 25
1-2 Associated documents .................................................................................................................. 25
1-3 Drawings ............................................................................................................................................... 25
1-4 Typographical conventions ......................................................................................................... 26
2 SAFETY INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 27

2-1 Risk Assessment (RA) ....................................................................................................................... 27
3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 29

3-1 Two kinds of maintenance ........................................................................................................... 29
3-2 Safety information ........................................................................................................................... 29
3-2-1 Risk Assessment (RA) ............................................................................................................ 30
3-3 Contents of this chapter ................................................................................................................ 30
3-4 On-site tools ........................................................................................................................................ 31
3-4-1 Included in product ................................................................................................................ 31
3-4-2 Not included in product ....................................................................................................... 35
3-5 LOTO (Lock-Out and Tag-Out) kits, LOTO tags, LOTO instructions .............................. 35
3-5-1 Full European Electrical LOTO kit (spare part 2334312) content ....................... 36
3-5-2 Full European Electrical LOTO kit (spare part 2334312) user instructions ...... 39
3-5-3 Set of 10 LOTO tags, English (spare part 2355715) ................................................. 53
3-5-4 Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit (spare part 2398878) content .......................... 53
3-5-5 Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit (spare part 2398878) user instructions ........ 54
3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the MINItrace system ................................................................ 59
3-5-7 Problem feedback for the LOTO kit ................................................................................. 66
3-6 Cyclotron job safety ......................................................................................................................... 67
3-6-1 PPE (Personal Protection Equipment) and dosimeters .......................................... 67
3-6-2 Working environment ........................................................................................................... 67
3-6-3 Lock-Out and Tag-Out (LOTO) ........................................................................................... 67
3-6-4 GE dose exposure guidelines and general radiation safety aspects ............... 67
3-6-5 Calculating estimated dose ............................................................................................... 68
3-6-6 PM safety analysis ................................................................................................................. 68
3-6-7 RAs/JSAs .................................................................................................................................... 81
3-7 Spare parts .......................................................................................................................................... 81
3-8 Consumables ...................................................................................................................................... 81
3-9 Sequence list for MINItrace Planned Maintenance .......................................................... 85
3-9-1 List of tools and instruments that have serial numbers/calibration ................ 86
3-9-2 Shutdown, stop vacuum, disconnect/remove targets, open magnet door ... 86
3-9-3 Ion source PM, central region measurements ........................................................... 88
3-9-4 RF .................................................................................................................................................. 91
3-9-5 Extraction ................................................................................................................................... 92
3-9-6 Beam diagnostics ................................................................................................................... 93
3-9-7 Vacuum chamber ................................................................................................................... 95
3-9-8 Vacuum pump system ......................................................................................................... 96
Table of Contents 15
3-9-9 Compressed air moisture trap .......................................................................................... 97

3-9-10 Target maintenance, helium compressor .................................................................... 98
3-9-11 Vacuum restart ........................................................................................................................ 102
3-9-12 Water leaks ............................................................................................................................... 104
3-9-13 Control Cabinet (CCAB) ......................................................................................................... 106
3-9-14 RFPG: Cabinet and fans ....................................................................................................... 109
3-9-15 RFPG: SCU Gen I Measurement Module readout (STANDBY/NORMAL
mode) ........................................................................................................................................... 110
3-9-16 RFPG: SCU Gen II measurement ...................................................................................... 116
3-9-17 Gas cylinders ............................................................................................................................ 119
3-9-18 Beam ON; check diagnostics, ion source and target .............................................. 120
3-9-19 Safety interlock system and warnings lights ............................................................. 123
3-9-20 Configuration values ............................................................................................................ 123
3-9-21 Master System ......................................................................................................................... 124
4 SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................. 125
5 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................. 127

5-1 Table headlines .................................................................................................................................. 127
5-2 Error messages .................................................................................................................................. 127
6 GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................................................. 161

6-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 161
6-1-1 Control system details .......................................................................................................... 162
7 GENERAL CONTROL UNIT ....................................................................................... 163

7-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 163
7-2 GCU – type Gen I ............................................................................................................................... 165
7-2-1 Hazards and warnings ....................................................................................................... 165
7-2-2 GCU boards ............................................................................................................................... 165
7-2-3 Planned maintenance .......................................................................................................... 167
7-2-4 The GCU I/O backplane ....................................................................................................... 171
7-2-5 CPU board ................................................................................................................................. 173
7-2-6 Digital I/O board ..................................................................................................................... 181
7-2-7 Analog In board ...................................................................................................................... 187
7-2-8 Analog Out board ................................................................................................................... 190
7-2-9 Beam Current Analyzer board .......................................................................................... 194
7-2-10 DC motor board ...................................................................................................................... 196
7-2-11 CI, Control Interface board ................................................................................................. 199
7-2-12 Disassembly/reassembly .................................................................................................... 200
7-2-13 Document references ........................................................................................................... 201
7-3 GCU – type Gen II .............................................................................................................................. 202
7-3-1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 202
7-3-2 Operation ................................................................................................................................... 210
7-3-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 217
7-3-4 Planned maintenance .......................................................................................................... 220
7-3-5 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 221
16 Table of Contents
7-3-6 Disassembly/reassembly .................................................................................................... 226

7-3-7 Spare parts ................................................................................................................................ 234
7-3-8 Interconnect data ................................................................................................................... 234
8 CYCLOTRON SUPPORT CABINET, CSC (POWER/COOLING/VACUUM) .............. 255

8-1 General description ......................................................................................................................... 255
8-2 Hazards and warnings ................................................................................................................... 255
8-3 Compressed air moisture trap .................................................................................................... 256
8-4 Power distribution (CSC electronics) ........................................................................................ 256
8-4-1 Theory of operation ............................................................................................................... 256
8-4-2 Hazards and warnings ........................................................................................................ 257
8-4-3 Maintenance on units in the power distribution system ..................................... 258
8-4-4 Replacing RFPG or transformer in CCAB ..................................................................... 258
8-4-5 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 259
8-4-6 Switches, fuses, circuit breakers, contactors and relays ...................................... 259
8-5 Vacuum and water control panel ............................................................................................. 260
8-6 Operator maintenance .................................................................................................................. 260
8-7 Planned maintenance .................................................................................................................... 260
8-7-1 Test tools and requirements .............................................................................................. 260
8-7-2 Overhaul of terminal blocks ............................................................................................... 261
8-7-3 Empty the compressed air moisture trap .................................................................... 261
8-8 Disassembly/reassembly procedures ..................................................................................... 261
8-9 Drawings and parts lists ................................................................................................................ 262
8-10 Document references ..................................................................................................................... 262
9 COOLING WATER SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 263

9-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 263
9-2 Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) ............................................................................................... 265
9-2-1 Cooling water system schematic .................................................................................... 266
9-2-2 Shunt valve temperature control .................................................................................... 267
9-4-1 Overhaul of cooling water system .................................................................................. 271
9-5-1 Tools ............................................................................................................................................. 272
9-5-2 Water cooling pump ............................................................................................................. 272
9-5-3 Target water cooling ............................................................................................................. 274
9-5-4 Shunt motor and temperature control unit ................................................................ 275
9-6 Closing down the cooling water system ................................................................................ 279
9-7 Ion exchanger and filter ................................................................................................................ 280
9-7-1 Removing the ion exchanger ............................................................................................ 280
9-7-2 Install the new ion exchanger .......................................................................................... 281
9-7-3 Replacing the filter ................................................................................................................. 281
10 VACUUM SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 283

10-2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 284
10-3 Vacuum chamber ............................................................................................................................. 286
10-3-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 286
10-4 Pump system ...................................................................................................................................... 286
10-4-1 Diffusion pump with baffle ................................................................................................ 286
10-4-2 Fore-vacuum pump ............................................................................................................... 287
10-5 Vacuum valves ................................................................................................................................... 287
10-5-1 High Vacuum Valve specification .................................................................................... 287
10-6 Vacuum Control Unit (VCU) .......................................................................................................... 288
10-6-1 Reprogramming the VCU .................................................................................................... 290
10-7 Open the vacuum chamber and replace spare parts ..................................................... 294
10-7-1 Open the vacuum chamber ............................................................................................... 295
10-7-2 Shutting down the vacuum system ............................................................................... 298
10-7-3 Closing the vacuum chamber ........................................................................................... 299
10-7-4 Start up the MINItrace after vacuum system maintenance ................................ 300
10-8-1 Test tools and spare parts .................................................................................................. 300
10-8-2 Safety precautions ................................................................................................................. 301
10-8-3 Overhaul of diffusion pump ............................................................................................... 301
10-8-4 Overhaul of rotary pump .................................................................................................... 303
10-8-5 Overhaul of High Vacuum Valve ...................................................................................... 305
10-8-6 Overhaul of vacuum valves ............................................................................................... 305
10-8-7 Overhaul of Pirani gauges .................................................................................................. 305
10-8-8 Overhaul of Penning gauge ............................................................................................... 308
10-9-1 Safety precautions ................................................................................................................. 308
10-9-2 Tools and accessories .......................................................................................................... 309
10-9-3 Spare parts ................................................................................................................................ 309
10-9-4 Venting the vacuum system .............................................................................................. 309
10-9-5 Disconnecting the compressed air supply .................................................................. 311
10-9-6 Pirani 2 gauge (chamber) ................................................................................................... 311
10-9-7 Pirani 1 gauge (backing) ...................................................................................................... 312
10-9-8 Penning gauge (chamber) .................................................................................................. 312
10-9-9 Vacuum valves ........................................................................................................................ 313
10-9-10 Oil mist filter .............................................................................................................................. 314
10-9-11 Diffusion pump oil (Santovac) ........................................................................................... 315
10-9-12 Rotary pump oil ...................................................................................................................... 317
10-9-13 O-rings ........................................................................................................................................ 318
10-9-14 Vacuum seals .......................................................................................................................... 318
10-9-15 Diffusion pump maintenance ........................................................................................... 319
10-9-16 Diffusion pump heating elements – attachment procedure ............................... 324
10-10 Connector lists ................................................................................................................................... 330
11 ION SOURCE AND CENTRAL REGION .................................................................... 331

11-2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 333
11-2-2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 333
11-3 Ion source ............................................................................................................................................. 334
11-4 Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC) ............................................................................................. 336
11-4-1 Model PS/GEMS–02A ............................................................................................................ 337
11-4-2 Model PS/GEMS–01 ............................................................................................................... 339
11-4-3 Model PS/PK003R1.3 ............................................................................................................ 341
11-5 Gas handling system ...................................................................................................................... 343
11-5-1 Theory of operation, operational examples ............................................................... 343
11-5-2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 343
11-6 Pipes ....................................................................................................................................................... 343
11-8-1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 343
11-8-3 Spare parts ................................................................................................................................ 344
11-9-1 Drawings .................................................................................................................................... 345
11-9-2 Tools ............................................................................................................................................. 349
11-9-3 Spare parts ................................................................................................................................ 350
11-9-4 Removal of ion source .......................................................................................................... 350
11-9-5 Ion source maintenance – disassembly/inspection/cleaning/reassembly .... 355
11-9-6 Reinstallation of the ion source into the cyclotron .................................................. 360
11-9-7 Upper Dee connector assembly ....................................................................................... 364
11-9-8 Functional check ..................................................................................................................... 365
11-10 Connector lists ................................................................................................................................... 366
12 MAGNET SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 369

12-1-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 369
12-2-1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 371
12-2-2 Maintenance on the magnet coil .................................................................................... 371
12-2-3 Magnet Power Supply (PSMC) ........................................................................................... 375
12-2-4 Document references ........................................................................................................... 384
13 RF SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 385

13-2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 386
13-2-1 RFPG sub-assemblies ........................................................................................................... 387
13-2-2 RFPG SCU functions .............................................................................................................. 388

13-2-3 SCU Gen I ................................................................................................................................... 389
13-2-4 SCU Gen II .................................................................................................................................. 390
13-3 Overhaul of Tube Amplifier and RF system tuning ........................................................... 437
13-3-1 General ....................................................................................................................................... 437
13-3-2 Grid circuit ................................................................................................................................. 437
13-3-3 Phase set .................................................................................................................................... 438
13-3-4 Anode circuit ............................................................................................................................. 439
13-5-1 RFPG SCU Gen I Measurement Module readout ....................................................... 441
13-5-2 RFPG SCU Gen II measurement readout ...................................................................... 446
13-6-1 Spare parts requiring safety interlock test .................................................................. 447
13-6-2 Shutting down the RFPG ..................................................................................................... 447
13-6-3 Removing covers .................................................................................................................... 448
13-6-4 Power tube replacement ..................................................................................................... 448
13-6-5 Start-up after power tube replacement ....................................................................... 454
13-6-6 DPA (Drive Power Amplifier) replacement ................................................................... 457
13-6-7 GSPU (Grid Screen Power Unit) ........................................................................................ 462
13-6-8 Anode current monitor board ........................................................................................... 462
13-6-9 RF circuit board and SKQ/SKR low pass filter ........................................................... 465
13-6-10 Circuit board change in SCU Gen I .................................................................................. 468
13-6-11 SCU Gen II replacement ....................................................................................................... 470
13-6-12 Replacing SCU Gen I with SCU Gen II ............................................................................ 478
13-7 Connector lists ................................................................................................................................... 492
14 EXTRACTION SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 493

14-2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 493
14-2-2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 494
14-3 Single extraction ............................................................................................................................... 494
14-3-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 495
14-3-4 Controls and displays ........................................................................................................... 495
14-4 Dual extraction .................................................................................................................................. 496
14-4-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 497
14-5 Electrical interface ........................................................................................................................... 497
14-5-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 497

14-8 Disassembly/reassembly .............................................................................................................. 498
14-8-2 Opening and closing the vacuum chamber ............................................................... 498
14-8-3 Replacing the single extraction unit foils ..................................................................... 499
14-8-4 Dual extraction unit ............................................................................................................... 503
14-9 Calibration of the extraction system motors ....................................................................... 506
15 TARGETS AND RADIOCHEMISTRY SYSTEM ........................................................... 507

15-1 System overview ............................................................................................................................... 507
15-2 Target Support Cabinet (TSC) ...................................................................................................... 507
15-3 Targets – theory of operation ..................................................................................................... 507
15-4 Helium cooling system ................................................................................................................... 508
15-4-1 Main parts ................................................................................................................................. 508
15-5-1 Overhaul of helium cooling system ................................................................................ 513
15-5-2 Replace transfer line (Tefzel tube) to hot cell .............................................................. 514
15-6-1 Spare parts ................................................................................................................................ 515
15-6-2 PEEK tubing connections .................................................................................................... 515
15-6-3 Targets ........................................................................................................................................ 516
15-6-4 Reconfiguration of targets ................................................................................................. 518
15-6-5 Liquid Target Fillers ............................................................................................................... 519
15-6-6 Valve panel ................................................................................................................................ 521
15-6-7 Target water cooling ............................................................................................................. 521
15-6-8 Helium cooling compressor ............................................................................................... 523
15-6-9 Helium cooling compressor diaphragm (membrane) ............................................ 524
15-6-10 Helium cooling filling ............................................................................................................ 526
15-7 How to add an 18F target option to MINItrace .................................................................... 527
16 BEAM DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................................ 541

16-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 541
16-2 Theory of operation ......................................................................................................................... 542
16-2-1 Flip-in probe .............................................................................................................................. 542
16-2-2 Extraction foils ......................................................................................................................... 542
16-2-3 Collimators ................................................................................................................................ 542
16-2-4 Targets ........................................................................................................................................ 543
16-2-5 Beam Current Analyzer (BCA) ........................................................................................... 543

16-3-1 Collimators ................................................................................................................................ 543
16-3-2 Flip-in probe .............................................................................................................................. 557
16-3-3 Extraction foils ......................................................................................................................... 558
16-3-4 Checking the targets ............................................................................................................. 558
17 RADIATION SHIELD .................................................................................................. 559

17-2 Radiation shield door control ...................................................................................................... 559
17-3 Door motors ....................................................................................................................................... 561
17-4 Warning light on cyclotron top .................................................................................................. 561
17-5 Waste gas system ............................................................................................................................ 562
17-6 Cyclotron maintenance shield assembly .............................................................................. 563
17-7 Ladder and climbing safety ......................................................................................................... 564
17-7-1 Securing the foldable combination ladder .................................................................. 564
17-7-2 Anchoring the safety harness ........................................................................................... 565
18 SAFETY SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 567

18-2 Hazards and warnings ................................................................................................................... 567
18-3 Theory of operation ......................................................................................................................... 569
18-4 Interlock switches and warning lights .................................................................................... 570
18-4-1 Warning lights and shield door switches .................................................................... 570
18-4-2 Magnet door switch and ion source gas switch ....................................................... 571
18-5 Test instructions ................................................................................................................................ 571
18-5-1 Related drawings ................................................................................................................... 571
18-5-2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................... 572
18-5-3 Radiation shield or vault door interlocks (radiation safety) ................................. 573
18-5-4 RFPG interlocks ....................................................................................................................... 577
18-5-5 RF inhibit external interlocks ............................................................................................. 583
19 MINITRACE SERVICE SYSTEM VERSION 2.X (MSS) SOFTWARE .......................... 589

19-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 589
19-2 Service laptop setup ........................................................................................................................ 590
19-2-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 590
19-2-2 Initial communication and system setup .................................................................... 590
19-2-3 Connect and disconnect the service laptop to the cyclotron .............................. 592
19-2-4 Software and service laptop spare parts .................................................................... 594
19-3 MSS software installation ............................................................................................................. 594
19-3-1 First-time installation ............................................................................................................ 594
19-3-2 Upgrading MSS ....................................................................................................................... 595
19-4 Main window ...................................................................................................................................... 596
19-4-1 Menu bar .................................................................................................................................... 596
19-4-2 Task selection ........................................................................................................................... 597
19-4-3 Action log ................................................................................................................................... 597
19-4-4 Status bar .................................................................................................................................. 597
19-5 Administration .................................................................................................................................... 598

19-5-1 User administration ............................................................................................................... 599
19-5-2 System options ........................................................................................................................ 601
19-5-3 Default configuration ........................................................................................................... 601
19-6 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 601
19-6-1 Configuration – GCS .............................................................................................................. 604
19-6-2 Configuration – Target ......................................................................................................... 607
19-6-3 Configuration – Export and Import ................................................................................ 614
19-7 Subsystem control ........................................................................................................................... 615
19-7-1 Expandable fields ................................................................................................................... 616
19-7-2 Magnet system ........................................................................................................................ 617
19-7-3 RF system .................................................................................................................................. 619
19-7-4 Ion source system .................................................................................................................. 626
19-7-5 Extraction and diagnostics system ................................................................................ 629
19-7-6 Vacuum and cooling system ............................................................................................. 634
19-7-7 Beam control system ............................................................................................................ 636
19-7-8 Motor calibration system .................................................................................................... 644
19-7-9 18F- Nb 25 and 18F- (3.9 mm, 6 mm and 12 mm Gen II) targets ......................... 646
19-7-10 13N target ................................................................................................................................... 653
19-7-11 11CO target .............................................................................................................................. 656
2
19-7-12 15O target ................................................................................................................................... 660
19-7-13 Dummy target ........................................................................................................................ 663
19-7-14 Exit ................................................................................................................................................ 665
A RISK ASSESSMENT (RA) ............................................................................................ 667
B GENERAL RADIATION SAFETY ASPECTS ............................................................... 669

B-1 Radiation basics ................................................................................................................................ 669
B-1-1 Object of this chapter ........................................................................................................... 669
B-1-2 What is radiation? .................................................................................................................. 669
B-1-3 Radiation types ....................................................................................................................... 669
B-1-4 Radioactivity ............................................................................................................................. 670
B-1-5 Radioactive half-life ............................................................................................................... 671
B-2 Measuring radiation ........................................................................................................................ 671
B-2-1 Measurement quantities ..................................................................................................... 671
B-2-2 Dose monitoring ..................................................................................................................... 671
B-2-3 Dose exposure (European/US/GE) .................................................................................. 673
B-3 Reducing exposure to radiation ................................................................................................ 675
B-3-1 Planning the work .................................................................................................................. 675
B-3-2 General guidelines ................................................................................................................. 675
B-3-3 Protective shielding ............................................................................................................... 677
B-4 Common PET tracers ...................................................................................................................... 678
C MINITRACE RADIATION SAFETY ASPECTS ............................................................ 679

C-1 Object of this section ...................................................................................................................... 679
C-2 MINItrace radiation basics ........................................................................................................... 679
C-2-1 Radioactive/non-radioactive zones ............................................................................... 679
C-2-2 Radiation during cyclotron beam operation .............................................................. 680

C-2-3 Radiation after cyclotron beam operation .................................................................. 681
C-2-4 Remaining induced activity ............................................................................................... 683
C-2-5 Waste .......................................................................................................................................... 683
C-3 Measuring MINItrace associated radiation .......................................................................... 684
C-3-1 Badge (film/TLD/Luxel OSL) whole body dosimeter ................................................ 684
C-3-2 Hand/finger dosimeter ........................................................................................................ 685
C-3-3 Personal radiation monitor ................................................................................................ 685
C-3-4 Digital dose monitor (dose rate, accumulated dose, energy discrimination) . 686
C-4 Reducing exposure to radiation when working with MINItrace ................................. 687
C-4-1 User responsibility .................................................................................................................. 687
C-4-2 Protective shielding ............................................................................................................... 687
D THE MINITRACE SERVICE SYSTEM (MSS) SOFTWARE .......................................... 691

D-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 691
D-2 Connect and disconnect the service laptop to the cyclotron system ..................... 692
D-2-1 Connect the MSS ..................................................................................................................... 692
D-2-2 Disconnect the MSS ............................................................................................................... 694
D-3 Software functions ........................................................................................................................... 694
D-3-1 Main menu ................................................................................................................................ 694
D-3-2 Magnet system menu ........................................................................................................... 697
D-3-3 RF system menu ..................................................................................................................... 700
D-3-4 Ion source and gas handling system menu ............................................................... 707
D-3-5 Diagnostic and extraction system menu ..................................................................... 710
D-3-6 Vacuum and cooling system menu ................................................................................ 715
D-3-7 Motor calibration menu ....................................................................................................... 718
D-3-8 Beam control menu ............................................................................................................... 722
D-3-9 18F- target menu ..................................................................................................................... 731
D-3-10 13N target menu ..................................................................................................................... 737
D-3-11 Proton target menu ............................................................................................................... 740
D-3-12 Configuration parameters menu .................................................................................... 741
D-3-13 Change password .................................................................................................................. 749
D-3-14 Exit ................................................................................................................................................ 750
D-4 Software installation ....................................................................................................................... 750
D-4-1 Start-up files ............................................................................................................................. 751
D-4-2 MSS software files .................................................................................................................. 751
D-5 MSS software structure ................................................................................................................. 752
D-5-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 752
D-5-2 Software security levels ....................................................................................................... 753
D-5-3 MSS system files ..................................................................................................................... 753
D-5-4 Start-up software ................................................................................................................... 757
1 INTRODUCTION
This manual applies to the following cyclotron systems:
• MINItrace Qilin
• MINItrace (discontinued in 2014)
The system is called MINItrace in this manual.
1-1 Contents of this manual

The object of this manual is to present
• technical descriptions of the various MINItrace cyclotron subsystems.
• instructions for planned maintenance and replacement of spare parts.
• all MINItrace Service System (MSS) menus and controls.
• a diagnostic guide.
Note!
The illustrated spare parts list is found in MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
This manual is intended for use by trained service engineers who are required to perform
maintenance on the MINItrace cyclotron system.
1-2 Associated documents

• MINItrace Qilin Technical Specification (DOC0453403)
• MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995)
• MINItrace Service Manual – Master System (dir. 2232999-100)
• MINItrace Qilin Master System – PC Lynx – Software Manual (dir. 5324838-100)
• MINItrace Service Manual – Drawings and Parts Lists (dir. 2233001-100)
• MINItrace Service Manual – OEM Manuals (dir. 2233002-100)
• MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100)
• MINItrace Qilin Installation Manual (dir. 2232994-100)
1-3 Drawings
For Drawings and Parts Lists, refer to MINItrace Service Manual – Drawings and Parts Lists
(dir. 2233001-100).
1 Introduction 25
1-3 Drawings
1-4 Typographical conventions

For ease of identification the names of software menus, hardware controls and modes of
operation are typographically distinct from the ordinary text of this manual.
These distinctions are as follows:
1 Acronyms are presented in upper-case letters throughout. Thus: RFPG, GCS.
2 Software menus and buttons are presented in bold text throughout. Thus: Maintenance
menu.
3 The names of operational modes are presented in italic text throughout. Thus: OFF,
EMPTY, Hot, Cold
26 1 Introduction
1-4 Typographical conventions
2 SAFETY INFORMATION
• Only personnel with appropriate training and experience should service this system.
For information on available GE Healthcare training, go to

www.tracercenteracademy.com.
• Do not attempt to service the system unless all applicable manuals have been consulted
and are understood.
• The system should be serviced in strict compliance with the safety precautions, warnings,
and instructions contained in this manual, and in any other documentation specific to
the system. Otherwise, personal injury might occur due to electric shock, mechanical or
other hazards.
• Do not attempt to service the system unless relevant safety measures (e.g. Lock-Out
and Tag-Out) are implemented to block any energy sources that could be potential safety
hazards.
• The manufacturer or vendor of this system makes no representation that the act of
reading this manual renders the reader qualified to service the system.
2-1 Risk Assessment (RA)

Read all applicable RAs before starting any service operations. See AppendixA Risk Assessment
(RA).
2 Safety information 27
2-1 Risk Assessment (RA)
3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
3-1 Two kinds of maintenance

To maintain safe and reliable operation of the MINItrace system, maintenance must be
performed at specified intervals.
Maintenance of the MINItrace system is divided into:
Operator Maintenance Planned Maintenance
To be performed by the user. To be performed by qualified service person-

nel.
Refer to MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide Described in this chapter.

(dir. 2232995). For PM schedule, refer to MINItrace Qilin
Operator Guide (dir. 2232995).
Planned maintenance is to be performed by qualified service personnel only.
CAUTION! Hazards
Read the health and safety information in MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995)
and MINItrace Service Manual – Health and Safety (dir. 2232998-100) (especially the Job
Safety Analysis (JSA)) before performing any maintenance on the MINItrace system.
Note!
Do not attempt to lift more than 18.2 kg (40 lbs) by yourself.
Note!
Your system might not include all the subsystems mentioned in this chapter.
3-2 Safety information

• Only personnel with appropriate training and experience should service this system.
For information on available GE Healthcare training, go to

www.tracercenteracademy.com.
• Do not attempt to service the system unless all applicable manuals have been consulted
and are understood.
• The system should be serviced in strict compliance with the safety precautions, warnings,
and instructions contained in this manual, and in any other documentation specific to
the system. Otherwise, personal injury might occur due to electric shock, mechanical or
other hazards.
• Do not attempt to service the system unless relevant safety measures (e.g. Lock-Out
and Tag-Out) are implemented to block any energy sources that could be potential safety
hazards.
3 Periodic maintenance 29
3-2 Safety information
• The manufacturer or vendor of this system makes no representation that the act of
reading this manual renders the reader qualified to service the system.
3-2-1 Risk Assessment (RA)

Read all applicable RAs before starting any service operations. See AppendixA Risk Assessment
(RA).
3-3 Contents of this chapter

This chapter provides
• a list of suitable on-site tools (see Section 3-4 On-site tools on page 31).
• comprehensive information on three LOTO kits and LOTO procedures for the MINItrace
system (see Section 3-5 LOTO (Lock-Out and Tag-Out) kits, LOTO tags, LOTO instructions
on page 35).
• a list of consumables (see Section 3-8 Consumables on page 81).
• a sequence list (with empty tables for notes, measurement values, etc.) to facilitate the
documentation of the planned maintenance (see Section 3-9 Sequence list for MINItrace
Planned Maintenance on page 85).
Note!
Copy pages 85–124 to get a complete and comprehensive documentation of the planned
maintenance.
30 3 Periodic maintenance
3-3 Contents of this chapter
3-4 On-site tools
3-4-1 Included in product

Table 3-1: On-site tools included in product
Hardware
Magnet door locking device, socket wrench 30 mm
Ion source service tools ass'y
Beam profile monitor
Target dump
Collimator tool
MINItrace RFPG tube tool (Radio Frequency

Power Generator)
3-4 On-site tools
Hardware
MINItrace special tools
Lead glass
10:
Lead container for target foils
13:
Bench Radiation Shield (BRS)
3-4 On-site tools
Hardware
Cyclotron maintenance shield ass'y
Extensions for the door handles on the radi-

ation shield (for attaching the ladder when
working on top of the shield)
3-4 On-site tools
Hardware
Foldable combination ladder (for work on

top of the shield)
Extension board, RFPG (Radio Frequency Power Generator)
Extension board, RF
Tubing for liquid target calibration
Extension board, VME
Software
CD: MINItrace Service System version x.x Floppy disks: MINItrace system installa-
tion floppy disks
Floppy disks: Service laptop

OR
EyesCream 2.26
Floppy disk: MINItrace service software

installation
CD: Master System Application Software CD: Master System Application Software
release PC Lynx x.x release x.x
OR
DVD: SUSE Linux version x.x Hard drive: Solaris version x.x
3-4 On-site tools
3-4-2 Not included in product

Table 3-2: On-site tools not included in product
Description
Service laptop
Personal radiation dose monitor Shows dose in Sievert
Personal radiation dose monitor Shows dose in Rem
General FE service tools
Full European Electrical Loto Kit See Section 3-5-1 Full European Electrical
LOTO kit (spare part 2334312) content on
page 36.
Set of 10 LOTO tags, English See Section 3-5-3 Set of 10 LOTO tags, En-
glish (spare part 2355715) on page 53.
Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit See Section 3-5-4 Radiopharmacy valve LO-
TO kit (spare part 2398878) content on
page 53.
For spare part numbers, refer to the spare parts listed for each subsystems in MINItrace Spare
Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
3-5 LOTO (Lock-Out and Tag-Out) kits, LOTO tags, LOTO instructions
LOTO kits are orderable through the following numbers:
• Full European Electrical LOTO kit, can be used World Wide (W.W.): spare part number
2334312.
• Set of 10 LOTO Tags, English: spare part number 2355715.
Tags are to be ordered with Spare part number 2334312 (Full European Electrical LOTO
kit because the Electrical kit does not contain tags.
• Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit: spare part number 2398878.
(This valve LOTO kit 2398878 includes 5 tags.)
It is recommended that every Field Engineer has personal LOTO kits (one Electrical LOTO kit
and one valve LOTO kit).
The object of this section is to provide
• information on the content of each kit
• a number of supplementary user instructions
• information on the LOTO procedures for the cyclotron system
• a problems feedback form (paper copy)
3-5-1 Full European Electrical LOTO kit (spare part 2334312) content
The Full European Electrical LOTO kit contains a number of items, shown in Figure 3-1 and
Table 3-3 below.
Figure 3-1: Full european electrical LOTO kit content
Table 3-3: Full european electrical LOTO kit content piece by piece
Description Installation see section
Warning stripe tape -
Lock -
Oversized Breaker Lock- Section 3-5-2-1 Oversized

Out. Breaker Lock-Out user in-
structions on page 39
Non-labeled Lock-Out -
Hasps.
Lock-Out Cleat. Section 3-5-2-2 Lock-Out

(277 Volt/General Use) Cleat user instructions on
page 41
Lock-Out Cleat. Section 3-5-2-2 Lock-Out

(480/600 Volt/General Use) Cleat user instructions on
page 41
Single Pole Circuit Breaker Section 3-5-2-3 Single Pole

Lock-Out Device. Circuit Breaker Lock-Out
Device user instructions on
page 43
Hubbell Plugout™. Small Section 3-5-2-4 Hubbell

Plugout™. Plugout™ user instructions
Accepts plugs with maxi- on page 45
mum 7 cm diameter and
12 cm length with 25 mm
cord.
No Hole Circuit Breaker Section 3-5-2-5 No Hole

Lock-Out. (277 Volt device) Circuit Breaker Lock-Out
user instructions on
page 47
No Hole Circuit Breaker Section 3-5-2-5 No Hole

Lock-Out. Circuit Breaker Lock-Out
(480/600 Volt device) user instructions on
page 47
Hubbell Plugout™. Large Section 3-5-2-4 Hubbell

Plugout™. Plugout™ user instructions
on page 45
Accepts plugs with maxi-
mum 11 cm diameter and
25 cm length and 35 mm
cord.
Universal Multi-Pole Break- Section 3-5-2-6 Universal

er Lock-Out. Multi-Pole Breaker Lock-
Out user instructions on
page 49
Set of 2 Lock Breaker. Mer- Section 3-5-2-7 Set of 2

lin Gerin. Lock Breaker (Merlin Gerin)
page 51
Set of 4 Lock Breaker. Mer- Section 3-5-2-7 Set of 2

lin Gerin. Lock Breaker (Merlin Gerin)
page 51
NA GE Power Control Lock-Out -
Set of tags -
Bags -
3-5-2 Full European Electrical LOTO kit (spare part 2334312) user instructions
Instructions on how to use the Full European Electrical LOTO kit is provided below.
3-5-2-1 Oversized Breaker Lock-Out user instructions
Oversized Breaker Lock-Out.
3-5-2-2 Lock-Out Cleat user instructions
Lock-Out Cleat. (277 Volt/general use)
Lock-Out Cleat. (480/600 Volt/general use)
3-5-2-3 Single Pole Circuit Breaker Lock-Out Device user instructions
Single Pole Circuit Breaker Lock-Out Device.
3-5-2-4 Hubbell Plugout™ user instructions
Hubbell Plugout™. Small

Plugout™. Accepts plugs
with maximum 7 cm diame-
ter and 12 cm length with
25 mm cord.
Hubbell Plugout™. Large

Plugout™. Accepts plugs
with maximum 11 cm diam-
eter and 25 cm length and
35 mm cord.
3-5-2-5 No Hole Circuit Breaker Lock-Out user instructions
No Hole Circuit Breaker Lock-Out.
(277 Volt device)
No Hole Circuit Breaker Lock-Out.
(480/600 Volt device)
3-5-2-6 Universal Multi-Pole Breaker Lock-Out user instructions
Universal Multi-Pole Breaker Lock-Out.
3-5-2-7 Set of 2 Lock Breaker (Merlin Gerin) user instructions
Set of 2 Lock Breaker.

Merlin Gerin.
Set of 4 Lock Breaker.

Merlin Gerin.
3-5-3 Set of 10 LOTO tags, English (spare part 2355715)
Qty Item Description
5 Tags TG027E
3-5-4 Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit (spare part 2398878) content

Table 3-4: Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit content piece by piece
Qty Item Description Installation see section
2 Safetee Donuts, SD02 (Handles Section 3-5-5-1 Instruction for

1"–2½" valve handle). Safetee Donuts on page 54
2 Safetee Donuts, SD04 (Handles

2½"–5" valve handle).
1 Ball Valve Lock-Out, BS07A. Section 3-5-5-2 Instruction for

Ball Valve Lock-Out on page 55
1 Cablo-10 (Plastic coated steel Section 3-5-5-3 Instruction for

wire locking device). Cablo-10 (Plastic coated steel
wire locking device) on page 57
Qty Item Description Installation see section
1 Hasp (for multiple locking) -
1 - Padlock -
3-5-5 Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit (spare part 2398878) user instructions
Instructions on how to use the Radiopharmacy valve LOTO kit is provided below.
3-5-5-1 Instruction for Safetee Donuts
2 Safetee Donuts, SD02 (Handles 1"–2½"

valve handle).
2 Safetee Donuts, SD04 (Handles 2½"–5"

valve handle).
3-5-5-2 Instruction for Ball Valve Lock-Out
1 Ball Valve Lock-Out, BS07A.
Examples how to use BS07A
3-5-5-3 Instruction for Cablo-10 (Plastic coated steel wire locking device)
1 Cablo-10 (Plastic coated steel wire

locking device).
3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the MINItrace system
3-5-6-1 General
To be authorized to perform GE LOTO procedures you must:
• attend LOCKOUT/TAGOUT AUTHORIZED training in GE Learning every year.
• pass a test to demonstrate adequate knowledge every year.
This procedure sets the basic requirements established by the standard and the norms of GE
Healthcare for the energy-blocking (LOTO) and the isolation of energy required to realize any
sort of installation, de-installation, maintenance or repair of this equipment.
It is the obligation of each employee to follow these and other safety instructions regarding
the operation of this equipment or works close to these sites.
WARNING!
Ignoring of isolation of energy can cause serious injuries or even fatalities.
The following personnel are authorized to lock and tag the equipment, providing they have
received the LOTO authorized training and demonstrated knowledge annually:
• Field service engineers
• Support engineers
• Engineering department staff
All non-authorized employees of GE Healthcare and the customer site will be considered as
affected employees.
The person who applies the LOTO device must communicate it verbally to all employees the
date at which the locking and tagging took place, as well as the date when the equipment
might start to work again.
3-5-6-2 Standard LOTO procedure

Before commencing any operation in a subsystem, follow this general LOTO procedure when
the equipment is under repair.
Figure 3-2: Standard LOTO procedure
1 Prepare the equipment for switch-off:
• Have the specific LOTO procedure at hand.
• Inform all the staff that the equipment is to be taken out of operation.
2 Identify the energies of the system:
• Find out the energies of the equipment and the subsystem. See Table 3-5.
• Identify those points where these energies exist in the system and the magnitude
of them.
3 Switch off the equipment.
4 Isolate the energies.
See Section 3-5-6-3 Cyclotron subsystems – energy types and locations on page 61.
5 Apply LOTO.
See Section 3-5-6-4 Cyclotron subsystems – LOTO procedures on page 62.
6 Free any remaining energy in the circuit/component/system that has been subject to
LOTO.
7 Verify that there is no remaining energy in the circuit/component/system.
Table 3-5: Description of energies
Type of energy Identification
Electric E
Mechanic M
Pneumatic P
Gaseous G
Hydraulic H
Water W
3-5-6-3 Cyclotron subsystems – energy types and locations

Table 3-6: Identification
Subsystem Unit Energy type LOTO location Procedure for LOTO
Targets & Radiochem- Targets Gas Gas Supply Panel LOTO on Gas Supply Panel,
istry System Identification: G see Table 3-13
11C and 15O Gas Gas Supply Panel LOTO on Gas Supply Panel,
System Identification: G see Table 3-13
Helium Cooling Gas He-gas at Gas Sup- LOTO on Gas Supply Panel,
System Identification: G ply Panel see Table 3-13
Electricity Cyclotron Support LOTO on CSC CB in CCAB,

Live hazardous volt- Cabinet (CSC) CB in see Table 3-9
ages up to 230 V AC Control CAB (CCAB)
Identification: E
Target and LTF Compressed air CSC LOTO on Compressed air

6 bar valve in CSC, see Table 3-
Identification: P 14
Ion source & Central PSARC Electricity PSARC CB in CCAB LOTO on PSARC CB in
region Live hazardous volt- CCAB, see Table 3-11
ages up to 400 V AC
Identification: E
Ion source Gas Gas Supply Panel LOTO on Gas Supply Panel,
Identification: G see Table 3-13
Magnet System PSMC Electricity PSMC CB in CCAB LOTO on PSMC CB in CCAB,

Live hazardous volt- see Table 3-8
ages up to 400 V AC
Identification: E
RFPG RFPG Electricity RFPG CB in CCAB LOTO on RFPG CB in CCAB,

(Radio Frequency Live hazardous volt- and see Table 3-12
Power Generator) ages up to 400 V AC RFPG CB in MDP LOTO on RFPG CB in MDP,
Identification: E (both must be ap- see Table 3-7
plied)
Water Cooling Sys- CSC Electricity CSC CB in CCAB LOTO on CSC CB in CCAB,
tem Live hazardous volt- see Table 3-9
ages up to 400 V AC
Identification: E
Subsystem Unit Energy type LOTO location Procedure for LOTO
Vacuum System Vacuum Electricity CSC CB in CCAB LOTO on CSC CB in CCAB,

Pumps Live hazardous volt- see Table 3-9
ages up to 400 V AC
Identification: E
Compressed Air CSC LOTO on Compressed air

6 bar valve in CSC, see Table 3-
Identification: P 14
GCU CCAB Electricity GCU CB inside CCAB LOTO on GCU CB inside

Live hazardous volt- CCAB, see Table 3-10
ages up to 230 V AC
Identification: E
3-5-6-4 Cyclotron subsystems – LOTO procedures
Note!
The customer is responsible for the Mains Distribution Panel, the gas supply panel and the
compressed air panel. Therefore, these units can be designed in several different ways. In some
cases, a suitable LOTO kit needs to be created by the local GE FE together with the customer.
The pictures below only show examples of how LOTO devices are used.
Table 3-7: Electricity
Location Procedure Illustration
Mains Distribu- There are two circuit breakers: RFPG and

tion Panel (MDP) CCAB.
Use a suitable Breaker Lockout device from
your personal LOTO kit to lock out the de-
sired circuit breaker on the MDP. Follow the
standard LOTO procedures and mark with
LOTO tag.
If maintaining the RFPG (Radio Frequency
Power Generator), verify that the unit is free
from charged energy.
Control CAB Use a suitable Breaker Lockout device from

(CCAB) your personal LOTO kit to lock out the PSMC
circuit breaker in CCAB. Follow the standard
LOTO procedures and mark with LOTO tag.

(CCAB) your personal LOTO kit to lock out the CSC

(CCAB) your personal LOTO kit to lock out the GCU

(CCAB) your personal LOTO kit to lock out the PSARC

(CCAB) your personal LOTO kit to lock out the RFPG
Table 3-13: Gas
Gas Supply Pan- Use a suitable Valve Lockout device from

el your personal LOTO kit to lock out the gas
valves. Follow the standard LOTO procedures
and mark with LOTO tag.
Table 3-14: Compressed air
Compressed air Use a suitable Valve Lockout device from

supply your personal LOTO kit to lock out the Com-
pressed Air valve in the CSC. Follow the
standard LOTO procedures and mark with
LOTO tag.
3-5-7 Problem feedback for the LOTO kit

Table 3-15: Problem feedback for the LOTO kit
First Name
Last Name
Function
Modality
What are the problems on the LOTO kit modules?
Module Problem Input Comments
Other comments, products not covered, etc:
3-6 Cyclotron job safety
3-6-1 PPE (Personal Protection Equipment) and dosimeters

Ensure the following is available and worn at all times:
• Personal whole body dosimeter (worn at collar or in a location where highest exposure
is likely to occur)
• Personal extremity dosimeter
• Personal alarm dosimeter (worn in close proximity to the personal whole body dosimeter)
• Safety shoes
• Shoe covers
• Full body lab coat
• Safety glasses or face shield
• Protective gloves
3-6-2 Working environment

Ensure the following factors are present:
• Room ventilation
• Adequate lighting
• Calibrated contamination monitors (for checking feet, hands, clothing and objects for
potential contamination)
• Emergency stop buttons and door interlocks
• Calibrated radiation survey meters (to conduct surveys upon entering bunker or radiation
shield of self-shielded cyclotron.
• Shielded area/container for target assemblies
3-6-3 Lock-Out and Tag-Out (LOTO)

See Section 3-5 LOTO (Lock-Out and Tag-Out) kits, LOTO tags, LOTO instructions on page 35.
3-6-4 GE dose exposure guidelines and general radiation safety aspects

See Section B-2-3 Dose exposure (European/US/GE) on page 673.
3-6-5 Calculating estimated dose

Always measure radiation levels and calculate your estimated dose before starting to work
on the cyclotron:
measured dose rate × estimated time = estimated body dose
Example: Your electronic dosimeter displays 120 μSv/h, which means 2 μSv/min. If you spend
2 minutes in that particular area, your additional body dose will be 4 μSv.
3-6-6 PM safety analysis

The table below is based on the normal cyclotron PM.
For each maintenance task, the table describes:
• Risk levels:
Green: OK to proceed with task.
Yellow: Proceed with caution.
Red: Do not proceed until all safety precautions have been completed.
• Hazard
• Cause
• PPE (appropriate personal protection equipment, i.e. personal film dosimeter, personal
electronic dosimeter, personal finger dosimeter, safety shoes, shoe covers, full body lab
coat, safety glasses or face shield, protective gloves, etc.)
• Control measures
Note!
The safety analysis in Table 3-16 is only a means of assistance, not an exhaustive analysis of
all possible situations.
General advice
• Be informed and instructed on any customer emergency and site-specific safety
procedures.
• Service work should be delayed as long as practical from the last production run with
beam on to minimize dose rates in work areas.
• Wait at least two hours after the last production run with beam on before entering the
bunker.
• Planned maintenance should be requested from the customer to provide at least 24 hours
down time from the last production run with beam on prior to beginning service work
in the cyclotron vacuum chamber.
• For 18F- targets only: During the waiting time, do a dual filling/empty cycle with 16O water
and half an hour dry target. It eliminates any residual activity in the targets and delivery
lines.
• Radiation level surveys must be conducted when entering the bunker or radiation shield
of self-shielded cyclotron.
• Service work should not be performed when initial survey indicates dose rates in excess
of 2 mSv/hr at the position where work will be performed. If dose rates exceed 2 mSv/h
in the working area, work should be done by a senior engineer or escalated to a senior
engineer/local RSO for guidance prior to proceeding. Additional waiting time, removal
of components (for example, target assemblies) by the customer, or other shielding
arrangement should be considered prior to work.
• Always have a second skilled person in the vicinity to keep track of your own actions.
A customer representative should be available within the building/work areas when
service is performed.
• Keep track of dose registered on personal dosimeter and record accumulated dose.
• After working in cyclotron areas, use contamination monitor to check feet, hands, clothing
and any objects removed prior to leaving restricted areas.
• Activated or contaminated radioactive parts and/or materials cannot be removed or

shipped from the customer’s facility as part of the service activity.
• All radioactive waste generated from service activities is the responsibility of the customer
for disposal in accordance with federal, state and/or local regulations.
Table 3-16: PM safety analysis
TASK: Shut down the system
TASK RISK LEVEL HAZARD CAUSE PPE CONTROL MEASURES
Log out from the Master OK to proceed None

System with task
TASK: Record vacuum pressure and ventilate the vacuum chamber
Make vacuum pressure OK to proceed None

readout at the VCU in the with task
CSC (Cyclotron Support
Cabinet)
Press OFF in VCU OK to proceed None

with task
Press VENT in VCU Proceed with Thermal Mandatory 2 hour delay

(Wait two hours before caution prior to commencing work
servicing the pump) on pump systems in order
to allow sufficient cooling
time.
TASK: Disconnect targets
Disconnect all targets us- OK to proceed None Refer to the Service System
ing the service laptop with task instructions. Ensure that
pressure in targets is com-
pletely released.
TASK: Enter inside the cyclotron room
Measure radiation level in Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- See General advice above.
the room until all safety tion fect Always request approval
precautions from the customer radia-
have been tion safety officer.
completed
TASK: Stop water cooling to targets
Switch off water valves to Proceed with Radia- Potential radia- The task will take 2 min to
targets on manifold caution tion tion in the cy- accomplish.
clotron room Do not start any job if the
dose rate is too high. Al-
ways request approval
from the customer radia-
tion safety officer.
TASK: Open radiation shield
Use the door pendant con- Proceed with Pinch Mechanical Take care when opening
trol to open the Integrated caution movement door. Ensure safety shoes
Radiation Shield are worn.
Measure radiation level in Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Measure dose rate in tar-
targets area until all safety tion fect gets area.
precautions
have been
completed
Decide if the radiation level Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Do not start any job if the
is low enough to start work until all safety tion fect dose rate is too high.
precautions Consider:
have been - the present radiation
completed - the time required to com-
plete task
- your personal accumulat-
ed dose
TASK: Remove targets
Remove each mounted Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Time: Minimize any person-
target until all safety tion fect al contact with the targets.
precautions Distance: Always verify
Note! have been head and body position are
The task of removal the completed as far as possible away
targets should normally be from unshielded targets.
performed by the cus- Shielding: Store the targets
tomer’s trained on site engi- immediately in an appropri-
neer as this is an operator ately shielded area/contain-
procedure. er.
Action:
Apply lead shield in front of
targets.
Action:
Remove all connections
(beam current probe, heli-
um, gas and media, cooling
water).
Note: High finger dose ex-
posure!
Action:
Remove target, put it in the
BRS.
TASK: Open vacuum chamber
Open the vacuum chamber Proceed with Pinch Mechanical Take care when opening
door caution movement door. Make sure that safety
shoes are worn.
Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Monitor radiation level

until all safety tion fect while opening the door.
precautions
have been
completed
Do not proceed Radia- Target foil parti- Check for presence of tar-
until all safety tion cles get foil particles in the
precautions chamber.
have been
completed Possible radiation sce-
nario:
Question: How do you find
out if (by any chance) tar-
get foil particles (frag-
ments) are present in the
chamber?
Answer: Target foil frag-
ments will be revealed by
high radiation levels at
certain spots. Radiation
levels above 1 mSv/h
(1000 μSv/h) 10 cm in front
of your electronic dosime-
ter indicates target foil
fragments. Use long
tweezers to manipulate
target foils. Move target
foils to lead container.
Proceed with Electrical Electric power Apply LOTO procedure to

caution could be recon- all energy sources before
nected during starting work.
circuits manipu-
lation
Check magnet door and Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Continue monitoring radia-
compressed air cylinder until all safety tion fect tion level.
precautions
have been
completed
TASK: Perform ion source maintenance
Unmount and service ion Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Always monitor radiation
source until all safety tion fect levels before removal and
precautions ensure PPE requirements
have been are rigidly observed.
completed
Removing the ion source
will take ~5 mins.
Ion source service will take
~30 min, but with a lower
radiation level (it is done
outside radioactive area).
Remount ion source Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Shielding, distance: Al-
until all safety tion fect ways verify your head and
precautions body position are as far as
have been possible away from collima-
completed tors.
Remounting the Ion Source

will take 15–30 minutes.
Check and correct dis- Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Shielding, distance: Al-
tances in central region until all safety tion fect ways verify your head and
completed tors.
TASK: Check RF components inside the vacuum chamber
Check and tighten stem Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Shielding, distance: Al-
screws until all safety tion fect ways verify your head and
completed tors.
Checking Dee and stem

Screws will take ~10 min.
Check finger contacts and Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Shielding, distance: Al-
feed-through until all safety tion fect ways verify your head and
completed tors.
Checking finger contacts

and feed-through will take
~5 min.
TASK: Perform extraction system maintenance
Remove extraction holders Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Shielding, distance: Al-
until all safety tion fect ways verify your head and
completed tors.
Removing the extraction

foil carousels will take less
than 1 min each, ~10 min
in total.
Check extraction foils and Proceed with Radia- Ionization ef- Ensure PPE requirements
replace bad ones caution tion fect are rigidly observed.
Checking extraction foils

(and replacing extraction
foils that are broken or
bad) will take ~30 min.
Check and calibrate the Proceed with Radia- Ionization ef- Shielding, distance: Al-
extraction system caution tion fect ways verify your head and
body position are as far as
possible away from collima-
tors.
Checking and calibrating

the extraction system from
the service laptop will take
~2 min.
TASK: Check all beam path components inside vacuum chamber
Check collimators Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Time: Work fast to mini-
until all safety tion fect mize exposure.
precautions
have been Checking and measuring
completed collimator openings will
take ~5 minutes.
Measure beam current Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Time, distance: Measure
readout in targets, collima- until all safety tion fect fast and use long test
tors, extraction and flip-in precautions probes.
probe have been
completed Measure beam resistance
readout on flip-in probe
and extraction revolvers
will take ~5 min.
TASK: Close vacuum chamber
Clean vacuum chamber Proceed with Radia- Ionization ef- Remove all tools from the
and O-ring caution tion fect vacuum tank. Check that
the area is tidy. Use a vacu-
um cleaner, if necessary.
Removing all tools, clean-

ing vacuum chamber and
regreasing vacuum tank O-
ring will take ~15 min.
Close vacuum chamber Proceed with Mechani- Tools left inside Check and verify carefully
caution cal can damage that nothing is left inside
system the chamber.
Estimated time: 5 min.
TASK: Perform vacuum system maintenance
Perform service of diffusion Proceed with Thermal, Harmful fumes Mandatory 2 hour delay to
pump caution chemical if hot oil ex- ensure sufficient cooling
posed to ambi- time.
ent air
Perform service of rough- Proceed with Thermal Roughing Mandatory 2 hour delay to
ing pump caution pump can ensure sufficient cooling
reach up to time.
70–80°C
Perform service of Penning OK to proceed None

and Pirani gauges with task
TASK: Verify compressed air circuit
Empty the compressed air Proceed with Com- Ensure compressed air
moisture trap caution pressed supply is locked out before
air removing water trap.
TASK: Perform target maintenance
Clean targets Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Time: Minimize any person-
until all safety tion fect al contact with the targets.
Note! precautions Distance: Always verify
The task of target mainte- have been head and body position are
nance should normally be completed as far as possible away
performed by the cus- from unshielded targets.
tomer’s trained on site engi- Shielding: Use bench radi-
neer as this is an operator ation shield and long
procedure. tweezers to manipulate
target foils.
Cleaning and rebuilding

one target will take 30 min.
Note!
When practical, use a spare
target assembly which has
decayed to minimize dose
during repair and mainte-
nance.
Targets are not to be han-

dled unless ~8–10 half lives
of the radionuclide pro-
duced is decayed to mini-
mize contamination.
TASK: Restart water cooling to targets
Open water valves on OK to proceed None

manifold with task
TASK: Perform He cooling maintenance
Replace the helium cooling Proceed with Radia- He pipes con- Measure the radiation level
compressor membrane caution tion tamination before start working.
Ventilate all helium lines

before servicing the helium
cooling compressor. The
helium cooling pipes and
the filter can (in the rare
case of target foil rupture)
contain fragments of ra-
dioactive target foils, which
should be removed from
the workspace as soon as
possible to reduce
hand/finger dose.
Store target foils (if any) in
adequate lead container.
Question: How do you find

out if (by any chance) tar-
get foil particles (frag-
ments) are present in the
helium cooling system pip-
ing and the helium cooling
compressor?
Answer: Target foil frag-

ments will be revealed by
high radiation levels at
certain spots. Radiation
levels above 1 mSv/h
(1000 Sv/h) 10 cm in front
of your electronic dosime-
ter indicates target foil
fragments.
Clean helium cooling filter Proceed with Radia- Filter contami- As above, verify filter con-
caution tion nation tamination level. See
above.
Check for water and heli- Proceed with Radia- Ionization ef- Verify radiation level in the
um leaks caution tion fect working area. See above.
Unlock energy sources and set system to operational conditions
TASK: Test targets and delivery system to hot lab
Remount targets Do not proceed Radia- Ionization ef- Time: Minimize any person-
until all safety tion fect al contact with the targets.
Note! precautions Distance: Always verify
The task of remounting the have been head and body position are
targets should normally be completed as far as possible away
performed by the cus- from unshielded targets.
tomer’s trained on site engi- Verify target radiation level
neer as this is an operator and handle accordingly.
procedure.
Note!
These targets do not con-
tain radioactive target foils,
as they have not yet been
used in production.
Connect targets using the OK to proceed None

service laptop with task
Flush, fill, empty, flush and OK to proceed None

fill all targets with helium with task
Perform targets leak test OK to proceed None

with task
Check fill volume of liquid OK to proceed None

targets with task
Change 1/16" delivery lines Do not proceed Chemi- 18F– remain- Verify target radiation level
to hot cell until all safety cal, radia- ings in lines and handle accordingly.
precautions tion Manipulate carefully the
have been delivery lines. They could
completed contain rests of 18F– and
contaminate your clothes
or skin.
TASK: Restart vacuum system
Follow complete procedure OK to proceed None

to restart vacuum to oper- with task
ational level
TASK: Check complete water system
Check for water leaks in all Proceed with Electrical Accidental con- Use insulated tools and
system, verify conductivity, caution tact with live or good working procedures
pressure and flow charged com- to avoid electrical shock.
ponents LOTO: Always turn off and
Lock-Out the power supply
before servicing the sys-
tem. The secondary cooling
system (water pump,
PSMC, RFPG) contains
lethal voltages of up to the
mains voltage 400 VAC.
Proceed with Radia- Contamination Always monitor radiation

caution tion levels before servicing the
cooling water system. Pay
particular attention to the
filter and the ion exchang-
er, where radioactive parti-
cles may accumulate.
TASK: Perform electronic cabinets maintenance
Replace or clean air filters OK to proceed None

with task
Reconnect electric power OK to proceed None

with task
Check all voltages and Proceed with Electrical Accidental con- Use insulated tools and
currents caution tact with live or good working procedures
charged com- to avoid electrical shock –
ponents ground the TPSU before
touching the internal parts.
Test interlocks OK to proceed None

with task
Check fans and fuses Proceed with Electrical Accidental con- Use insulated tools and
caution tact with live or follow working procedures
charged com- to avoid electrical shock.
ponents
TASK: Check all gas supplies
Check all pressures OK to proceed None

with task
TASK: Perform beam quality tests
Fill targets, turn on beam OK to proceed None When using the service
and check all path (flip-in with task laptop, always remember
probe, gas handling, ion to connect and select a
source parameters, extrac- target before running the
tion current, targets cur- beam. In fact, it is possible
rent) to run beam from the ser-
vice system without con-
necting and selecting the
target, but this will damage
the target.
TASK: Record and backup configuration values
Store configuration values OK to proceed None

using the service laptop with task
TASK: Perform full production test
Test production for each OK to proceed None

target using the Master with task
System
3-6-7 RAs/JSAs
For a comprehensive list of RAs, see Appendix A Risk Assessment (RA).
3-7 Spare parts

For lists of available spare parts, see MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
See also under the heading ACTION/PROCEDURE/REMARKS/REFERENCE in Section 3-9

Sequence list for MINItrace Planned Maintenance on page 85.
3-8 Consumables
The customer is responsible for providing all consumables and parts needed for planned
maintenance, unless otherwise stipulated in contract agreement.
3-8 Consumables
To obtain a list of consumables, contact the local GE Healthcare service representative and
refer to DOC1731876 (internal GE document).
Table 3-17: Consumables and PM parts
Qty Description
2 Seal DN25KF BP213316-T
2 Seal DN10KF BP213314-T
1 Vacuum grease APIEZON type M
1 Mechanical pump oil 5l P3
2 Helium compressor diaphragm
1 Anode Service Kit, containing:
Qty Description
1 Anode tube
2 Cathode
4 Anode insulator
8 Washer
2 Cathode screw
1 O-ring
2 Anode Ring Wolfram (inserted in the anode tube)
3-8 Consumables
Qty Description
1 Extraction foil kit, containing:
2 CFOIL graphite 24 x 69
Assembly instruction CAC204-63004-xx-4
Assembly instruction CAC204-63005-xx-4
1 Foil ass'y
2 Air filter for GCU Gen I and PSMC
1 Fan filter 200x250 CCAB
1 Target filter replacement
1 Filter replacement RFPG
Chemically pure ethanol for cleaning
Examination gloves
If applicable:
Qty Description
1 18F Liquid target maintenance kit, containing:
Qty Description
1 Foil Havar 25 Dia.38.1
1 Foil TI/AL/V 12.5
1 Helicoflex, oval silver
1 Helocoflex, aluminum AL. HN 100
1 O-ring Viton™ 34.2 x 3
2 Peek tubing connections F 130
4 O-ring Viton MC/D 21-04
1 13N Liquid target maintenance kit, containing:
Qty Description
1 Foil TI/AL/V 12.5
1 Helicoflex, oval silver
3-8 Consumables
Qty Description
1 Helocoflex, aluminum AL. HN 100
1 O-ring Viton 34.2 x 3
2 Peek tubing connections F 130
4 O-ring Viton MC/D 21-04
1 Foil Havar 12.5
4 Hex screw MC6S 6 X 45 A4
1 O-ring kit, containing 4 O-rings for diffusion pump
1 Santovac diffusion pump oil
3-8 Consumables
3-9 Sequence list for MINItrace Planned Maintenance

Note!
Copy pages 85–124 to get a complete and comprehensive documentation of the planned
maintenance.
PM
(Planned Maintenance)
CHECKLIST
for MINItrace systems
Planned maintenance is to be performed by qualified service personnel only!
Copy this page and the following pages

in order to enable a complete and comprehensive documentation of the planned maintenance.
CUSTOMER:
...........................................
DATE OF VISIT:
...........................................
PERFORMED BY:
...........................................
(FE signature)
3-9-1 List of tools and instruments that have serial numbers/calibration

Use the table below to specify the tools and instruments that are used during planned
maintenance and have serial numbers and/or are calibrated.
Tool/instrument Serial no. Calibration date Remarks
GE HEALTHCARE PETtrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

GE HEALTHCARE
REV 7 PETtrace INSTALLATION
DIRECTIONMANUAL
2131771-100
REV 7 DIRECTION 2131771-100
APPENDIX F — WATER COOLING UNIT OPERATOR PANEL

APPENDIX
WARNING! F — WATER COOLING UNIT OPERATOR PANEL
Apply LOTO as applicable in accordance with GE regulations and local restrictions. For
This appendix contains the operating instructions for the electronic operator panel on
LOTO procedures, see Section3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the MINItrace system on page59.
the front contains
This appendix of the Water Cooling Unit.
the operating For additional
instructions for theinformation consult the
electronic operator SwedeWater
panel on
Operation
the front and Maintenance
of the Water Cooling Unit.Manual that came
For additional with yourconsult
information system.the
(Normally shipped
SwedeWater
insideand
Operation theMaintenance
Cooling Water Unit, behind
Manual the door
that came with on
yourthe front panel.)
system. (Normally shipped
WARNING! Fall hazard
inside the Cooling Water Unit, behind the door on the front panel.)
F-1 Working on parts on top of the radiation shield or standing on a ladder involves potential
General Panel Operation
fall hazard.
F-1 General Panel Operation
1. Turn on the Water Cooling Unit power with the front panel switch.
Use secured ladder
1. Turnandon safety harness.
the Water Cooling Unit power with the front panel switch.
2. See Illustration F-1.Press the Main menu button to display the following list of selec-
tions:
2. See Illustration F-1.Press the Main menu button to display the following list of selec-
For instructions on using ladder and safety harness, refer to Section 17-7 Ladder and climbing
tions:
TABLE safety
F-1 on page 564.
TABLE F-1
MODE SELECTtargets, open magnet
3-9-2 Shutdown, stop vacuum, disconnect/remove Mode Select
door Menu
MODE SELECT Mode Select Menu
RUNNING CONDITIONS Display Running Conditions
# Location System Action
RUNNING CONDITIONS Display Running Conditions
PUMPS CONTROL Pump Control Menu
PUMPS CONTROL Pump Control Menu
1 Control Master PRESSURE
Shutdown the MINItrace andDisplay Pressure
logout from Value
the Master.
PRESSURE Display Pressure Value
2 CSC Vacuum CONDUCTIVITY
Record the vacuum pressureDisplay Conductivity
before PM start. Value
CONDUCTIVITY
Refer to MINItrace Qilin Display
Operator Conductivity
Guide Value
(dir. 2232995).
TEMPERATURE Display Temperature Value
See
TEMPERATURE Chapter 10 Vacuum system for details.
Display Temperature Value
PARAMETERS SETTINGS Set Parameters
PARAMETERS
The A2SETTINGS Set Parameters
set point determines when the Penning gauge
DATE/TIME SETTING Set Date and Time
B1 is activated.
DATE/TIME SETTING
Make Set and
sure that the A2 low Datehigh
andset
Timepoints are:
3. Press
6.0 x 10the (low)
-3 or Cursor key to select an item from the main menu.
3. Press 8.0thex 10or-3 Cursor key to select an item from the main menu.
(high)
4. Press the Enter key to display the corresponding item’s menu or values.
4. Press the Enter key to display the corresponding item’s menu or values.
• If the menu screen has a + in the bottom right corner, information exists below
• If the the
menu screen.
screen has a + in the bottom right corner, information exists below
the screen.
• If the menu screen has a + in the upper right corner, information exists above
86 3 Periodic maintenance • If the the
menu screen.
screen has a + in the upper right corner, information exists above
the screen.
[#2] VACUUM PRESSURE READOUT WHEN CYCLOTRON IS IN STAND-BY
Gauge number Pressure Low limit High limit Remarks
A1 (Pirani A) x10- x10- x10-
A2 (Pirani B) x10- 1 x10- x10-
B1 (Penning) x10- x10- x10-
1 Probably UR = Under Range (< 1.0 x 10-4 mbar)
Date: Signature:
3 CSC Vacuum Press OFF on the VCU.

Wait 4 (four) hours before starting with #35!
Keep working with #4–34.
4 CSC Vacuum Press VENT on the VCU.
5 Service laptop Targets Disconnect all targets by using the Service laptop and
the MINItrace Service System software as follows:
– Select a target menu in the MSS, for example 18F- Tar-
get.
– Click DISCONNECT TARGET.
6 CSC Cooling water Switch off water valves to the targets on Water Manifold.
7 CSC Radiation shield Use the door pendant control (hand hold device located
in the CSC) to open the radiation shield. See Figure 10-5.
WARNING! Pinch hazard
Personal injury can be caused when the

radiation shield doors move.
The door pendant control must be disconnected from

the CSC during service on the cyclotron.
Mind your feet. Stay clear of the moving doors.
8 Cyclotron Targets Remove all targets.

WARNING! High exposure action
Note!
The target assembly, upon removal, must be immediately
stored in an appropriately shielded area/container.
WARNING! Radioactive parts
Always wear protective clothing, foot pro-

tection (shoes with steel toe cap), gloves
and goggles.
Always measure radiation levels before working on parts.
Always handle used parts in accordance with federal,

state and/or local regulations.
For removal instructions, refer to MINItrace Qilin Operator

Guide (dir. 2232995).
9 Magnet Open the vacuum chamber, see Section 10-7-1 Open

the vacuum chamber on page 295.
10
11 Check the Magnet Door and Magnet Door Gas Cylinder.

Make notes.
[#11] MAGNET DOOR CHECK
Item Checked? (Yes/No) Remarks
Magnet door
Date: Signature:
3-9-3 Ion source PM, central region measurements
12 Cyclotron Ion source Perform ion source PM.

See Section 11-8 Planned maintenance on page 343.
13 Check distances in Central Region and make notes.

See Figure 11-12.
[#13] ION SOURCE DISTANCES
Table 3-18: Values valid on MINItrace systems up to and including S/N 28790
Pos. Default factory Distances Note Measured distance

[mm] [mm]
A 1.5 ±0.05 mm [mm]
B 2.0 ±0.05 mm [mm]
C 3.0 ±0.05 mm D2 centred on lower Dee connector [mm]
D 3.0 ±0.05 mm D2 centred on lower Dee connector [mm]
E Slit opening centred on long mark on IS tool [mm]
F 13.2 ±0.1 mm [mm]
G 20.5 ±0.1 mm [mm]
H (29.3) ±0.1 mm [mm]
I (30.2) ±0.1 mm [mm]
J 20.6 ±0.1 mm Valid on MINItrace systems up to and including

S/N 28772.
[mm]
21.4 ±0.1 mm Valid on MINItrace systems from S/N 28773
and forward.
K Ref. pin in contact lower Dee connector [mm]
L 4.0 ±0.1 mm [mm]
M 28.8 mm Valid on MINItrace systems up to and including

S/N 28772.
[mm]
30.0 ±0.1 mm Valid on MINItrace systems from S/N 28773
and forward.
N 1.0 [mm]
Date: Signature:
Table 3-19: Values valid on MINItrace systems from S/N 28791 and forward
Pos. Default factory Distances Note Measured distance

[mm] [mm]
A 1.3 ±0.05 mm [mm]
B 1.5 ±0.05 mm [mm]
C 2.7 ±0.05 mm D2 centred on lower Dee connector [mm]
D 2.7 ±0.05 mm D2 centred on lower Dee connector [mm]
E Slit opening centred on long mark on IS tool [mm]
F 13.0 ±0.1 mm [mm]
G 20.0 ±0.1 mm [mm]
H (30.9) ±0.1 mm [mm]
I (31.6) ±0.1 mm [mm]
J 21.3 ±0.1 mm [mm]
K Ref. pin in contact lower Dee connector [mm]
L N/A N/A
M 30.6 mm [mm]
N N/A N/A
Date: Signature:
3-9-4 RF
14 Cyclotron RF Check and tighten STEM screws if necessary.
15 Check finger contacts and feedthrough.
[#14–15] RF MECHANICAL CHECK
RF stem screws OK
RF finger contacts OK
Date: Signature:
3-9-5 Extraction
16 Cyclotron Extraction Remove single extraction foil holder and (if applicable)
dual extraction foil holder.
WARNING! Radiation
When working in a potentially radioactive

area:
• Always wear a personal dose monitor that has an
audible dose rate alarm function, to ensure accept-
able radiation levels and safe working conditions.
• Use gloves, goggles and laboratory coat. If the area

can contain open source radioactivity use a beta
detector and regularly check for contamination. In
case of contamination, remove contaminated coat
and gloves and check for skin contamination. Follow
your local procedures and report to the local Radia-
tion Safety Officer immediately, and to GE Health-
care within 24 hours.
See Section 14-8-3 Replacing the single extraction unit

foils on page 499.
17 Check foils. Replace foils that are broken or bad. Make

notes!
18 Check foil holder turn mechanism.
19 Check limit positions on extraction system.
20 Calibrate single extraction and check motor current.
21 Calibrate dual extraction and check motor current.
[#17] FOILS CHECKED/REPLACED
Foil Checked? (Yes/No) Replaced? (Yes/No) Remarks
Single extraction foil
Dual extraction foil

(if applicable)
Date: Signature:
[#20 and #21] EXTRACTION MOTOR CURRENT READOUT
Motor Motor current readout Remarks
Single extraction motor [mA]
Dual extraction motor [mA]

(if applicable)
Date: Signature:
3-9-6 Beam diagnostics
22 Cyclotron (Beam) Diagnostic Check and measure beam collimator open-

System ings (the vertical aperture dimension).
See Chapter 16 Beam diagnostics.
23 Measure beam current readout on targets.
24 Measure beam current readout on beam

collimators.
25 Measure beam current readout on singe and

dual extraction foil holder.
26 Measure beam current readout on flip-in

probe.
[#22] BEAM COLLIMATOR SINGLE EXTRACTION OPENINGS
Checkpoint Target type Vertical aperture dimension [mm]
Target 1 opening [mm]

(dummy target)
Date: Signature:
[#22] BEAM COLLIMATORS DUAL EXTRACTION OPENING (if applicable)
Checkpoint Target type Vertical aperture dimension [mm]
Date: Signature:
[#23–#26] CURRENT CALIBRATION SINGLE EXTRACTION
Checkpoint DVM resistance readout Read current on Service Remarks

laptop
Target 1 [kΩ] [µA]

(dummy target)
Single extrac- upper [kΩ] [µA]

tion collimators
lower [kΩ] [µA]
Extraction unit 1 [kΩ] [µA] Note: 50% of inject current

read
Flip in probe [kΩ] [µA]
Date: Signature:
[#23–#26] CURRENT CALIBRATION DUAL EXTRACTION (if applicable)
Checkpoint DVM resistance readout Read current on Service Remarks

laptop
Dual extraction upper [kΩ] [µA]

collimator
lower [kΩ] [µA]
Extraction unit 2 [kΩ] [µA] Note: 50% of inject current

read
Date: Signature:
3-9-7 Vacuum chamber
27 Cyclotron Vacuum In case of dust, wipe the vacuum chamber.
28 Remove all tools from the vacuum cham-

ber!
29 Clear the surface for the O-ring on the vacu-

um chamber body.
30 Clean and regrease the vacuum chamber O-

ring.
31 No tools left!
32 Close the magnet door.
3-9-8 Vacuum pump system
33 Cyclotron Vacuum Before performing #35, make sure 4 hours

have elapsed since OFF was pressed on the
VCU (see #3).
34 Close the magnet door.
35 Perform overhaul of Recommendation:

diffusion pump, see Change Santovac oil
Section 10-8-3 Over- every 5th year.
haul of diffusion
pump on page 301.
Make notes, see be-
low!
36 Perform overhaul of rotary pump, see Sec-

tion 10-8-4 Overhaul of rotary pump on
page 303.
37 Perform overhaul of Pirani gauge for backing

pressure, see Section 10-8-7 Overhaul of Pi-
rani gauges on page 305.
38 Perform overhaul of Pirani gauge for tank

pressure, see Section 10-8-7 Overhaul of Pi-
rani gauges on page 305.
39 Perform overhaul of Penning gauges, see

Section 10-8-8 Overhaul of Penning gauge
on page 308.
[#36] PUMPS
Rotary pump
Diffusion pump
Pump compartment Motor compartment
Oil type
Oil level
Old oil color
Oil filled
Pump cleaned
Cooling water
Date: Signature:
[#37–#38] GAUGE OVERHAUL
Gauge Checked? (Yes/No) Replaced? (Yes/No) Remarks
Backing Pirani
Chamber Pirani
Penning gauge
Date: Signature:
3-9-9 Compressed air moisture trap
40 CSC Compressed air Empty the compressed air moisture trap.

The compressed air moisture trap is located
in the CSC, on the left-hand side, below the
compressed air manifold.
[#40] COMPRESSED AIR MOISTURE TRAP
Trap emptied Remarks
Date: Signature:
3-9-10 Target maintenance, helium compressor
41 CSC Cooling water sys- Reinstall the targets and open the water
tem valves for the targets.
Always wear protective cloth-

ing, foot protection (shoes with
steel toe cap), gloves and goggles.
Always measure radiation levels before

working on parts.
Always handle used parts in accordance with

federal, state and/or local regulations.
42 Cyclotron He-cooling Replace the compressor membrane, see

Section 15-6-9 Helium cooling compressor
Note! diaphragm (membrane) on page 524.
If the system is only WARNING! Radiation
equipped with
18F- Nb 25 targets, When working in a potentially
maintenace on the radioactive area:
helium cooling sys- • Always wear a personal dose monitor
tem is not necessary. that has an audible dose rate alarm
function, to ensure acceptable radiation
levels and safe working conditions.
• Use gloves, goggles and laboratory coat.

If the area can contain open source ra-
dioactivity use a beta detector and reg-
ularly check for contamination. In case
of contamination, remove contaminated
coat and gloves and check for skin
contamination. Follow your local proce-
dures and report to the local Radiation
Safety Officer immediately, and to GE
Healthcare within 24 hours.
In the rare case of a target foil rupture, ra-

dioactivity might spread throughout the heli-
um cooling system piping and the compres-
sor.
43 Clean helium cooling filter, see Section 15-5-

1 Overhaul of helium cooling system on
page 513.
44 Check the helium cooling circuit for water

leaks.
45 Check the helium cooling circuit for He leaks.

See Section 15-5-1-2 Helium cooling system
leak check on page 514.
46 Service laptop Target system Connect targets.
47 Flush, fill, empty, flush and fill all targets with

helium.
48 Repeat the above procedure once more on

all targets.
49 Cyclotron Vacuum tight test the targets. See Sec-

tion 15-7 How to add an 18F target option to
MINItrace on page 527, step 31.
50 Leak check all targets with helium or target

gas. See Section 15-7 How to add an 18F
target option to MINItrace on page 527, step
31.
Note: Service laptop MSS need to be used
during leak check.
51 Check fill volume of liquid targets (change

configuration if necessary). See MINI-
trace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995).
52 Leak check the liquid targets again.

Note: Service laptop MSS need to be used
during leak check.
53 Change 1/16" tubings between liquid targets

and hotcells. See Section 15-5-2 Replace
transfer line (Tefzel tube) to hot cell on
page 514.
[#42–43] HELIUM COOLING COMPRESSOR
Item Replaced? (Yes/No) Remarks
Membrane
Item Checked? (Yes/No) Replaced? (Yes/No) Remarks
Gasket
Item Checked? (Yes/No) Cleaned? (Yes/No) Remarks
Helium filter cleaned
Compressor function
Date: Signature:
[#44–45] HELIUM COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling water
Helium gas supply pressure bar
Date: Signature:

[#49–53] TARGET CHECKS
Target Water leaks Valve function Vacuum tight Media tight check
(OK if < 3 psi/minute)
Target 1
Target 2
Target 3
Target 4
Target 5
(dummy target)
Target 6
(if applicable)
Date: Signature:

3-9-11 Vacuum restart
54 Cyclotron Vacuum Make sure that

- all tubes are properly connected.
- all cables are properly connected.
- both Pirani gauges are reinserted.
- the Penning gauge is reinserted.
- pumps are connected.
- valves are connected.
55 Open water valves to the diffusion pump

(CSC).
56 Switch on Cooling (CSC).
57 Press PUMP on the VCU and note the time.
58 Check that the pressure goes down.
59 When the backing pressure reaches 1.0 x

10-1 mbar, the diffusion pump oil heater goes
on.
30–40 minutes later, the green DP LED stops
flashing and illuminates steady (check the
DP LED on VCU Panel at the CSC). Note the
time.
Check that the High Vacuum Valve opens

(check the HVV LED on VCU Panel at the CSC).
60 Record the vacuum pressure during produc-

tion.
[#57–#59] TIME BETWEEN PUMP ON VCU AND DIFF PUMP HOT
[#57] pump activat- [#59] Time from pump activated [#59] High vacuum Remarks
ed at: to Green DP LED stops flashing and illuminates valve opens
steady (YES/NO)
Date: Signature:

[#60] VACUUM PRESSURE READOUT DURING PRODUCTION
(Ion source gas pressure: 6.0 bar)
Gauge number Pressure (mbar) Remarks
A1 (Pirani A) x10-
A2 (Pirani B) x10- 1
B1 (Penning) x10-
1 Probably UR = Under Range (<1.0 x 10-4 mbar)
Date: Signature:

3-9-12 Water leaks
61 CSC Cooling water sys- The Cooling Water System should already be
tem running, see #57.
62 Check water level in expansion vessel (look

at transparent tube connected to the expan-
sion vessel in CSC). See Figure 9-1. Fill if nec-
essary.
63 Check the BP1 pressure (Cooling Water

Pump).
Check the BP3 Static Pressure.
See Figure 9-1.
64 Check all connections in CSC.
65 Magnet Check for water leaks on magnet connec-

tions.
66 RF Check for water leaks on RF system.
67 Ion source Check for water leaks on ion source system.
68 CCAB Check for water leaks on PSMC.
69 RFPG (Radio Frequen- Check for water leaks on RFPG.

cy Power Generator)
70 CSC Check water flow. Write down values in table

below.
71 CSC Check conductivity meter in CSC (see Fig-

ure 9-1).
In case of High Conductivity alarm, replace
the Ion Exchanger and filter, see Section 9-7
Ion exchanger and filter on page 280.

[#62–#71] WATER LEAKS
Checkpoint Status/value Remarks
Expansion vessel water level
BP1
BP3
Connections in CSC
Check for water leaks on RF system
Ion source system
PSMC
RFPG
High conductivity meter
Ion exchanger and filter replaced
Date: Signature:
[#70] WATER FLOW
Checkpoint Flow Remarks

[liter/min]
RFPG
Magnet
RF1
RF2
Target dual
PSMC
Vacuum
Ion source
Date: Signature:

3-9-13 Control Cabinet (CCAB)
72 PS Room CCAB Switch off and apply LOTO on the CCAB

circuit breaker in MDP.
See Section 3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the
MINItrace system on page 59.
73 Open CCAB
74 Visual inspection of CCAB
75 Clean inside CCAB
76 Change air filter in CCAB
77 Close CCAB
78 Switch on power to the CCAB
79 Check voltages on GCU Gen I Power Supply.

See Section 7-2-3-3 Check voltages on GCU
Power Supply on page 169.
Check voltages on GCU Gen II Power Supply.
See Section 7-3-4-2 Checking voltages on
page 221.
80 PSMC Test interlocks related to Magnet System
81 Connect your multimeter on the current

output
82 Measure currents and voltages with operat-

ing PSMC
83 Disconnect your multimeter
84 Ramping sequences OK?
85 GCU Change fan filter in General Control Unit front

(GCU Gen I only)
Note!
CCAB contains either a GCU Gen I or a GCU Gen II.

[#79] VOLTAGES ON GCU Gen I POWER SUPPLY
Voltage Tolerance Remarks
-15 V ±0.3 V
+15 V ±0.3 V
+24 V ±0.6 V
+5 V ±0.1 V
+9 V ±0.1 V
Date: Signature:
[#79] VOLTAGES ON GCU Gen II POWER SUPPLY
Test points Tolerance Remarks
24V GND_IO ±1.2 V
+15V GND_IO ±0.75 V
-15V GND_IO ±0.75 V
+5V GND ±0.25 V
GND_IO CHASSIS ±5 V
Date: Signature:

[#] VOLTAGES ON MAGNET POWER SUPPLY
Voltage Max Conf. value

(PS delivers 150 A) (normal operation)
Current
Voltage
Ripple
AC current R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
AC voltage R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
Date: Signature:

3-9-14 RFPG: Cabinet and fans
86 PS Room RFPG Switch off and apply LOTO on the RFPG

circuit breaker in CCAB.
Switch off and apply LOTO on the RFPG
circuit breaker in MDP.
See Section 3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the
87 Check Grounding device in the TAU. See

Section 3-9-14-1 Ground stick check on
page 110.
88 Clean the TAU interior
89 Visually inspect the TAU
90 Visually inspect the DPA
91 Change filters in the RFPG
92 Visually inspect the GSPU
93 NOTE! Ground the TPSU before committing

to any work tasks on the TPSU interior.
94 Visually inspect the TPSU
95 Open the TPSU front cover and check, with

a screwdriver, that all terminal screws on
terminal block TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 are
tightened.
96 Check the diodes inside the TPSU
97 Check the High Voltage fuse in the TPSU
98 Visual inspect the DPSU
99 NOTE! Remove the TPSU grounding before

switching on the power.
Remove LOTO and switch on power to RFPG.
100 Verify RFPG fan operation
101 Reinstall all covers

3-9-14-1 Ground stick check
Make a safety check of the ground stick:
1 Check that the ground cable is securely connected to both the ground stick and the
chassis.
2 Check that the ground cable is in good condition and not damaged.
3 Use an Ohm-meter and measure between the tip of the ground stick and the chassis
(not the screw that holds the cable to the chassis). The resistance should be less than
1 Ω.
3-9-15 RFPG: SCU Gen I Measurement Module readout (STANDBY/NORMAL mode)

This sequence only applies to RFPG systems that contain SCU Gen I (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-3: SCU Gen I

102 PS Room Service laptop Use the MSS Magnet System menu to start
the PSMC and set the Magnet Current to
135 A.
103 Use the MSS RF System menu to

set the RF system in STANDBY mode.
104 RFPG (SCU Mea- Record values related to RF system.

suremet module) For info on the RFPG SCU, see Section 13-5-
1-1 Standard RFPG SCU Measurement Mod-
ule readout on page 442.
105 Service laptop Use the MSS RF System menu to

set the RF system in NORMAL mode.

suremet module)
107 After 1 hour – record the values once again:

109

suremet module)

set the RF system in NORMAL mode.

suremet module)

switch off RF.

[#104, #106] RFPG SCU MEASUREMENT MODULE READOUT
Measurement Module Standby Normal

RFPG measurements
@ ______ kV and ______ µA
on target
DEE VOLT REF
DEE VOLT READ
DPA REFLECTED POWER
LOAD TUNING ERROR
RF FORWARD VOLTAGE
RF REFLECTED VOLTAGE
DPA FORWARD POWER
FORWARD POWER
REFLECTED POWER
ANODE VOLTAGE
ANODE CURRENT
GRID VOLTAGE
GRID CURRENT
SCREEN VOLTAGE
SCREEN CURRENT
HEATER VOLTAGE
Date: Signature:

[#110, #112] RFPG SCU MEASUREMENT MODULE READOUT (1 hour later)
Measurement Module Standby Normal

RFPG measurements
@ ______ kV and ______ µA
on target
DEE VOLT REF
DEE VOLT READ
DPA REFLECTED POWER
LOAD TUNING ERROR
RF FORWARD VOLTAGE
DPA FORWARD POWER
FORWARD POWER
REFLECTED POWER
ANODE VOLTAGE
ANODE CURRENT
GRID VOLTAGE
GRID CURRENT
SCREEN VOLTAGE
SCREEN CURRENT
HEATER VOLTAGE
Date: Signature:
If specifically asked for (by for example OnLine Center personnel), please record all values
related to the RF system in the table on the opposite page.
Note!
This is not a regular Planned Maintenance issue! Disregard this if a complete set of values is
not specifically asked for!
For details on RF board TP (Test points), see Section13-5-1-2 Extended RFPG SCU Measurement
Module and RF board readout on page 444.

EXTENDED RFPG SCU MEASUREMENT MODULE AND RF BOARD READOUT
(Note: This is not a normal PM issue, see the previous page.)
Measurement Module OFF STANDBY NORMAL @ PULSE FIX

____ kV and
___ µA
on target
DEE VOLT REF
DEE VOLT READ
DPA REFLECTED POWER
LOAD TUNING ERROR
RF FORWARD VOLTAGE
DPA FORWARD POWER
FORWARD POWER
REFLECTED POWER
ANODE VOLTAGE
ANODE CURRENT
GRID VOLTAGE
GRID CURRENT
SCREEN VOLTAGE
SCREEN CURRENT
HEATER VOLTAGE
RF board
RF DET (TP24)
DVR (TP15)
DVR REL (TP22)
DEE VOLT REF (TP4)
FV (TP16)

Measurement Module OFF STANDBY NORMAL @ PULSE FIX

____ kV and
___ µA
on target
AM2 (TP3)
AM1 (TP2)
AM3 (TP21)
DVR OK (TP1)
FP (TP17)
RV (TP18)
RP (TP19)
DET LIMIT (TP6)
RF ENABLE (TP5)
PHASE (TP20)
+5 V (TP11)
-5 V (TP14)
+15 V (TP7)
+12 V (TP8)
-12 V (TP10)
-15 V (TP9)
GND (TP13)
+24 V (TP12)
Date: Signature:

3-9-16 RFPG: SCU Gen II measurement

This sequence only applies to RFPG systems that contain SCU Gen II (Figure 3-4).
Figure 3-4: SCU Gen II
SCU Gen II has a front display used for showing RF values. SCU Gen II can also be connected
to a service laptop where the values can be monitored in a web browser (SCU web interface).
It is also possible to create log files in the SCU web interface.
For more information on using the front display and the SCU web interface, see Section 13-2-4
SCU Gen II on page 390.

114 PS Room Service laptop, MSS Use the MSS Magnet System menu to start
the PSMC and set the Magnet Current to
135 A.
115 SCU Web interface, Fill in the OFF columns in both tables below.
MSS
116 MSS Use the MSS RF System menu to

117 SCU Web interface, Fill in the STANDBY columns in both tables
MSS below.

set the RF system in NORMAL mode and
35 kV.
119 SCU Web interface, Fill in the NORMAL, 0 hour columns in both
MSS tables below.
Wait 1 hour
120 SCU Web interface Create a Milli-seconds log.
121 SCU Web interface, Fill in the NORMAL, 1 hour columns in both
MSS tables below.
122 SCU Web interface Create a Five-seconds log.

switch off RF.
124 SCU Web interface Download the Statistics log, the Five-seconds
log and the Milli-seconds logs.
125 Service laptop Save the log files in the backup folder in the
service laptop, C:\backup\scu.
126 Service laptop Empty the log folders. Log files cannot be
recorded if the memory is full.
Note!
Make sure the log files are backed up before
deleting them.

[#115, #117, #119, #121] RFPG VALUES IN THE SCU WEB INTERFACE AND MSS
SCU web interface, main page RFPG status
Parameter OFF STANDBY NORMAL

@ ______ kV and ______ µA
on target
0 hour 1 hour
DEE REF IN
DEE 1
MTCH PH 90
DPA FWD
DPA REFL
FWD PWR
REFL PWR
ANODE V
ANODE C
GRID V
GRID C
SCREEN V
SCREEN C
HEATER V

MSS RFPG status
Parameter OFF STANDBY NORMAL

@ ______ kV and ______ µA
on target
0 hour 1 hour
DEE VOLTAGE SET
DEE VOLTAGE READ
FORWARD POWER
REFLECTED POWER
PHASE ERROR
Date: Signature:
3-9-17 Gas cylinders
127 Gas Room Media supply Check gas cylinder pressure and
output pressure.

GAS CYLINDERS
Gas (purity) Pressure Use
Nominal Regulator readout
H2 (6.0) Variable, typically 0.5 MPa Ion source gas

(73 psi).
(Pressure range determined by
using a restriction and setting
hydrogen pressure on the regula-
tor.)
CH4 (5.5) 0.4 MPa (58 psi) 13N-NH

3
Pressure range 0.3–0.6 MPa (Long tubing and vertical dis-
(44–87 psi) tance between cyclotron and
Radiochemistry system may re-
quire higher pressure.)
He (5.5) 2.48 MPa (360 psi) ±0.1 MPa 18F-F- (operation gas)
(14 psi)
He (5.5) 0.5 ±0.2 MPa (73 ±29 psi) 18F-F- (carrier gas)
He (5.5) 0.16 ±0.01 MPa (23.5 ±1.5 psi) All (cooling gas)
Date: Signature:
3-9-18 Beam ON; check diagnostics, ion source and target
128 PS Room Service laptop Check Flip-in probe function.
129 Check gas handling system.
130 Perform ion source Performance

Test.
131 Fill a target and select it.
132 Tune beam.
133 SYSTEM OFF

[#130] ION SOURCE PERFORMANCE TEST
Ion source gas pressure: [MPa]
Vacuum pressure with gas: [mbar]
Magnet current: [A]
Dee voltage: [kV]
IS current [mA] I probe [µA]
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000

Probe current (Iprobe)[µA]

200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Ion source current (IIS )[mA]
[#128–#133] CHECKS WHEN BEAM ON EXECUTED
Check Value Remarks
Secondary cooling water tempera-

ture (CSC)
Check Yes/No Remarks
Flip-in probe OK
Gas handling system OK
Ion source output OK
Target filled
Secondary cooling water tempera-

ture (CSC)
System off executed bar
Date: Signature:

3-9-19 Safety interlock system and warnings lights
134 Service laptop Safety interlock sys- Check the function of the radiation safety
Cyclotron tem system, RFPG interlocks, RF inhibit external
CCAB Warning lights interlocks, and warning lights.
For instructions, see Chapter 18 Safety sys-
tem.
Note!
Make sure that the terminal screws are tight-
ened thoroughly after the test.
Check Yes/No Remarks
Radiation safety system OK
RFPG interlocks OK
RF inhibit external interlocks OK
Warning lights OK
Date: Signature:
3-9-20 Configuration values
135 Service laptop Configuration Note record configuration values and make
a back-up.

3-9-21 Master System
136 Master Master System Log in to the Master System
137 Print out config for the Master System
138 Open a terminal window and make a print-

out: Errorlog “errprint 60”
139 Start-up the accelerator
140 Fill the 18F- target with H216O
141 Run a 18F- production 25 µA 5 min
142 Record the activity EOB (A0=A/e-ln2*t/T) T=9.97

min N13
143 Repeat #140–142. Then continue.
144 Fill the 13N target with H216O
145 Run a 13N production 25 µA 5 min
146 Record the activity EOB (A0=A/e-ln2*t/T) T=9.97

13N
147 Repeat #144–146. Then continue.
148 Shut down the cyclotron.
149 Log out
END OF SEQUENCE LIST!

4 SPARE PARTS
The spare parts are listed in MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
To order a spare part, quote the part number, the name and the required quantity. Address
the order to the nearest GE Healthcare service representative.
Procedures for disassembly and reassembly of the MINItrace system and spare parts are
detailed in other chapters in this volume.
4 Spare parts 125

5 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
5-1 Table headlines

The diagnostic information on the following pages is presented in a four-column table, as
follows:
Error message Possible cause (parameter) Possible solution (Action) Related spare
parts
This column contains fault This column may contain pos- This column suggests ways of This column
messages shown on the Mas- sible causes to the fault in- solving the problem. might contain
ter System screen. curred. spare part data
5-2 Error messages
parts
Database fault in error han- Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
dler, database access fault planation.
Database fault in error han- Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
dler, database fault planation.
Database fault in main menu, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
database access fault planation.
Database fault in main menu, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
database fault planation.
Database fault in network Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
sender, database access fault planation.
Database fault in network Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
sender, database access fault planation.
Database fault in parameter Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
editor, database access fault planation.
Database fault in parameter Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
editor, database fault planation.
Database fault in production, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
Database fault in production, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
Database fault in show status, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
5 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 127

5-2 Error messages
parts
Database fault in show status, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
Database fault in start unit, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
Database fault in start unit, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
Database fault in supplies, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
Database fault in supplies, Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
Database fault in system sta- Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
tus, database access fault planation.
Database fault in system sta- Database error (sqlca.sqlcode) See Informix manuals for ex-
tus, database fault planation.
Fault at safety interlocks, I/O One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
board is missing the GCU is not responding. ber for board 0=DIO_1,
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
Then check select LED on I/O
board should be flashing or on
if working. Try to change
board.
Fault at safety interlocks, The door to the cyclotron vault Close the door.
safety door is open or the radiation shield is open.
Fault at safety interlocks, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault at safety interlocks, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Fault at startup, I/O board is One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
missing the GCU is not responding. ber for board 0=DIO_1,
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault during foilchange, out of All foils are used up. Time for service. Change to Foils
foils new foils.
Fault during foilchange, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
128 5 Diagnostics and troubleshooting

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault for balance, regulation The balance motor has not Check the motor. Motor-unit, DCM
fault reached position within board
120 seconds (old_mo-
tor_speed).
Fault for balance, SW fault 1 An illegal signal is received.
Fault in ARC current regula- ARC current has exceeded its

tion, regulation fault limits.
Fault in ARC current regula- An illegal signal is received.

tion, SW fault 1
Fault in BCA system, BCA Check +15 and -15 LEDs on

power fault BCA board.
Fault in BCA system, I/O board One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O boards
is missing the GCU is not responding. ber for board 0=DIO_1,
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in BCA system, probe Probe not responding for Check that the magnet is on.
fault 2 seconds.
Fault in BCA system, An illegal signal is received.

SW fault 1
Fault in BCA system, An illegal parameter is re-

SW fault 2 ceived.
Fault in BCA system, too high Collimator current too high.

beam current on collimator 1- Used collimator max = 10 µA,
left unused = 5 µA

right unused = 5 µA.

left unused = 5 µA.

right unused = 5 µA.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in BCA system, too high Target current too high, rela-
beam current on target 1 tive to maximum current con-
figured from the Service Sys-
tem. Average of 10 readings.
Fault in beam checking, beam The difference between the foil Check vacuum and foils. Foils
losses too high from foil to current and target current
target must be less than the configu-
ration value “Loss foil/tar-
get[%]”.
Fault in beam checking, beam The difference between the Check vacuum and foils. Foils
losses too high from probe to probe current and foil current
foil must be less than the configu-
ration value “Loss
probe/foil[%]”.
Fault in beam checking, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault in beam starter, system Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
is still busy at the Service System.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in cooling system, I/O One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in foil regulation, no There is no beam current on

beam current on target target, maybe the Beam Exit
Valve does not work properly.
Fault in foil regulation, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault in foil regulation, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Fault in foil supervising, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault in global production sys- This target is not configured.

tem, illegal target type Should not occur, program-
ming error.
Fault in global production sys- When starting dual beam,

tem, in bad state there is less than two target
positions between the select-
ed targets, or the selected
particle is different. Should not
occur, programming error.
Fault in Ion source, gas flow Flow is outside set flow ±20%, Try again. If still problems, Flowreg
fault or unstable for 20 seconds. check gas supply. Next check
flow regulator.
Fault in Ion source, gas off Illegal to set ion source current Turn on the gas before setting
fault when the gas is switched off. current.
Fault in Ion source, HV relay Check the PSARC.

fault
Fault in Ion source, I/O board One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in Ion source, in bad Illegal to set ion source current Turn on the ion source before
state when the ion source is setting current.
switched off.
Fault in Ion source, magnet Magnet is off or current Check the PSMC.
current too low < 100 A.
Fault in Ion source, PSarc fault Check the PSARC. PSARC
Fault in Ion source, PSARC off Illegal to set ion source current Turn on the ion source before
when the ion source is setting current.
switched off.
Fault in Ion source, safety door Check the cyclotron vault

is open door, should be closed.
Fault in Ion source, set ARC It is not possible to set the arc Use values within the config-
current is outside limits current above the configured ured limits.
limit.
Fault in Ion source, SW fault 1 An illegal signal is received.
Fault in Ion source, SW fault 2 An illegal parameter is re-

ceived.
Fault in Ion source, SW fault 6 Internal software error.
Fault in Ion source, vacuum Check the vacuum system Vacuum compo-
fault (VCU). nents
Fault in Ion source, waterflow Check IS water flow.

fault
Fault in LTF system, I/O board One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in LTF system, in bad A calibrate command has Try again.

state been sent to a motor already
moving. The moving is
stopped.
Fault in LTF system, SW fault 1 An illegal signal is received.
Fault in LTF system, SW fault 2 An illegal parameter is re-

ceived.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in magnet optimizer, in Magnet has not reached

bad state standby-H or -D when the op-
timizing command arrives.
Fault in magnet optimizer, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault in magnet system, I/O One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in magnet system, PSMC Problems with the serial com- Check the cables, report to the
communication fault munication to the PSMC. service engineer.
Fault in magnet system, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Fault in magnet system, SW Internal software error.

fault 6
Fault in mode changer, divi- Programming error, should not

sion by zero occur.
Fault in mode changer, in bad Programming error

state (s_acs_mode recieved in other
state then IDLE).
Fault in mode changer, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault in mode changer, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Fault in motor system, balance Motor has not reached posi- Check the motor.
motor fault tion within 60 s.
Fault in motor system, busy Motor is already calibrating, Wait and try again.
calibrating wait.
Fault in motor system, calibra- Motor has not reached posi- Motor-unit, DCM
tion fault tion within 60 seconds. board
Fault in motor system, foil 1 Motor has not reached posi- Check the motor.
Fault in motor system, foil 2 Motor has not reached posi- Check the motor.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in motor system, foil Foil holder 2 does not exists.

holder 2 does not exist.
Fault in motor system, I/O One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in motor system, initial- Trying to use a non-existing Check the config parameters,
ization fault motor. The GCS configuration using the Service System.
is not complete.
Fault in motor system, inter- DCM board power error when Check LED for +15 and -15 on DCM board
lock fault running a motor. the DCM board.
Fault in motor system, motor Motor is already being used,

busy wait.
Fault in motor system, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault in motor system, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Fault in motor system, SW Internal software error.

fault 6
Fault in network signal distrib- An illegal signal is received.

utor, SW fault 1
Fault in RF system, cannot set Standby-ready/cavity-water- Not relevant.

fix mode flow/magnet-on/vacuum-
ok/door error.
Fault in RF system, cannot set

normal mode
Fault in RF system, cannot set

normal mode
Fault in RF system, cannot set A safety door is open. Check

normal mode doors and radiation shields.
Fault in RF system, cannot set RFPG processor has latched

normal mode up. Read manual.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in RF system, cannot set Short circuit within the RF

normal mode Cavity. Check inside the vacu-
um tank for shortcircuit Dee
to ground, e.g. at a silicon baf-
fle, via a damaged foil etc.
Fault in RF system, cannot set Sparks within the vacuum

normal mode tank. Verify sparks by means
of MSS or LED on Interface
Board 1 of the RFPG. Run at
reduced Dee voltage to condi-
tion system. Search for cause
inside the vacuum tank.
Fault in RF system, cannot set There is a magnet or a vacu-

normal mode um system interlock. Check
magnet current and vacuum
pressure.
Fault in RF system, cannot set There is no or too low RF pow-

normal mode er out of the RFPG. If MSS is
available run FIX MODE to see
if there is RF power. Use MSS
or LEDs on RFPG to collect
possible fault information.
Fault in RF system, cannot set Standby-ready/cavity-water- RFPG shuts down from stand-
normal mode flow/magnet-on/vacuum- by ready to off when normal
ok/door error, or Dee-volts-ok mode is started. Refer to
signal is not received from the “cannot set standby mode”.
RF within 100 seconds.
Fault in RF system, cannot set Standby-ready/cavity-water- Not relevant.

pulse mode flow/magnet-on/vacuum-
ok/door error.
Fault in RF system, cannot set Check circuitbreakers SW1,

standby mode SW2 and SW3 on RFPG. Switch
on if necessary. Call for a ser-
vice engineer if a circuitbreak-
er trips repeatedly.
Fault in RF system, cannot set RF INHIBIT interlock.Check LED

standby mode 2 on Interface Board 1 of the
SCU. If the LED is lit, RF is inhib-
ited by relays within the Con-
trol Interface Unit.Check RF
cavity water flow and magnet
door of the cyclotron.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in RF system, cannot set RFPG internal fault. Switch to

standby mode the MSS or use the LEDs on
the RFPG for detailed info.
LEDs on Interface Boards 1
and 2 provide latched status
information.
Fault in RF system, cannot set RFPG or RF Cavity water flow

standby mode too low. Check and turn on if
necessary.
Fault in RF system, cannot set Waterflow is not OK Mains power for the RFPG is
standby mode (DI_RF_WFN), or standby- missing.
ready signal is not received
from the RF within 90 seconds.
Fault in RF system, cannot set DI_RF_STANDBY_READYSwitch- Equivalent to the previous row

standby mode ing off RF. “....cannot set standby mode”.
Fault in RF system, cavity wa- DI_RF_CAVITY_WATER- Check RF Cavity Water Flow.

terflow fault FLOW_OK Switching off RF. (Three circuits).
Fault in RF system, Dee volt-

age fault
Fault in RF system, Dee volt-

age fault
Fault in RF system, Dee volt- RFPG processor has latched

age fault up. Read manual.
Fault in RF system, Dee volt- Short circuit within the RF

age fault Cavity. Check inside the vacu-
um tank for shortcircuit Dee
to ground, e.g. at a silicon baf-
fle, via a damaged foil etc.
Fault in RF system, Dee volt- Sparks within the vacuum

age fault tank. Verify sparks by means
of MSS or LED on Interface
Board 1 of the RFPG. Run at
reduced Dee-voltage to condi-
tion system. Search for cause
inside the vacuum tank.
Fault in RF system, Dee volt- There is no or too low RF pow-

age fault er out of the RFPG. If MSS is
available run FIX MODE to see
if there is RF power. Use MSS
or LEDs on RFPG to collect
possible fault information.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in RF system, Dee volt- DI_RF_ERRORGoing to stand- DEE VOLTS not OK within
age fault by. 60 secs.
Fault in RF system, I/O board One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in RF system, in bad Illegal change of RF state.

state Current operation mode.
Fault in RF system, initializa- The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
tion fault complete. using the Service System.
Fault in RF system, magnet DI_RF_PSMC_IS_ONGoing to Check the Magnet system.

current too low standby.
Fault in RF system, safety door The accelerator room door or Close safety door.
is open radiation shield is open.
Fault in RF system, spark latch The RF system is signaling Reset the RFPG by switching
up SPARKS too long to the control off its mains power for a few
system. seconds. Run the RF system at
reduced Dee voltage in order
to condition vacuum and sta-
bilize RF action. If the system
persists in sparking search for
possible cause within the RF
cavity.
Fault in RF system, start fault Flaps have moved through No Dee voltage has been
whole search area without found. Equivalent to “Fault in
succeeding. RF system, Dee voltage fault”.
Fault in RF system, SW fault 1 An illegal signal is received.
Fault in RF system, SW fault 2 An illegal parameter is re-

ceived.
Fault in RF system, vacuum DR_VACUUM_OKGoing to Check the Vacuum system.

fault standby
Fault in RF system, waterflow DI_RF_WFNSwitching off RF Check RFPG Water Flow.

fault

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in service system com- If the GCS does not receive

munication, communication any signals from the Service
timeout System for 10 seconds, the
beam is switched off.
Fault in start beam for target The door to the cyclotron vault Close the door.
1, Safety door open or the radiation shield is open.
Fault in target 1, initialization The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
fault complete. using the Service System.
Fault in target 1, SW fault 1 An illegal signal is received.
Fault in target 1, SW fault 6 Internal software error.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in target system, He Helium compressor is not on. Check Circuit breaker in the CB
compressor fault CB in PDU off. PDU.
Fault in target system, He The He-pressure is not reach- Check He gasbottle pressure.
cooling pressure fault ing 18 psi within 80 seconds.
Fault in target system, He flow He flow not OK. Check if there is any flow in Flow-meter
1 fault the flowmeter.
Fault in target system, He flow He flow not OK. Check if there is any flow in Flow-meter
2 fault the flowmeter.
Fault in target system, I/O One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in target system, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Fault in target system, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Fault in target system, target Target waterflow too low. Check the flowswitch. if too Water flow
waterflow 1 fault low flow check that the valves switch
on the manifold is open. Check
that the coolig system is run-
ning.
Fault in target system, target Target waterflow too low. Check the flowswitch. if too Water flow
waterflow 2 fault low flow check that the valves switch
on the manifold is open. Check
that the coolig system is run-
ning.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Fault in vacuum system, I/O One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Fault in vacuum system, mag- Magnet door open. Close the magnet door.
net door is open
Fault in vacuum system, vacu- Vacuum not OK. Check the vacuum system (on Vacuum compo-
um fault the VCU). nents
Internal communication fault Error when creating a commu- Print errorlog (for further inves-
in error handler, SW fault 11 nication socket. Check access tigations). Error from cre-
rights in the socket directory, ate_socket (errno).
should be “prw-rw-r-- 1 MINI-
trac MINItrac”.
Internal communication fault Error when trying to send a

in error, SW fault 8 signal to the error task.
Internal communication fault Error when creating a commu-

in main menu, SW fault 11 nication socket. Check access
rights in the socket directory,
trac MINItrac”. Error from cre-
ate_socket (errno).

in main_menu, SW fault 8 signal to the main-menu task.

in maintenance, SW fault 8 signal to the maintenance
task.
in network GCS receiver, SW nication socket. Error from tigations). Check access rights
fault 11 create_socket (errno). in the socket directory, should
be “prw-rw-r-- 1 MINItrac
MINItrac”.
in network GCS receiver, SW nication socket. Error from tigations). Check access rights
MINItrac”.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Internal communication fault Error when sending between

in network library, SW fault 8 internal Master tasks. Error
during “open” or “write”.
in network receiver, SW nication socket. Error from tigations). Check access rights
MINItrac”.

in network sender, SW fault 11 nication socket. Check access
ate_socket (errno).
in parameter editor, SW nication socket. Check access tigations). Error from cre-
fault 11 rights in the socket directory, ate_socket (errno).
trac MINItrac”.

in parameter editor, SW fault 8 signal to the parameter editor
task.

in production, SW fault 11 nication socket. Check access
ate_socket (errno).

in production, SW fault 8 signal to the production task.
in show status, SW fault 11 nication socket. Error from tigations). Check access rights
create_socket (errno). in the socket directory, should
MINItrac”.

in show status, SW fault 8 signal to the show status task.
in start unit, SW fault 11 nication socket. Error from tigations). Check access rights
create_socket (errno). in the socket directory, should
MINItrac”.

5-2 Error messages
parts

in supplies, SW fault 8 signal to the supplies task.

in system status, SW fault 11 nication socket. Check access
ate_socket (errno).

in system status, SW fault 8 signal to the system status
task.
Master internal fault in error An illegal signal is received.

handler, SW fault 1
Master internal fault in main Could not start a subtask (er- Report to service engineer or
menu, cannot execute pro- rno). system admnistrator and try
gram again.
Master internal fault in main File report/report.txt fault (sta- Check the directory /ex-
menu, report file could not be tus from xv_set, or 0). port/home/MINItrac/report.
read
Master internal fault in main An illegal signal is received.

menu, SW fault 1
Master internal fault in main An illegal parameter is re-

menu, SW fault 2 ceived.
Master internal fault in main Fork did not work. (errno)

menu, SW fault 4
Master internal fault in mainte- An illegal signal is received.

nance, SW fault 1
Master internal fault in mainte- Bad start parameter (A|C), or

nance, SW fault 2 nof parameters, or proc_id
non-existing.
Master internal fault in mainte- The target or chemistry sys- Check the status of the target
nance, target or chemistry is tem is disconnected. or chemistry system. If OK,
disconnected connect using the Master
maintenance function.
Master internal fault in net- An illegal signal is received.

work receiver, SW fault 1
Master internal fault in net- An illegal parameter is re-

work receiver, SW fault 2 ceived.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Master internal fault in net- Wrong start parameters.

work receiver, SW fault 3 (start_arg)
Master internal fault in net- An illegal signal is received.

work sender, SW fault 1
Master internal fault in param- An illegal signal is received.

eter editor, SW fault 1 (sig_no)
Master internal fault in produc- Not possible to start a subtask Report to service engineer or
tion, cannot execute program (0). system admnistrator and try
again.
Master internal fault in produc- An illegal signal is received.

tion, SW fault 1 (sig_no)
Master internal fault in produc- Illegal start parameters, not

tion, SW fault 3 B|C, or proc_id not found, ille-
gal selection in database. (0)
Master internal fault in produc- Not possible to start a second Report to service engineer or
tion, SW fault 4 program. (0) system admnistrator and try
again.
Master internal fault in show An illegal signal is received.

status, SW fault 1
Master internal fault in start Timeout on s_alive or _install Check the network.
unit, no Ethernet response (unit).
Master internal fault in start An illegal signal is received.

unit, SW fault 1
Master internal fault in start Illegal start parameter, not

unit, SW fault 3 A|C. (undef)
Master internal fault in start Wrong version number on GCS The wrong software version is
unit, wrong program version (unit). installed, check with system
administrator.
Master internal fault in start Target configuration Check the Master and GCS
unit, wrong target type not matching between Master configuration, they must
and GCS (unit). match.
Master internal fault in sup- Selected media not found in

plies, SW fault 2 database. (gas_no)
Master internal fault in system An illegal signal is received.

status, SW fault 1 (sig_no)

5-2 Error messages
parts
Message from main menu, Local mode ended, not a fault

Master System has control (0).
Message from main menu, A tracer production is started

production is started (process id).
Message from main menu, Local mode started, not a fault

Service System has control (0).
Message from main_menu, A tracer production is ended

production is ended (process id).
Network communication fault GCSport is not defined (unit). Check file /etc/services, which
in network receiver, etherport should contain definition of
environment undefined GCSport.
Network communication fault Error from create_inet_socket, Print errorlog and report to
in network receiver, network connect (errno). service engineer.
connection problem
in network receiver, SW setsockopt (errno). service engineer.
fault 13
Network communication fault Error when creating a network Print errorlog (for further inves-
in network receiver, SW fault 9 communication socket. Error tigations). Check access rights
from create_inet_socket (er- in the socket directory, should
rno). be “prw-rw-r-- 1 MINItrac
MINItrac”.
in network GCS receiver, should contain definition of
etherport environment unde- GCSport.
fined
Network communication fault Not possible to find the ad- Print errorlog (for further inves-
in network GCS receiver, net- dress located in the TFTP tigations). Change the address
work connection problem bootstrap PROM. Error from in the NVRAM with a CONSOLE
create_inet_socket, connect or change the TFTP PROM.
(errno).
in network GCS receiver, SW setsockopt (errno). service engineer.
fault 13
in network GCS receiver, SW communication socket. Error tigations). Check access rights
fault 9 from create_inet_socket (er- in the socket directory, should
MINItrac”.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Network communication fault The hostname that is request- Print the errorlog, contact the
in network GCS receiver, the ed does not exist (errno). system administrator, and
network host is not defined check the file /etc/hosts for
“gemsacs”.
Network communication fault Error from receive_inet_sig or

in network receiver, communi- timeout (unit) (select=100)
cation broken (read=300+errno) (size-
of=400+errno) (malloc=500+er-
rno).
in network receiver, etherport should contain definition of
Network communication fault Problems with the network Print errorlog (for further inves-
in network sender, communi- communication. Error from tigations) Check cables. Use
cation broken send_inet_sig, (errno). the “ping” command: “ping
gemsacs”, which should give
result “gemsacs is alive”.
Network communication fault GCSport or is not defined (unit). Check file /etc/services, which
in network sender, etherport should contain definition of
Network communication fault Error from create_inet_socket,

in network sender, network connect (errno).
connection problem
Network communication fault FALSE from send_inet_sig or Check the network.

in network sender, no Ethernet GCS is down (unit).
response
Network communication fault Error from create_inet_socket,

in network sender, SW fault 13 setsockopt (errno).
in network sender, SW fault 9 communication socket. Error tigations). Check access rights
from create_inet_socket (er- in the socket directory, should
MINItrac”.
Network communication fault The host name that is request- Print the errorlog, contact the
in network sender, the net- ed does not exist. (errno). system administrator, and
work host is not defined check the file /etc/hosts for
“gemsacs”.
Network communication fault An illegal parameter is re-

in production, SW fault 2 ceived. Wrong unit received in
signal.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Power fail fault in main menu, Batch report incomplete, pro-

production was interrupted duction was never completed
(batch_no).
Serious fault in common sys- An illegal signal is received.

tem, SW fault 1
Serious fault in cooling system, The secondary cooling system. Check if the pump is running Pump
cooling pump is not running on the water cooling system.
Serious fault in cooling system, Check the secondary cooling Check the secondary cooling
cooling system in local mode system, it should be set to re- system, it should be set to re-
mote mode. mote mode.
Serious fault in cooling system, Cooling water temperature Check water temperature on
cooling water temperature too too high. the water system. If to high
high check that the primary water
system is running.
Serious fault in Ethernet com- Master communication bro- Check power and cables.
munication, communication ken.
is broken
Serious fault in magnet sys- Close the magnet door.

tem, magnet door is open
Serious fault in magnet sys- Check the power to the PSMC

tem, PSMC main power fault cabinet.
Serious fault in magnet sys- Check on the PSMC front panel

tem, PSMC summary interlock if there is any interlock.
Target fault in production A specific production is abort-

controller, aborted ed. Comes together with some
other error message.
Warning at safety interlocks, External interlock number 1 is Check if the external interlock
safety 1 fault activated. is activated.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning at safety interlocks, A faulty command is received

SW fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning at safety interlocks, An illegal command/order is

SW fault 5 received.
Warning at startup, SW fault 1 An illegal signal is received.
Warning for warning signs, I/O One of the VME I/O boards in Print errorlog and check num- I/O board
1=DIO_2, 3=AI, 4=AO, 5=SMB
board.
Warning for warning signs, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Warning for warning signs, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Warning for warning signs, SW Internal software error.

fault 6
Warning in BCA system, initial- The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
ization fault complete. using the Service System.
Warning in BCA system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in BCA system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in BCA system, sys- Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
tem is still busy at the Service System.
Warning in beam starter, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Warning in common system, The allocated memory for sig-

out of memory nals has exceeded its limits.
Warning in common system, An illegal parameter is re-

SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in common system, A faulty command is received

Warning in common system, An illegal command/order is


5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in config area, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Warning in config area, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in cooling system, The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
initialization fault complete. using the Service System.
Warning in cooling system, Cooling water pressure too Check pressure on the meter
low pressure low. on the cooling water system,
if necessary fill water, also
check for water leaks.
Warning in cooling system, Cooling water level too low. Check water level in cooling
low water level water system, if necessary fill
water, also check for water
leaks.
Warning in cooling system, not The PSMC is on and/or the Turn off the PSMC and/or
allowed to switch off PSarc is on and/or the RF is in PSARC. If necessary in local
standby. mode.
Warning in cooling system, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Warning in cooling system, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Warning in cooling system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in cooling system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in cooling system, Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
system is still busy at the Service System.
Warning in Ethernet communi- The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
cation, initialization fault complete. using the Service System.
Warning in Ethernet communi- The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
cation, initialization fault complete. using the Service System.
Warning in Ethernet communi- An illegal signal is received.

cation, SW fault 1
Warning in Ethernet communi- An illegal signal is received.

cation, SW fault 1

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in foil supervising, (Target+collimators) current is Check if foils are broken. Foils
extraction foil break less than foil current for con-
secutive measuring.
Warning in foil system, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Warning in foil system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in foil system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in global production An illegal signal is received.

system, SW fault 1
Warning in global production An illegal parameter is re-

system, SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in global system, ini- The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
tialization fault complete. using the Service System.
Warning in global system, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1
Warning in global system, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Warning in global system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in global system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in global system, Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
Warning in Ion source, initial- The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
ization fault complete. using the Service System.
Warning in Ion source, ion Cathode wearing > configured Time for service. cathode
source life time exceeded lifetime. Only warning, nothing
is stopped.
Warning in Ion source, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in Ion source, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in Ion source, system Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
Warning in LTF system, step- The GCU contains one stepper Try again.
per motor is busy motor board. If a second
command is sent to the step-
per motor module while it is
busy, the first command will
be finished and the second will
be ignored.
Warning in LTF system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in LTF system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in magnet system, The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
Warning in magnet system, Problems with the serial com- Check the cables, report to the
PSMC communication fault munication to the PSMC. service engineer.
Warning in magnet system, A faulty command is received

Warning in magnet system, An illegal command/order is

Warning in magnet system, Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
Warning in main menu, the The second connected server Check that the correct server
second server is not logged in is not logged in. name is defined in the databas
table parameters. Check that
the server is logged in with
OpenWindows™ started.
Check that the original Master
server is included in the xhost
list (enter command “xhost” to
see the list. If not included, en-
ter “xhost ‘servername’” where
‘servername’ is the name of
the original Master server
(petxxx)).
Warning in main menu, wrong Wrong password in configura-

password tion (0).

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in maintenance The receiving unit is not ready. Verify the hotcell door, the
function, receiving unit is not FDG system status and maybe
ready other things as well.
Warning in maintenance An illegal signal is received.

function, SW fault 1
Warning in maintenance An illegal parameter is re-

function, SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in master configura- An illegal parameter is re-

tion, SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in mode changer for Should not occur.

target 1, SW fault 16





Warning in mode changer, SW Should not occur.

fault 16
Warning in motor system, foil Foil holder 2 does not exists.

holder 2 does not exists.
Warning in motor system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in motor system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in motor system, Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
Warning in network manager, An illegal signal is received.

SW fault 1

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in network receiver, Minor programming error re-

SW fault 15 garding in list of data request-
ing tasks.
Warning in network signal The Master is trying to connect Exit and try again later.
distributor, Service System when the GCS is in local mode.
control
Warning in network signal An illegal parameter is re-

distributor, SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in parameter editor, Copy destination file name =

destination file same as source file name(0).
source file
Warning in parameter editor, Parameter file GEMS may not

GEMS file may not be edited be edited, deleted or overwrit-
or deleted ten (0).
Warning in parameter editor, Entered string not valid (0).

illegal input
Warning in production con- This target is not configured.

troller, illegal target type Should not occur, program-
ming error.
Warning in production con- An illegal signal is received.

troller, SW fault 1
Warning in production con- An illegal parameter is re-

troller, SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in production, illegal Entered string not valid (0).

input
Warning in production, receiv- The receiving unit is not ready. Verify the hotcell door, the
ing unit is not ready FDG system status and maybe
other things as well.
Warning in production, wrong Wrong or operator password

password entered (0).
Warning in production, zero in Entered operator empty or

an input field current=0 or charge_time=0
(0) .
Warning in RF system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in RF system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in RF system, system Buttons are pressed too often

Warning in service system GCS has read an unexpected Check cables, and the serial
communication, service sys- character. port parameters.
tem communication fault
Warning in service system An illegal signal is received.

communication, SW fault 1
Warning in service system An illegal parameter is re-

communication, SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in service system An illegal command/order is

communication, SW fault 5 received.
Warning in service system Internal software error.

communication, SW fault 6
Warning in signal supervisor, An illegal signal is received.

SW fault 1
Warning in signal supervisor, An illegal command/order is

Warning in start beam for tar- Programming error (s_halt is

get 1, start fault received before cancel_prod
in start_beam).

in start_beam).

in start_beam).

in start_beam).

in start_beam).

in start_beam).
Warning in status handler, SW An illegal signal is received.

fault 1

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in status handler, SW An illegal parameter is re-

fault 2 ceived.
Warning in status handler, Buttons are pressed too often Take it easy.
Warning in status text handler, Wrong parameter for the sta-

in bad state tus text table.
Warning in status text handler, An illegal signal is received.

SW fault 1
Warning in system stopping, An illegal signal is received.

SW fault 1
Warning in system stopping, An illegal parameter is re-

SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in target 1, illegal Programming error, should not

target type occur.
Warning in target 1, in bad It is not possible to disconnect

state or perform He-flush, He-empty
on a selected target. It is not
possible to perform He-actions
if no target is connected.
Warning in target 1, LTF motor The difference between the Try again. If still problems
is not moving true- and calculated stepper check that the motor in the
motor position has twice ex- LTF is running.
ceeded 20 µl.
Warning in target 1, stepper A move command has been Wait and try again.
motor is busy sent to a motor that is already
moving. This command is ig-
nored, the previous command
continues.
Warning in target 1, SW fault 2 An illegal parameter is re-

ceived.
Warning in target 1, target al- The liquid target has already

ready full been filled, and performed the
filling sequence without errors.
Warning in target 1, target is It is not possible to use a dis- Check the target, and if OK
disconnected connected target. connect using the mainte-
nance function “Connect” at
the Master.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in target 1, target Target pressure is outside lim- Check configuration parame-
pressure fault its, where limits depend on ters.
target and action and configu-
ration parameters.

target type occur.

ceeded 20 µl.
continues.

ceived.

the Master.
ration parameters.

target type occur.


5-2 Error messages
parts
ceeded 20 µl.
continues.

ceived.

the Master.
ration parameters.

target type occur.

ceeded 20 µl.
continues.

ceived.

5-2 Error messages
parts

the Master.
ration parameters.

target type occur.

ceeded 20 µl.
continues.

ceived.

the Master.
ration parameters.

5-2 Error messages
parts

target type occur.

ceeded 20 µl.
continues.

ceived.

the Master.
ration parameters.
Warning in target system, He The He-pressure drops below

cooling system refilling 16 psi during a production,
and is automatically filled to
at least 18 psi.
Warning in target system, in It is not possible to disconnect Connect target

bad state or perform He-flush, He-empty
on a selected target.It is not
Warning in target system, ini- The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
tialization fault complete. using the Service System.

5-2 Error messages
parts
Warning in target system, SW A faulty command is received

fault 5 (in MSS).
Warning in target system, SW An illegal command/order is

fault 5 received.
Warning in target system, Buttons are pressed too often

Warning in target system, tar- The liquid target has already

get already full been filled, and performed the
filling sequence without errors
Warning in target system, too It is not possible to select more Do not select more than two
many selected targets than two targets. targets.
Warning in vacuum system, The GCS configuration is not Check the config parameters,
Warning in vacuum system, An illegal signal is received.

SW fault 1
Warning in vacuum system, An illegal parameter is re-

SW fault 2 ceived.
Warning in vacuum system, A faulty command is received

Warning in vacuum system, An illegal command/order is

Power monitor error One or several internal volt- Check the voltages on the test
ages in the control unit are points and via the CONSOLE
outside the specification port, and document the val-
(±10%). ues.
Turn the mains switch off/on.
If the Power monitor error re-
mains, the error needs more
investigation. Call service.
Ground fault error Short-circuit to chassis (tempo- Press the Ground fault reset
rary or permanent), for exam- button on the front panel. If
ple, in 24 V-driven parts the Ground fault error re-
(probes, sensors, etc.) mains, the error is permanent
and needs more investigation.
Call service.

5-2 Error messages
6 GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM
6-1 Introduction
The cyclotron system is computer-controlled.
The control system comprises three primary units: the Master System, the General Control
Unit (GCU) and the MINItrace Service System (MSS).
• The Master System exercises operational control over the tracer production, runs and
provides the primary interface between the MINItrace system and the operator.
• The General Control Unit (GCU) provides the control interface between the Master
System and the accelerator.
• The MINItrace Service System (MSS) provides a dedicated maintenance terminal for
system service.
The Master System and the GCS communicate over an ethernet local area network, using
RJ45 cables. The MSS is connected to the GCS by a serial link.
Figure 6-1: The control system structure
6 General control system 161

6-1 Introduction
6-1-1 Control system details

The Master System
• synchronizes the GCU for automated daily tracer production
• contains some regular maintenance functions
• requires no knowledge about the hardware
• keeps databases, for example, for batch reports, media information, error messages,
network log.
The GCS
• controls the cyclotron and the targets
• contains no hard disk but loads the software from the Master system
• contains a flash or battery-supported memory for storing the installation and

configuration parameters
• communicates with both the Master system (Ethernet) and the MSS (serial).
The MSS
• sends low-level specific commands to the GCS
• requires knowledge about the hardware and manual verification of all actions
• accepts one command at a time per subsystem
• is used for installation, configuration and service.
See MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100), section MT207 CCAB, and Chapter 7
General control unit for more information on the General Control System.
162 6 General control system

6-1 Introduction
7 GENERAL CONTROL UNIT
CAUTION!
Use suitable devices for protection against electrostatic discharge (ESD).
7-1 Introduction
The purpose of the General Control Unit (GCU) is to regulate and control the MINItrace cyclotron
and peripherals.
The GCU is a part of the General Control System (GCS).
Figure 7-1: The GCU in the control cabinet
7 General control unit 163

7-1 Introduction
There are two different types of GCU, called Gen I and Gen II in the manual.
• GCU Gen I is based on a PowerPC™ CPU and VME bus. See Section 7-2 GCU – type Gen I
on page 165.
• GCU Gen II is based on an ETX CPU module and PCI bus. See Section 7-3 GCU – type
Gen II on page 202.
Note!
There are two GCU Gen II models:
• an old model with an internal Power Supply (PS),
• a new improved model with an external PS.
When replacing a GCU with internal PS it must be upgraded to a GCU with an external PS.
This chapter is divided into two sections describing each GCU.
Figure 7-2 shows the upper part of two CCAB equipped with the GCU Gen I and GCU Gen II.
Figure 7-2: GCU type Gen I and Gen II
Gen I Gen II
164 7 General control unit

7-1 Introduction
7-2 GCU – type Gen I

The General Control Unit controls and monitors the MINItrace cyclotron and peripherals.
The GCU is based on a CPU with
• built-in Ethernet interface
• VME bus backplane interface 1
• serial ports
• boot program memory
1 The VME bus follows the VME bus specification ANSI/IEEE STD1014-1987, IEC821 and IEC297.
The GCU is mounted in a 19" rack unit, which contains three fans, VME bus backplane, I/O
backplane, CPU, different I/O boards and two power supplies.
From the mains power inlet, the two power supplies generate all the power requirements for
the CPU–board and the I/O-boards. All signals between the I/O backplane and the VME
backplane are galvanically isolated with opto couplers for noise reduction.
The GCU is connected to the Master System via an Ethernet local area network. The GCS
(General Control System) software is downloaded from the Master System at start-up, and
anytime the RESET button is pressed.
7-2-1 Hazards and warnings
WARNING! Hazardous voltage
Lethal voltage of up to 250 V AC is present within the General Control Unit.
Lock-out and tag-out the control cabinet circuit breaker at the MDP, before any service
is performed on the GCU.
7-2-2 GCU boards

The GCU rack unit contains a VME-rack, a VME-backplane, An I/O-backplane, a power supply
and the following boards:
• CPU board, CPU
• Two Digital I/O boards, DIO
• Analog In board, AI
• Analog Out board, AO
• Beam Current Analyzer board, BCA
• DC Motor board, DCM
• Control Interface board, CI

Figure 7-3: GCU boards position

Figure 7-4: GCU rear view
7-2-3 Planned maintenance
WARNING!

For Lock-Out and Tag-Out (LOTO) procedures of the equipment, see Section 3-5-6 LOTO
procedures for the MINItrace system on page 59.
7-2-3-1 Spare parts

• Fan Filter GCU Front
For spare part numbers, refer to the spare parts listed for each subsystem in MINItrace Spare
7-2-3-2 Replacing the fan filter GCU front
Figure 7-5: Fan filter GCU front
WARNING! Moving parts
1 Turn off the GCU by switching OFF the GCU-CB on the back of the CB panel in the CAB.
The fans stop.
2 Loosen six retaining screws on the lower front panel.
3 Remove the lower front panel.
4 Replace the filter.
5 Mount the lower front panel and fasten the retaining screws.
6 Turn on the GCU-CB. The fans should start.
7 The software starts to be downloaded from the Master via the Ethernet local area network
to the CPU board.

7-2-3-3 Check voltages on GCU Power Supply

The following voltages are to be checked.
Voltage Tolerance Remark
-15 V ±0.3 V Check on VME backplane.

+15 V ±0.3 V (Adjustments are discussed in Section 7-2-3-4 Adjustment
+24 V ±0.6 V of GCU Power Supply voltages on page 170.)
+5 V ±0.1 V
+ 9V ±0.1 V Check on Ethernet transceiver supply voltage cable.
GCU backplane voltages (–15 V, +15 V, +24 V, +5 V)

Check the voltages at the points shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6: GCU backplane -15 V/+15 V/+24 V/+5 V measuring points
Ethernet transceiver supply voltage (+9 V)

Remove the Ethernet transceiver supply voltage cable. Check voltage.
Figure 7-7: Location of Ethernet tranciever

7-2-3-4 Adjustment of GCU Power Supply voltages

Should the GCU Power Supply voltages be out of range can they be adjusted on the GCU
Power supply. The position of the potentiometers can be seen in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-8: GCU Power Supply
Figure 7-9: GCU Power Supply DC level potentiometers

7-2-4 The GCU I/O backplane

The purpose of the I/O backplane is to connect the different I/O boards to the GCU
board-connectors.
Figure 7-10: GCU I/O backplane
The connectors P3–P22 are connected via cables to the different sub-systems and are
receiving/sending control signals.
Table 7-1: GCU I/O backplane connectors
Connector Connected to
P3 MSS (MINItrace Service System)
P4 PSMC
P5 RS232 – RS485 converter (option)
P6 Not used
P7 Not used
P8 Not used

P9 RFPG/SKG
P10 RFPG/SKH
P11 RSARC/P1
P12 Mains Distribution Control for PSARC
P13 CSC/P7
P14 CSC/P2
P15 CSC/P3
P16 PSMC
P17 CSC/P5
P18 CSC/P18
P19 TSC/P1
P20 TSC/P2
P21 H2O/15 O/P1
P22 Not used
P2-1 CPU board
P2-3 DIO #1 board
P2-4 DIO #2 board
P2-6 AI board
P2-8 AO board
P2-9 BCA board
P2-10 DCM board
P2-12 CI board

7-2-4-1 Replacing the GCU I/O backplane

Remove the GCU from the cabinet by:
1 Loosen the cables on the rear and loosen the screws on the front.
2 Remove all the GCU boards.
3 Unscrew the GCU I/O backplane board
Assemble in reverse order.
7-2-5 CPU board
7-2-5-1 Introduction
The CPU board is a Motorola™ MVME2301, which is based on the PowerPC 603 32-bit
microprocessor. Please refer to Motorola's web-page for details on the CPU board.
This section includes
• information about the CPU board jumper setting.
• information about the CPU board front panel LEDs and switches.
• instructions for configuration of the TFTP bootstrap program.

Figure 7-11: The CPU board

7-2-5-2 Jumper and switch positions, CPU board

CPU board contains three jumper groups. The correct setting for use in the GCU are listed in
Table 7-2.
Table 7-2: CPU board, switches and jumpers
Positions Description
J17 PPCBug INSTALLED SWITCH 2 determines the source of the setup/operation

parameters for the PPCBug firmware. The other switches
are not used.
Jumper 1 In Not used

Jumper 2 In (In=Flash; Out= NVRAM)
J16 VMEbus System Controller Selection At system power-up or reset, the MVME2300SC deter-
mines whether it is system controller by its position on
the bus; or not.
Jumper at 1 and 2 Open System Controller Disabled

Jumper at 2 and 3 Closed Automatic System Controller (factory setting)
No Jumper System Controller Enabled
J15 Flash Bank Selection The setting of J15 determines whether the board fetches
its reset vector from bank A or from bank B. Both banks
contain the on-board firmware,
Jumper at 1 and 2 OPEN Flash Bank A Enabled (2MB/4MB, Soldered)

Jumper at 2 and 3 CLOSED Flash Bank B Enabled (1MB, Sockets)

7-2-5-3 LED indicators and switches on front panel

On the CPU Front Panel there are four LEDs and two switches. They are used for
troubleshooting. The functions can be seen in Table 7-3. For more information on these LEDs
and switches, please refer to Motorolas WEB-page.
Figure 7-12: Connectors LEDs and switches on CPU board front panel
Table 7-3: CPU board front panel, switches and LEDs
Switches Description
ABT Abort switch. Generates an interrupt which abort program execution

and download firmware from flash memory.
RST Reset switch. Reset all GCU Devices and download software from
the Master.
LEDs Description
BLF Yellow LED indicates board failure.
CPU Green LED indicates that signal line on processor bus is active.
PMC Top Green LED indicates that a PCM is active in slot 2.
PMC Bottom Green LED indicates that a PCM is active in slot 1.
Connectors Description
DEBUG Used for configuring the TFTP boot strap program.
10/100 BASET Used for Ethernet connection.

7-2-5-4 Replacing the PLCC flash memorys

You need a special PLCC-Tool when the two flash devices should be replaced. The flash devices
are programmed in the GE-factory and need to be ordered separately (the ones coming with
a new CPU board are not programmed).
To reach the PLCC Flash Devices you need to remove the TPMC866 Serial Interface Module,
see Figure 7-13.
7-2-5-5 TPMC866 serial interface module

On the top of the CPU board there is a PMC Module installed. The module is a 8 channel RS232
serial Interface with Front I/O, called TPMC866-10.
Replacing the TPMC866 serial interface module

Unscrew the four screws holding the board and lift it from the CPU board.
Figure 7-13: TPMC866 module

7-2-5-6 Configuration
Introduction
The CPU board must be configured as described below for use in the General Control Unit
(GCU).
The two Flash-memories XU1 and XU2 (on the MVME2301 board mounted in the MINItrace
General Control Unit, GCU) contain a boot strap program, used to download the application
program from a specified Unix node on the network (normally the MINItrace master
workstation).
The bootstrap program uses a standard protocol (TFTP, Trivial File Transfer Protocol) to onnect
to the master and download a HEX file.
TFTP allows users to transfer files to and from a remote machine. It uses a well known port
number defined in /etc/services to connect to the tftpd daemon process on the remote host.
(In the bootstrap program the port number is hardcoded to 69.)
(See the Unix manual pages on TFTP for more information.)
Configuring the TFTP boot strap program

Reset the GCS to define the IP-addresses and software load object file.
To be able to connect to the Master and fetch the GCS application file the GCU CPU board
has to be set up with correct network addresses (own address + Master address) and path
to the object file. This information is stored in non-volatile RAM. When the bootstrap program
starts up the current parameter setting is sent to the serial port. If a carriage return is received
within 5 seconds an interactive setup procedure is entered. If not, the TFTP boot sequence
starts.

The following describes how to set up the TFTP bootstrap program:
1 Connect the RJ45 4 pair category 5 cable to DEBUG-port on the CPU board, see Figure 7-3
[9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity].
Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ45-D9 adapter.
2 Reset the CPU. (The J15 jumper must have jumper closed at 2 and 3, see Table 7-2.) The
bootstrap program starts. The current parameter settings are listed at the console screen.
You should now get a menu with the following layout on the next page:
If any if these parameters need to be changed, press m. This will list a number of questions
to answer. The current setting of the parameter asked for is shown within braces, just press
<Enter> to select this value.

When all parameters are defined correctly and c is pressed, the GCS software will automatically
be loaded from the Master system at reset and power on.

The values shown for “virtual io” may vary between different versions of the GCS software.
When the text “Root suspended” is shown, the GCS software is running, and the Master may
be started.
For the GCS to properly connect to the Master system when running the application, the
IP-adress must be defined in the GCS configuration using the MSS software.
7-2-6 Digital I/O board

The Digital I/O boards (DIO) control every digital in- and output signal in the cyclotron, for
example: interlocks, opening and closing different valves. The Digital I/O boards are marked
DIO.
Table 7-4: Digital I/O board specifications
Optoisolated outputs
Number of output channels 48 (6 groups with 8 in each)
Type of outputs Open Collector darlington

driver
V C (+24 V) 24 V 10%
I OH at V OH =24 V Max 0.5 mA

V OL at I OL =100 mA Max 1.1 V Typ 0.9 V
Max output sink current (I OL) per channel
Number of outputs simultaneously in one group of eight

channels
with 50% duty cycle with 100% duty cycle
(T a = 50°C) (T a =50°C)
8 outputs 300 mA 8 outputs 150 mA
Optoisolated inputs
Number of input channels 32 (4 groups with 8 in each)
Type of inputs optoisolated 24 V negative

logic
V C (+24 V) 24 V 10%
V IL at V C =24 V Max 6 V
V IH at V C =24 V Min 21.5 V
I IL at V I =6 V V C =24 V Max -10 mA Typ -8 mA
I IH at V I =21.5 V V C =24 V Min -0,8 mA Typ -1 mA
VME Bus Interface
Data transfer type A16:D8
Interrupter options IRQ1-IRQ7
Interrupt timer One software configurable

Power requirements
+5 V supply (VCC)
Voltage 4.75–5.25 V
Current Typ 1.5 A Max 2.2 A
+24 V Supply for optoisolated inputs and outputs (V C)
Voltage 21.6–26.4 V
Current (without output loads and no input currents) Typ 50 mA Max 60 mA
Current (without output loads and all inputs connected Typ 400 mA Max 470 mA
to +24 V common)
Figure 7-14: Digital I/O board 1 and board 2

7-2-6-1 Jumper and switch positions, board 1 and 2

DIO board #1 contains three switch banks and two jumper groups.
The correct positions for DIO #1are listed in Table 7-2. The correct positions for DIO #2 are
listed in Table 7-6.
Table 7-5: DIO #1, switches and jumpers for the GCU
SW1 BASE ADDRESS SWITCH 1 THRU SWITCH 8 ARE USED TO DETERMINE

THE BASE ADDRESS FOR THE DIO BOARD.
OFF = LOGIC 1, ON = LOGIC 0.
SWITCH 1 ON
SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 3 ON A10
SWITCH 4 ON A11
SWITCH 5 ON A12
SWITCH 6 ON A13
SWITCH 7 ON A14
SWITCH 8 ON A15
SW2 INTERRUPT REQUEST LEVEL SHUNT 1 THRU SHUNT 8 ARE USED TO SELECT ONE IN-
TERRUPT REQUEST LEVEL OR NONE. A CLOSED SHUNT
MEANS THAT THIS LEVEL IS SELECTED, ALL OTHER
SHUNTS MUST BE OPEN.
SHUNT 1 OPEN IRQ1

SHUNT 2 OPEN IRQ2
SHUNT 3 OPEN IRQ3
SHUNT 4 OPEN IRQ4
SHUNT 5 OPEN IRQ5
SHUNT 6 OPEN IRQ6
SHUNT 7 OPEN IRQ7
SHUNT 8 CLOSED NONE
SW3 INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVEL SWITCH 1 THRU SWITCH 3 SHOULD BE SET TO THE SAME
BINARY VALUE AS THE SELECTED INTERRUPT REQUEST
LEVEL. FOR THE DIO BOARD, THIS VALUE IS ZERO.
SWITCH 1 ON LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT

SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 3 ON MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT
SWITCH 4 ON

SW4 INTERRUPT VECTOR WORD SWITCH 1 THRU SWITCH 8 ARE USED TO SET A WORD
THAT DISTINGUISHES THE DIO BOARD FROM OTHER
BOARDS AT THE SAME IRQ LEVEL ON SIMULTANEOUS
INTERRUPT REQUESTS.
SWITCH 1 ON D00
SWITCH 2 ON D01
SWITCH 3 ON D02
SWITCH 4 ON D03
SWITCH 5 ON D04
SWITCH 6 ON D05
SWITCH 7 ON D06
SWITCH 8 ON D07
SW5 WATCH DOG ENABLE SHUNT 1–2 AND SHUNT 2–3 ARE USED TO SELECT
SOURCE OF RESET FOR THE DIO OUTPUT LATCHES.
SHUNT 1–2=OPEN WATCHDOG COUNTER AND VME-RESET

SHUNT 2–3=CLOSED VME-RESET
Table 7-6: DIO #2, switches and jumpers for the GCU

THE BASE ADDRESS FOR THE DIO BOARD.
OFF = LOGIC 1, ON = LOGIC 0.
SWITCH 1 ON
SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 3 OFF A10
SWITCH 4 ON A11
SWITCH 5 ON A12
SWITCH 6 ON A13
SWITCH 7 ON A14
SWITCH 8 ON A15
MEANS THAT THIS LEVEL IS SE-LECTED, ALL OTHER
SHUNT 1 OPEN IRQ1

SHUNT 2 OPEN IRQ2
SHUNT 3 OPEN IRQ3
SHUNT 4 OPEN IRQ4
SHUNT 5 OPEN IRQ5
SHUNT 6 OPEN IRQ6
SHUNT 7 OPEN IRQ7
SHUNT 8 CLOSED NONE

LEVEL. FOR THE DIO BOARD, THIS VALUE IS ZERO.

SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 4 ON
THAT DISTINGUISHES THE DIO BOARD FROM OTHER
INTERRUPT REQUESTS.
SWITCH 1 ON D00
SWITCH 2 ON D01
SWITCH 3 ON D02
SWITCH 4 ON D03
SWITCH 5 ON D04
SWITCH 6 ON D05
SWITCH 7 ON D06
SWITCH 8 ON D07
SW5 WATCH DOG ENABLE SHUNT 1–2 AND SHUNT 2–3 ARE USED TO SELECT
SOURCE OF RESET FOR THE DIO OUTPUT LATCHES.
SHUNT 1–2=OPEN WATCHDOG COUNTER AND VME-RESET

SHUNT 2–3=CLOSED VME-RESET
7-2-6-2 Theory of operation

The DIO board is an 80-channel 24-volt level, VME bus compatible slave I/O-module. 48 of
the channels are arranged to form 6 byte-wide output ports. 32 channels are configured as
4 byte-wide input ports.
All input and output ports are galvanically isolated (optoisolated) from the VME bus.
All +5 Volt supplies are connected via the P1 connector and all +24 Volt supplies are connected
via the P2 connector. Every byte-wide output or input port may have their own +24 Volt supply
and can thus be galvanically isolated from each other.

7-2-7 Analog In board

The Analog In board (AI) reads the following signals from the cyclotron unit:
• Gas pressures
• Vacuum level
• Ion source voltage and current
• Motor positions
• Beam extraction
• Liquid Target Fillers
• Motor supply current of the DCM board
• Ion beam amplified current of the BCA board
• Phase load
The Analog In board is marked AI.
7-2-7-1 Specifications
Table 7-7: Analog board specifications
Analog Inputs
Number of input channels 32
Type of inputs Differential
Input voltage range ±10 V
Input impedance 1 MΩ
VME bus interface
Power requirements
+5 V Supply (VCC) Voltage 4.75–5.25 V
Max current 1 A

Figure 7-15: The Analog Input board
7-2-7-2 Jumper and switch positions

The AI board contains three switch banks and one jumper group.
The correct positions for use in the GCU are listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8: AI board, switches and jumpers for GCU
SW1 BASE ADDRESS SWITCH 1 THRU SWITCH 8 ARE USED TO DETERMINE THE BASE ADDRESS FOR THE
AI BOARD.
OFF= LOGIC 1, ON = LOGIC 0.
SWITCH 1 ON
SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 3 OFF A10
SWITCH 4 OFF A11
SWITCH 5 ON A12
SWITCH 6 ON A13
SWITCH 7 ON A14
SWITCH 8 ON A15

SW2 INTERRUPT REQUEST SHUNT 1 THRU SHUNT 8 ARE USED TO SELECT ONE INTERRUPT REQUEST LEVEL
LEVEL OR NONE. A CLOSED SHUNT MEANS THAT THIS LEVEL IS SELECTED, ALL OTHER
SHUNT 1 OPEN IRQ1

SHUNT 2 OPEN IRQ2
SHUNT 3 OPEN IRQ3
SHUNT 4 OPEN IRQ4
SHUNT 5 OPEN IRQ5
SHUNT 6 OPEN IRQ6
SHUNT 7 OPEN IRQ7
SHUNT 8 CLOSED NONE
SW3 INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEV- SWITCH 1 THRU SWITCH 3 SHOULD BE SET TO THE SAME BINARY VALUE AS THE
EL SELECTED INTERRUPT REQUEST LEVEL. FOR THE AI BOARD, THIS VALUE IS ZERO.

SWITCH 3 ON
SWITCH 4 ON
SW4 INTERRUPT VECTOR SWITCH 1 THRU SWITCH 8 ARE USED TO SET A WORD THAT DISTINGUISHES THE
WORD AI BOARD FROM OTHER BOARDS AT THE SAME IRQ LEVEL ON SIMULTANEOUS IN-
TERRUPT REQUESTS.
SWITCH 1 ON D00
SWITCH 2 ON D01
SWITCH 3 ON D02
SWITCH 4 ON D03
SWITCH 5 ON D04
SWITCH 6 ON D05
SWITCH 7 ON D06
SWITCH 8 ON D07

The Analog Input board is a VME bus compatible slave I/O module with 32 differential input
channels. The analog inputs are optoisolated from the VME bus. The input voltage range for
all channels are ±10 Volts. All inputs are protected against EMI with RC filters and diodes. To
select 1 of the 32 differential inputs four multiplexers (IC101,102,108,109) are used.
A differential amplifier (IC111) provides a single ended output to the A/D-converter (ADC, IC
112). The ADC is a standard 574-type with 12-bit resolution. The ADC has a +10 Volt reference
signal inside.
The ADC output is connected to the VME bus interface via three quad optocouplers.

A DC/DC converter (IC118) uses the +5 Volt supplied from the VME bus via the P1 connector
to produce +15 Volts and -15 Volts. Via a voltage regulator (IC119), +5 Volt is then derived
from the +15 Volt output of IC 118.
There is also an opto isolated “POWER OK” signal to the VME bus interface which senses if
the +15 Volt or -15 Volt on the board falls below +10 Volt or -10 Volt respectively
7-2-8 Analog Out board

The Analog Out board (AO) sets the Dee voltage, flap and extraction motor speed, ion source
gas flow and the Ion Source Power Supply Current in the cyclotron. The Analog Out board is
marked AO.
Table 7-9: Analog Out board specifications
Analog Outputs
Number of outputs 8
Type of output Single ended
Output voltage range ±10 V
Output impedance 200 Ω
Max output current 10 mA
+10 Volts outputs
Number of outputs 2
-10 Volts outputs
Number of outputs 2

VME bus interface
Power requirements
+5 V supply (VCC) Voltage 4.75–5.25 V
Max current 1 A
Figure 7-16: The Analog Output board

7-2-8-2 Jumper and switch positions

The AO board contains three switch banks and two jumper groups.
The correct positions for use in the GCU are listed in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10: AO board, switches and jumpers for GCU

THE BASE ADDRESS FOR THE AI BOARD.
OFF= LOGIC 1, ON = LOGIC 0.
SWITCH 1 ON
SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 3 OFF A10
SWITCH 4 ON A11
SWITCH 5 OFF A12
SWITCH 6 ON A13
SWITCH 7 ON A14
SWITCH 8 ON A15
MEANS THAT THIS LEVEL IS SELECTED, ALL OTHER
SHUNT 1 OPEN IRQ1

SHUNT 2 OPEN IRQ2
SHUNT 3 OPEN IRQ3
SHUNT 4 OPEN IRQ4
SHUNT 5 OPEN IRQ5
SHUNT 6 OPEN IRQ6
SHUNT 7 OPEN IRQ7
SHUNT 8 CLOSED NONE
LEVEL. FOR THE AI BOARD, THIS VALUE IS ZERO.

SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 4 ON

THAT DISTINGUISHES THE AI BOARD FROM OTHER
INTERRUPT REQUESTS.
SWITCH 1 ON D00
SWITCH 2 ON D01
SWITCH 3 ON D02
SWITCH 4 ON D03
SWITCH 5 ON D04
SWITCH 6 ON D05
SWITCH 7 ON D06
SWITCH 8 ON D07
J101 SHUNT 1–2 AND SHUNT 2–3 ARE USED TO SET THE AO
BOARD OUTPUT VOLTAGE. A VOLTAGE RANGE IS SELECT-
ED BY CLOSING THE CORRESPONDING SHUNT.
SHUNT 1–2 OPEN 0 TO 10V

SHUNT 2–3 CLOSED -10 TO +10 V

The Analog Output board is a VME bus compatible slave I/O module with 8 outputs. The analog
outputs from the D/A-converters (IC 110, 114) are optoisolated from the VME bus.
The output voltage range for all analog outputs is strappable for ±10 Volts or 0 to +10 Volts.
The output impedances are 200 Ω and the outputs should be loaded with about 1 MΩ to give
full output with 12 bit accuracy. There are also two buffered +10 Volt outputs and two –10 Volt
outputs. All outputs are protected against EMI with RC filters and diodes.
A DC/DC converter (IC115) uses the +5 Volt supplied from the VME bus via the P1 connector
to produce +15 Volts and -15 Volts. Via a voltage regulator (IC118), +5 Volt is then derived
from the +15 Volt output of IC 115.
There is also an opto isolated POWER OK signal to the VME bus interface which indicates if
the +15 Volt or -15 Volt voltages on the board fall below +10 V or -10 V respectively.

7-2-9 Beam Current Analyzer board

The Beam Current Analyzer board (BCA) measures the Ion Beam Current at different positions
in the cyclotron. The current is measured at the flip-in probe, the extraction foil revolver, the
collimators and the targets. The Beam Current Analyzer board is marked BCA.
Table 7-11: Beam current analyzer specifications
Beam Current Inputs
Number of inputs 32
Input current range ±200 µA
Input voltage drop at ±200 µA ±4 V
Channel Select Inputs
Number of inputs 5
Type of inputs Optoisolated 24 V
V C =24 V
V IL Max 6 V
V IH Min 21.5 V
I IL at V I =6 V Max -10 mA Typ -8 mA
I IH at V I =21.5 V Min -0.8 mA Typ -1 mA
Analog Outputs
Number of outputs 2
Output 1 voltage with ±20 µA input ±10 V
Output 2 voltage with ±200 µA input ±10 V
Accuracy ±1% ±0.01 µA
Impedance output 1 and 2 typ 200 W
POWER OK Output
Type of output Optoisolated open collector

VC Max 26.4 V
With POWER OK
V OL at I O =10 mA Max 3 V
Without POWER OK
I OH at V C =24 V Max 0.5 mA

Power requirements
+5 V supply
Voltage 4.5–5.5 V
Current Max 1.0 A
Figure 7-17: The beam current analyzer board


The Beam Current Analyzer is a current-to-voltage converter. The BCA includes 32 identical
current-to-voltage converters.
Each current-to-voltage converter uses one of four operational amplifiers contained in a quad
operational amplifier. All together eight quad operational amplifiers are used (IC 1-8).
All current inputs are protected against EMI with RC filters and diodes.
Two multiplexers (IC10, 11) select one of the 32 voltage converters for output. The output
from the multiplexers are amplified (IC 9). Output 1 gives ±10 V out for ±200 µA in and Output
2 gives ±10 V out for ±20 µA in. The outputs are read by a 12-bit ADC to achieve high accuracy
(±0.01 µA).
The five channel select inputs are optoisolated and use 24 V signals with negative logic.
A DC/DC converter (IC15) produces ±15 V from the single +5 V supply of the VME bus.
A voltage regulator (IC14) uses the +15 V to produce a stabilized +5 V supply.
There is also an opto isolated POWER OK signal with open collector output, which indicates
if the +15 V or -15 V voltages on the board fall below +10 V or -10 V respectively.
7-2-10 DC motor board

The DC servo board (DCM) controls the flap motors and the beam extraction motor in the
cyclotron. The DC servo board is marked DCM.
Table 7-12: DC servo board specifications
Number of inputs 2 analog and 4 digital
Number of outputs 9 analog and 1 digital
Number of DC motors
Possible to Drive Max 8
Input characteristics
Max input voltages ±10 V DC
Output characteristics
Driver type DC motor driver
Max output voltages ±12 V DC
Max output current ±800 mA (current limit)

Power requirements
Input supply voltages
Motor driver ±15 V DC ±5%
Logic +24 V DC ±10%
Input supply current
Motor driver ±15 V DC, Max 5 A
Logic +24 V DC, 40 mA
Temperature
Operating 0-65°C (32-149 F)
Storage -40°C to 85°C (-40 to 158 F)
Relative humidity R.H. 40-60%. No condensation allowed
Mechanical dimensions
Board depth 159.85 ± 0.15 mm= 6.223 ± 0.006 inch
Board height 233.20 ± 0.15 mm= 9.181 ± 0.006 inch
Depth with front panel and connectors 169.93 ± 0.4 mm= 6,690±0.015 inch
Front panel height 261.85 mm= 10.309 inch
Width 40.34 mm= 1.58 inch

Figure 7-18: The DC motor board

The DC motor board is an 8-channel DC motor driver. All inputs and outputs are galvanically
isolated (optoisolated) from the VME bus.
A supply of +24 V is provided by the VME bus via the P2 connector.
The DCM power supply provides the ±15 V voltages. A voltage regulator uses the +15 V to
produce a stabilized +5 V supply.
One analog and three digital signals are used to control the eight output voltages.
The “flying capacitor” technique is used, the eight flying capacitors must be updated once
per second.

The motor drive current can be read out as an analog signal (multiplexed).
There is also an open collector POWER OK signal to the VME bus interface which indicates if
the +15 V or -15 V voltages on the board fall below +10 V or -10 V respectively.
7-2-11 CI, Control Interface board

The CI board is an interface between the GCU and Safety Interlock signals. It also contains
an amplifier for controlling the Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC) current.
Figure 7-19: CI board

7-2-11-2 LED indicators on front panel, CI board
LED (when on) Description
RAD SH OK Radiation shield doors micro switch is closed, signal A.
IS MAINT The Ion source runs from the MSS. It is not allowed to run RF under
these circumstances.
MAGN D OK Magnet door µSW is closed, signal B
BEAM ALLOW Radiation shield doors are closed and its Ok to run beam.
RCAV W OK Water cooling is OK for RF cavities and its OK to run RF.
PSARC P ON Power is ON for PSARC.
7-2-12 Disassembly/reassembly
The purpose of this section is to detail the removal and reinstallation of the rack-mounted
circuit boards within the General Control Unit.
CAUTION!
Turn off power before connecting/disconnecting.
The GCU boards and externally connected devices can be damaged if the boards are
connected or disconnected with power on.
Always turn off the VME power supply and peripheral power supplies before connecting
or disconnecting the GCU boards at the backplane.
Use suitable devices for protection against electrostatic discharge (ESD).
7-2-12-1 Tools
One tool is required for the removal and re-installation of the rack-mounted circuit boards:
• Flat head screwdriver (3 mm)
7-2-12-2 Removal of circuit boards

1 Use the screwdriver to loosen the two retaining screws on the circuit board.
2 Press the upper handle upwards and the lower handle downwards until the board comes
loose from its connector.
3 Carefully pull the board out of the rack.

7-2-12-3 Installation of circuit boards

The steps below are just a general description on how to install circuit boards. For detailed
instructions on CPU board installation, see Section 7-2-5 CPU board on page 173.
The general installation procedure includes the following steps:
1 Check that jumpers and switches are correctly set for the board, refer to the previous
sections. For the CPU board, check that two PLCC flash memories are present on the
board.
2 Insert the board, with the component side facing to the right, into the upper and lower
guide rails.
3 Press the upper and lower handles simultaneously until the board is completely inserted.
Do not use excessive force. Difficulty in mounting may be due to misalignment between
the board and the guide rails.
4 Tighten the two retaining screws on the front panel of the board.
5 Perform operational check.
7-2-12-4 Operational check

1 Turn on power on the GCU
2 Press RESET on the CPU board
3 The software is loaded from Master to GCU
When loading software from the master, the CPU will automatically test communications
with the different boards.
4 RUN, SCON and STATUS LEDs should be lighted on the CPU board (STATUS LED only
faintly lighted).
5 ±15 V LEDs should be lighted on the AI-, AO-, BCA-, DCM-boards.
6 SELECT LEDs should be lighted on the DIO-, AI-, AO-boards.
7-2-13 Document references

—

7-3 GCU – type Gen II

The General Control Unit (GCU) monitors and controls the MINItrace accelerator and
peripherals.
This GCU type is designed around an ETX CPU module which communicates with other
modules via a PCI bus. It also has integrated Ethernet interface, PCI bus interface, and serial,
USB, and monitor ports which are accessible via connectors on the front and rear panels.
All electronics is mounted on a built-in I/O board and a connector board. There are no
replaceable circuit boards.
The GCU handles the following types of components and signals:
• Digital I/O
• Analog I/O
• DC motors
• Beam current analyzer
It is also equipped with ports for connecting external control and monitoring equipment, for
example the MINItrace Service System (MSS).
From the mains power inlet, an integrated power supply generates the basic power
requirements for the GCU. DC/DC converters on the I/O board generate the necessary internal
voltages.
The GCU is connected to the Master System via an Ethernet local area network. Any new GCS
software stored on the Master System will be downloaded to the GCU at start-up, or whenever
the GCU is reset.
Before disassembling the GCU, remove the mains power cable from the mains power
inlet at the rear of the GCU/external PS.
7-3-1 Description
The GCU is located in electronics cabinet CCAB. The GCU consists of a rack, front panel, I/O
board, connector board, power supply and an IEC320 power inlet filter with fuses.

7-3-1-1 GCU front panel

The GCU front panel contains LED indicators for control signals, reset buttons, and ports for
connecting external equipment. See Figure 7-20 and Table 7-13 and Table 7-14.
Figure 7-20: GCU front panel layout
Table 7-13: LED indicators on the GCU front panel
LED indicator Color Indication when lit (or flashing)
Power OK Green All internal voltages OK
24V Green 24 V DC from mains PS
-15V Green -15 V DC from mains PS
RAD SH OK Green Radiation shield doors closed (micro switch, signal A)
IS MAINT Green Ion source is run from the MSS. RF cannot be run under these condi-
tions.
MAGN D OK Green Magnet door is closed (magnet switch, signal B)
BEAM ALLOW Green Radiation shield doors are closed and it is OK to run beam
RCAV W OK Green Water cooling is OK for RF cavity
PSARC P ON Green Power for PSARC is ON
Eth Link Green Ethernet communication enabled
Eth Activity Green Communication through Ethernet interface (Flashing)
Error Yellow Application software failure
Init Ready Green Booting of GCU successfully completed

LED indicator Color Indication when lit (or flashing)
System Activity Green The application software on the IDE flash disc is accessed (Flashing)
System Boot Green Booting of the GCU in progress (Flashing)
Ground fault Yellow Ground fault detected
Note!
For information on error conditions indicated by LEDs, see Section 7-3-5 Troubleshooting on
page 221.
Table 7-14: Buttons on the GCU front panel
Button Function
Ground fault reset Resets the ground fault state LED indicator
System reset Reboots the GCU. The firmware will NOT be reset or implement-
ed.
CAUTION!
Before resetting a ground fault, investigate and correct the error causing the fault. (See
Section 7-3-5 Troubleshooting on page 221.)
Table 7-15: Connectors on the GCU front panel
Connector Connected to Connector type
MSS MSS/SERIAL A1 D-Sub, 9 pin, female
Console Serial port for CPU communica- D-Sub, 9 pin, female

tion
USB Standard USB device2 USB type A, 2 ports
Monitor Standard VGA monitor2 VGA, HD D-Sub, 15 pin, fe-

male
1 If the service laptop has no serial port, use the USB-to-RS232 adapter supplied.
2 For manufacturing purposes.

7-3-1-2 Service connectors

The connectors on the front panel are mainly used for service or manufacturing purposes.
The MSS connector on the front panel is used for connecting the MINItrace Service System
(MSS) to the GCS. A shielded, straight cable with 9-pole D-Sub connector should be used. If
the service laptop has no serial port, use the USB-to-RS232 adapter supplied.
There are service locations on the GCU and the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC). They are all
equipped with identical MSS connectors. It makes it possible to control the GCU from either
of these service locations. However, only one of the service locations can be used at the time
to connect a MSS to a specific unit.
Note!
It is not possible to communicate with the GCS from several service locations at the same time.
The CONSOLE connector can be used for direct communication with the GCU hardware, for
example by connecting a laptop and using a terminal communication software (terminal
emulation).
The two USB connectors for standard USB devices (for example a keyboard or mouse) and
the MONITOR connector are used for manufacturing purposes only.
7-3-1-3 GCU rear

The connector board at the rear of the GCU contains connectors for I/O signals and
communication, mains power inlet and test points.
Note!
The below figure shows a GCU with internal PS. For a GCU with external PS, the mains power
switch and fuses are located on the external PS.
Figure 7-21: GCU rear layout
The test points are used for measuring internal voltages as listed in Table 7-16. The test points
are short-circuit protected by 1 kΩ serial resistors.

Table 7-16: GCU rear test points
Test point Voltage
+24V +24 V to digital I/O and beam current analyzer
+15V +15 V to DC motor drivers
-15V -15 V to DC motor drivers
+5V +5 V to internal DC/DC converter, ETX and FPGA modules
Gnd Ground (+5 V)
Gnd_IO Ground I/O (+24 V, +15 V, -15 V)
Note!
For information on voltage tolerances, see Section 7-3-5 Troubleshooting on page 221.
Table 7-17 lists the GCU rear panel connectors with cable connection points.
Table 7-17: GCU rear connectors
P1 External PS in CCAB
(only on GCU with
external PS)
P3 CSC/MSS
P4 PSMC/RS232 (MPS 883)

PSMC/REMOTE LINE (MPS 9700)
P5 TSC/H2 15O/P2 (option)
P7 TSC/11C /P1 (RS485, option)
P8 Not used (RS485)
P9 RFPG/SKG
P10 RFPG/SKH
P11 PSARC/J1
P12 MDC/PSARC
P13 CSC/P7
P14 CSC/P2
P15 CSC/P3

P16 PSMC/USER INTERLOCKS (MPS 883)

PSMC/EXTERNAL INTERLOCKS (MPS 9700)
P17 CSC/P5
P18 CSC/P8
P19 TSC/P1
P20 TSC/P2
P21 TSC/H2 15O/P1 (option)
P22 Not used
P24 Target switching connector (option)
P25 Ethernet switch (inside cabinet)
J8 MSB/TS
(only on GCU with in- J8 is the mains power switch. Contains fuses.
ternal PS)
All connectors are D-Sub connectors of different types, except P1 (Molex) and P25 (RJ-45).
For pin configuration, see Section 7-3-8 Interconnect data on page 234.
7-3-1-4 Rating labels
Old GCU with internal PS: New GCU with external PS:
The rating label is located at the rear of the The rating label is located on the external PS
GCU. plate.

7-3-1-5 GCU control system

The control of the GCU is mainly handled by three components on the I/O board inside the
GCU:
• Embedded Technology Extended (ETX) processor module
• Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) module
• Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD) module
The control system is designed around the ETX CPU module. Besides the main processor it
also has integrated Ethernet interface, PCI bus interface, and serial, USB, and monitor ports.
These interfaces and ports are accessible via connectors on the front and rear panels. The
ETX module communicates with other modules on the I/O board via a PCI bus.
The FPGA contains a major part of the system specific logic functions, for example motor
control logics, digital I/O and analog I/O. These functions are used to control and monitor the
accelerator subsystems via connectors on the rear panel. The subsequent sections provide
more information on the I/O functions.
The CPLD is used to control the reset and boot sequences of the GCU.
Note!
The below figure shows a GCU with internal PS. For a GCU with external PS, the mains power
switch and fuses are located on the external PS.
Figure 7-22: GCU electronics, block scheme
Note!
Voltage supply shown with thicker lines.

7-3-1-6 Digital Input and Output

The Digital Input and Output modules control all digital input and output signals in the
MINItrace cyclotron, for example interlocks, and opening and closing valves.
7-3-1-7 Analog Input and Output

The Analog Input module reads the following signals from the accelerator:
• Gas pressures
• Vacuum level
• Ion source voltage and current
• Motor supply current
• Ion beam amplified current
• Phase load
• Motor positions:
- Beam extraction
The Analog Out module sets the Dee voltage, extraction motor speed and the Ion Source
Power Supply Current in the accelerator.
7-3-1-8 DC motor driver

The DC motor driver module controls the beam extraction motor in the accelerator.
7-3-1-9 Beam Current Analyzer

The Beam Current Analyzer module measures the ion beam current at different positions in
the accelerator. The current is measured at the flip-in probe, the extraction foils, the collimators
and the targets.
7-3-1-10 Power supply

The GCU power supply can be fed by 100–240 V AC, 50–60 Hz (autorange), 340 W. See the
rating label in Section 7-3-1-4 Rating labels on page 207. New GCU models have an external
PS, older GCUs have the PS inside the unit. The GCU should be connected to the GCU circuit
breaker inside CCAB.
The switched power supply provides 24 V DC, ±15 V DC and 5 V DC for the GCU. DC/DC
converters inside the GCU provide the other necessary internal voltages; 1.2, 2.5, 3.3 and
isolated 5 V DC. See Figure 7-22.
The IEC 320 input connector is connected to mains voltage.

7-3-2 Operation
7-3-2-1 System startup, reset and booting
Starting the system

Start the GCU by turning on the power using the mains switch on the:
• Power Supply (PS) (for a GCU with external PS), or
• rear panel of the GCU (for an GCU with internal PS).
The GCU hardware is initialized by the local BIOS before the boot process is started. The GCU
operating system, located on the IDE flash disc, is then loaded into the memory by the BIOS.
The operating system checks for any program updates on the Master System before starting
the application program, which sets the GCU in its operational default state.
Resetting the system

The GCU can be reset in either of the following ways:
• Cycle the mains power to the GCU.
Resets and boots the GCU completely. Also implements any new application software
or firmware for the GCU. Also called cold reset.
• Press the System Reset button on the front panel.
Reset of the application software. The firmware will not be reset; any new firmware will
not be implemented. Also called warm reset.
• Automatic reset by the software.
Occurs at some pre-defined error conditions detected by the control unit. Same type of
reset as when pressing the System Reset button.
LED indicator sequence during reset and boot process

During a cold reset (power off–on), the LED indicators on the front panel will be lit in the
following order:
1 The 24V, +15V, -15V and 5V LEDs are lit if the power supply delivers power at these
voltages. The actual voltages are not necessarily within specifications.
2 The System Boot LED is lit during loading of the FPGA firmware.
3 The Power OK LED is lit when the ETX module has booted and all system voltages are
within the specifications.
4 The Init Ready LED is lit when the system has completed all initialization procedures.
The system is now in its operational default state.

7-3-2-2 Configuration of the GCU

In a new MINItrace system, the GCU software has a default setup of the system configuration
file and IP-addresses (the GCU address and the Master System address). This setup makes it
possible to start the GCU and connect it to the Master System or the MINItrace Service System.
However, the configuration file and/or the IP-addresses might have to be changed to comply
with the local setup of the MINItrace system and connection to the central site network.
Changing the configuration file

When, for example adding components to the accelerator, the configuration file should be
changed from the Master System or the MSS. For information on changing the configuration,
see this manual or MINItrace Service Manual – Master System (dir. 2232999-100)/MINItrace Qilin
Master System – PC Lynx – Software Manual (dir. 5324838-100).
CAUTION!
Do not change a parameter value unless the consequences are fully understood.
Backing up the configuration file

Before replacing a GCU or upgrading the GCU software, the currently used configuration file
should be saved to the MSS because this file will be replaced by a default version. By reinstalling
the “old” file from the MSS to the GCU after the replacement/upgrade, it is possible to retain
any customization made of the system configuration. See also Section 7-3-2-4 Upgrading
GCU software on page 213.
Changing IP addresses
The default IP addresses in a new GCU are:
Master System 192.0.4.30
GCS 192.0.4.40
Note!
The default netmask is 255.255.255.0.
These are normally used when the Master System is not connected to a local network.
However, when connected to a local network with other addresses, the default addresses
are not applicable and have to be replaced.
Note!
The IP addresses of the Master System and GCU must be in the same sub-net.
To change the IP addresses:
1 Connect the laptop to the CONSOLE port using a male, straight, 9-pole, D-Sub serial
cable.
2 Start Microsoft™ Windows™.
3 Start a terminal communication software (terminal emulation) in Windows.

4 A terminal software is a program in Windows for communicating with other devices over
the serial port of your computer. By running a terminal you can communicate directly
with the CPU in the GCU. When you start the terminal application for the first time, you
will be asked to set the communication parameters.
Set the communication as follows:
Connector: COM1 or COM2
Baud rate: 9600
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Parity: None
Flow Control: None
5 Press Enter until the log-in prompt appears and log in as follows:
Debian GNU/Linux 3.1 gcs ttyS1
gcs login: service

Password: service
The following is shown:
Type “show_voltages” to view the voltages.

Type “show_ip“ to view the stored addresses.
Type “set_ip” to change the addresses.
Type “help” to show this text.
#
Example: When typing show_ip to a new GCU, the following is shown:
Master IP address: 192.0.4.30

gcs IP address: 192.0.4.40

6 Change the IP addresses as follows:
Type set_ip
To interrupt this procedure press Ctrl-C.
Set Master IP address (y/n)?y

Enter Master IP address (192.0.4.130): 175.2.3.10
Set gcs IP address (y/n)?y
Enter gcs IP address (192.0.4.40): 175.2.3.20
#
Note!
The new addresses used above are only examples.
The GCU can now connect to the Master System when reset, and check for new software.
7-3-2-3 System shutdown
Note!
To maintain maximum long-term performance of the accelerator, shut down the system in a
controlled way from the Master System.
If the mains power to the GCU needs to be turned off, we recommend shutting down the
accelerator in a controlled way from the Master System. If not, the accelerator subsystems
might be exposed to unnecessary wear.
To shut down the MINItrace system from the Master System, see MINItrace Qilin Operator
Guide (dir. 2232995).
When the system is shut down, the GCU can be turned off at the Mains Switch (located on
the PS for a GCU with external PS, or on the GCU for a GCU with internal PS). All GCU outputs
will then automatically be deactivated.
7-3-2-4 Upgrading GCU software

A new GCU software version is issued, for example when the application file for the GCU has
been changed.
The new GCU software is a part of the complete MINItrace application software, which is
distributed on a CD included in the software upgrade kit. The software upgrade is made on
the Master System.
During an GCU software upgrade, the GCU configuration file with the parameters settings
might be over-written by a default version. Therefore, the GCU configuration should be backed
up before the upgrade to facilitate reinstalling the old configuration after the upgrade.
However, if it is obvious in the release note supplied that the configuration file in the GCU will
not be affected, it is normally not necessary to back up and reinstall the configuration.

Note!
In general, the GCU configuration should be backed up:
• whenever the configuration has been changed
• before replacing the GCU (if it is working)
Procedure for upgrading the software:
1 Back up the current GCU configuration.
2 Upgrade the software.
3 Reinstall the GCU configuration.
The procedure details depend on the software version on the service laptop:
• MINItrace Service System ver. 2.0 (released 2014), or
• MINItrace Service System (pre 2014)
The procedures are described in the sections below.
Backing up the GCU system configuration file

1 Connect the laptop to the MSS port on the GCU or CSC.
Note!
If the laptop has no serial port(s), use the USB-to-RS232 adapter(s) supplied.
MINItrace Service System ver. 2.0 procedure (released 2014)
To save the current GCS and target configuration to an XML-file:
1 Start MSS.
2 In the Tasks bar, click Configuration.
3 Click Export.
4 In the dialog, type a suitable time stamp after Configuration for easy identification.
5 Click Save.
The file can viewed by clicking the file name.
MINItrace Service System procedure (pre 2014)
To save the configuration file on the MSS laptop:
2 Start the MSS application on the laptop.
3 Click Config Parameters from the Main menu.

4 Type the password GEMGEM.
5 On CONFIG PARAMETERS accelerator page 1:
a Click Get from GCS. Values are shown.
b Click Save to file.
c Click Next page.
6 On CONFIG PARAMETERS page 2:
a Type target pos 1.
b Click Config.
7 On CONFIG PARAMETERS page:
a Click Get from GCS. Values are shown.
b Click Save to file.
c Click Previous page.
8 Repeat step 6 to 7 for each target position 2–6.
9 Click MAIN MENU. The Main menu page is opened.
10 Click Exit.
The configuration file is now saved on the MSS as GEM_CONF.DAT in the folder
C:\MINItrace\MSS.
To create a backup of GEM_CONF.DAT:
1 Locate GEM_CONF.DAT in the folder C:\MINItrace\MSS.
2 Use Copy/Paste to create a copy of the file.
To view and print GEM_CONF.DAT:
1 Double-click the file getconf located in C:\MINItrace\MSS to create a text file of

GEM_CONF.DAT.
2 The configuration file MSSCONF.TXT can now be viewed and printed.
Upgrading the software

To install the software upgrade, follow the instructions in MINItrace Service Manual – Master
System (dir. 2232999-100) or MINItrace Qilin Master System – PC Lynx – Software Manual
(dir. 5324838-100), whichever is applicable.
After the installation, cycle mains power on the GCU to boot the GCU.
During the boot procedure the new software on the Master System will be loaded to the GCU.
The release note supplied should tell if the configuration file has been replaced.

Reinstalling the old configuration file

Note!
If the laptop has no serial port(s), use the USB-to-RS232 adapter(s) supplied.
MINItrace Service System 2.0 procedure (released 2014)
To import the GCS and target configuration from an XML-file:
1 Start MSS.
2 In the Tasks bar, click Configuration.
3 Click Import.
4 Select the desired Configuration file.
5 Click Open.
6 Click Yes in the dialog.
The configuration parameters is now implemented in the GCS.
MINItrace Service System procedure (pre 2014)
The old configuration file saved on the MSS laptop reflects the actual system setup, such as
installed components, parameter settings, etc.
To reinstall the old configuration file:
1 Start the MSS application on the laptop.
2 Click Config parameters from the Main menu.
3 Type the password GEMGEM.
4 On CONFIG PARAMETERS accelerator page 1:
a Click Get from file. Values are shown.
b Click Save to GCS.
c Click NEXT PAGE.
5 On CONFIG PARAMETERS page 2:
a Type target pos 1.
b Click Config.

6 On CONFIG PARAMETERS page:
a Click Get from file. Values are shown.
b Click Save to GCS.
c Click Previous page.
7 Repeat step 5 to 6 for each target position 2–6.
8 Click MAIN MENU. The Main menu page is opend.
9 Click Exit.
The configuration file is now reinstalled on the GCS.
7-3-3 Specifications
For pin configuration, see Section 7-3-8 Interconnect data on page 234.
Table 7-18: Operating data
Digital I/O
Optoisolated Inputs
Type of inputs Optoisolated 24 V negative logic
VC (+24 V) 24 V ±10%
Optoisolated Outputs
Number of output channels 96
Type of outputs Open collector
VC (+24 V) 24 V ±10%
Minimum output sink current per channel 350 mA

Analog I/O
Analog Inputs
Type of inputs Differential
Input voltage range ±10 V
Input impedance 1 MΩ
Analog Outputs
Number of outputs 8
Output voltage range ±10 V
DC motor driver
Number of DC motors
Possible to drive Maximum 5
Output characteristics
Driver type DC motor driver
Max output voltages ±15 V DC
Max output current 1 A (current limit)
Beam current analyzer
Number of inputs 16
Input current range ±500 µA

Table 7-19: Physical data
Power requirements
Voltage 100–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz (autorange)
Power Maximum 400 VA
Fuses 2 × T4AH 250V
Dimensions
W×H×D 480 × 180 ×230 mm
Weight 7.5 kg
Environment
Humidity 30–60% (non-condensing)
Ambient temperature
Control system room 18–25°C

Table 7-20: Regulatory compliance
Directives This product is marked with the CE symbol in accordance with the
following directives:
• EMCD 2014/30/EU concerning electromagnetic compatibility.
• LVD 2014/35/EU concerning low voltage devices.
The CE marking is valid for the product only when:

• the equipment is connected as described in the user documen-
tation, and
• used in the same state as it was delivered from GE Healthcare

(except for alterations described in the user documentation).
This product is marked with the GOST (Russia only) and EAC sym-
bols.
The product meets all applicable requirements and technical reg-
ulations in the Customs Union member countries (Russia, Belarus,
Kazakhstan, Armenia, and Kyrgyzstan).
Safety standards EN 61010-1 ed. 3:2010, concerning safety requirements for electri-
cal equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use.
• Pollution degree: 2
• Installation category: 2
EMC standards EN 61326-1:2013 concerning electromagnetic emission and immu-

nity.
Electromagnetic emission compliance:
• Class A
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
This product is not suitable for use in domestic establishments

or those directly connected to a low voltage power supply
network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
• Group 1
This product uses RF (radio frequency) energy only for its in-
ternal function.
7-3-4 Planned maintenance
WARNING! Hazardous voltages
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not remove covers. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel.

7-3-4-1 Cleaning
When necessary, wipe the panel using a cloth moistened with mild detergent.
7-3-4-2 Checking voltages

At planned maintenance, the GCU voltages should be checked by measuring on the test
points using a calibrated voltmeter. These are the four voltages generated by the mains PS
inside the GCU.
Required tools:
• Standard hand tool kit
• Digital voltmeter, 10 MΩ, calibrated
To measure the voltages:
1 Open the rear door on CCAB using the cabinet door tool.
2 Measure the voltages on the test points at the rear of the GCU (see Table 7-21).
3 Check that they are within the specifications. If not, contact Online Center.
Table 7-21: Control unit voltages
Test points Expected value [V] Measured value
24V GND_IO +24 ± 1.2
+15V GND_IO +15 ± 0.75
-15V GND_IO -15 ± 0.75
+5V GND +5 ± 0.25
GND_IO CHASSIS 0±5
7-3-5 Troubleshooting
This section describes troubleshooting of the GCU based on error messages, LED indicator
status and other measurements.
7-3-5-1 Error messages

Diagnostics information based on error messages shown on the Master System screen is
found in Chapter 5 Diagnostics and troubleshooting.

7-3-5-2 LED indicators

Table 7-22 lists conditions which are indicated by the LED indicator status.
Table 7-22: Conditions indicated by the LEDs
LED indica- OK status indication Error/interlock/other status indication

tor
Power OK ON All internal voltages OK OFF One or several of the internal

voltages are not OK
24V ON +24 V from mains PS OK OFF No +24 V from mains PS
-15V ON -15 V from mains PS OK OFF No -15 V from mains PS
RAD SH OK ON Radiation shield doors closed OFF Radiation shield doors not closed
(micro switch, signal A)
IS MAINT OFF Ion source is not run from the ON Ion source is run from the MSS.
MSS RF cannot be run then.
MAGN D OK ON Magnet door is closed (magnet OFF Magnet door not closed
switch, signal B)
BEAM ALLOW ON Radiation shield doors are closed OFF Radiation shield doors are not
and it is OK to run beam closed and/or beam cannot be
run
RCAV W OK ON Water cooling is OK for RF cavity OFF Water cooling not OK for RF
and it is OK to run RF cavity
PSARC P ON ON Power for PSARC is turned on OFF Power for PSARC is turned off
Eth Link ON Ethernet communication en- OFF Ethernet communication dis-

abled abled
Eth Activity FLASHING Communication through Ether- OFF No communication through Eth-
net interface (LAN). ernet interface (LAN).
Error OFF Application software OK ON Application software failure
Init Ready ON System initialization completed OFF System initialization not complet-
ed
System Activi- FLASHING Accessing the application soft- OFF No communication with the IDE
ty ware located on the IDE flash flash disc
disc

LED indica- OK status indication Error/interlock/other status indication

tor
System Boot FLASHING The GCU boots up (a few flashes OFF GCU does not boot if no flashes
during the booting process) during the booting process
Ground fault OFF No ground fault is detected ON Ground fault detected and not
reset
If all LEDs are off, check the fuses at the mains inlet of the GCU. See Section 7-3-6
Disassembly/reassembly on page 226 for instructions.
7-3-5-3 Ground fault detection

The GCU continuously checks the voltage potentials between the grounds for analog input
and chassis, and for digital I/O and chassis.
If the potential difference exceeds the accepted value, the error handler in the GCU:
• turns off the RF
• turns on the Ground fault LED (will be lit until the Ground fault reset button is pressed)
• generates an error to the software
Possible cause: Short circuit to chassis (temporary or permanent), for example

in 24 V-driven parts (flip-in probe, other sensors, etc).
Corrective action: Press the Ground fault reset button on the front panel. If the RF
still is turned off and the Ground fault LED turned on, the error
is permanent and needs more investigation. Check the voltages.
7-3-5-4 Checking voltages using a terminal

If the Power OK indicator is off, one or several of the voltages in the GCU do not meet the
specification. All voltages in the GCU can be measured using a terminal. By issuing a software
command to the GCU, the terminal automatically shows the current values of the GCU voltages.
Note!
This is not a calibrated measurement device but gives valuable information for trouble-shooting
the GCU.

To show the GCU voltages on a terminal:
1 Connect a laptop to the CONSOLE port on the GCU.
2 Start a terminal communication software (terminal emulation) in Windows. Set the

communication as follows:
Connector: COM1 or COM2
Baud rate: 9600
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Parity: None
Flow Control: None
3 Press Enter until the log-in prompt appears and log in as follows:
Debian GNU/Linux 3.1 gcs ttyS1
gcs login: service

Password: service
Type “show_voltages” to view the voltages.

Type “show_ip“ to view the stored addresses.
Type “set_ip” to change the addresses.
Type “help” to show this text.
#
4 Type show_voltages and press Enter. A list of the voltages will be shown on the screen.
See also Table 7-23.
5 Check that they are within the specifications. If not, call Online Center.

Table 7-23: Logical names of voltages
Logical name Voltage designation Expected value Displayed value

[V]
V+5V_BCA +5 V, BCA Input +5 ±0.5
V+15V_BCA +15 V, BCA Input +15 ±1.5
V-15V_BCA -15 V, BCA Input -15 ±1.5
V_BAT Not used —
V+3.3V +3.3 V, system input +3.3 ±0.33
V+2.5V +2.5 V, system input +2.5 ±0.25
V+1.2V +1.2 V, system input +1.2 ±0.12
V+5V +5 V, system input +5 ±0.5
V+15V_CI +15 V, I/O board input, Control Inter- +15 ±1.5

face
V+15V_DCM +15 V, I/O board, DC Motor +15 ±1.5
V+24V_IO +24 V, I/O board input +24 ±2.4
V+5V_STEPPER +5 V, I/O board input, Stepper Mo- +5 ±0.5

tor1
V+5V_DCM +5V, I/O board, DC Motor +5 ±0.5
V-15V_DCM -15 V, I/O board, DC Motor -15 ±1.5
V-15V_CI -15 V, I/O board input, Control Inter- -15 ±1.5

face
1 Not used in General Control Units.
7-3-5-5 Software versions

There are several software components in the GCU, each one containing version information.
• The version information of the application file gcsd is shown in the MSS. The application
has a major and minor version number. See also Section7-3-2-4 Upgrading GCU software
on page 213.
• The version information of the firmware is checked by the application at start. The
firmware has a major and minor version number.

7-3-6 Disassembly/reassembly
The purpose of this section is to detail the removal and reinstallation of the fuses and of a
complete GCU.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not remove covers. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel.
Lock-out and tag-out the control cabinet circuit breaker at the MDP, before any service
is performed on the GCU.
CAUTION!
Shut down the system from the Master System before turning off the power to the GCU.
CAUTION!
Turn off the power to the GCU before disconnecting/connecting.
The GCU can be damaged if cables are connected or disconnected with power on.
Note!
7-3-6-1 Spare parts

For spare parts, see Section 7-3-7 Spare parts on page 234.
7-3-6-2 Tools
• General FE service tools

7-3-6-3 Shutting down power to the GCU and PS

Before any maintenance on the GCU or PS, shut down the power to the GCU as follows:
1 Shut down the cyclotron from the Master System.
2 Press OFF on the VCU control panel located on the cyclotron. Wait 30 minutes to allow
the vacuum system to cool.
3 Open the rear door on CCAB using the cabinet door tool.
4 Turn off the mains switch (1 or 5 in Figure 7-23).
5 Turn off the GCU circuit breaker (3) by pressing it downwards.
6 Disconnect the IEC 320 mains cable from the mains power inlet (2 or 6).
7 For a GCU with external PS: Disconnect the DC cable (4) from the rear of the GCU.
Figure 7-23: GCU and PS power
1
1
0
4
5
Description Location
1 Mains switch On GCU with internal PS
2 Mains power inlet On GCU with internal PS
3 GCU circuit breaker MSB panel in CCAB
4 Connector for DC cable On GCU with external PS
5 Mains switch On external PS
6 Mains power inlet On external PS

7-3-6-4 Replacing fuses
CAUTION!
Call service if the new fuses blow immediately when turning on the system.
There are two fuses located at the mains power inlet. The mains power inlet is placed on the
GCU or external PS, see Figure 7-23.
To replace the fuses:
1 Shut down the GCU. See Section 7-3-6-3 Shutting down power to the GCU and PS on
page 227.
2 Loosen the fuse holder using a flat tip screwdriver.
Note!
The below figure shows a GCU with internal PS, where the fuses are found on the GCU.
For a GCU with external PS, the fuses are located on the external PS.
Figure 7-24: Removing fuses from the GCU
3 Replace the old fuses with new ones (rating T4AH 250 V).
4 Insert the fuse holder.
5 Turn on the power as described in Section 7-3-6-7 Turning on the power to the GCU and
PS on page 233.
6 Close and lock the rear door on CCAB using the hex wrench.

7-3-6-5 Replacing the GCU

This section describes how to replace GCU Gen II and installing the software.
• For instructions on upgrading from GCU Gen I to Gen II, refer to Customer Information
DOC0759837CI.
• For instructions on rebuilding a GCU Gen II with internal PS into a GCU with external PS,
refer to DOC1719487.
Note!
Note!
Before removing the old GCU, back up the configuration file in the GCU. The new GCU only
contains a default version of the configuration file. By transferring the old file to the new GCU,
the file does not have to be changed again. For instructions, see Section 7-3-2-2 Configuration
of the GCU on page 211.

Removing the GCU

1 Shut down the GCU. See Section 7-3-6-3 Shutting down power to the GCU and PS on
page 227.
2 Remove all the cables at the rear of the GCU.
3 Remove the four retaining screws on the front panel of the GCU using a screw driver
(see Figure 7-25).
Figure 7-25: Remove the screws, remove the GCU
4 Pull out the GCU.
5 If the GCU has an external PS and if the PS is not working properly, remove the PS
according to the instructions in Section Removing an external PS on page 232.
Installing the GCU

1 Insert the GCU into the rack.
2 Fasten the GCU using the four retaining screws.
3 Fasten all connectors at the rear of the GCU.
Note!
Pay attention to the labels on the cables and the marking on the connector board at the
rear of the GCU!
4 Install a new external PS according to the instructions in Section Installing an external

PS on page 233), if:
• an old GCU model with internal PS has been removed, or
• the external PS not working properly.
PS on page 233.
6 Close and lock the rear door on CCAB using the cabinet door tool.

7-3-6-6 Replacing the Power Supply (PS)
Upgrading a GCU with internal PS
Note!
To upgrade a GCU with internal PS into a GCU with external PS:
1 Remove the old GCU (see Section Removing the GCU on page 230).
2 Install a new GCU (see Section Installing the GCU on page 230).
3 Install a new external PS (see Section Installing an external PS on page 233).

Figure 7-26:
1: External PS fitted on the side rails of the cabinet.
2: DC connector on GCU.
1 2
Removing an external PS
To remove an external PS:
1 Shut down the power to the GCU and PS, see Section 7-3-6-3 Shutting down power to
the GCU and PS on page 227.
2 Remove the four screws that fastens the PS to the cabinet stand:
• two M4 from the top rail, and
• two M6 from the bottom rail.
3 Remove the PS assembly.

Installing an external PS
Viewed from the back of the cabinet, install the PS on the left hand side of the cabinet, as
follows:
1 Mount the PS plate with two M5 screws to the top rail, positioned according to the figure
below.
2 Drill a 4.5 mm hole in the lower rail at the plate’s lower left cutout. Place a 2 mm washer
under the plate and fasten the PS to the lower rail with a M5 screw.
PS on page 233.
7-3-6-7 Turning on the power to the GCU and PS

1 Connect the IEC 320 mains cable to the mains power inlet (2 or 6 in Figure 7-23).
2 For a GCU with external PS: Connect the DC cable running from the PS to the Connector
for DC cable (4) on the GCU.
3 Turn on the GCU circuit breaker (3) by pressing it upwards.
4 Turn on the mains switch (1 or 5).
5 Close the rear door on CCAB using the cabinet door tool.
6 Check that the GCU is working properly, as decribed in Section 7-3-6-8 Basic function
check on page 234.

7-3-6-8 Basic function check

To check the basic functions of the GCU:
Turn on the mains switch found on the external PS.
• The GCU starts the boot process. It can be followed by the LED indicator sequence. See
Section 7-3-2-1 System startup, reset and booting on page 210 LED indicator sequence
during reset and boot process. If there is new application software or firmware on the
Master System, it will be downloaded to the GCU.
Note!
If other IP-addresses than the standard MINItrace addresses are used on the site, the
IP-addresses in the new GCU must be changed manually. For instructions see
Section 7-3-2-2 Configuration of the GCU on page 211.
• When the boot process is completed, check the status of the LED indicators. See
Table 7-13.
7-3-7 Spare parts
Spare part
General Control Unit
MINItrace Master System Application Software PC Lynx release x.x (Linux™)
Fuses T4AH 250V (10 pcs.)
7-3-8 Interconnect data

This section contains connector signal lists for the GCU connectors.
Table 7-24: Panel connectors, GCU
Conn. pin Signal name Connected to Comment
Rear connectors
GCU/P1 External PS Only on GCU with external

PS
1, 2 24V supply
3 +15V supply
4 -15V supply
5 +5V sense

6–8 +5V supply
9, 10 GND 24V supply
11 GND +15V supply
12 GND -15V supply
13 GND 5V sense
14–16 GND 5V supply
GCU/P3 CSC/MSS MT Service System (MSS)
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1
2 TX1 2
3 RX1 3
4 Not Used 4
5 GND_COM1COM2 5
6 Not Used 6
7 Shorted to pin 8 7
9 Not Used 9
GCU/P4 PSMC/RS232 (MPS 883)

PSMC/REMOTE LINE (MPS
9700)
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1
2 RX3 2
3 TX3 3
4 Not Used 4
5 GND 5

6 Not Used 6
9 Not Used 9
GCU/P5 TSC/H2 15O/P2 H2 15O option
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1
2 RS485 - 2
3 Not Used 3
4 Not Used 4
5 GND 5
6 RS485 + 6
7–9 Not Used 7–9
GCU/P7 TSC/11C/P1 11C option
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1
2 RS485 - 2
3 Not Used 3
4 Not Used 4
5 GND 5
6 RS485 + 6
GCU/P8 Not Used
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1

2 RS485 - 2
3 Not Used 3
4 Not Used 4
5 GND 5
6 RS485 + 6
GCU/P9 RFPG/SKG
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 STANDBY 2
3 NORMAL MODE 3
4 RESET 4
5 FIX MODE 5
6 PULSE MODE 6
7 FREQ LOAD 7
8 RF INHIBIT 8
9 STANDBY READY 9
10 STANDBY ERROR 10
11 START MODE 11
12 TUNING MODE 12
13 DEE VOLTS OK 13
14 SPARK* 14
15 ERROR* 15 (if not ok 30 sec. after

NORMAL)
16 GN Grid normal 16
17 SN Screen normal 17

18 EN EHT Normal 18
19 V+24V_IO2 19
20 HN Heater Normal 20
21 WFN Water Flow Normal 21
22 AFN Air Flow Normal 22
23 DIOK Door Interlock ok 23
24 ESOK Earth Stick ok 24
25 DVL* Drive Voltage Limited 25
26 RVL* Reflected Voltage 26

Limited
27 FREQ DATA 27
28 DPA TEMP ok 28
29 FREQ CLOCK 29
30 Spare 30
31 Controller fault* 31
32 General supply fault* 32
33 Tube water temp. normal 33
34 RF standby 34
35 Not Used 35
36 Not Used 36
37 GND_IO_2 37
GCU/P10 RFPG/SKH
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 GND_AIO 2
3 DVR_RTN 3

4 Spare -AI33_-AI34_-AI35 4
5 Spare –AI35 5
6 FP_RTN 6
7 RP_RTN 7
8 PHASE LOAD -VE 8
9 DEE VOLT REF 9
10 DVR SIG 10
11 Spare –AI33 11
12 Spare –AI34 12
13 FP SIG 13
14 RP SIG 14
15 PHASE LOAD +VE 15
GCU/P11 PSARC/P1
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1
2 Not Used 2
3 +10VOLT_REF 3 External from PSARC
7 +10VOLT_REF 7 External from PSARC
8 PSARC VOLTAGE 8
9 PSARC CURRENT REF 9
10 Not Used 10
11 Not Used 11
12 PSARC HV ON 12
13–16 Not Used 13–16
17 PSARC REMOTE ENABLE 17

18 +15VOLT PSARC 18
19 GND PSARC 19
20 PSARC CURRENT SET 20
21 PSARC CURRENT 21
22 GND PSARC 22
23 GND PSARC 23
24 PSARC NO FAULTS 24
25 Not Used 25
GCU/P12 Mains Distribution Control for PSARC
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 Not Used 2
3 V+24V_IO 3
4 PSARC POWER ALLOWED 4

B

A
6 Not Used 6
7 V+24V_IO 7

B

A
GCU/P13 CSC/P7
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 V+24V_IO 2

3 V+24V_IO 3
4 Not Used 4
5 Not Used 5
6 +PRESSURE 13N 6
7 +PRESSURE 18F 7
8 +PRESSURE F2 8
9 +PRESSURE DUAL 9
10–13 Not Used 10–13
14 GND_IO 14
15 GND_IO 15
16 V+24V_IO 16
17 V+24V_IO 17
18 V+24V_IO 18
19 V+24V_IO 19
20 V+24V_IO 20
21 V+24V_IO 21
22 GND_IO 22
23 Not Used 23
24 GND_IO 24
25 Not Used 25
GCU/P14 CSC/P2
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 Pirani 2+ 2
3 Pirani 1+ 3
4 Penning + 4

5 COLLIMATOR 2 LEFT CUR- 5

RENT
6 COLLIMATOR 1 LEFT CUR- 6

RENT
7 FOIL 1 CURRENT 7
8 GND_BCA 8
9 TARGET 5 CURRENT 9
12 GND_IO 12
13 V+15V_CI 13
14 -10VOLT (AO) 14
15 Dual Foil 2 position 15 –AI-14 to GND_AO
16 -10VOLT (AO) 16
17 Dual Foil 1 position 17 –AI-13 to GND_AO
18 -10VOLT (AO) 18
19 Single Foil position 19 –AI-12 to GND_AO
20 GND_VCU (External input) 20
23 COLLIMATOR 2 RIGHT CUR- 23

RENT
24 COLLIMATOR 1 RIGHT CUR- 24

RENT
25 FOIL 2 CURRENT 25
26 PROBE CURRENT 26

30 - He Pressure 30
31 + He Pressure 31
32 Not Used 32
33 +10VOLT (AO) 33
34 +10VOLT (AO) 34
35 +10VOLT (AO) 35
36 Not Used 36
37 GND RFPG 37
GCU/P15 CSC/P3
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 GND_IO 2
3 BEAM_ALLOWED 3
4 Radiation interlock 4* 4
6 GND PSMC 6 External input from PSMC
7 GND_IO 7
8 VACUUM OK 8
9 ION SOURCE WATER FLOW 9

OK
10 Target_Dual_Waterflow ok 10
11 TARGET SINGLE WATER 11

FLOW OK
12 RCAV WATER FLOW OK 12
13 MAGNET WATER FLOW OK 13
14 GND_IO 14

15 GND_IO 15
19 MAGNET TEMPERATURE OK 19
20 WATER COOLING OK 20
21 GND_IO 21
22 GND_IO 22
23 GND_IO 23
24 GND_IO 24
GCU/P16 MPS 883

PSMC/USER INTERLOCKS
Shield Chassis
3 MAGNET DOOR CLOSED 3

PSMC

GCU/P16 MPS 9700

PSMC/EXTERNAL INTER-
LOCKS
Shield Chassis
3 MAGNET DOOR CLOSED 13

PSMC
4 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
5 shorted to pin 12
GCU/P17 CSC/P5
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 Probe out 2 Allows beam
3 GND_IO 3
4 GND_IO 4
5 DUAL_MOTOR 2 5
6 DUAL_MOTOR 1 6
7 SINGLE_FOIL_MOTOR 7
8 Magnet door closed 8 Chamber
9 EXIT VALVE TARGET 6 9 Dual Beam
10 EXIT VALVE TARGET 4 10

12 V+24V_IO 12
13 V+24V_IO 13
14 HELIUM OUT 14
15 TARGET 6 COOLING 15
18 He COMPRESSOR ON/OFF 18
19 HE Compressor ON 19
20 PROBE COIL (R) 20
21 GND_IO 21
22 GND_IO 22
23 DUAL_MOTOR 2 23
24 DUAL_MOTOR 1 24
25 SINGLE_FOIL_MOTOR 25
26 GND_IO 26
27 ION GAS VALVE 27
31 V+24V_IO 31
32 HELIUM IN 32
33 HELIUM LOOP 33

37 GND_IO 37
GCU/P18 CSC/P8
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 Not Used 2
3 +24 VOLT GAS VALVE 3
4 BEAM ON 4 PSARC + RFPG on
5 RADIATION SHIELD CLOSED 5
6 SYRINGE DISP2 DUAL 18F 6
7 OPEN HP EXIT VALVE 18F 7 High Pressure Valve
8 SYRINGE DISP1 18F 8
9 OPEN SPARE V4 9
10 OPEN SPARE V2 10
11 OPEN 15O SPARE VALVE1 11
12 OPEN INLET VALVE 11C 12
13 OPEN INLET DISP1 DUAL 13

18F
14 OPEN LP DUAL 18F 14 Low Pressure
15 OPEN INLET DISP1 18F 15
16 OPEN LP 18F 16 Low Pressure
17 OPEN HP NH3 17 High Pressure
18 V+24V_IO 18
19 V+24V_IO 19
20 Not Used 20
21 Not Used 21

22 RF ON (RFPG on) 22
23 PSMC ON 23
24 OPEN HP EXIT VALVE DUAL 24 High Pressure

18F
25 SYRINGE DISP1 DUAL 18F 25
26 SYRINGE DISP2 18F 26
27 SYRINGE DISP1 NH3 27
28 OPEN SPARE V3 28
29 OPEN 15O SPARE VALVE2 29
30 OPEN INLET VALVE 15O 30
31 OPEN INLET DISP2 DUAL 31

18F
32 OPEN HP DUAL 18F 32 High Pressure
33 OPEN INLET DISP2 18F 33
34 OPEN HP 18F 34 High Pressure
35 OPEN INLET DISP1 NH3 35
36 OPEN LP NH3 36 LowPressure
37 V+24V_IO 37
GCU/P19 TSC/P1
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 GND_IO 2
3 GND_IO 3
4 DI_SPARE1 4
5 DO_SPARE2 5
6 +Pressure 11C 6
7 11C_TEMP_OK 7

8 11C_VALVE7 8
9 11C_VALVE5 9
10 11C_VALVE3 10
11 11C_VALVE1 11
12 V+24V_IO 12
13 V+24V_IO 13
14 GND_IO 14
15 GND_IO 15
16 DI_SPARE2 16
17 DO_SPARE3 17
18 DO_SPARE1 18
19 11C_DI_NOT_Used 19
20 11C_FURN_ON 20
21 11C_VALVE6 21
22 11C_VALVE4 22
23 11C_VALVE2 23
24 V+24V_IO 24
25 V+24V_IO 25
GCU/P20 TSC/P2
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 GND 2
3 SPARE4_FURN_ON 3
4 SPARE2_FURN_ON 4
5 DI_SPARE6 5
6 DI_SPARE4 6

7 DO_SPARE6 7
8 DO_SPARE4 8
9 15O_DI_NOT_USED 9
10 15O_VALVE3 10
11 15O_VALVE1_NOT_USED 11
12 V+24V_IO 12
13 V+24V_IO 13
14 GND_IO 14
15 GND_IO 15
16 SPARE3_FURN_ON 16
17 SPARE1_FURN_ON 17
18 DI_SPARE5 18
19 DI_SPARE3 19
20 DO_SPARE5 20
21 +PRESSURE_15O 21
22 15O_VALVE4 22
23 15O_VALVE2 23
24 V+24V_IO 24
25 V+24V_IO 25
GCU/P21 TSC/H2 15O/P1 H2 15O option
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2 GND_IO 2
3 H2O Interlock* 3
4 H2O_DI_NOT_USED 4
5 H2O_TEMP_OK 5

6 H2O_FURN_ON 6
7 H2O_VALVE1_NOT_USED 7
8 V+24V_IO 8
9 GND_IO 9
10 H2O Interlock* 10
11 H2O_DI_NOT_USED 11
12 H2O_TEMP_OK 12
13 H2O_FURN_ON 13
14 H2O_VALVE1_NOT_USED 14
15 V+24V_IO 15
GCU/P22 SPARE Not used
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
2–6 No Used 2–6
7 SPARE_DI58 7
8 SPARE_DI46 8
9 SPARE_DO95 9
10 SPARE_DI30 10
11 SPARE_DO23 11
12 SPARE_DO1 12
13 V+24V_IO 13
14 GND_IO 14
15–19 Not Used 15–19
20 SPARE_DI57 20
21 SPARE_DO96 21
22 SPARE_DI32 22

23 SPARE_DO22 23
24 SPARE_DO12 24
25 V+24V_IO 25
GCU/P24 Target Switching System Option
Shield Chassis
1 Chassis 1
10 SW1B TARGET 2 10
11 SW1B TARGET 1 11
12 SW1C TARGET 2 12
13 SW1C TARGET 1 13
14–21 Not Used 14–21
22 GND_IO 22 SW2 C common via Relay 9
GCU/P25 Network switch inside cabinet (Ethernet)
1 Bi-directional pair A + 1
2 Bi-directional pair A - 2
3 Bi-directional pair B + 3
4 Bi-directional pair C + 4
5 Bi-directional pair C - 5
6 Bi-directional pair B - 6
7 Not Used 7
8 Chassis 8

Front connectors
GCU/Console Laptop/Serial port Use a terminal communica-

tion software (terminal
emulation) to communi-
cate with the CPU in the
GCU
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1
2 TX2 2
3 RX2 3
5 GND_COM1COM2 5
9 Not Used 9
GCU/MSS MSS/COM1 Service
Shield Chassis
1 Not Used 1
2 TX1 2
3 RX1 3
5 GND_COM1COM2 5
9 Not Used 9

8 CYCLOTRON SUPPORT CABINET, CSC (POWER/COOLING/VACUUM)
8-1 General description

The Cyclotron Support Cabinet, CSC, is included in the MINItrace unit and situated on the right
side of the radiation shield. The CSC houses a number of sub-systems etc:
• The secondary cooling unit comprises a water manifold, distributing cooling water to a
number of subsystems. See Chapter 9 Cooling water system for details.
• The Vacuum Control Unit (VCU) with control keys and display. See Chapter 10 Vacuum
system for details.
• A connector to the radiation shield door control. See Chapter 17 Radiation shield for
details.
• A Compressed air moisture trap is housed in the CSC. See Section 8-3 Compressed air
moisture trap on page 256 and Section 8-7-3 Empty the compressed air moisture trap
on page 261 for details.
• The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) contains Mains switch, fuses, CBs, contactors and
support power for vacuum pumps, helium cooling pump and radiation shield door
actuators. See Section 8-4 Power distribution (CSC electronics) on page 256 for details.
• The Customer Interface Connector (CIC) on the top of the CSC allows the customer to
add interconnects etc. See MINItrace Qilin Site Planning Guide (dir. 2232993-100) for
details.
8-2 Hazards and warnings
Lethal voltages of up to 400 V AC is present within the Cyclotron Support Cabinet.
8 Cyclotron support cabinet, CSC (power/cooling/vacuum) 255

8-3 Compressed air moisture trap

To prevent moist and oil to accumulate randomly in the system, a compressed air moisture
trap is mounted on the left hand side in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC).
Figure 8-1: Compressed air moisture trap
The moisture trap is to be emptied during PM (Planned Maintenance). See Section 8-7-3 Empty
the compressed air moisture trap on page 261.
8-4 Power distribution (CSC electronics)
8-4-1 Theory of operation

From the local electricity distributor there is a power inlet of 400 V or 480 V (phase-to-phase)
to the MDP, Main Distribution Panel. The main parts of the power distribution system are:
• The MDP, Mains Distribution Panel, is supported by the customer. It shall include two, or
more, Circuit Breakers (CBs) for the outgoing lines.
• The CCAB, Control Cabinet, has a Transformer from which the voltages are 400 Volts
(phase-to-phase) for the outlet to the CSC and the RFPG and internal to the GCU and the
PSMC. From the transformer there is also a 3×208 V-support for the PSARC. All the different
outlets from the transformer are secured by circuit breakers (CBs).
• The RFPG has two different power inlets, one 400–480 V coming from the MDP and an
other, 400 V coming from the CCAB.
• The CSC, Cyclotron Support Cabinet, has a 400 V-inlet from the CCAB. The outlets are
400 V and 230 V (one phase) for pumps and valves.
256 8 Cyclotron support cabinet, CSC (power/cooling/vacuum)

Figure 8-2: MINItrace including power disribution
Figure 8-3: Power lines
The units in the power distribution system contains and provides lethal voltages of up to
mains voltage, 400 V AC.
Lock-out and tag-out the mains circuit breakers in the MDP before servicing the power
distribution system. Verify with a multi-voltmeter.

CAUTION!
The MINItrace subsystem has two phase sensitive components:
- the rotary pump in the vacuum system
- the water pump in the support cabinet
If you apply power and run the pumps with the phases swapped, this will damage the
system.
Consider this when installing or maintaining the power support to the MINItrace subsystem.
Always check that the pumps run in the correct direction. If a pump run in wrong direction,
correct the fault at the right place. Use the drawings for guidance (L1, L2, L3, N and PE
must be connected to the correct terminal).
8-4-3 Maintenance on units in the power distribution system

• Normally you always turn off the main CBs (Circuit Breakers) in the MDP before you start
servicing units in the system. But there is one thing to remember:
When applying LOCK-OUT and TAG-OUT to the main CBs in the MDP, the power for
the Vacuum system will be turned off as well. But the Vacuum system needs to cool
down for at least 1 hour before turned OFF, so please plan your time.
• If any of the CBs in the Control Cabinet or RFPG are turned OFF, instead of the Main CBs
in the MDP, please observe this:
The RFPG gets its power input from two different units. One from the MDP and an
other from the Control Cabinet. Only when both of these inputs are turned off the
RFPG is secure for servicing. Verify with a multimeter that the power is OFF.
For more information about maintenance on each unit, please refer to corresponding chapter
in this manual or MINItrace Service Manual – OEM Manuals (dir. 2233002-100).
8-4-4 Replacing RFPG or transformer in CCAB

• If the Power supply in the RFPG is going to be replaced it is important that the voltage
tapping on the new unit is the same as the original one. Refer to the manufacturers
manual, Microwave Engineering design.
• If the main transformer in the CCAB, Control Cabinet, is going to be replaced it’s important
that the voltage tapping on the new unit is the same as the original one. On the top of
the transformer the voltage inputs are marked 400 and 480 V.

The mains input voltages can be 400 V AC or 480 V AC, 50 or 60 Hz.
Table 8-1: Mains input power
CCAB (Control Cabinet) 25 kVA
RFPG 25 kVA
Total 50 kVA
8-4-6 Switches, fuses, circuit breakers, contactors and relays

In the RFPG there is a CB (Circuit breaker) placed behind a front-cover-plate. See Figure 8-4.
But remember that this CB only breaks the high voltages, the other parts of the RFPG still
have its power from the CCAB. Only when the CB in the MDP and the RFPG CB in the CCAB
are OFF, the complete RFPG is without power.
Figure 8-4: CB in RFPG-cabinet
In the CCAB (Control cabinet) there are seven CBs (Circuit Breakers) to turn off the CSC, PSMC,
GCU, PSARC and one of the lines to the RFPG. See Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5: CBs in CCAB
8-5 Vacuum and water control panel

See
• MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995)
• MINItrace Service Manual – Maintenance (dir. 2233000-100)

See Section 8-2 Hazards and warnings on page 255 and Section 8-4-2 Hazards and warnings
on page 257.
8-6 Operator maintenance

See MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995).
8-7 Planned maintenance

8-7-1 Test tools and requirements

No special test tools needed.

8-7-2 Overhaul of terminal blocks

Tighten all screws on the terminal strip.
8-7-3 Empty the compressed air moisture trap

(See Section 8-3 Compressed air moisture trap on page 256.) Press the tiny red knob at the
bottom of the Compressed Air Moisture Trap, see Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6: Compressed air moisture trap
8-8 Disassembly/reassembly procedures

The disassembly/reassembly procedures for the Cyclotron Support Cabinet are described in
Chapter 9 Cooling water system and Chapter 10 Vacuum system.

8-9 Drawings and parts lists

The following Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) drawings are available in MINItrace Service
Manual – Drawings and Parts Lists (dir. 2233001-100).
Table 8-2: Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) drawings
Sub system Drawing name Drawing Parts list
Power distr. Mains Distribution MINItrace CAC 209-56001-xx-3
CAC Cooling Cyclotron Support Cabinet CAC 212-31001-xx-1 CAC 212-36001

Ass'y
CAC Cooling CSC Electronics Ass'y CAC 212-31002-xx-1 CAC 212-36002
CAC Cooling Cooling System Ass'y CAC 212-31003-xx-1 CAC 212-36003
CAC Cooling Manifold Ass'y CAC 212-31005-xx-1 CAC 212-36005
8-10 Document references

MINItrace Qilin Site Planning Guide (dir. 2232993-100)
MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995)
MINItrace Service Manual – Drawings and Parts Lists (dir. 2233001-100)
MINItrace Service Manual – OEM Manuals (dir. 2233002-100)

9 COOLING WATER SYSTEM

The heat power generated by the MINItrace system is dissipated by the secondary cooling
system through an external primary cooling system. A shunt regulator at the inlet of the heat
exchanger regulates the flow from the heat exchanger. A temperature sensor is installed in
the secondary cooling system to supply the necessary feedback system for the shunt
regulation.
The external primary cooling system is connected to a heat exchanger, which is part of the
closed loop of the secondary cooling system. The primary cooling system supply’s inlet water
at a temperature of not more than +13°C and provides temperature regulation of the
secondary cooling system within ±1°C.
A lower temperature of the cooling medium with a corresponding decrease in flow can be
acceptable if the problems with condensation are handled accordingly.
Table 9-1: Primary cooling circuit specifications
Cooling capacity 30 kW
Load variation range 1–26 kW
Flow 50 liters/min
Inlet temperature to secondary cooling unit Maximum 13°C
Max system pressure 0.6 MPa
Differential Pressure drop (heat exchanger) Approx. 0.05 MPa
Table 9-2 contains a list of typical flow rates.
9 Cooling water system 263

Table 9-2: Typical flowrates
Flowmeter Circuit Typical flow (l/min)
F20 RFPG 15
F21 MAGNET 5–6
F22 RF 1 10–12
F23 RF 2 10–12
F24 TARG.S. (Target system, Single extraction) 3
F25 TARG.D. (Target system, Dual extraction) 3
F26 PSMC 4
F27 VACUUM 4
F28 IONS. (Ion source system) 1
264 9 Cooling water system

9-2 Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC)

Most of the components comprising the secondary cooling system are located in the Cyclotron
Support Cabinet (CSC).
Figure 9-1: Cooling water components in the CSC (Cyclotron Support Cabinet)

9-2-1 Cooling water system schematic
Figure 9-2: Cooling water system schematic

9-2-2 Shunt valve temperature control

The shunt valve in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet controls the flow at the primary water inlet
and thereby the cooling in the heat exchanger.
9-2-2-1 EVR (TIDUR) (discontinued in 2009)

When the temperature is higher (or lower) than 20ºC, the “-RED” (or “+RED”) will turn on and
the shunt valve will open (or close) to regulate the temperature.
Figure 9-3: Shunt valve temperature control diodes
The left red diode turns on if the The green diode turns on if the tem- The right red diode turns on if the
temperature is too high. perature is OK. temperature is too low.

The shunt valve operation is indicated by the shunt valve handle.
Figure 9-4: Shunt valve handle movements
To adjust the temperature

1 Check that the TIDUR switch is in the “0” position.
2 Turn the knob marked with an down arrow to zero.
3 Turn the “sun” knob to the following value: Value on water temperature digital display
(green figures right above the controller) - 20.
(Example: If the value on water temperature display is 25, turn knob to 25-20 = +5.
If the value on water temperature display is 17, turn knob to 17-20 = -3.)
4 Remove the black cover from the hole to the left of the “moon” knob.
5 Use a small screwdriver and adjust the potentiometer until the green LED lights up. See
Figure 9-5.
6 Put the “sun” knob back to 0. The regulator should now regulate the water temperature
to 20°C.
7 The white potentiometer at the upper left corner should be adjusted to give 10–20 pause
between shunt motor motions. Check that the system is not oscillating.

Figure 9-5: EVR (TIDUR) shunt valve temperature adjustment
9-2-2-2 EVR-CA (discontinued in 2015)

EVR-CA is a temperature control unit which controls the shunt motor (actuator) and shunt
valve at the primary water inlet.
Figure 9-6: EVR-CA shunt valve temperature control unit
Minus on the control unit is lit when the motor will open towards the heat exchanger, plus is
lit when the motor will close. Green light indicates that the temperature is ok.
If the temperature is stable in the range 19–21º and the green 0 indicator on EVR-CA is lit,
the temperature is ok. If the temperature is unstable and/or the red - or + indicator is lit, it
needs to be adjusted.

To adjust the temperature

1 Make sure that the motor wheel on the shunt motor is fully pressed in order to enable
valve control.
2 Make sure that screw Sec. on the EVR-CA is set to 15.
3 Make sure that knob C is set to 0 s.
4 Adjust knob P until the temperature is stable in the range 19–21ºC and the green 0
indicator is lit.
9-2-2-3 CRA112 (introduced in 2015)

CRA112 is a combined temperature control unit and shunt motor (actuator) which controls
the shunt valve at the primary water inlet. It was introduced in 2015 and replaced both the
control unit EVR-CA and the actuator ARA663.
Figure 9-7: CRA112 shunt valve temperature control unit
Make sure that the temperature is stable in the range 19–21ºC. The display on CRA112 shows
the read temperature by default.
To change set-temperature
The set-temperature should be 20ºC.
1 Make sure that the motor wheel is fully pressed in order to enable valve control.
2 Press the adjustment wheel.

The display starts to flash and show the set temperature.
3 If necessary, adjust the value to 20 by rolling the wheel.
4 Press the wheel to save the displayed value.

After a few seconds the display returns to start.

To adjust control parameters

To be able to reach stable temperature, it might be necessary to reduce overshoot/undershoot
(or oscillations) by adjusting how quickly the motor responds to temperature changes.
1 Press the wheel for at least 10 seconds.

The display starts to flash and show the set temperature.
2 Roll the wheel until the display shows P-4 (default from factory).
3 Press the wheel.
4 Roll the wheel to change the control parameter value.
5 Press the wheel to save the displayed value.

After a few seconds the display returns to start.

See MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995).

9-4-1 Overhaul of cooling water system

1 Check for water leaks and repair if necessary.
2 Check for damage on all tubing exposed to radiation. Exchange tubing if necessary.
3 Check for water leakage on the pump shaft.
4 Check for noise and vibrations in the motor/pump assembly.
5 Check all water flow switches: Turn off the valve on each circuit on the pressure side.
Check the signal response. Record all parameters of interest, including these:
a Temperature at standby and every 5th minute up to 1 hour of cyclotron operation.
b Pressure and water level in the expansion vessel.
c Pump pressure and pump flow at the manifold.
d Water conductivity.
6 Replace the ion exchanger if necessary (too high conductivity). See Section 9-7 Ion
exchanger and filter on page 280.
7 Disassemble and clean the filter. See Section 9-7 Ion exchanger and filter on page 280.


9-5-1 Tools
• Teflon™ thread tape
• Lint-free cleaning tissues
• Bucket for disposal of filter
• Waste container for drain water
WARNING! Radiation
Always monitor radiation levels before servicing the water cooling system. Pay particular
attention to the filter and the ion exchanger, where radioactive particles may accumulate.
The secondary cooling system (water pump, CSC, PSMC, RFPG) contains lethal voltages
of up to the mains voltage, 400 V AC.
Always lock-out and tag-out power before servicing the system.
9-5-2 Water cooling pump

The water cooling pump was originally of type CRN 2-70 (50 Hz) or CRN 2-50 (60 Hz). In systems
manufactured later than Q2 2003, the water cooling pump is of type CRN 3-9 (50 Hz) or CRN
3-5 (60 Hz).
The increased height of the newer water cooling pump makes it interfere with the piping
above the pump. This calls for a pipe conversion kit if an old pump is to be replaced by a new
pump. See table below for detailed information and the spare parts.

Table 9-3: Action options in case of malfunctioning water cooling pump
If ... ... you have to: Comment
You have an old pump The motor (or any other vi- You also need a pipe con-
2223593 (50 Hz) or tal part) is broken. version kit, since the new
2273907 (60 Hz). motor is slightly bigger
than the old motor.
The vanes are broken. The pump manufacturer

offers a vane maintenance
kit. This kit is as of yet not
Order a new pump for orderable as spare part
50 Hz or 60 Hz (different within GEMS.
spare part numbers).
You have a new pump The motor (or any other vi- —
tal part) is broken.
The vanes are broken. The pump manufacturer

offers a vane maintenance
kit. This kit is as of yet not
orderable as spare part
within GEMS.
For spare part numbers, refer to the spare parts listed for the sub systems in MINItrace Spare
9-5-2-1 Water cooling pump pipe conversion kit

As stated in Table 9-3, if you need to replace an old water cooling pump with a new pump
for 50 Hz or 60 Hz (different spare part numbers), you need a pipe conversion kit since the
new motor is slightly bigger than the old motor.
For spare part numbers, refer to the spare parts listed for the sub systems in MINItrace Spare
Proceed as described in Figure 9-8 to use the pipe conversion kit.

Figure 9-8: Using the pipe conversion kit
1 Drain the system from water with valve V52.
2 Dismount the clamping ring on the flanges on the

pump.
3 Dismount the electrical cable.
4 Dismantle the four nuts on the pump.
5 Check if there is a hose on valve V50. If there is it

should be dismounted.
6 Take off the PU-tube on F10 (flow meter).
7 Dismount the two tube clamps on the vertical pipe

(see figure).
8 Dismount the vertical pipe.
9 Turn the T-piece so the horizontal pipe with the valve

can be dismantled.
10 Take the pipe and remove the valve.
11 Connect the pump conversion pipe (spare part) at

the same place where the valve was removed. Use
loctite 542 in the thread.
12 Mount the pipe at the T-piece according to figure.

Use loctite in the thread. Turn back the T-piece.
13 Assemble the vertical pipe and the tube clamps.
14 Mount the PU-tube on V10 (flow meter).
15 Replace the old pump with the new one. Mount the
nuts and the clamping rings on the flanges.
Check the water level in the system
Check the pressure in the system.
9-5-3 Target water cooling

See Section 15-6-7 Target water cooling on page 521.

9-5-4 Shunt motor and temperature control unit

CRA112 is a combined temperature control unit and shunt motor (actuator) which controls
the shunt valve at the primary water inlet. It was introduced in 2015 and replaces both the
EVR (TIDUR)/EVR-CA control units and the separate shunt motors.
Figure 9-9: Location of shunt motor/temperature control units in the CSC
Figure 9-10: CRA112 shunt valve temperature control unit

9-5-4-1 Replacing old shunt valve control units with CRA112

1 Remove the three panels in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet.
2 Mount the terminal at the top end of the DIN rail, on top of the fuse terminal.

3 Connect the 1-meter cable between the top terminal and terminal 3 at the bottom left
in the cabinet.

4 Remove the old cable from F3 on the right side of the fuse terminal.
(This will not be used any longer.)
5 Remove the old shunt valve control unit and mount the new CRA112 shunt valve control
unit in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet.
6 Attach the sensor to the brass T-piece with the hose clamp.
7 Route the cables the same way as the old ones and connect the power cable connector
to the shunt valve motor. Connect the other end of the cable to F3 on the new terminal
and to the free fuse connection in the cabinet.
Note!
It does not matter where it is connected to the new terminal and the free fuse terminal
since this motor runs on 24 V AC.

9-6 Closing down the cooling water system

Before replacing parts of the cooling water system, applicable valves should be closed and,
in some cases, the pump must be stopped.
To stop the cooling water pump:
At the MSS (MINItrace Service System): At the CSC (Cyclotron Support Cabinet):
1. In the VACUUM and COOLING SYSTEM

menu, click on the SYSTEM OFF button to
close down the cyclotron.
2. Click on YES in the Message window.

The shutdown process may take up to
10 minutes. When the cyclotron reaches the
Off state, the MAGNET ON lamp on top of
the radiation shield goes off.
3. At the vacuum and cooling control panel,

VACUUM section, press STAND BY and then
OFF.
Let the diffusion pump cool off for 30 min-
utes.
4. At the COOLING section, press OFF/RESET.
5. At the MSS, check that the pump running

indicator changes color from green to yellow.

9-6 Closing down the cooling water system
9-7 Ion exchanger and filter

Figure 9-11: Cooling water components in CSC (Cyclotron Support Cabinet), lower part
9-7-1 Removing the ion exchanger

1 Close valves V51 and V52 to isolate the filter circuit.
2 Open the air valve, V70, on the left side of the ion exchanger (Z1).
3 Open the quick connection on the right side of the ion exchanger (see Figure 9-11). Press
the blue ring and pull out the tube.
4 Loosen the tube fitting for the transparent hose at the air valve, V70.
5 Keep the hose end high by tying it to the tube above valve V2. Otherwise, empty the
contents of the hose into the bucket.
6 Remove the ion exchanger.
7 Loosen the connections at the top of the ion exchanger and keep them for the new ion
exchanger (see illustration to the left).

9-7-2 Install the new ion exchanger
CAUTION!
Use Teflon thread tape only. Use of other materials may damage plastics in the cooling
system.
1 Wind Teflon thread tape onto the threads of the tube connections.
2 Fasten the tube connections to the ports on the ion exchanger, by hand.
3 Tighten the connections carefully using a wrench.
4 Place the ion exchanger in the cabinet.
5 Attach the thin hose with quick connection to the ion exchanger.
6 Attach the transparent hose to the connection at air valve V70. Tighten the nut carefully,
do not overtighten as this may damage the hose.
7 Top up the filter circuit by opening valve V50 until water comes out of air valve V70, then
close V70.
8 Open valve V52.
9 Open valve V51 just enough for flow meter F10 to rotate.
10 Note that HIGH CONDUCTIVITY alarm may light when the top-up water circulates. If the
ion exchanger is working, the alarm indicator should extinguish within a few minutes.
9-7-3 Replacing the filter

1 Close valves V51 and V52 to isolate the filter circuit.
2 Loosen the filter housing (Z4) by turning it CCW.
3 Remove the housing with the cartridge.
4 Empty the water and the used cartridge into a bucket.
5 Clean the filter housing.
6 Insert the new cartridge and fasten the filter housing by hand.
7 Open air valve V70.
8 Top up the filter circuit by opening valve V50 until water comes out of air valve V70, then
close V70.
9 Open valves V51 and V52.

10 Check that the filter housing is tight. If water leaks, tighten further.
11 Note that HIGH CONDUCTIVITY alarm may light when the top-up water circulates. If the
ion exchanger is working, the alarm indicator should extinguish within a few minutes.

10 VACUUM SYSTEM

The purpose of the vacuum system is to maintain the evacuated state of the cyclotron vacuum
chamber in order to enable accelerator operation. The vacuum system includes the cyclotron
vacuum chamber, vacuum pumps, vacuum valves and vacuum gauges.
The vacuum system is controlled by a separate Vacuum Control Unit (VCU) independent of
the General Control Unit (GCU). The independent GCU ensures safe and automated operation
of the vacuum system. See Chapter 7 General control unit for a detailed description of the
GCU. The VCU is included in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet on the right side of the MINItrace,
see Figure 10-1.
The VCU includes a pressure gauge (TPG 300), displaying reading from different vacuum
system gauges.
WARNING! Hot surface
During operation, the external surface of the vacuum diffusion pump can reach
temperatures of up to 250°C.
Do not touch!
The arm and pneumatic actuator for the high vacuum valve is a potential pinch hazard.
Stay away from the vacuum pump assembly during operation.
The lid of the high vacuum valve is a severe pinch hazard when closing.
Stay away from the vacuum pump assembly during maintenance.
10 Vacuum system 283

Figure 10-1: Vacuum Control Unit (VCU)
10-2 Overview
The following description is based on Figure 10-2 and Figure 10-3 below.
Figure 10-2: Block diagram of the vacuum system
PIR 2 Vacuum tank PEN RP Rotary Pump

BV Backing Valve
PIR1 Pirani gauge (backing pressure)
DP Diffusion Pump
HVV High Vacuum Valve
VV HVV
RV Roughing valve
PIR2 Pirani gauge (tank pressure)
PEN Penning gauge (tank pressure)
VV Vent Valve
DP RV
PIR 1
BV
RP
284 10 Vacuum system

10-2 Overview
Figure 10-3: Vacuum system overwiew
The vacuum system is operated on a 24-hour basis.
In order to cover the pressure range from atmosphere to the 10-7 mbar (10-5 Pa) range, two
vacuum gauges are connected to the vacuum chamber. The Pirani gauge handles the 1 bar
to 10-3 mbar (0.1 MPa to 10-5 Pa) range and the Penning gauge takes over in the high vacuum
range, <10-3 mbar (<0.1 Pa).
A second Pirani gauge monitors the backing pressure of the diffusion pump.
The diffusion pump, which is supplied with a baffle, is the first stage in the vacuum pumping
system. In the second stage, the diffusion pump is backed by a rotary pump. The diffusion
pump is water-cooled, see Chapter 9 Cooling water system.
The vacuum chamber has a rather small volume and is made of aluminum. No iron surfaces
are exposed to vacuum (iron can have a negative influence on humidity).
For further information, refer to Manufacturer’s Manuals (OEM) for the vacuum system.

10-2 Overview
10-3 Vacuum chamber
Table 10-1: Vacuum chamber specifications
Chamber volume 200 liters
Material Aluminum
Type of assembly TIG welded
Type of sealings Nitrile O-rings
10-4 Pump system
10-4-1 Diffusion pump with baffle

Table 10-2: Diffusion pump with baffle – specification
Pump manufacturer/type Pfeiffer (Balzers)/DIF 250 I
Baffle manufacturer/type Integrated in DIF 250 I
Pump speed 1750 l/s (with baffle)
Type of cooling Water (pump and baffle)
Cooling flow rate 3.3 l/min (at 20°C inlet temperature)
Heat load to air 0.3 kW
Power requirement
Voltage/frequency 230 V AC /50 Hz
Power 2.4 kW
Start time (heating-up time) 20 min
Weight 30 kg
Size See manufacturers data
Diffusion pump oil
Manufacturer/type Santovac 5
Volume min. 0.45 l max. 1,0 l
Exchange intervals 36 months

10-4 Pump system
10-4-2 Fore-vacuum pump

Table 10-3: Fore vacuum pump – specifications
Pump manufacturer/type Pfeiffer/DUO 20 M
Pump capacity 20 m3/h
Type of cooling Air
Heat load to air 0.6 kW
Power requirements
Voltage, frequency 220–240/380–420 V AC/50 Hz

250–277/440–480 V AC/60 Hz
Power 1 kVA
Weight 33 kg
Fore-vacuum oil
Manufacturer/type Pfeiffer/P3
Volume 1.1 l
Exchange intervals 12 months
10-5 Vacuum valves
10-5-1 High Vacuum Valve specification

Table 10-4: High Vacuum Valve specifications
High Vacuum Valve type Butterfly
Valve manufacturer Pfeiffer (Balzers)
Compressed air pressure 6 bar
Actuator volume 130 cm3
Actuator control voltage 24 VAC

10-5 Vacuum valves
10-6 Vacuum Control Unit (VCU)

The Vacuum Control Unit (VCU) consists of the LED panel, from where the vacuum system
can be controlled with a control keyboard and the pressure gauge controller where vacuum
readings can be displayed. See Figure 10-4.
CAUTION!
The controls on the VCU are for use by authorized service personnel only, with the
exception of the vacuum readout procedure described.
For more information concerning operation of the VCU keyboard and readout of the pressure
gauge control, please refer to MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995) and Manufacturers
operating instruction.

Figure 10-4: Vacuum Control Unit (VCU)

10-6-1 Reprogramming the VCU

Sometimes after a power failure the VCU loses its SET-parameters. When this happens it is
impossible to start up the cyclotron. Then the VCU needs to be reprogrammed. (Done from
the pressure gauge controller).
Table 10-5: Programming of the VCU in case of set-parameter problems
The programming is done on the Balzers TPG 300 pressure gauge controller.
• To enter the SET UP mode, press funct and group key simultaneously
• To quit the SET UP mode, press sensor key
• Please program the parameters correct, or you need to start over from the beginning again.
The keys in the table below works as follows:

• group key Press this key only when there is bold-script-text in the group-key-fields below.
• funct key Press this key every time there is bold-script-text in the func-key-fields below.
• step key Press this key to change value in the step-key-fields below. This has to be done when the text is in
bold-script.
group key funct key step key
Switching functions 1 (Switching functions selection) Leave as 1
2 Threshold selection Leave as LOWER
3 Threshold 1st digit Change to 1
4 Threshold 2nd digit Leave as 0
5 Threshold exponent Change to -1
6 Measuring circuit assignment Change to A1

7 Switching functions selection Leave as 1
8 Threshold selection Change to UPPER
12 Measuring circuit assignment Leave as A1
13 Switching functions selection Change to 2
14 Threshold selection Change to LOWER
26 Threshold selection Leave as LOWER
29 Threshold exponent Leave as -5
30 Measuring circuit assignment Change to B1

36 Measuring circuit assignment Leave as B1
37 (Switching functions selection) Leave as 4
38 (Switching functions selection) Leave as A
39 Switching functions selection Change to B
45 Switching functions selection Leave as B

PE measuring circuit under- 51 (Control) Leave as 0

range control
Measurement unit 52 (Measuring unit selection) Leave as mbar
Filter 53 (Filter assignment) Leave as 2
Interface 54 (Baud rate) Leave as 9
Parameter storage 55 Parameter program Leave as u
56 Code Leave as 0
57 Code Leave as 0
58 Code Leave as 0
59 Storage Press for 10 sec.
Test programs 60 (Test programs selection) Leave as .dl t
66 Measuring circuit assignment Leave as B1
67 (Switching functions selection) Leave as 4
68 (Switching functions selection) Leave as A
69 Switching functions selection Change to B

75 Switching functions selection Leave as B
PE measuring circuit under- 81 (Control) Leave as 0

range control
Measurement unit 82 (Measuring unit selection) Leave as mbar
Filter 83 (Filter assignment) Leave as 2
Interface 84 (Baud rate) Leave as 9
Parameter storage 85 Parameter program Leave as u
86 Code Leave as 0
87 Code Leave as 0
88 Code Leave as 0
89 Storage Press for 10 sec.
Test programs 90 (Test programs selection) Leave as .dl t
10-7 Open the vacuum chamber and replace spare parts

Before opening the vacuum chamber:
• The vacuum must be in STANDBY mode.
• The chamber must be vented (see Section10-7-1 Open the vacuum chamber on page295).
The pumps may continue running to maintain the vacuum level in other parts of the
vacuum system.
Before replacing vacuum spare parts, the vacuum system must be closed down and the
compressed air supply must be disconnected (see Section 10-7-2 Shutting down the vacuum
system on page 298). To enable the pumps to cool down the vacuum system should be closed
down at least 4 hours before starting the disassembly work.

10-7-1 Open the vacuum chamber
10-7-1-1 Before opening the vacuum chamber

1 At the vacuum and cooling control panel, press the VENT key:
a the High Vacuum Valve closes (red)
b the Vent Valve opens (green)
Note!
The vacuum pumps continue to run.
PIR 2 Vacuum tank PEN
VV HVV
DP RV
PIR 1
BV
RP
2 Wait for the chamber pressure to reach atmosphere (approx. 2 minutes).

10-7-1-2 Open the radiation shield

1 Connect the door pendant control to the DOOR PENDANT CONTROL connector in the
CSC (see Figure 10-5).
2 Press the Left Door Open and Right Door Open switches to fully open the radiation
shield.
Figure 10-5: Door pendant control
Left door open Left door close
Right door open Right door close
Personal injury can be caused when the radiation shield doors move.
The door pendant control must be disconnected from the CSC during service on the
cyclotron.
WARNING! Radiation inside
Always monitor radiation levels when opening the radiation shield.
3 Remove the magnet yoke compression screw located in the upper left corner of the
magnet yoke, see Figure 10-6 (1).

4 Open the magnet yoke by hand. Use the slot in the door as shown in Figure 10-6 (2).
The magnet yoke will shut with high force if the magnet door switch is operated or if the
PSMC is accidentally turned on.
5 Perform a radiation survey inside the vacuum chamber.
Figure 10-6: Opening the magnet yoke
1. 2.
3.

WARNING! Radiation
Dust and fragments inside the vacuum chamber can be highly radioactive. The surface
of the vacuum chamber can also be contaminated.
Always use protective clothes, gloves and goggles when working inside the vacuum
chamber.
Always use cleaning tissues moistened with alcohol when cleaning surfaces with a potential
risk of contamination.
Follow federal state and/or local regulations for disposal of radioactive waste.
10-7-2 Shutting down the vacuum system
CAUTION!
Allow the diffusion pump to cool down for a total of 4 hours after shutting down the
vacuum system. Otherwise the pump oil may be oxidized and carbonized on the inside
surfaces of the diffusion pump.
To shut down the vacuum system:
1 Check that the vacuum chamber pressure has reached atmosphere.
2 At the vacuum and cooling control panel, press OFF:
a The High Vacuum Valve closes (red).
b The diffusion pump stops (red).
c The rotary pump continues running for 1 hour (green) to maintain vacuum in the
diffusion pump while it is hot.
d The rotary pump stops (red).
VV HVV
DP RV
PIR 1
BV
RP
3 Wait another 3 hours for the diffusion pump to cool down to a safe working temperature.

10-7-3 Closing the vacuum chamber

1 Clean the O-ring surface around the vacuum chamber with a tissue moistened with
alcohol.
2 Check the O-ring in the vacuum chamber door (main O-ring).
• Cover the O-ring surface with a thin layer of vacuum grease and make sure it is free
from dust and dirt.
• Clean and grease the O-ring surface if necessary.
3 Carefully check that the vacuum chamber can be closed and that nothing is squeezed
during closing.
4 Carefully close the magnet yoke by hand. Use the slot in the door as shown in Figure 10-7
(1), to reduce the pinch hazard.
Figure 10-7: Closing the magnet yoke
1. 2.
5 Tighten the magnet with the compression screw, see Figure 10-7 (2), until the slot between
the yoke and the magnet is almost zero.
6 Use the door pendant control to close the radiation shield.
7 Disconnect the door pendant control and close the CSC.

10-7-4 Start up the MINItrace after vacuum system maintenance
WARNING! Hazardous fumes
The vacuum system emits an oil mist during start-up. This can be harmful to the lungs.
Do not stay in the vicinity of the vacuum system during the first hour of pumping.
1 At the vacuum and cooling control panel – Press the PUMP key. Follow the pump-down
sequence and compare with earlier pressure vs. time records.
Note!
A variation with earlier records can exist due to different factors. High humidity and long
chamber opening time will lengthen the pump-down time. The Pump-down time can
under normal circumstances be 2–3 hours.
2 If the pump-down time tends to be too long:
a Open the vacuum chamber, as described in Section 10-7-1 Open the vacuum
chamber on page 295.
b Check the main O-ring.
c Close the vacuum chamber as described in Section 10-7-3 Closing the vacuum
10-8-1 Test tools and spare parts

The following tools and spare parts are required for planned maintenance:
• Standard tool kit
• Scotch Brite or steel wool
• Soft paper tissues
• Alcohol
• De-greasing solvent
• Caustic soda
• Vacuum grease APIEZON type M
• GE O-ring set

10-8-2 Safety precautions
WARNING! Radioactive pump oil
The pump oil in the diffusion pump and the rotary pump will be radioactive after production
runs.
Always wear protective gloves when replacing pump oil. Do not touch eyes or mouth.
Follow federal, state and/or local regulations when disposing of pump oil.
WARNING! Radioactive waste
Cleaning tissue, rubber gloves, cotton tops or other items used for cleaning inside the
vacuum chamber are radioactive.
Dispose of these items in accordance with federal, state and/or other local regulations.
CAUTION! Cleanliness
The cleaner all surfaces inside the vacuum chamber are, as well as all other components
that get in contact with the vacuum system, the better the end pressure will be.
Always use rubber or latex gloves when you work with vacuum components.
10-8-3 Overhaul of diffusion pump
10-8-3-1 Check/refill oil

1 At the vacuum and cooling control panel, press the OFF key.
2 The heating element of the diffusion pump is now switched off and the High Vacuum
Valve is closed. The rotary pump will run for 60 minutes during diffusion pump cool-down.

3 Allow the pump oil to run down to the bottom of the diffusion pump, and the pump to
cool down. This takes about 4 hours.
CAUTION! Contaminating fumes
If the pump oil is hot and air is allowed to enter into the diffusion pump, the oil may burn
and produce fumes, which contaminate the interior of the vacuum chamber. In addition,
the pump oil will be destroyed when it reacts with the air.
WARNING! Hazardous fumes
Harmful fumes are formed when air is mixed with hot pump oil.
Do not inhale. Allow for adequate ventilation before continuing work.
4 Unscrew the filler plug/dipstick at the pump fluid filler neck. Check the oil level on the
dipstick: it should be covered up to about 6 mm from the top of the stick (compare with
specifications in the DIF 250 Operating Instructions).
5 If necessary, slowly refill pump oil. The fill volume for the diffusion pump is 0.5 liter (min.
0.45 liter, max. 1.0 liter).
Note!
The pump fluid spreads only slowly within the diffusion pump. If the oil is warm (not hot),
it flows more easily. The actual pump fluid level can be read about 3 minutes after filling.
10-8-3-2 Clean, if necessary

When is cleaning necessary?
If the final pressure (<4,0 x 10-5) cannot be obtained any more (and no leaks can be detected
in the vacuum system), it is time to clean the inside of the diffusion pump.
Time between cleanings may vary, depending on factors such as
• cooling water temperature.
• cleanliness of the system.
• how many pump-down cycles the pump oil has experienced.
Intervals range from a couple of thousand hours of operation to several years.

10-8-3-3 Diffusion pump cleaning procedure

1 Remove the diffusion pump. See Section10-9-15 Diffusion pump maintenance on page319.
2 Clean the jet system. See Section 10-9-15-3 Disassembly of diffusion pump on page 322,
with Scotch Brite or steel wool and alcohol to remove all the black material on the parts.
When all the parts are shiny use paper and isopropanol to get rid of all dust. Rinse well
with alcohol.
3 Clean the interior of the diffusion pump with soft paper and alcohol.
4 Clean the interior of the baffle with soft paper and alcohol to remove used-oil droplets
inside.
5 Clean all surfaces exposed to O-rings with soft paper and alcohol. Make sure there is no
dust on the surfaces.
6 Reinstall the diffusion pump. See Section 10-9-15-4 Reassembly of diffusion pump on
page 323.
10-8-3-4 Restart vacuum system after cleaning the diffusion pump

1 Make sure that all cables and tubing are properly connected.
2 Start the vacuum system, see Section 10-7-4 Start up the MINItrace after vacuum system
maintenance on page 300. Note the time.
3 At the TPG 300, check that backing pressure drops after approx. 2 minutes.
4 Verify that it takes 25–35 min before the diffusion pump is hot (LED switches from flashing
to continuous green).
10-8-4 Overhaul of rotary pump

Before removing the rotary pump, shut down and ventilate the vacuum system, see
Section 10-7-2 Shutting down the vacuum system on page 298 and Section 10-9-4 Venting
the vacuum system on page 309.
CAUTION!
Allow the diffusion pump to cool down for a total of 4 hours after shutting down the
vacuum system. Otherwise the pump oil may be oxidized and carbonized on the inside
surfaces of the diffusion pump.
There are two different rotary pump models: DUO 20 (newer model) and DUO 016 (older
model). See Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8: Rotary pump models
DUO 20
DUO 016 Motor compartment Pump compartment
Filler cap Oil mist filter
Gas ballast
valve Filler cap
Sight glass Sight glass
10-8-4-1 Check/refill oil
WARNING!
The rotary pump is hot (70–80°C) after operation. Use protective cloths to move the pump.
DUO 20
Check and refill operating fluid according to instructions in MINItrace Service Manual – OEM
Manuals (dir. 2233002-100).

DUO 016
1 If needed, move the rotary pump for better access to the sight glasses (see Figure 10-8).
2 Look through the sight glass at the end of the pump compartment. Check the color of
the pump oil against the color scale in the MINItrace Service Manual – OEM Manuals
(dir. 2233002-100). Replace the oil if it is contaminated to a higher degree than 5 on the
scale, see Section 10-9-12 Rotary pump oil on page 317).
3 Check the oil levels in the pump and motor compartments. The sight glasses should be
about 3/4 full.
4 If required, refill pump oil and/or motor oil:
a Open the filler cap at top of pump compartment and refill pump oil.
b Open the filler cap at top of motor compartment and refill motor oil.
5 Check the condition of the oil mist filter: clean with alcohol if there is oil on the filter, see
Section 10-9-10 Oil mist filter on page 314.
10-8-5 Overhaul of High Vacuum Valve

The High Vacuum Valves should be removed and cleaned when the diffusion pump is removed
for service. Apply a light coat of vacuum grease on the O-ring before reassembling the High
Vacuum Valve.
10-8-6 Overhaul of vacuum valves

The vacuum valves do not need any particular maintenance.
10-8-7 Overhaul of Pirani gauges

Maintenance of the two Pirani gauges includes cleaning and calibration, as shown in
Table 10-6. After changing a Pirani gauge, the corresponding module in the TPG must be
calibrated to match the new gauge. An incorrect pressure reading might be caused by a dirty
gauge, and may be restored by cleaning the gauge. Otherwise it has to be replaced
Table 10-6: Pirani gauges maintenance
Calibration Cleaning
Pirani 2 gauge (Chamber) See Section 10-8-7-1 Pirani See Section 10-8-7-2 Pirani
2 gauge (chamber) calibra- 2 gauge (chamber) cleaning
tion on page 306 on page 306
Pirani 1 gauge (Backing) See Section 10-8-7-3 Pirani See Section 10-8-7-4 Pirani
1 gauge (backing) calibration 1 gauge (backing) cleaning
on page 307 on page 307

10-8-7-1 Pirani 2 gauge (chamber) calibration

1 At the vacuum and cooling control panel, press the STANDBY key if the system is in PUMP
mode. Ventilate the chamber by pressing VENT.
2 At the TPG 300, press sensor to select Pirani 2 readout, A2.
3 Loosen four screws on the front panel of the TPG 300 and carefully pull the unit out of
the rack. Do not stretch the cables which are connected at the rear panel.
4 If necessary adjust the ATM screw at the 2 TPR input on the PI 300 module until the
readout is 1.0E03 ±0.2E03 mbar (1.0E05 ±0.2E05 Pa).
5 Press the PUMP key and verify the pumping sequence. Check also that the Pirani 2 (A2)
counts down when the pressure is falling. This will be seen only when the system is
roughing.
6 When the chamber pressure is in the 10E-6 mbar (10E-4 Pa) range, the reading should
remain at 1.0E-04 mbar (1.0E-02 Pa). If not, adjust the HIGH VAC screw.
10-8-7-2 Pirani 2 gauge (chamber) cleaning
Figure 10-9: Pirani gauge head
1 Remove the Pirani 2 gauge, see Section 10-9-6 Pirani 2 gauge (chamber) on page 311.
2 To clean the Pirani 2 gauge Head, see Figure 10-9.
a Remove the locking spring with a pair of tweezers.
b Remove the filter.
c Remove the washer.
d Wash and rinse the interior of the gauge head with alcohol. Repeat twice.
e Clean the filter with alcohol.
f Allow the gauge head and filter to dry thoroughly.
g Reassemble the gauge head.

3 Remount the Pirani 2 gauge and connect the cable.
4 Follow the procedure in Section10-8-7-1 Pirani 2 gauge (chamber) calibration on page306

to calibrate the Pirani 2 gauge.
10-8-7-3 Pirani 1 gauge (backing) calibration

1 The diffusion pump must be at atmospheric pressure. If not, follow the procedure in
Section10-7-2 Shutting down the vacuum system on page298 and Section10-9-4 Venting
the vacuum system on page 309 to vent and shut down the vacuum system.
2 At the TPG 300, press sensor to select Pirani 1 readout, A1 (backing pressure).
3 Loosen four screws on the front panel of the TPG 300 and carefully pull the unit out of
the rack. Do not stretch the cables which are connected at the rear panel.
4 If necessary adjust the ATM screw at the 1 TPR input on the PI 300 module until the
readout is 1.0E03 ±0.2E03 mbar (1.0E05 ±0.2E05 Pa).
5 Press the PUMP key and verify the pumping sequence.
6 Check also that the Pirani 2 (A2) counts down when the pressure is falling. This will be
seen only when the system is roughing.
7 Monitor the readout of the backing pressure as it slowly drops. Compare to earlier record
that the readout is reasonable (< 2x10-1 mbar). It is not necessary to calibrate high
vacuum.
10-8-7-4 Pirani 1 gauge (backing) cleaning

1 Remove the Pirani 1 gauge (see Section 10-9-7 Pirani 1 gauge (backing) on page 312).
2 To clean the Pirani 1 gauge Head (see Figure 10-9):
a Remove the locking spring with a pair of tweezers.
b Remove the filter.
c Remove the washer.
d Wash and rinse the interior of the gauge head with alcohol. Repeat twice.
e Clean the filter with alcohol.
f Allow the gauge head and filter to dry thoroughly.
g Reassemble the gauge head.
3 Remount the Pirani 1 gauge and connect the cable, see Section 10-9-7-2 Insertion
procedure on page 312.
4 Follow the procedure in Section 10-8-7-3 Pirani 1 gauge (backing) calibration on page 307
above to calibrate the Pirani 1 gauge.

10-8-8 Overhaul of Penning gauge

Maintenance of the Penning gauge is restricted to cleaning as described below.
Jumps in the pressure readout normally indicate that the anode pin and the ionization chamber
in the Penning gauge are dirty.
10-8-8-1 Cleaning procedure

To clean the Penning gauge:
1 Remove the Penning gauge (see Section 10-9-8 Penning gauge (chamber) on page 312).
2 Clean the ionizing compartment and the center anode pin with Scotch Brite.
3 Rinse the interior of the Penning gauge with alcohol.
4 Allow the interior to dry thoroughly.
5 Mount the Penning gauge again and connect the cable.
6 No calibration is necessary.
10-9-1 Safety precautions
runs.
WARNING! Radioactive waste
Cleaning tissue, rubber gloves, cotton tops or other items used for cleaning inside the
vacuum chamber are radioactive.
Dispose of these items in accordance with federal, state and/or other local regulations.
WARNING! Compressed air
Always disconnect the compressed air supply at the cyclotron support cabinet before
removing any air-controlled vacuum components.

CAUTION! Cleanliness
The cleaner all surfaces inside the vacuum chamber are, as well as all other components
that get in contact with the vacuum system, the better the end pressure will be.
Always use rubber or latex gloves when you work with vacuum components.
10-9-2 Tools and accessories

The following tools and accessories are required for disassembly and reassembly of vacuum
system components:
• Socket wrench: 8, 10 mm
• Lint-free tissues
• Rubber or latex gloves
10-9-3 Spare parts

Before starting disassembly work, make sure that the following parts are available:
• SEAL 10 KF
• SEAL 25 KF
• SEAL 250 KF
• SEAL 40 KF
• O-RING SET
Seals and O-rings should be replaced, if required, before reassembling vacuum components.
10-9-4 Venting the vacuum system
CAUTION!
Make sure that the diffusion pump has cooled down before venting the vacuum system.
1 Shut down the vacuum system, see Section 10-7-2 Shutting down the vacuum system
on page 298.
2 Check that the diffusion pump has cooled down (4 hours after shutdown). Touch the
heating element at the bottom of the diffusion pump lightly (see Figure 10-10). The
diffusion pump should not be more than “hand warm” before proceeding.
3 Disconnect the cable from the Pirani 1 gauge by turning the connector counter-clockwise
a quarter of a turn.

4 Carefully loosen the wing nuts on the Pirani 1 gauge mounting clamps, and slightly tilt
the gauge to bleed air into the diffusion pump.
CAUTION!
Bleed the diffusion pump carefully in order to avoid contamination in the vacuum system.
Figure 10-10: Venting the vacuum system
5 Check that the Pirani 1 O-ring is clean and undamaged. If required, clean or replace.
Apply a thin layer of vacuum grease to the O-ring.
6 Mount the Pirani 1 gauge and fasten the clamps.

10-9-5 Disconnecting the compressed air supply

Before the Pirani and Penning gauges are removed, the compressed air supply (that drives
the gauges) has to be disconnected. At the compressed air manifold in the Cyclotron Support
Cabinet, open the VACSY valve by moving it towards the panel. The compressed air supply is
disconnected at the same time as the tubing is vented.
Figure 10-11: Disconnecting the compressed air supply
10-9-6 Pirani 2 gauge (chamber)
10-9-6-1 Removal procedure

1 Shut down and vent the vacuum system, Section 10-7-2 Shutting down the vacuum
system on page 298 and Section 10-9-4 Venting the vacuum system on page 309.
2 Disconnect the cable from the Pirani 2 gauge by turning the connector counter-clockwise
a quarter of a turn.
3 Loosen the wing nuts on the mounting clamps of the Pirani 1 gauge and remove the
clamps.
4 Remove the Pirani 2 gauge.
5 Clean the O-ring surface with alcohol.
6 Clean the O-ring with alcohol and apply a thin layer of vacuum grease.

10-9-6-2 Insertion procedure

1 Install the new Pirani gauge and attach the cable connector.
2 Calibrate the Pirani 2 gauge, see Section 10-8-7-1 Pirani 2 gauge (chamber) calibration
on page 306.
10-9-7 Pirani 1 gauge (backing)

system on page 298 and Section 10-9-4 Venting the vacuum system on page 309 (this
procedure includes loosening the Pirani 1 gauge).
2 Remove the Pirani 1 gauge.

1 Install the new Pirani 1 gauge and connect the cable.
2 Calibrate the Pirani 1 gauge, see Section 10-8-7-3 Pirani 1 gauge (backing) calibration
on page 307.
10-9-8 Penning gauge (chamber)

2 Disconnect the cable at the Penning gauge.
3 Loosen the clamps and remove the Penning gauge.

1 Install the new Penning gauge and connect the cable.
2 No calibration of the Penning gauge is necessary.

10-9-9 Vacuum valves

The backing and roughing valves are the same type and the replacement procedures are
similar.

2 Disconnect the compressed air supply, see Section10-9-5 Disconnecting the compressed
air supply on page 311.
3 Remove the compressed air tubing from the valve: push the tube fitting towards the
connector and pull out the tube.
4 Using a wrench, loosen and remove the T-connector (backing valve) or elbow connector
(roughing valve), see illustration to the left.
5 Disconnect the cable from the valve by turning the ring on the connector.
6 Loosen the wing nuts on the mounting clamps of both valve ports.
7 Note the position of the valve, then remove the valve.
8 Check the condition of the O-rings. Replace, if required (“SEAL 40 KF”).
9 Clean the O-rings with alcohol and apply a thin layer of vacuum grease. The O-rings
must be absolutely free from dust.

1 Install the new valve in the correct position and fasten the mounting clamps.
2 Attach the cable and fasten the connector.
3 Install the T-connector or elbow connector in the compressed air port.
4 Connect the compressed air line(s): slide the tube into the fitting until it butts against the
inside shoulder.

10-9-10 Oil mist filter
10-9-10-1 DUO 20
Refer to MINItrace Service Manual – OEM Manuals (dir. 2233002-100).
10-9-10-2 DUO 016
Removal procedure
WARNING!
The diffusion pump and the rotary pump are hot during operation. Allow 4 hours cool-down
time before starting any service work.
2 Check that the rotary pump has cooled down.
3 For access to the oil mist filter, carefully move the pump outward without stretching the
vacuum hoses.
Figure 10-12: Replacing the oil mist filter
4 Loosen the wing nut and remove the clamp.
5 Remove the oil mist filter.
6 Check the condition of the O-ring, replace if required.
7 Clean the O-ring and apply a thin layer of vacuum grease.
8 Check the oil levels in the pump and motor compartment sight glasses. Both sight glasses
should be 1/2 to 3/4 full. If required, refill with vacuum oil (see Section 10-9-12 Rotary
pump oil on page 317).

Insertion procedure
1 Install the new oil mist filter and attach the clamp.
2 Fasten the wing nut.
10-9-11 Diffusion pump oil (Santovac)
WARNING!
runs.
10-9-11-1 Drain the old oil

2 Disconnect the compressed air supply, see Section10-9-5 Disconnecting the compressed
air supply on page 311.
3 Check that the diffusion pump has cooled down: touch the heating element at the bottom
of the diffusion pump lightly.
4 Remove the diffusion pump, see Section10-9-15 Diffusion pump maintenance on page319.
5 Disconnect the backing line: loosen the clamp at the fore vacuum port and remove the
valve assembly (backing valve, roughing valve, Pirani 1 gauge). Carefully place the
assembly on the floor.
6 Place absorbent material under the drain plug to collect spillage during the draining.
7 Place a waste can under the drain plug.
8 Open the drain plug and drain the old pump oil.
9 When finished, pour the oil into, for example, an empty oil container.
10 Dispose of the old oil according to federal, state and/or local regulations for radioactive
waste.

Figure 10-13: Diffusion pump
10-9-11-2 Refill the diffusion pump

1 Clean the diffusion pump internally. Refer to the manufacture’s manual for disassembly
and cleaning instructions.
2 Refit the drain plug.
3 Open the filler plug/dipstick at the pump fluid filler neck (or fill through the fore vacuum
port).
4 Make sure that the diffusion pump is positioned upright.
5 Slowly refill pump fluid until the dip stick is covered to about 6.5 mm from the top (about
0.5 l).
Note!
The pump fluid spreads only slowly within the diffusion pump. If the oil is warm (not hot),
it flows more easily. The actual pump fluid level can be read about 3 minutes after filling.
6 Wipe any dust or residue from the open end of the cross-piece and the fore vacuum
port.
7 Always replace the two O-rings in the pump fluid filler neck and drain plug, see
Figure 10-13. Check the condition of the other O-rings, replace if necessary.
8 Apply a light coat of vacuum grease to the O-ring, and reconnect the metal hose to the
fore vacuum port.

10-9-12 Rotary pump oil
WARNING!
runs.
10-9-12-1 DUO 20
Replace operating fluid according to instructions in MINItrace Service Manual – OEM Manuals
(dir. 2233002-100).
10-9-12-2 DUO 016
Drain the old oil

2 Disconnect the vacuum hoses.
3 Open the drain plug at the end of the pump and drain the pump (see Figure 10-14).
4 Open the drain plug at the motor and drain the motor.
5 Dispose of the old oil according to federal, state and/or local regulations for radioactive
waste.
6 Refit the drain plugs.

Figure 10-14: Replacing rotary pump oil
Motor compartment Pump compartment
Filler cap
Filler cap
Sight glass
Sight glass
Drain plug
Drain plug
Fill new rotary pump oil

1 Rinse inside of the pump and motor with some new oil.
2 Open the filler cap on the motor compartment and pour in new pump oil. Fill until the
sight glass appears 3/4 full, about 1.1 l.
3 Open the filler cap on the pump compartment and pour in new pump oil. Fill until the
sight glass appears 3/4 full, about 1.7 l.
4 Refit the filler caps.
10-9-13 O-rings
Worn out or damaged O-rings should be replaced where applicable during disassembly and
reassembly work. An O-ring is acceptable if it is elastic and without cracks. Clean the O-ring
and apply a very thin layer of vacuum grease before reassembly.
10-9-14 Vacuum seals

Worn out or damaged vacuum seals should be replaced where applicable during disassembly
and reassembly work. The vacuum seal is acceptable if it is elastic and without cracks. Clean
the vacuum seal and apply a very thin layer of vacuum grease before reassembly.
CAUTION!
Never use metal tools when you remove an O-ring or seal from an aluminum body, there
can be scratches on the surface.

10-9-15 Diffusion pump maintenance
Figure 10-15: Diffusion pump
10-9-15-1 Prepare for disassembly of diffusion pump

1 At the vacuum and cooling control panel, press the OFF key.
2 Allow the pump to cool down for 4 hours. This is to protect the oil from oxidation and
carbonization on the surfaces of the inside of the diffusion pump.
WARNING!
Hot oil must not be exposed to air
CAUTION!
Keep all cabling away from the hot surface of the diffusion pump.

3 In the Vacuum Control Unit (VCU), unscrew the screws for the lower alu-panel and switch
off Circuit Breaker CB3 (diffusion pump) and CB1 (rotary pump). Also turn off the Circuit
breaker CSC on the Control Cabinet.
Figure 10-16: Circuit breakers
4 Make sure that the diffusion pump not is hot.
5 Ventilate the diffusion pump by removing the Pirani 1 gauge (backing), see Section 10-9-7
Pirani 1 gauge (backing) on page 312. Tilt the Pirani gauge slowly to let air into the diffusion
pump while preventing contaminants from entering the pump.
6 Disconnect all the electrical wiring on the diffusion pump:
a Mains power connector.
b The temperature sensor using a 3 mm hex key to remove the cover and a 7 mm
wrench to remove the sensor.
c Connectors to the valves.

7 At the cooling water system, close the valves (marked Vacuum) for cooling water to the
vacuum system: first the PRESSURE line (the upper one), and then the RETURN line (the
lower one).
Figure 10-17: Water valves
8 At the diffusion pump, disconnect the piping for cooling water. Use a small bucket, or
similar, for waste-water from the piping.
10-9-15-2 Removal of diffusion pump
WARNING! Heavy object
The diffusion pump weighs 30 kg. Two people are needed when lifting it.
1 Place a roller plate or wooden lumber (thickness about 30 mm) underneath the pump
so it cannot fall down when it is loose.
2 At the air manifold, close the valves for compressed air to the diffusion pump valves.
3 Disconnect the vacuum hose from the rotary pump.
4 Disconnect the rotary pump and remove it.
5 Loosen the pump house from the vacuum chamber in these steps:
a Unscrew the two outer, upper M10-screws and replace them with guide pins (GEPS
part no 909262, CAC206-33014-00-4)
b Unscrew the remaining four screws.
c Carefully loose the pump house (including the pump).
d Drag the unit out from its position, and be careful not to scratch the sealing area.

6 Mark the position of the diffusion pump on the baffle before unscrewing the M10-nuts
holding the diffusion pump.
7 Unscrew the clamps that attach the diffusion pump to the baffle crosswise and with
small steps. Take care about the O-ring between the baffle and the pump.
8 If the pump oil has been spread all over inside the vacuum system, you also have to
separate the baffle from the pump house. Mark the position before unscrewing the nuts.
10-9-15-3 Disassembly of diffusion pump

Refer to the manufacturer’s manual (Balzers DIF 250 l Operating Manual) for a detailed
description of the dismounting procedure. A condensed description is provided below:
1 Drain the diffusion pump oil, see Section10-9-11 Diffusion pump oil (Santovac) on page315.
2 Fasten an M5 screw in the center hole on the jet system cover.
3 Remove the two peripheral screws from the cover.
4 Lift off the jet system cover by the M5 screw.
5 Remove the spring.
6 Fasten an M6 screw in the center hole on top of the jet system.
CAUTION! Fragile parts
The soft aluminum pieces on the jet system are fragile.
Be very careful when handling the jet system.
7 Holding the M6 screw, pull out the jet system.
8 Turn the jet system upside down.
9 Remove the locking spring on the shaft and pull out the shaft.
10 Make notes how the jet system fits together.
11 Disassemble the jet system.
12 Clean the jet system and the inside of the diffusion pump. Please see Section 10-8-3-3
Diffusion pump cleaning procedure on page 303.

10-9-15-4 Reassembly of diffusion pump

1 Re-grease (slightly) all O-rings and replace if necessary during the reassembly. Make
sure that there is no dust on the O-rings.
2 Carefully assemble the jet system and mount the diffusion pump in reverse order (see
Section 10-9-15-3 Disassembly of diffusion pump on page 322.
3 Fill the diffusion pump with new pump oil; the fill volume is 0.5 l. See Section 10-9-11-2
Refill the diffusion pump on page 316.
10-9-15-5 Reinstallation of diffusion pump

1 Attach the diffusion pump to the baffle. Re-grease (slightly) all O-rings and sealing (replace
them if necessary).
2 Make sure that the marks on the connection between the diffusion pump and the baffle
are in line. Then fasten the clamps crosswise and with small steps.
3 Carefully lift the diffusion pump back into position. Use a roller plate or wooden lumber
(about 30 mm) underneath to reach the correct level.
4 Carefully put the pump assembly back in position. Use the guide pins for positioning the
pump house.
5 Screw back the M10-screws and unscrew the guide pins.
6 Put back and connect the rotary pump.
7 Connect the tubing for the compressed air on the diffusion pump. Make sure that the
tubing are correctly mounted.
8 Connect the piping for the cooling water on the diffusion pump.
9 Open the valve at the air manifold for the compressed air to the valves for the diffusion
pump.
10 Open the valves at the water manifold: first the RETURN line (lower), and then the
PRESSURE line (upper) for cooling water to the diffusion pump. Make sure that there is
no water leakage.
11 Connect all the electrical wiring for the diffusion pump, including the temperature sensor.
12 Reinstall the cleaned or new Pirani gauge and connect it, see Section 10-9-6-2 Insertion
procedure on page 312.
13 Switch on the Circuit Breakers, CB3 and CB1, in the Vacuum Control Unit (VCU),

10-9-16 Diffusion pump heating elements – attachment procedure

For spare part numbers, refer to the spare parts listed for each sub systems in MINItrace
Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
10-9-16-1 Furnished materials

See Figure 10-18 for
• Teflon glide plate (thickness 8 mm) with grooves for packing and knitted copper tube (RF
seal). The plate should be attached to the surface of the pump house to support when
you turn the DP around the upper left fastener point.
• Support washer to keep the gap between DP housing and vacuum chamber in service.
• DP support: A construction of steel tubes and plates to support the DP in service position.
• 2ea. hex head bolt (MC6S 10x40 fzb).
• 1ea. hex head bolt (MC6S 6x16 fzb).
• 1ea. hex head set screw/stud (P6SS 10x50 fzb).
• 1ea. nut (M6M M10 fzb).
• Washer BRD 6.7 × 16 × 1.5.
• Hex wrench 8 mm.
10-9-16-2 Special tools and test equipment

N/A
10-9-16-3 Field supplied materials

• Standard hand tools
• MINItrace Service Manual – Maintenance (dir. 2233000-100) (this manual)
• MINItrace Service Manual – Drawings and Parts Lists (dir. 2233001-100)
Note!
All removed parts or waste that is radioactive shall be handled and disposed in accordance
with (I/A/W) local laws and restrictions. Please refer to Appendix B General radiation safety
aspects and Appendix C MINItrace radiation safety aspects for further instructions during
work with radioactive equipment/parts.

10-9-16-4 Dismounting
Note!
All numbers inside brackets/parenthesis refers to pos. balloons on drawing CAC206-31001-04-1,
except for if other reference is stated.
Action Check
1. Shut down MINItrace cyclotron, ventilate vacuum chamber (27) and

let DP (37) cool down to maintainable temperature in accordance
with (I/A/W/) the EHS regulations (min. time 4 hours).
2. Perform actions according to Section 10-9-15-1 Prepare for disas-

sembly of diffusion pump on page319, from item 1 up to and includ-
ing item 7.
3. Dismount the cable duct by the radiation shield and cut the inner
stripes/cable ties that retain the cooling tubes for DP (37).
4. Remove the three upper screws (61) (use the hex wrench supplied
with the spare part, see Figure 10-18, item 1) and install stud (see
Figure 10-18, item 8) with nut (see Figure 10-18, item 5) in the middle
of the upper holes (see Figure 10-19). Verify that the stud (item 8) is
securely fastened.
Figure 10-18: Furnished materials
1: Hex wrench
2: Glide plate
5: Nut
6: Screws
7: Screw
8: Stud
9: Washer
10. Support washer
Details from DWG CAC206-33016-00-3

Action Check
5. Install two screws (see Figure 10-18, item 6) in the two remaining
upper holes (see Figure 10-19). Verify that there is about 15 mm
gap/play between the two screw heads (see Figure 10-19) and DP
housing (29).
Figure 10-19: DP housing upper screws
Action Check
6. Remove the three lower screws (61) and back off nut on upper stud
until DP housing (29) touches the head of upper screws. See Fig-
ure 10-19.
7. Press the support washer on the upper left screw between DP

housing and vacuum chamber. See Figure 10-19.
8. Restrain DP (37) and install glide plate (see Figure 10-18, item 2) from
below and upwards (see Figure 10-20).
CAUTION! Be careful not to damage sealing surface on vacuum
chamber (27), O-ring (6), the contact spring (36) and connecting plate
on DP housing (29). Verify that the three rivet nuts enters the lower
screw holes on DP housing (29) so that glide plate (see Figure 10-
20) is mounted in the right position.

Figure 10-20: Glide plate
Action Check
9. Install the screw with washer (see Figure 10-18, item 7) in the middle
hole and tighten, then remove the stud (see Figure 10-19) and right
upper screw (see Figure 10-19) to make it possible to turn DP (37)
outwards (see Figure 10-21).
Figure 10-21: DP in its outwards position, supported by DP support

Action Check
10. Prepare the support (see Figure 10-21) by placing it on the floor on
the right side of the DP (37). Carefully turn out the DP (37) and place
the support so that the bended plate leans on the DP (37). The DP
(37) is now in service position (see Figure 10-21). DP (37)
heater(s)/element(s) may now be replaced in accordance with en-
closed INFICON instructions (see Figure 10-22).
(For further information on the diffusion pump, see the Inficon diffusion pump PDI 250-W
manual in MINItrace Service Manual – OEM Manuals (dir. 2233002-100). OEM = Original
Manufacturer Equipment)
10-9-16-5 Mounting
Action Check
11. Lift the DP (37) and remove the support (see Figure 10-21). Carefully
turn the DP (37) to upright position and fasten right upper screws
(see Figure 10-19) and stud (Figure 10-19).
12. Remove the screw (see Figure 10-18, item 7) that retains the glide
plate (see Figure 10-18, item 2). Retain the DP (37) and remove the
glide plate (see Figure 10-20).
13. Remove support washer.
14. Install the nut (see Figure 10-19) to the stud (Figure 10-19), and turn
it until the DP housing (29) is flush with the vacuum chamber (27).
Mount the three lower screws (61) and tighten.
15. Remove the two upper screws (see Figure 10-19) and install the
original screws (61). Remove the stud (see Figure 10-19) and nut
(Figure 10-19) and reinstall the last of the original screws (61).
Tighten all six screws to the correct torque.
16. Perform actions according to Section 10-9-15-5 Reinstallation of

diffusion pump on page 323, from item 10 up to and including
item 13.
17. Reinstall the cable duct and install new stripes/cable ties at the
cooling tubes for the DP (37).
18. Wipe the MINItrace clean from possible contamination that might
have occurred during implementation of the spare part. Perform a
production test and return the system to operator/customer.

Figure 10-22: INFICON instructions

10-10 Connector lists

Not included in this manual.

The drawings listed in Table 10-7 are included in the MINItrace Service Manual – Drawings
and Parts Lists (dir. 2233001-100).
Table 10-7: Vacuum system drawings
Sub sys- Drawing name Drawing Parts list

tem
Vacuum Vacuum System Assembly CAC 206-31001-xx-1 CAC 206-36001
Vacuum Vacuum System Wiring Diagram CAC 206-54001-xx-3

Table 10-8: Vacuum system manufacturer’s documents
Device Description Manufacturer Document
DIF 250 Diffusion Pump Balzers/Inficon Operating Instructions
DUO 20 Rotary Pump Pfeiffer Service Instructions
TPR 010 Pirani Gauge Balzers Operating Instruction
TPG 300 Vacuum Con- Balzers Configuration/Installation/Operation/Techn. Data

trol Unit
BVB 250 P Butterfly Valve Inficon Operating Manual
EVL 040 P/PX Angle Valve Pfeiffer Operating Manual
EVC 110M Angle valve Pfeiffer Operating Manual

11 ION SOURCE AND CENTRAL REGION
Note!
Dummy Dee 4 (DD4) is not included in systems with serial number 28791 and higher.

The ion source system comprises the ion source (mounted in the center of the cyclotron) and
the Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC).
When
• fed with H2 gas and
• activated by the Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC)
the ion source produces negative ions (H-). These ions are picked up and accelerated in orbits,
guided by the magnet field and the radiofrequent electric field. The electric power, the ion
source gas and the cooling water (water from the water cooling system is used to remove
heat from the ion source system) is brought to the ion source by means of the ion source
system assembly, see Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1: Ion source assembly
Figure 11-2 shows the ion source assembly in place inside the vacuum chamber.
11 Ion source and central region 331

Figure 11-2: Ion source and central region
332 11 Ion source and central region

11-2 Overview
WARNING! High voltages
The ion source is supplied with high voltage of up to 3000 V.
Do not remove the ion source cable when the ion source is powered up.
WARNING! Radiation
Dust and fragments inside the vacuum chamber can be highly radioactive. The surface
of the vacuum chamber can also be contaminated.
Always use protective clothes, gloves and goggles when working inside the vacuum
chamber.
WARNING! Explosive gas
Hydrogen (H2) gas is explosive at certain mixing proportions with air. No open flames!
Check ventilation before starting production.
Close the H2 (ion source gas) main valve after production.
In case of unexpected pressure drop in the H2 bottle, always find the cause of the leak.
Typical beam current levels on the beam probe (“flip” probe) at the center of the cyclotron
are shown in Table 11-1:
Table 11-1: Typical beam current levels
I-arc (mA) Beam current (µA)
500 30–40
1000 80–110
1500 130–170
2000 165–
Conditions: Gas pressure on the H2 ion source gas supply is 6 bar.

11-2 Overview
11-3 Ion source
11-3-1-1 Ion source

A plasma is built up between the two opposite cathodes in line with the magnetic field, which
keeps the plasma arc concentrated. The cathodes are galvanically connected to the negative
output of the Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC). The housing of the ion source (anode) is at
ground potential.
The plasma column and the cathodes are put in a closed volume in order to maintain the
gas pressure without loading the cyclotron vacuum system excessively. The only opening to
the cyclotron vacuum system is the so called slit, which is a small opening centered around
the cyclotron mid-plane.
Negative ions will basically only exist in the outer “shell” of the plasma (PIG discharge) and
due to that, a concentration of negative ions will appear in the slit opening. The ions can be
extracted from the ion source by a positive potential. In order to define the edge of the plasma
with respect to the slit, a restriction is included, which defines the outer boundary of the
plasma.
Figure 11-3: Ion source
Cathode
Restriction
Slit
H

PSARC + Cyclotron
mid plane
Plasma
Cathode
2
H
The position of each slit defines the starting point for the acceleration of the particles. This
must be carefully determined to match the accelerator parameters (particle, magnet field,
RF field and frequency).

11-3 Ion source
The arc current supplied from the PSARC controls the output beam current from the ion
source. The gas flow into the source effects the beam intensity but is normally set to a fix
value.
Across the ion source a potential drop is developed, caused by electron emission from the
cathode surfaces. In the operating range of the PSARC, the ion source will then act as a
negative load resistance for the PSARC.
11-3-1-2 Central region

Ions are extracted from the slits when a positive potential is applied to the pullers. The pullers
are part of the RF acceleration structures (Dees) and will follow the alternating potential on
the Dees.
The RF voltage presents a positive potential once per period. Ions leave the ion source during
this phase and are accelerated in orbits guided by the magnet field and by the shape of the
central region electrodes. The beam time pattern will thus be pulsed with a pulse frequency
equal to the RF frequency.
Figure 11-4: Central region
Dummy Dee:s Dee 1

First
beam
orbits
Ion source
Dee2 Central region
Note!
Only three dummy dees from systems S/N 28791.

11-3 Ion source
11-4 Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC)

A commercially available unit from Glassman High Voltage Inc. supplies the ion source with
constant current. There are three different power supply models (see Figure 11-5):
• PS/GEMS-02A (introduced in 2017)
• PS/GEMS-01 (discontinued in 2017)
• PS/PK003R1.3 (discontinued in 2003)
Figure 11-5: PSARC front panel, all three models
PS/GEMS-02A PS/GEMS-01
HIGH VOLTAGE
SCALE MONITORS
POWER HIGH VOLTAGE
ON
2 AMP/2 kV VOLTAGE
ON ON
1.3 AMP/3 kV CURRENT
POWER
GLASSMAN HIGH VOLTAGE, INC. GLASSMAN HIGH VOLTAGE, INC.
PS/PK003R1.3
ENABLE
POLARITY METER DAMPING TREND METER DAMPING
ON
POS NEG
HIGH VOLTAGE
STANDBY
800 290
REMOTE
OFF / RESET PROGRAMMING MILLIAMPERES KILOVOLTS
INTERLOCK ENABLE
CONTROL CONTROL
I mA
O EXTERNAL kV
POWER
SERIES PK GLASSMAN HIGH VOLTAGE, INC.
For information on model PS/GEMS-02A, see Section11-4-1 Model PS/GEMS–02A on page 337.
For information on model PS/GEMS-01, see Section 11-4-2 Model PS/GEMS–01 on page 339.
For information on model PS/PK003R1.3, see Section11-4-3 Model PS/PK003R1.3 on page341.

11-4-1 Model PS/GEMS–02A
The high voltage connector (J1) supplies lethal voltage of up to 3000 V DC, even when
power is off.
Do not attempt to make or remove any high voltage connections to the PSARC until the
load and the PSARC have been discharged (grounded). It may take up to 60 seconds to
discharge the PSARC if it is unloaded.
Table 11-2: PSARC specifications
Max output current 2A
Max output voltage 2 kV
Current stability 1%
Type of cooling Air
Heat load to air < 1 kW
Mains input 230 V AC 50/60 Hz
Figure 11-6: PSARC front panel PS/GEMS-02A
POWER HIGH VOLTAGE
ON ON
GLASSMAN HIGH VOLTAGE, INC.

The PSARC is a switched power supply delivering constant current to the ion source. Normally,
the PSARC is remote-controlled from the General Control Unit (GCU).
For details on the PSARC refer to the Glassman instruction manual PS/GEMS-02A.
11-4-1-3 Jumpers and switches

Terminal Block TB1 on the rear panel should have a strap between terminals 1 and 2. See
Figure 11-7.

11-4-1-4 Rear panel

The PSARC rear panel has connectors J1, J2, and J3, terminal block TB1, fuses F1 and F2,
cable shoe E1 (ground), fan, and power switch.
Figure 11-7: PSARC rear panel
TB1 POWER ON
J3
1
2
J1 3
4 F1
J2
F2
E1
GROUND
Table 11-3: PSARC panel connectors
Connection Connected to
J1 Vacuum chamber (up to 3000 V DC)
J2 Mains input (230 V AC 50/60 Hz)
J3 GCU
TB1 Current selector

Strap between 1 and 2 gives 2.0 A
E1 (Ground) Protective ground
Table 11-4: PSARC fuses
Fuse Rating Description
F1 6 A, 250 V slow blow Breaks the input power to PSARC

11-4-2 Model PS/GEMS–01
The high voltage connector (J1) supplies lethal voltage of up to 3000 V DC, even when
power is off.
Table 11-5: PSARC specifications
Max output current 2A
Max output voltage 2 kV
Current stability 1%
Type of cooling Air
Heat load to air < 1 kW
Mains input 230 V AC 50/60 Hz
Figure 11-8: PSARC front panel PS/GEMS-01
HIGH VOLTAGE
SCALE MONITORS
ON
2 AMP/2 kV VOLTAGE
1.3 AMP/3 kV CURRENT
POWER
GLASSMAN HIGH VOLTAGE, INC.

the PSARC is remote-controlled from the General Control Unit (GCU).
For details on the PSARC refer to the Glassman instruction manual PS/GEMS-01.

Terminal Block TB1 on the rear panel should have a strap between terminals 1 and 2. See
Figure 11-9.

11-4-2-4 Rear panel

The PSARC rear panel has connectors J1, J2, and J3, terminal block TB1, fuses F1 and F2,
cable shoe E1 (ground), and fans.
Figure 11-9: PSARC rear panel
Power On
TB1 F1
J3
J1 J2
1
2
3 F2
4
GROUND
J1 Vacuum chamber (up to 3000 V DC)
J2 Mains input (230 V AC 50/60 Hz)
J3 GCU
TB1 Current selector

Strap between 1 and 2 gives 2.0 A
E1 (Ground) Protective ground
Fuse Rating Description

11-4-3 Model PS/PK003R1.3
Figure 11-10: Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC) front and rear view
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW J1
JHV1
TB2
1
2
3
TB1 F1
1 Power On
2 F2 Indicator
3
4
5 F3
E1

the PSARC is remote-controlled from the General Control Unit (GCU). For details on the PSARC
refer to the Glassman instruction manual.

11-4-3-2 Hazards and warnings
The JHV1 connector supplies lethal voltage of up to 3000 V DC, even when power is off.
Constant current control, featuring
• typical output voltage at 2000 mA is 250 V.
• maximum ratings: 2000 mA/2500 V.

All three REMOTE PROGRAMMING switches on the front panel should be in REMOTE position
(right position, see FRONT VIEW in Figure 11-10), for normal operation from the Master System
or the MINItrace Service System (MSS). Associated indicators will also light when the switches
are in REMOTE position.
11-4-3-5 Rear panel

The PSARC rear panel has connectors J1 and JHV1, terminal blocks TB1 and TB2, fuses F1,
F2, and F3, cable shoe E1, and fans.
J1 Connected to GCU I/O backplane
TB1 Mains input (208 V 3 phase AC)
TB2 Not Used
JHV1 Vacuum chamber/P4 (up to 3000 V DC)
E1 Protective ground
Fuse Rating Nominal voltage Description
F1, F2, F3 20 A, 250 V slow blow 208 V Breaks the input power to PSARC.

11-5 Gas handling system
11-5-1 Theory of operation, operational examples
11-5-1-1 Normal operation

The H2 gas flow to the ion source is controlled by a calibrated leak. The flow will be defined
the pressure of the H2 gas supply. Gas flow ON/OFF is done by an electrically controlled valve.
There is no need of gas flow adjustment but change of the pressure of the H2 gas supply will
allow for changes if that by any reason will be of interest.
The gas control valve is put in the secondary cooling water system section in the right side
cabinet of the radiation shield
11-5-1-2 Turn off gas

As mentioned above the gas is turned on by the control system during beam operation of
the cyclotron.
The H2 gas supply should be furnished with valves in order to be able to close the supply
during weekends and other longer stops (customer responsibility)
Nominal H2 gas supply pressure: 6 bar. This corresponds to a gas flow of about 6 ml/min (at
normal pressure).
11-6 Pipes
The pipes from the gas bottles are made of stainless steel.

Check pressure of H2 gas supply.
Keep track of the H2 usage in order to be sure of a tight system. Possible leaks in the H2 supply
must be found ASAP.
11-8-1 General
The expected planned maintenance interval is at least 3 months, but large variations in system
usage will probably call for a flexibility in maintenance planning.
It is important to note that an ion source may fail suddenly. This is normally related to loose
short circuiting fragments inside the ion source. The problem can normally be cured by a
surge of current into the ion source, burning away the shorting fragment.

The normal deterioration of the ion source refers to cathode wear and widening of the anode
tube slit. The heads of the cathodes (Ta) will loose material during the operation due to
bombardment of ions from the plasma. The lost material will “sputter” onto adjacent surfaces.
The ion source works as long as the cathodes are in place and the cathode heads “cover”
the plasma extension. However, massive loss of cathode material will, depending on the
build-up of sputtering material, slowly change the internal dimensions of the ion source. This
can lead to a drop in output. The risk of short circuits also increases.
The concentration of ions in the anode tube slit also leads to a wear of the slit sides, resulting
in a slow widening of the slit opening. The larger area of the slit results in a lower gas pressure
inside the ion source with a drop in output as a result.
Planned maintenance includes:
• Removal of ion source
• Ion source maintenance: disassembly/inspection/cleaning/reassembly
• Reassembly of the ion source (to end ion source overhaul)
• Reinstallation of the ion source into the cyclotron
• Upper Dee connector assembly
• Functional check
The ion source PM instructions are integrated in Section 11-9 Disassembly/reassembly

procedures on page345. (The instructions are provided as a long check list, from Section11-9-4
Removal of ion source on page 350 to Section 11-9-8 Functional check on page 365.)

See Section 11-9-2 Tools on page 349.
11-8-3 Spare parts

See Section 11-9-3 Spare parts on page 350.


11-9-1 Drawings
Figure 11-11: Central region main parts
D1 = Dee-electrode 1 (“puller”)
DEE 1
D2 = Dee-electrode 2 (“Dee post”)
DD1 = Dummy Dee 1
DD2 = Dummy Dee 2
DD3 = Dummy Dee 3
DD4 = Dummy Dee 4*
DD1 IS = Ion Source
D1 DD4
DD2 D2
DD3
DEE 2
*Removed from S/N 28791
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1 (detail)

Figure 11-12: Central region measurements
Serial numbers
28773–
–28772 28790 28791– Edge of lower
Pos. [mm] Note Dee connector
A 1.5 1.3
B 2.0 1.5
C IS K
3.0 2.7 D2 centred on lower Dee connector
D 3.0 2.7 D2 centred on lower Dee connector (Ion Source tool)
IS tube slit opening centered on IS tool CAC203-33003
E
marking Dee edge
ref. pin hole
F 13.2 13.0 Center pin hole (Ø 1.0 mm)
G 20.5 20.0 of cyclotron
H (29.3) (30.9) (Ø 3.0 mm)
I (30.2) (31.6) E
J 20.6 21.4 21.3 IS
Dee edge ref. pin in contact with lower
K
connector
L 4.0 N/A
M 28.8 30.0 30.6
N 1.0 N/A
Flush to sector
L edge*
Flush to L DD4*
sector edge A
D1
DD1
B
IS
F N
Screen
Center pin hole of
G J cyclotron (Ø 3.0 mm)
M
C D
DD2 DD3
(H) (I)
D2
Flush to Flush to
sector edge sector edge * Only applicable to systems up to
and including S/N 28790

Figure 11-13: Exploded view of central region with ion source
Note!
DD4 removed from system S/N 28791.

Figure 11-14: Ion source assembly

11-9-2 Tools
• Gloves
• Glasses
• Standard hand tools
• Set of hex keys
• Feeler gauges for the different gaps (drills with suitable diameters can be used)
• Tie wraps (handy to remove sputtered material)
• Calipers
• Magnifying glass
• Suitable solvent (for example, alcohol)
• Plastic bag for used parts
• Gamma monitor
• Ion source tool, see Figure 11-15 below (drawing CAC203-33003)
• A set of cylindrical pins
Figure 11-15: Ion source tool

11-9-3 Spare parts

• You will need an anode service kit (IS Gen I) or anode tube with restrictor (IS Gen II).
• You might need central region screws.
• If the ion source is seriously damaged, you need a complete ion source assembly.
For spare part numbers, refer to the spare parts listed for each sub systems in MINItrace
11-9-4 Removal of ion source
11-9-4-1 Shut down the cyclotron and open the vacuum chamber
Action Check
1. In the MSS MAIN MENU, click on the center of the cyclotron to access
the Ion Source and Gas Handling System menu.

Action Check
2. In the Ion Source and Gas Handling System menu:

Click SYSTEM OFF.
3. Click YES in the Message window.

The shutdown process may take up to 10 minutes. When the cyclotron
reaches the Off state, the MAGNET ON lamp on top of the radiation
shield goes off. With the cyclotron in the Off state, the helium cooling
pump is stopped.
4. Turn off power to the PSARC (power switch to 0 position).

Action Check
5. Ventilate the vacuum chamber:

1 at the vacuum and cooling control panel, press the VENT key:
a the High Vacuum Valve (HVV) closes (red).
b the Vent Valve (VV) opens (green).
Note!
The vacuum pumps continues to run.
2 the High Vacuum Valve (HVV) closes (red).
3 the Vent Valve (VV) opens (green).
Note!
The vacuum pumps continues to run.
VV HVV
DP RV
PIR 1
BV
RP
6. Wait for the chamber pressure to reach atmosphere (approx. 1 minute).
7. Disconnect the services to the ion source on the outside of the vacuum
chamber on the lower right hand side (two water quick connections, gas
quick connection and arc voltage connector).
CAUTION!
The lower part of the diffusion pump is very hot.
Keep disconnected tubing and cabling away from the diffusion pump.
8. Open the vacuum chamber, see Section 10-7-1 Open the vacuum

11-9-4-2 Remove the ion source
WARNING! Radiation
Always monitor radiation levels and take all relevant safety precautions to limit the dose
delivered to personnel before starting any work.
Before the ion source can be removed, some of the elements in the central region must be
removed or adjusted in position in order to make necessary space for the removal of the ion
source.
Note!
Numbers printed in bold type refer to item numbers in Figure 11-13 (part of drawing
CAC203-31001) if not otherwise noted.
Action Check
1. Insert a piece of cleaning tissue inside RF Dee 2 (lower Dee) in

order to prevent parts from falling down inside the Dee stem.
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail)
2. Remove the upper Dee connector 4 by first loosening the

central clamping screw 18 and then the four outer fixing
screws 23 with spring washers.
Remove screen 25 by carefully pulling it out.
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail)
3. Carefully remove the puller electrode 8 and put aside for further
inspection. Do not drop!
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail)

Action Check
4. Loosen the Dummy Dee 4 (DD4) and push it gently towards a

larger diameter (in order to get free space for the ion source)
and lock in position by tightening one of the fixing screws 22.
Note!
DD4 removed from system S/N 28791.
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail)
5. With Ion Source Adjustment Tool:

Loosen and remove screws 17 (3 pcs) and screen 9.
Unscrew the knurled screw. Push the assembly towards the
diffusion pump and remove the ion source together with the
Ion Source Adjustment Tool from the chamber. Put the assem-
bly on a suitable clean working bench in the service area.
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail) Without Ion Source Adjustment Tool:
Loosen and remove screws 17 (3 pcs) and screen 9.
Note!
Handle the sealing surface on the inside of the vacuum chamber
carefully. Avoid scratches.
6. Without Ion Source Adjustment Tool:

Loosen and remove screws (item 28, drawing CAC203-31002,
2 pcs).
Handle the ion source assembly with great care. Do not drop!
The head of the ion source is fragile. Errors in the mechanical

Dwg CAC203-31002-08-1
(detail) tolerances might cause gas leakage, reducing the output
performance.
7. Without Ion Source Adjustment Tool:

Carefully lift the ion source head and release from the guiding
pins (Item 26 (2 pcs), drawing CAC203-31002).
Dwg CAC203-31002-08-1
(detail)

11-9-5 Ion source maintenance – disassembly/inspection/cleaning/reassembly
11-9-5-1 Disassembly of the ion source
Note!
Numbers printed in bold type refer to Figure 11-14 (part of drawing CAC203-31002) if not
otherwise noted.
Action Check
1. Note the ion source operation time since last PM.
CAUTION!
Always use gloves and perform maintenance on a clean work bench with good light con-
ditions.
2. Loosen screws 23 (2 pcs) and 34.
3. Remove anode tube 42 with internal anode restrictions and put aside for
later inspection.
4. Disconnect the two cable shoes 2 by loosening the fixing screws 36.
5. Dismount the upper 16 and lower 15 anode section by loosening screws

33 (8 pcs).
6. Dismount the cathode 13 and cathode insulators 20 (2 pcs) from

the upper anode section 16.
7. Dismount the cathode 13 and cathode insulators 20 (2 pcs) from

the lower anode section 15.
11-9-5-2 Inspection of parts
Action Check
1. Check deterioration of cathodes 13 with earlier replaced

cathodes and compare ion source operation time. Determine
whether PM is performed too early or late.
2. Check condition of cathode insulators 20 (4 pcs). If they are in

good condition (white surface without cracks) they can be
reused.
3. Check the slit of the anode tube 42 with feeler gauge and
magnifying glass. If the opening size is <0.35 mm and the an-
ode tube restrictions are in good shape the anode tube can
be reused.

Action Check
4. Check wear of puller (dwg CAC203-31001, item 8, Figure 11-

13). Wear of entrance opening (surface facing the ion source)
will have an effect on ion source performance.
The nominal width of the puller opening is 2.7 mm.
If this measure is >3 mm, a replacement of the puller is recom-
mended.
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail)
5. Make notes of status and the condition of parts, condition and

including reuse of certain parts.
6. Put used parts in a plastic bag, mark bag and store.

These parts will be of importance in future decisions regarding
maintenance planning.
Note!
Always replace parts if you have any doubts about their condi-
tion. Reuse of parts is not recommended but could be a tempo-
rary method to quickly restore operation of the cyclotron.

11-9-5-3 Cleaning procedure
Action Check
1. Remove all sputtered material found …

1) … in the cathode compartments from upper and lower anode
sections (16 and 15 in dwg CAC203-31002)
2) … on the water-cooled flanges (2 pcs) clamping around the
anode body.
Hint 1:
Use a piece of tie wrap; it is hard enough to removed sputtered
material, but will not leave harmful scratches.
Hint 2:
The sputtered material can be quite hard to remove.
CAUTION!
Do not scratch the surfaces. They have a vital function for the
gas tightness of the ion source.
2. Inspect the surfaces with magnifying glass.
3. Make further cleaning if necessary.
Dwg CAC203-31002-08-1
(detail)
4. Remove all loose fragments and other remains from the

cleaning from all parts and put the parts on a clean paper
surface.
Note!
Wet cleaning with solvent is not necessary if the surfaces are
clean. Inspection with magnifying glass will be useful.

11-9-5-4 Reassembly of the ion source (to end ion source overhaul)
Note!
Numbers printed in bold type refer to Figure 11-14 (part of drawing CAC203-31002) if not
otherwise noted.
CAUTION!
Always use gloves and keep new parts clean and free from grease
Carefully inspect the new components. Do not use components that by any reason are not
in perfect condition.
To reassemble the ion source:
Action Check
1. Mount the upper cathode 13 with insulators 20 in the upper

anode section 16. Use screw 18, spring washer 41 and electri-
cal connection 19.
Finger-tighten the screw.
2. Move the cathode assembly back and forth in the upper anode
section 16 in order to center the assembly by use of the recess
for the insulator 20.
3. When fully sure about the centering, pull the screw 18 tight
with cathode 13 and el. connection 19 centered in their groves.
Make screw 18 tight until the electrical connection 19 is fixed
and cannot easily be moved by hand. Check insulator 20
condition afterwards for eventual cracks.
Note!
If you hear a “click-sound” during the actions above there is a
great risk that an insulator has been cracked. Disassembly will
be necessary to ensure conditions of insulators.
Dwg CAC203-31002-08-1 Note!

(detail) During this action a spacer on one side of the cathode stem
will be of help to keep the cathode centered in the grove.
Alignment of the electrical connection in the recess can be done
by hand.
4. Make necessary final trimming of the cathode 13 centering in

the cathode compartment in upper anode section 16 by gently
bending the stem of the cathode.
Make sure that the cathode head is well centered in its com-
partment in the upper anode section 16.
5. Repeat steps 34 to 37 for the lower anode section 15.

Action Check
6. Put the maintained upper 16 and lower 15 anode sections

back onto the main ion source assembly by screws 33 (8 pcs).
Do not tighten the screws.
Note!
Check carefully that connecting copper surfaces are clean.
7. Connect the two cable shoes 2 (2 pcs) with screws 36.

Tighten the screws.
Note!
Check that electrical connections 19 will not move during this
action, in order to avoid accidental short circuit to ground.
8. Fix upper and lower anode sections by screws 23 (2 pcs) and

34. Do not tighten.
9. Finally tighten the screws 33 (8 pcs) successively.

Dwg CAC203-31002-08-1
(detail)
10. Clean the O-ring on the vacuum flange (Item 1, dwg CAC203-
31001, shown in Figure 11-13) and apply a thin coating of
vacuum grease if necessary.
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail)
The ion source is now ready for reinstallation into the cyclotron.

11-9-6 Reinstallation of the ion source into the cyclotron
Note!
CAC203-31001) if not otherwise noted.
Action Check
1. Put a piece of cleaning tissue inside RF Dee 2 (lower Dee) in

order to prevent parts from falling down inside the Dee stem.
Handle the ion source assembly with great care. Do not drop!
The head of the ion source is fragile. Errors in the mechanical

tolerances might cause gas leakage, reducing the output
performance.
Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1
(detail)
2.
Note!
Do not lose the O-ring.
Check the sealing surface on the inside of the vacuum cham-

ber. Clean if necessary.
Note!
Handle the sealing surface on the inside of the vacuum chamber
carefully. Avoid scratches.
Accidentally created scratches crossing the O-ring sealing

surface must be removed. Methods for such corrections are
not described in this section.

Action Check

Gently put the ion source into the cyclotron (without using the
three screws at the vacuum seal). Carefully place the wedge
of the top plate in the track in the middle plate.
Make sure that the wedge on the top plate goes underneath
the flange on the slot in the middle plate.
Tighten (by hand) the knurled screw (that will pull the ion source
toward the puller) until the stop screw touches the middle
plate.
Tighten the three screws in the rear of the ion source that go
into the vacuum chamber. See Figure 11-12.
The ion source should now be in the same position as before
the removal.
Without Ion Source Adjustment Tool:

Put the ion source back.
Tighten the three screws in the rear of the ion source that go
into the vacuum chamber. See Figure 11-12.
The ion source should now be in the same position as before

the removal.
4.
Note!
Actions 5–17 below and the actions in Section 11-9-7 Upper
Dee connector assembly on page 364 are the most important
adjustments of the central region elements. Failure to meet the
requirements will most probably lead to reduced beam perfor-
mance of the cyclotron.
Insert the center ref. pin 15 (diam. 3.0 mm) through the center
hole in the Dee connector 5, and fully into the reference hole
in the magnet pole.

Action Check
5. Insert the ion source tool (see Figure 11-15, drawing CAC203-
33003) carefully on the center ref. pin 15.
1 Push the tool carefully against the lower Dee connector 5.
2 Make sure that the 1 mm Dee edge ref. pin on the tool
can rest on the edge of the lower Dee connector.
Dwg CAC203-33003-02-3
(detail)
3 With Ion Source Adjustment Tool: Use mild force to push
the tool into position. If the tool does not fit, loosen the
knurled screw and adjust with the stop screw.
Without Ion Source Adjustment Tool: Use mild force to

push the tool into position (rest on surface on lower Dee
connector 5). If the tool does not fit, loosen the two ion
source mounting screws 16, and move the ion source
backwards to create necessary space for the tool.

Action Check
6. Adjust carefully the angle of the ion source slit surface and the
position of the ion source, until the slit is centered on the middle
reference mark on the tool, and the slit surface is parallel to
and touching the reference surface of the ion source tool (see
Figure 11-12).
7. Tighten the three ion source clamping screws for angle adjust-
ment (item 23, 2 pcs and item 34, drawing CAC203-31002) and
tighten the knurled screw finger-tight (systems with Ion Source
Adjustment Tool) or the ion source mounting screws 16 (sys-
tems without Ion Source Adjustment Tool) carefully to position
slit and ion source tool flush.
Make sure that the ion source tool is not exposed to excessive
force during these actions.
8. Make a final check of the radial position and angle of the ion
source slit.
9. Remove the ion source tool and center ref. pin 15.
10. Install the puller electrode D1 8 using the screw and the
washer – do not tighten.
11. Carefully insert the center ref. pin 15t hrough the ref. hole on
the puller electrode 8 and further into the magnet pole after
passage of the inner Dee connector 5.
12. Move the puller electrode 8 carefully towards the slit surface;
the puller electrode 8 will be guided by the center ref. pin 15.
13. Set the distance A (see Figure 11-12) between the puller D1
and the slit surface by inserting a suitable cylindrical pin or a
feeler gauge. Lock in position by fixing the screw.
14. Verify the puller-slit distance A. Readjust if necessary.
15. Only for systems up to and including S/N 28790:

Use a ref. pin (diam. 4.0) to measure L (see Figure 11-12)
There should be 1 mm between DD4 and the ion source body
when the ion source tool is in center position.
16. Make sure that the three (four) dummy Dee electrodes are
positioned according to measures (see Figure 11-12).
Readjust if necessary.
17. Remove the center ref. pin 15 carefully – always use a screw-
driver to create a mild counter force on the base section with
the ref. hole on the puller electrode 8 when retracting the
center ref. pin 15.

11-9-7 Upper Dee connector assembly
Note!
CAC203-31001).
Action Check
1. Assemble the upper Dee connector 4 mounted on the two

support plates 10.
Note!
These three parts have probably not been disassembled.
2. Install the upper Dee connector 4. Tighten screws 23 with

flexible washers loosely (4 pcs each).
3. Insert compression screw 18 and tighten loosely. This screw

will guide the position of the outer Dee connector.
4. Tighten the four screws 23 successively with the edges of the

upper Dee connector flush with the Dee-edges.
5. Tighten the compression screw 18 in order to clamp the inner

Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1 and outer Dee connectors around the D1 and D2 electrodes.
(detail)
CAUTION!
Do not over-tighten! This may deform the center sections of

the Dee connectors!
6. Install the screen 25 between the DD1 11 and DD2 13.
Note!
It is important that the screen 25 edges are flush with or lower
than the electrodes DD1 11 and DD2 13 to form a free passage
for the ions.
7. Make final inspections of the working area:

1 Remove the piece of cleaning tissue inside RF Dee 2
(lower Dee). (That was inserted in order to prevent parts
from falling down inside the Dee stem, see page 353).
2 Remove all tools and accessories from the vacuum

chamber.
3 Make necessary cleaning.

Dwg CAC203-31001-09-1 4 Close the vacuum chamber and start the vacuum system
(detail)
(see Section 10-7-4 Start up the MINItrace after vacuum
system maintenance on page 300).

Action Check
8. Connect all ion source external services (power, gas and

cooling water).
9. Check cooling water flow in the ion source circuit.
10. The ion source is ready for operation.
11-9-8 Functional check
11-9-8-1 Check flow regulation
Action Check
1. There is no separate measurement device for the gas flow. However,

the vacuum pressure in the vacuum chamber will differ with gas flow
into the ion source.
The readings below can be used as a guideline, but the accuracy will be
low. It is recommended to note down some readings of the vacuum
pressure in a well working system in order to get a background for future
tests.
Typical values:
• Zero gas flow: 2-5 × 10–7 mbar
• With gas flow (@ 5 bar): 1.8 × 10–5 mbar

11-9-8-2 Ion source test
Action Check
1. After a maintenance action the ion source performance should be

checked by measuring the beam current vs. ion source (I-arc) on the
“flip-in” probe (see Table 11-1).
The numbers given in the specifications should be contained in order
to be able to run maximum beam conditions on target.
If the specifications are not contained the service personnel has to decide
whether the actual performance will be acceptable or not. If not, an
adjustment in accordance to information in this manual is necessary.
Note!
A new ion source or a used ion source which has been exposed to air will
normally provide a higher beam current. This “bonus current” will unfor-
tunately disappear after a couple of hours.
Note!
It is important to know this effect in order to not be fooled on the final
performance after leaving the premises. A “bonus current” of +20% can
be expected.

If the output of the ion source is unsatisfactory, use the Ion Source Ad-
justment Tool hand control to find the best output when running on
probe or target.
If the output of the ion source is still unsatisfactory, open the vacuum
chamber and recheck all measures and the screen plate position (see
Figure 11-12).
Without Ion Source Adjustment Tool:

If the output of the ion source is unsatisfactory, open the vacuum
chamber and recheck all measures (see Figure 11-12).
If everything seems to be in order, a slight trimming of the slit radial
position (measure E, see Figure 11-12) might help. Adjust in radial steps
of 0.2 mm until output is satisfactory.
Note!
Always keep the slit surface parallel to the tool surface.

Not available in this issue of the manual.


The drawings listed in Table 11-10 are included in the MINItrace Service Manual – Drawings
and Parts Lists (dir. 2233001-100).
Table 11-10: Ion source and central region drawings
Sub sys- Drawing name Drawing Parts list

tem
Ion Central Region Ass’y CAC 203-31001-xx-1 CAC 203-36001

source
Ion Ion Source Ass’y CAC 203-31002-xx-1 CAC 203-36002

source
Ion H2 Panel CAC 203-31010-xx-2 CAC 203-36010

source

Table 11-11: Ion source system, manufacturer’s documents
PS/GEMS–02A Power supply Glassman Instruction Manual
PS/GEMS–01 Power supply Glassman Instruction Manual
PS/PK003R1.3 Power supply Glassman Instruction Manual

12 MAGNET SYSTEM

The magnet system comprises the magnet, the coils and the magnet power supply (PSMC).
Figure 12-1: Magnet system
12-1-1 Introduction
The magnet system generates a magnetic field that retains the ion beam in a controlled orbit
during acceleration. The magnet system also focuses the beam.
The magnetic field is generated by the PSMC providing current for the two water cooled
copper coils mounted on poles. The magnet is mounted so that the beam plane is vertical.
One of the side yokes is supported on hinges and can easily be opened for access to the
interior of the system.
Lethal voltage of up to 95 V DC is applied to the cyclotron magnet.
Lock-out and tag-out the PSMC circuit breaker at the control cabinet before servicing
the magnet system.
12 Magnet system 369

WARNING! High current
The magnet power supply is capable of delivering high currents of up to 150 A.
Lock-out and tag-out the PSMC circuit breaker at the control cabinet before servicing
the magnet system.
WARNING! Strong magnetic field
Physical injury can be caused by tools that are attracted to the cyclotron magnet.
Use non-magnetic tools when working in the vicinity of the cyclotron magnet.
WARNING! Strong magnetic field
The magnetic field of the cyclotron magnet can interfere with physiological implants such
as pacemakers.
Persons having physiological implants should not enter the cyclotron room.
CAUTION! Magnetic media
The magnetic field of the cyclotron magnet can erase the information contained on for
example credit cards or other sensitive equipment.
Do not bring these items into the cyclotron room.
Figure 12-2: Warning light for magnet
370 12 Magnet system

12-2-1 General
The magnet system is divided into two parts, the magnet coil and the magnet power supply
(PSMC).
The magnet yoke (vacuum chamber) can be opened as a door. The heavy doors movement
is damped by a adjustable hydraulic damper. An interlock switch indicates if the door is open.
The copper coils and the yoke are water-cooled.
The PSMC delivers up to 150 A of current to the main coils and is made by Danfysik. Normally,
the PSMC is remote controlled via a serial line from the General Control System (GCS). The
PSMC is water-cooled.
Planned maintenance includes:
• Check and adjust the hydraulic door damper. Check the function of the interlock switch.
Look for water leeks.
• At the PSMC, look for water leaks and check cable-connections.
12-2-1-1 Tools and accessories

• Standard hand tools including hex keys
• Gloves
• Suitable solvent (pure alcohol)
• Teflon thread tape (for water connections)
12-2-2 Maintenance on the magnet coil
12-2-2-1 Open the vacuum chamber

See Section 10-7-1 Open the vacuum chamber on page 295.

12-2-2-2 Interlock switch

The interlock switch on the magnet door inform the GCU about if the door is open or closed.
If the door is open there are no possibilities to start up the Magnet Power Supply or the vacuum
system. The information can be seen on the Service System (MSS). See Section 19-7-2 Magnet
system on page 617. Check that the switch has a correct function by studying the magnet
door when the door closes. Check the “LED” at the MSS. Green LED means closed door and
yellow LED means open door. It is possible to adjust the switch-position, but do not let the
switch touch its very bottom when the door is in closed position as this could cause the switch
to brake.
Figure 12-3: Magnet door interlock switch
12-2-2-3 Hydraulic door damper

The hydraulic damper should be adjusted so the door moves in a soft and controlled way. If
it moves too fast the door can pinch someone.
There are two set-screws on the damper which are locked by small hex screws. Check the
movement and adjust if needed.

Figure 12-4: Hydraulic damper
12-2-2-4 Water connections on the magnet

The copper coils and magnet yoke are water cooled. If any of the water connections are going
to be opened, the magnet-water-valves in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet has to be closed.
See Figure 12-4. Use a bucket for drain-water.
1 Check for water leaks on all connections.
2 Check for damage and leaks on tubings, specially in the area around the hot diffusion
pump.
3 Check for leaks on the water manifolds at the coil-connections.
4 If any of the pipes needs to be replaced, use Swagelok 3/8" (9.5 mm) WP 300 PSIG hose.
5 Use Teflon thread tape when reassembling the Swagelok connectors.

Figure 12-5: Water valves in the cyclotron support cabinet
12-2-2-5 Electrical connections on the magnet

The electrical power is connected to the magnet coil via hex-screw-connectors. Check that
the hex screws are tight, and draw them if necessary. This is of special importance when the
cyclotron is newly installed. On a wall inside the radiation shield there is a connection box
(not on very early machines) for more easy access during maintenance.
Figure 12-6: Electrical connections, magnet

Figure 12-7: Magnet connection box
12-2-3 Magnet Power Supply (PSMC)

The PSMC is located in the Control Cabinet (CCAB).
The complete PSMC is a spare part. There is no need for replacement of parts inside the PSMC.
There are two different PSMC models: MPS 883 (older model) and MPS 9700 (newer model).
See Figure 12-8.

Figure 12-8: PSMC models
MPS 9700
3
1
4
2
Part Description Part Description
1 PSMC control unit, front view 3 PSMC control unit, rear view
2 PSMC power unit, front view 4 PSMC power unit, rear view
MPS 883

12-2-3-1 Removal of the PSMC
MPS 9700
The PSMC control unit weighs about 17 kg. Be careful when you move the PSMC control
unit out of and into position.
The PSMC power unit weighs about 22 kg. Two persons, or suitable lifting devices, are
required to lift the PSMC power unit.
1 At the Vacuum Control Unit, press the OFF key.
2 Let the diffusion pump cool down for one hour.
3 Turn off the water valves for the PSMC in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet. See Figure 12-5.
4 Lock-out and tag-out the circuit breaker in the Mains Distribution Panel (MDP) for the
Control Cabinet.
5 Disconnect the 400V MAINS cable at the rear of the PSMC control unit.
6 Disconnect the rest of the cables at the rear of the PSMC control unit.
7 Loosen the screws on the front panel of the PSMC control unit.
8 Carefully pull out the PSMC control unit from the cabinet.
9 Remove the plastic cover at the rear of the PSMC power unit.

10 Measure with a multimeter on the magnet output cables. Make sure that there is no
residual current in the PSMC.
11 Disconnect the magnet output cables.
12 Disconnect and remove all cables from the rear of the PSMC power unit.
13 Put a bucket on the cabinet floor below the PSMC water connections to catch any water
spillage.
14 Disconnect the water INLET and OUTLET hoses from the rear of the PSMC power unit.
15 Loosen the screws on the front panel of the PSMC power unit.
16 Carefully pull out the PSMC power unit from the cabinet.
MPS 883
The PSMC weighs 90 kg.
1 At the Vacuum Control Unit, press the OFF key.
2 Let the diffusion pump cool down for one hour.
3 Turn off the water valves for the PSMC in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet. See Figure 12-5.
4 Lock-out and tag-out the circuit breaker in the Mains Distribution Panel (MDP) for the
Control Cabinet.

5 Remove the cover plate on the front, below the PSMC. The cover plate can interfere with
the water connectors.
6 Disconnect the water hoses. Be prepared for drain-water, use a bucket.
7 Remove the plastic cover and disconnect the magnet output connectors. Remember
the locations of the magnet output connectors.
8 Disconnect the PSMC power input connector and the interface connectors.
9 Put a table, or similar, below the front of the PSMC. The PSMC can fall down when you
pull it out from the cabinet.
10 Loosen the screws on the front panel and pull out the PSMC. Be careful, the PSMC is
heavy.
12-2-3-2 Installation of the PSMC
MPS 9700
1 Carefully put the PSMC power unit into the cabinet and push the PSMC power unit into
position.
2 Tighten the four screws on the front panel of the PSMC power unit.
3 Carefully put the PSMC control unit into the cabinet and push the PSMC control unit into
position.
4 Tighten the four screws on the front panel of the PSMC control unit.
5 Connect the water INLET and OUTLET hoses to the rear of the PSMC power unit.
6 Connect all signal cables at the rear of the PSMC units according to the marking.
Note!
The connections ANALOGUE CONTROL X9 and LOCAL CONTROL X10 are not used.
7 Connect the ground cables to both PSMC units.
8 Connect the magnet output cables to the PSMC power unit. Make sure the connections
are securely fastened.
9 Install the plastic cover on the magnet output connectors.
10 Connect the power cable to the PSMC control unit.
11 Turn on the water valves for the PSMC in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet.
12 Turn on the circuit breaker in the Mains Distribution Panel (MDP) for the Control Cabinet.

MPS 883
1 Lift the PSMC in position on a table, or similar, in front of the control cabinet and push it
into the cabinet on its rails. Be careful, the PSMC is heavy.
2 Connect the water hoses. Use Teflon thread tape.
3 Connect the power input connector and the interface cables.
4 Connect the magnet output connectors. It is important that the hex screws are
well-tighten.
5 Install the plastic cover on the magnet output connectors.
6 Turn on the water valves for the PSMC in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet.
7 Turn on the circuit breaker in the Mains Distribution Panel (MDP) for the Control Cabinet.
Figure 12-9: Rear view of the PSMC model MPS 883
12-2-3-3 Upgrading the PSMC

To upgrade a PSMC model MPS 883 to a PSMC model MPS 9700:
1 Remove the PSMC model 883 (see Section 12-2-3-1 Removal of the PSMC on page 377).
2 Remove the side panels on the CCAB.
3 Remove the old slide rails in the CCAB.

4 Install the cage nuts in the new slide rails.
5 Install the new slide rails in the CCAB with the screws.
6 Install the side panels on the CCAB.

7 Install the cage nuts in the CCAB.
8 Install the blind panel in the CCAB.
9 Install the PSMC model 9700 (see Section 12-2-3-2 Installation of the PSMC on page 379).

12-2-3-4 Water connections on the PSMC

The PSMC is water cooled. Before you open the water connections, close the water valves
for the PSMC in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet. See Figure 9-1. Use a bucket for drain-water.
1 Check for water leaks on all connections.
2 Check for damage and leaks on the tubings.
12-2-3-5 Magnet output connections on the PSMC

The output connections for the magnet are located behind a transparence plastic cover, at
the rear of the PSMC.
1 Lock-out and tag-out the PSMC power circuit breaker.
2 Remove the plastic cover.
3 Use a hex key and check that the connectors are tight. There should not be any indication
that the cables are loose.
12-2-3-6 PSMC control

The operator at the Master System normally controls the PSMC. During a technical
maintenance, or troubleshooting, the Service System is used. So, under normal circumstances,
you do not use the PSMC front panel. Anyhow, the LEDs and the display can give some useful
information.
MPS 9700
• The POWER ON LED is on when the magnet is on and everything is normal. The Master
System or the Service System controls the PSMC.
• If the FAULT LED is on, the magnet is off and cannot start up because of an interlock.
If some kind of magnet start-up failure appears during normal operation from the Master
System, change to the Service System. From the Service System, you have more possibilities
to check status and interlocks. To get more information about the internal status and interlocks
of the PSMC, use the PSMC 9700 Service software (available for GE Healthcare internal use
only, refer to service note DOC1974785).
For more information on how to operate the PSMC, refer to the OEM manual DANFYSIK Magnet
Power supply 9700.
MPS 883
• The REMOTE LED and the ON LED are on when the magnet is on and everything is normal.
The Master System or the Service System controls the PSMC.
• If the STANDBY LED is on, the ON LED is off. This mean that the magnet is off and standby.
• If the INTERLOCK LED is on, the magnet is off and cannot start up because of an error.

If some kind of magnet start-up failure appears during normal operation from the Master
System, change to the Service System. From the Service System, you have more possibilities
to check status and interlocks. If it is also impossible to run the magnet from the Service
System, it is possible to start up the magnet system from the PSMC front panel. Do as follows:
1 Turn off the REMOTE key.
2 Press the SET key to enter values for the magnet current.
3 Press the ON key and the START key to start the magnet ramp up procedure.
4 Follow the reading on the PSMC display and verify that the magnet current rises.
For more information on how to operate the PSMC, refer to the OEM manual DANFYSIK Magnet
Power supply 883, System 8800.
For information on how to operate the MINItrace Service System, see Section 19-7-2 Magnet
system on page 617.
12-2-4 Document references

Table 12-1: Magnet system manufacturer’s documents
MPS 9700 Magnet Power Supply Danfysik Operating manual
MPS 883, System 8800 Magnet Power Supply Danfysik Service/Operating manual
ADA 515M TC Hydraulic Damper Enidine Mounting/Adjusting instruc-

tions

13 RF SYSTEM

The RF Power Generator (RFPG) generates the RF power which must be input to the RF cavity
in order to establish the acceleration voltages (Dee voltages) on the Dees. The RFPG is
comprised of all oscillators, amplifiers, control circuitry and power supplies that are required
for this function.
There is no control panel fitted to the RFPG. It is designed exclusively for control via the GCU
(General Control Unit). The GCU also handles the RF system interlocks regarding functions
external of the RFPG, and interlocking with other subsystems. RFPG internal interlocks are
handled by the Source and Control Unit (SCU) described further.
Water cooling is provided by the cooling system in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet.
The RFPG operates at lethal high voltages up to 8 000 V.
Always lock-out and tag-out mains supply to the RFPG before opening any covers.
Do not operate the RFPG with any cover open.
High voltage capacitors are dangerous if charged to a high voltage.
WARNING! Lethal RF power
The RF system produces high power RF signals of up to 10 000 W.
If the RF system is operated without all covers and doors in position, or if the RF cable is
not properly connected, RF power might be emitted from the RF system.
Only authorized personnel working in pairs should service the RF system.
Before operating the RF system, check that all screws are fitted on covers and panels,
that all locking screws are fitted at the terminals of the RF feeder cable, and that the
magnet door of the cyclotron is closed.
13 RF system 385
13-2 Overview
The Radio Frequency System comprises:
• The Radio Frequency Power Gererator (RFPG).
• The RF cable.
• The Dee assembly within the vacuum chamber.
Figure 13-1: RF system
The RF System has two main functions in the accelerator:
• To pull the H- ions out of the Ion Source in the center of the vacuum chamber.
• To accelerate these H- ions to a high speed as they orbit (with increasing radius) inside
the vacuum chamber.
386 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
To obtain this, a considerable amount of electric power (10 kW at 100.5–101.5 MHz) has to
be fed into the vacuum chamber, and applied to the so-called Dees (there are two Dees,
Figure 13-1). This is accomplished as follows:
• The electrical power is generated in the RFPG.
• The power is transmitted to the cyclotron by means of the RF cable (a coaxial transmission
cable).
• The power is consumed by the (resonant) load inside the vacuum chamber (the two
Dees).
13-2-1 RFPG sub-assemblies

The RFPG consists of the following sub-assemblies:
• Tube Amplifier Unit (TAU)
• Tube Power Supply Unit (TPSU)
• Grid Screen Power Unit (GSPU)
• Source and Control Unit (SCU)
Figure 13-2 shows the location of these sub-assemblies and Table 13-1 summarizes their
functions.
Figure 13-2: MINItrace RFPG sub-assemblies locations
RFPG
13 RF system 387
13-2 Overview
Table 13-1: MINItrace RFPG sub-assemblies – summary of functions
Sub-assembly Summary of function
SCU Contains most control functions of the RFPG.

There are two main types of SCUs:
SCU Gen I comprises six circuit boards.
SCU Gen II has one built-in circuit board.
(See Section 13-2-2 RFPG SCU functions on page 388),
TAU Final RF power amplifier which delivers its output power to the RF
(and DPA) cavity via the RF feeder cable. The TAU is driven from the DPA.
GSPU Houses power supplies for grid and screen voltages to the tube
within the TAU. Contains control relays for all supplies to the tube.
TPSU Houses power supply for the anode voltage to the tube within the
TAU. Mains power is connected to terminals in the TPSU.
WU Water flow control.
13-2-2 RFPG SCU functions

The SCU houses most of the control electronics of the RFPG. External digital and analog control
signals to and from the GCU, as well as external Dee voltage feedback RF signals from the
cyclotron, are connected to the RFPG via the SCU.
There are two main types of SCU (Figure 13-3):
• SCU Gen I is described in Section 13-2-3 SCU Gen I on page 389.
• SCU Gen II is described in Section 13-2-4 SCU Gen II on page 390.
Figure 13-3: SCU Gen I and Gen II
SCU Gen I SCU Gen II
388 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
13-2-3 SCU Gen I
Note!
MINItrace RFPG systems equipped with SCU Gen I can be upgraded with SCU Gen II (see
Section 13-6-12 Replacing SCU Gen I with SCU Gen II on page 478).
CAUTION! Electromagnetic interference
The front panel of the SCU must be closed during operation since it contributes to improve
the shielding.
Figure 13-4: SCU Gen I
The system controller and the Interface Boards handles only digital signals, whereas the Tube
Controller handles both digital and analog signals.
The SCU includes indicators that aid trouble-shooting and service: LEDs on some of the boards
show status and the Measurement Module shows voltages, currents and power levels within
the SCU.
Note the following for SCU Gen I units in MINItrace RFPG systems manufactured ...
... before Q2 2003: ... from Q2 2003 and

All boards are easily replaceable, but note that the RF board (as well as the RF Extension on:
board) has unique back plane connectors: A coding strip makes
CAUTION! NEVER CONFUSE CIRCUIT BOARD POSITION! NEVER CONFUSE EXTENSION it impossible to insert
BOARD POSITION! the boards in the
1) THE RF BOARD (AND THE RF Extension board) MUST BE INSERTED IN THE POSITION wrong position.
SHOWN IN Table 13-2!
2) NEVER INSERT ANY OF THE OTHER BOARDS (AND THE CORRESPONDING EXTENSION
BOARD) IN THE RF BOARD POSITION!
13 RF system 389
13-2 Overview
Table 13-2: MINItrace RFPG sub-assembly functions
Sub-assembly Summary of function
1 RF board has Load Phase Detection: Generates an output

three major signal that is used by the GCU to tune the RF
functions Cavity into resonance.
RF detection: Converts RF signals from the RF
Cavity and the TAU to dc signals for feedback
and monitoring.
RF control: Contains RF oscillator, and analog
and digital signal processing circuits. Controls
the level of the RF and gives an output driving
signal for the DPA.
2 System con- This is the controller of the RFPG. Controls the

troller various modes of RF operation.
3 Tube con- Controls RFPG power supplies.

troller
4 Interface Interfaces digital signals between the system

board 1 controller and the GCU.
5 Interface Interfaces digital output signals from the sys-

board 2 tem controller to the GCU.
6 Measure- Shows analog variables within the SCU.

ment Module
13-2-4 SCU Gen II
Note!
MINItrace RFPG systems equipped with SCU Gen I can be upgraded with SCU Gen II.
For replacement instructions concerning SCU Gen II, see the following sections:
• Section 13-6-11 SCU Gen II replacement on page 470
• Section 13-6-12 Replacing SCU Gen I with SCU Gen II on page 478
390 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Figure 13-5: SCU Gen II front panel
13-2-4-1 Main functions

The SCU houses most of the control electronics of the RFPG. External digital and analog control
signals to and from the GCU as well as external Dee voltage feedback signals (RF) from the
cyclotron, are connected to the RFPG via the SCU.
Figure 13-6 is a simplified description of the main function sections in the SCU including front
and rear panel interfaces. Table 13-3 contains a brief description of the main functions in the
SCU.
Figure 13-6: SCU function section description (simplified)

Front panel Rear panel
IDE bus Flash
System controller disc
SKM (to TAU/WU)
Front display (ETX module)
Battery
SKF (to GPSU)

ISA bus
Rear panel
LAN I/O manager SKE (to TPSU)

(FPGA module)
SKG (to GCU)
SKK (to TAU)
SPI bus
Limiter
ADC
SKH (to GCU)
Loop
DAC
Frequency source SKC (to TAU)
and modulator
RF detector SKA (to Acc.)

PLD/SKD (PS/TB2) DC/DC, regulators
AV: ±15V, ±10V, ±5V, 1.8V
DV: 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V, 1.2V SKN, SKP, SKQ, SKR (to TAU)
13 RF system 391
13-2 Overview
Table 13-3: Summary of the main functions in the SCU
Function Description
RF Detector Buffers and converts RF signals from the RF Cavity and the TAU to dc signals for
feedback and monitoring.
The Load Phase Detector monitors the tuning status of the RF cavity and generates
an output signal which is used by the GCU to tune the RF cavity into resonance.
Frequency Source and An RF oscillator generates the required control frequency.

Modulator, Limiter and Signal processing circuits control the level of the RF according to preset limit values,
Loop and puts out a driving signal for the DPA.
System controller The Embedded Technology Extended (ETX) module is the main controller of the RFPG.
It controls the different modes of RF operation and provides communication with the
SCU via Ethernet, USB and RS-232 interfaces.
I/O manager The Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) module handles logic functions for digital
I/O and analog I/O, both internally and to external units. Controls RFPG power supplies.
AD and DA converters Interfaces digital signals from/to the FPGA to/from other parts in the SCU, the GCU
and other units in the RFPG.
13-2-4-2 Rear panel connectors

The SCU rear panel contains connectors for interconnections to other sub units within the
RFPG as well as for connections to the GCU and the cyclotron. The connectors are listed in
Table 13-4.
For pin assignments and signal names, see Section 13-2-4-9 Interconnection signals data on
page 431.
Figure 13-7: SCU rear panel
392 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Table 13-4: SCU rear panel connectors
Panel connector Connected to
SKA Vacuum tank/P2
SKC TAU/P6
PLD/SKD PS/TB2
SKE TPSU/TB2
SKF GSPU/SKB
SKG GCU/P9
SKH GCU/P10
SKK TAU/P2
SKM TAU/Water flow switch
SKN TAU/P8
SKP TAU/P7
SKQ TAU/P9
SKR TAU/P10
LAN Laptop (Ethernet)
RS232 Not used
INPUT Not used
13-2-4-3 Identification and rating label

The identification and rating label is located at the rear panel.
Figure 13-8: Identification and rating label
13 RF system 393
13-2 Overview
13-2-4-4 Test points

There are thirty test points at the rear panel of the SCU (see Table 13-5).
Table 13-5: SCU test points
Test Point Description Typical value/range

(d=digital, a=analog) [V]
TP1 24 V DC (mains supply) 21.6–26.4
TP2 3V3D (d) 3.135–3.465
TP3 2V5D (d) 2.375–2.625
TP4 1V2D (d) 1.14–1.26
TP5 1V8A (a) 1.71–1.89
TP6 -5VA (a) -5.25– -4.75
TP7 10VA (a) 9.5–10.5
TP8 -10VA (a) -10.5– -9.5
TP9 GROUND —
TP10 5VD (d) 4.75–5.25
TP11 5VA (a) 4.75–5.25
TP12 15VA (a) 14.25–15.75
TP13 -15VA (a) -15.75– -14.25
TP14 15V 13.5–16.5
TP15 -15V -16.5– -13.5
TP16 RF_ENABLE 5 (TTL)
TP17 DEE1 0–10
TP18 DEE2 0–10
TP19 FWD_LIN 0–10
TP20 REFL_LIN 0–10
TP21 PHASE_LOAD_SIG -10– +10
TP22 N/A —
TP23 N/A —
394 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Test Point Description Typical value/range

(d=digital, a=analog) [V]
TP24 LOAD_MATCH_PHASE 0–2.5
TP25 FWD_REFL_PHASE 0–2.5
TP26 GROUND —
TP27 GROUND —
TP28 3.3 V (d) 3.135–3.465
TP29 GROUND —
TP30 GROUND —
13-2-4-5 SCU control panel

The control panel at the front shows basic system information, current operation mode, and
analog I/O and digital I/O signals within the SCU. The panel can also be used to create log
files containing signal data.
The push buttons are used to navigate in the menus using the under-line cursor and execute
commands (see Figure 13-9 and Table 13-7).
The menu structure is shown in Figure 13-10.
Figure 13-9: SCU control panel
Table 13-6: Status leds
LED indication Description
Green light on the top LED only. Power to the SCU is turned on.
No light on the other three LEDs.
Red light on all LEDs An error has been detected by the SCU.
The error message is shown on the display.
13 RF system 395
13-2 Overview
Table 13-7: Push buttons
Push button Function description
Browse upwards in a menu.
Browse downwards in a menu.
Enter a sub menu, or execute a command.

or (Both buttons have this function.)
Exit a sub menu, that is return to the previous menu.

or (Both buttons have this function.)
396 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Figure 13-10: Menu structure in the control panel
Main menu Main menu

MINItrace 1.00 First row Cyclotron type and SCU version no.
Off Second row Current status of the RF system:
More... (+) Off – The RF system is off
Any interlock – An Interlock is activated
Warming Up – The RF system is warming up (Standby Ready not reached)
Standby Ready – Standby Ready mode
Normal – Normal mode
Start – Start in Normal mode
Tune – Tuning in Normal mode
Dee volt OK – Dee voltage ok is reached in Normal mode
Spark – Spark in Normal mode
Fix – Fix mode
Pulse – Pulse mode
Third row Go to sub menu
Signals (+) Digital In (+) List of Digital In signals [<]

IP Address (+) Digital Out (+) with values
Save Fast Log (+) Analog In (+)
Save Slow Log (+) Analog Out (+) List of Digital Out signals [<]
Stop SCU (+) with values
(Stop SCU is possible when List of Analog In signals [<]

the system status is OFF) with raw values
List of Analog Out signals [<]
with values
Read IP (+) Current IP [<]

Restore IP (+) 192.0.4.71
IP restored [<]
Fast Log Saved [<] (Restored address: 192.0.4.71)
(Log �le with signal status

every millisecond)
Slow Log Saved [<]
(Log �le with signal status

every �ve seconds)
The SCU is stopped [<]
13 RF system 397
13-2 Overview
For more information on the I/O signals, see Section Analog In and Analog In (raw) pages on page 405 to Section Dig-
ital Out page on page 412.
For more information on IP and other addresses, see Section SCU Settings page on page 420.
For more information on log files, see Section Log page on page 414.
13-2-4-6 SCU web interface

The SCU web interface can be viewed in Internet Explorer™ on a PC laptop connected to the
SCU. The web interface makes it possible to monitor RF parameters and other system
information in the SCU, and to create log files.
The web interface has a main page and a number of sub pages. It has three user access
levels providing different functions. When starting the web interface, the ALL USERS access
level is entered automatically. The SERVICE access level provides more functions and is
intended for service purposes. The login password for this level can be requested from GE
Online Center. The ENGINEERING access level is intended for manufacturing purposes only
and is not described in this manual.
Functions overview
Functions on the ALL USERS access level (common for all levels):
• Select sub page.
• Show system information and SCU status.
• Monitor analog in, digital in, analog out, digital out and interlock signals.
• Create log files.
• View configuration parameters and values.
398 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Additional functions on the SERVICE access level (further to the ALL USERS level):
• Change IP addresses, serial numbers, time and reset the hour counter.
• Reboot the SCU.
• Change certain configuration parameter values.
• Turn the RF regulation and interlock relays on and off.
• Run the RF while sweeping parameter values.
The subsequent sections show the functions and the sub pages as they appear on the SERVICE
access level.
Connecting a laptop to the SCU

If the SCU is connected to the Ethernet network in the MINItrace system, the laptop can be
connected to a network switch, for example in Control Cabinet (CCAB).
If the SCU is not connected to the Ethernet network or if there is no such network (coaxial
cables are used instead), the laptop can be connected directly to the rear of the SCU.
To connect the laptop to the SCU:
1 Remove the rear cover required to get access to the network switch (CCAB door) or the
SCU (upper right-hand cover).
2 Connect the Ethernet port on the laptop to either the SCU or the switch as follows:
• To the switch using a straight-thru RJ45 cable. Make sure that the SCU is connected
to the network.
• To the LAN socket at the rear of the SCU using a twisted RJ45 cable.
3 Re-attach the cover.
Turning on power to the SCU

1 Switch on (push upwards) the TPSU front switch.
2 Switch on (push upwards) the RFPG circuit breaker at the rear of the CCAB. The SCU and
RFPG starts up which takes about 40–60 s.
3 Check that the Main menu appears on the front display on the SCU (see Figure 13-9).
4 Make sure that the IP address stored in the SCU is 192.0.4.71 by selecting More > IP
address > Read IP on the front display.
Note!
192.0.4.71 is the default address. It can be changed if required for matching another local
network address configuration.
13 RF system 399
13-2 Overview
Starting the SCU web interface

1 Start a web browser on the laptop.
2 Type http://192.0.4.71/www/ and press Enter.
The Main page in the SCU web interface appears in a few seconds.
If the Main page does not appear, the configuration of network parameters on the laptop
might be wrong. To correct it, see Section Setting the TCP/IP address and LAN parameters in
the PC on page 400.
Setting the TCP/IP address and LAN parameters in the PC

If the SCU web interface does not appear in the browser, the following might be the cause:
• Wrong TCP/IP address set in the PC.
• Wrong detection of LAN settings set in the PC.
Note!
Microsoft™ Windows™ XP and Internet Explorer are required in the procedures below.
The dialog examples below are from Windows XP Professional version 2002 SP 2. Other
versions might differ.
400 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Set the correct TCP/IP address as follows:
1 In Windows, select Start > Control Panel > Network Connections. Double-click the Local
Area Connections # that is being used.
Alternatively, left-click the network symbol on the right at the bottom of the screen.
2 Set the address as described in Figure 13-11.
Figure 13-11: TCP/IP address in the PC
1. Click Properties 2. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) 3. Select Use the ... and type
and click Properties 192.0.4.72 and 255.255.255.0.
Click OK.
13 RF system 401
13-2 Overview
Set the correct detection of LAN settings as follows:
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools > Internet Options.
2 Set the detection as described in Figure 13-12.
Figure 13-12: Detection of LAN settings in the PC
1. Click Connections 2. Click LAN Settings 3. Select Automatically detect set-

tings. Clear Use automatic configu-
ration script. Click OK twice.
If the SCU web interface still does not appear, check the communication to the SCU by pinging
as follows:
1 Open the DOS window on the PC.
2 Type ping 192.0.4.71 and press Enter.
3 If it returns “Reply from 192.0.4.71…”, the communication is OK.
If it returns “Request timed out”, the communication is not OK. Check the cable
connections.
402 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Main page
Figure 13-13: Main page, system status: Off
Figure 13-13 shows the Main page when the SCU status is OFF. Figure 13-14 shows status
STANDBY READY and Figure 13-15 shows DEE VOLTAGE OK.
Note!
All other examples on the web interface in this section show how the pages appear when
logged in as SERVICE and the SCU status is DEE VOLTAGE OK, unless stated otherwise.
The menu panel on the left is displayed on all sub pages and makes it easy to navigate through
the listed pages. It is also possible to change access level in this panel.
The upper panel contains refresh rate options. It appears on pages that monitor parameters
values.
The large right panel contains digital indicators that show interlock status and analog
parameters. The interlocks must all be turned green to make it possible to run the RFPG. If
any of them are dark, the cause must be investigated and rectified before the RFPG can be
run.
The analog parameters shown in this panel are described in Section Analog In and Analog In
(raw) pages on page 405.
The lower panel is shown on all sub pages. It shows general information on the SCU and the
system status. The status can be OFF, “Any interlock”, WARMING UP, START, TUNE, DEE VOLT
OK, SPARK, FIX, PULSE or STANDBY READY.
The four indicators on the right in the lower panel monitors the limits for the Spark, Anode
Current, Reflected Power and Screen Current signals. Dark indicator means that a signal is
within the limit. If the indicator is yellow, the signal has reached the limit and will cause a
reduction of the RF output power.
13 RF system 403
13-2 Overview
Figure 13-14: Main page, system status: Standby Ready
Figure 13-15: Main page, system status: Dee voltage OK
404 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Table 13-8: Main page interlock indicators
Indicator If indicator is green If indicator is dark
RF Inhibit 1 and 2 Normal indication for RF operation RF operation is inhibited by safety relays
within the Control Interface Unit (CIU).
RFPG cannot be set to STANDBY.
Waterflow OK Normal indication for RFPG in STANDBY TAU cooling water fault detected. (Latched
READY or any mode of RF operation interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
Earth Stick OK Normal indication for RFPG in STANDBY TPSU cover open, TPSU earth stick removed,
READY or any mode of RF operation. or TPSU thermal switch tripped. (Latched in-
terlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
Door OK Normal indication for RFPG in STANDBY TAU door open. (Latched interlock. RFPG set
READY or any mode of RF operation. to OFF.)
ALL PS OK All SCU power supplies are OK One or several power supplies in the SCU
have failed to deliver the required power.
Analog In and Analog In (raw) pages

The Analog In page shows the SCU analog input signals converted to relevant presentation
values.
The Analog In (raw) page shows the signals before the conversion and are values in the range
-4096 – +4096.
Figure 13-16 shows an example from running the system in status DEE VOLTAGE OK.
Figure 13-16: Analog In and Analog In raw panes
13 RF system 405
13-2 Overview
Table 13-9: Analog In parameters
Signal Description
Dee Dee Ref In Dee voltage reference set on GCU
Dee1 Dee voltage 1 reading
Load Mtch ph 90 Load tuning phase error
Mtch ph 0 Not used
Ld Mtch 1 Amplitude on grid pick-up (+30 dBm = 10 Vpeak RF into SKP)
Ld Mtch 2 Amplitude on anode pick-up (+30 dBm = 10 Vpeak RF into SKN)
DPA DPA Refl DPA RF reflected power
DPA Fwd DPA RF forward power
PWR Refl Pwr Reflected power
Fwd Pwr Forward power
Refl Pwr S Not used
Fwd Pwr S Forward power compensation scale for anode current limiting
Log RF Out Log Output power from SKC
Refl OT Log Over-tone amplitude from reflected coupler (+30 dBm = 10 Vpeak RF into SKR)
Fwd OT Log Over-tone amplitude from forward coupler (+30 dBm = 10 Vpeak RF into SKQ)
Fwd Log Amplitude from forward coupler (+30 dBm = 10 Vpeak RF into SKQ)
Refl Log Amplitude from reflected coupler (+30 dBm = 10 Vpeak RF into SKR)
DC Anode V Anode Voltage
Anode C Anode Current
Grid V Grid Voltage
Grid C Grid Current
Heater V Heater Voltage
Screen V Screen Voltage
Screen C Screen Current
406 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Signal Description
PS PSU IN 24V SCU 24 V input
PSU IN 5V SCU 5 V digital
Limit Lim Refl Negative if reflected voltage limited (RVL)
Lim Scrn Negative if screen current limited (SCL)
Lim Anode Negative if anode current limited (ACL)
Lim Sum Turns positive if any of Lim Refl, Lim Scrn or Lim Anode are negative
Other Mod Input RF modulator input voltage (proportional to SKC voltage). Maximum is normally
7–8 V.
Fwd Refl0 Phase between SKQ and SKR
Fwd Refl90 Phase between SKQ and SKR shifted 90º
Extra Input Volt meter for INPUT banana jacks on rear panel (max. ±10 V)
Test AD Test0 Check of internal ADC 0 (normally 2048 ± 30, 5 ± 0.08 V)
AD Test1 Check of internal ADC 1 (normally 2048 ± 30, 5 ± 0.08 V)
RF Frequency 101 000 ± 500 kHz
Relative humidi- SCU internal relative humidity. Normally about half the room humidity due to higher
ty internal temperature.
Temperature SCU internal temperature. Normally 5–10º above room temperature.
13 RF system 407
13-2 Overview
Digital In page
The Digital In page shows the status of the SCU digital input signals. The signals shown
underneath DC and PS are interlocks. The RF system can only run normal operation if all
interlock indicators are turned green.
Figure 13-17: Digital In panel
The indicators can be either green or dark. Their indications are described in Table 13-10.
Table 13-10: Digital In parameters
Mode Standby GCU request for RF in STANDBY STANDBY is not requested
Fix Mode GCU request for RF FIX mode FIX mode is not requested
Pulse Mode GCU request for RF PULSE mode PULSE mode is not requested
Normal Mode GCU request for RF NORMAL mode NORMAL mode is not requested
408 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
DC RF Inhibit 1 Normal indication for RF operation RF operation is inhibited by safety relays

RF Inhibit 2 within the Control Interface Unit (CIU).
Cavity water interlock (check on MSS).
RFPG cannot be set to STANDBY.
Enable SS Normal indication for RF operation Either RF operation is inhibited by RF In-

hibit 1 or RF Inhibit 2, or the TAU door
open.
Earth Stick OK Safety switches within TPSU OK, Either TPSU cover open, TPSU earth stick
Normal indication for RFPG in STANDBY removed, or TPSU thermal switch tripped.
READY or any mode of RF operation. (Latched interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
Door OK TAU door closed. TAU door open.

Normal indication for RFPG in STANDBY (Latched interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
READY or any mode of RF operation.
Waterflow OK Cooling water flow (TAU) OK. TAU cooling water fault detected.
Normal indication for RFPG in STANDBY (Latched interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
READY or any mode of RF operation.
Airflow OK TAU cooling fan operating OK. Either TAU cooling fan is OFF or not
Normal indication for RFPG in OFF, working as expected, or TAU door open.
STANDBY READY or any mode of RF oper- (Latched interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
ation.
PS +1.2V OK +1.2 V power supply OK +1.2 V power delivery failure
+3.3V OK +3.3 V power supply OK +3.3 V power delivery failure
+5V OK +5 V power supply OK +5 V power delivery failure
-15V OK -15 V power supply OK -15 V power delivery failure
+15V OK +15 V power supply OK +15 V power delivery failure
+24V OK External +24 V power supply OK External +24 V power delivery failure
ALL PS OK All SCU power supplies OK One or several SCU power supplies have
failed to deliver the required power
Reset Normal indication Reset command issued from GCU
13 RF system 409
13-2 Overview
Analog Out page

The Analog Out page shows the SCU analog output signals expressed in values in the range
-4096 – +4096.
Figure 13-18: Analog Out panel
The parameters are described in Table 13-11.
Table 13-11: Analog Out parameters
Signal Description
Dee DVR1 Sign Dee voltage 1 read. Output 0–10 V to GCU (10 V = 4096).
Dee V Ref Internal Dee voltage reference. 0–10 V (10 V = 4096).
Fwd V Ref Internal forward voltage reference. 0–10 V (10 V = 4096).
Limit Lim Anode Sets internal anode current limiting threshold
Lim Screen Sets internal screen current limiting threshold
Lim Refl Sets internal reflected voltage limiting threshold
Multi Multi Fwd Internal multiplier for forward power compensation for anode current limiting
Multi Refl Internal multiplier for reflected power compensation for anode current limiting. Not
used.
410 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Signal Description
DC Anode V Anode voltage. Output 0–10 V to GCU (10 V = 4096).
Anode C Anode current. Output 0–10 V to GCU (10 V = 4096).
Grid C Grid current. Output -10–0 V to GCU (-10 V = -4096).
Screen C Screen current. Output 0–10 V to GCU (10 V = 4096).
Other Phase Load Load tuning phase error. Output ±10 V to GCU (-10 V = -4096, 10 V = 4096).
RP Signal Reflected power. Output 0–10 V to GCU (10 V = 4096).
AD Test Internally connected to analog in AD Test 0–4 (10 V = 4096).
DPA Fwd DPA Forward power. Output 0–10 V to GCU (10 V = 4096).
Dee Comp Internally connected to comparator for limiting Dee pulses (10 V = 4096)
Dee Lim Internally connected to modulator for limiting Dee pulses (10 V = 4096)
Spark Comp Internally connected to comparator for spark detection (10 V = 4096)
FP Signal Forward power. Output 0–10 V to GCU (10 V = 4096).
13 RF system 411
13-2 Overview
Digital Out page

The Digital Out page shows the status of the SCU digital output signals.
Figure 13-19: Digital Out panel
The indicators can be either green or dark. Their indications are described in Table 13-12.
Table 13-12: Digital Out parameters
Mode Standby Ready RF is in STANDBY READY. (Signal to GCU). RF is not in STANDBY READY
Dee Volts OK In NORMAL mode, Dee voltage is above Condition not fulfilled
the limit set by Dee voltage OK configura-
tion. (Signal to GCU).
Start Mode In NORMAL mode, Dee voltage is below Condition not fulfilled
the limit set by Dee voltage Detected
configuration. Pulsed RF power. (Signal
to GCU).
Tuning Mode In NORMAL mode, Dee voltage is above Condition not fulfilled
the limit set by Dee voltage Detected
configuration and not Dee Volts OK.
Continuous RF power. (Signal to GCU).
412 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
DC AFN TAU cooling fan operating OK. (Signal to Air flow interlock detected.
GCU). (Latched interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
WFN Cooling water operating OK. (Signal to Water flow interlock detected.
GCU). (Latched interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
EN Anode PS operating OK. (Signal to GCU). Anode PS not within limits.

(Latched interlock. RFPG set to OFF.)
HN Heater PS operating OK. (Signal to GCU). Heater PS not within limits.

GN Grid PS operating OK. (Signal to GCU). Grid PS not within limits.

SN Screen PS operating OK. (Signal to GCU). Screen PS not within limits.

DIOK TAU door closed. (Signal to GCU). TAU door opened.

ESOK Safety switches within TPSU OK. (Signal TPSU cover opened, TPSU earth stick re-
to GCU). moved, or thermal switch tripped.
Error General Fault All PS OK. (Signal to GCU). All PS not OK.
Cont Fault Controller OK. (Signal to GCU). Alarm from internal controller watch dog.
Controller not OK.
Standby Error No Standby Error. (Signal to GCU). STANDBY READY not reached within time
limit set by configuration
Power Fan ON Command to GSPU to turn ON the fan Command to GSPU to turn OFF the fan
Heater ON Command to GSPU to turn ON the heater Command to GSPU to turn OFF the heater
EHT Con ON Command to GSPU to turn ON contactors Command to GSPU to turn OFF contac-
in the TPSU tors in the TPSU
Screen ON Command to GSPU to turn ON screen Command to GSPU to turn OFF screen
grid power supply grid power supply
Grid ON Command to GSPU to turn ON grid power Command to GSPU to turn OFF grid
supply power supply
13 RF system 413
13-2 Overview
Other RF Enable RF is turned on. (Internal signal.) RF is turned off
Note!
Flickering if RF mode is PULSE.
Ext Loop Sel The external feedback loop is selected The internal feedback loop is selected
which regulates the Dee voltage of the which regulates the output power of the
cyclotron. (Internal signal.) RFPG
Interl Reset Resets DPA. (Short pulse.) No reset pulse
Regul. On Regulation on Regulation internally disabled
90 LM Internal signal to set load match phase Internal signal to set load match phase
detector to 90º offset detector to 0º offset
90 FR Internal signal to set forward-reflected Internal signal to set forward-reflected

phase detector to 90º offset phase detector to 0º offset
Log page
On the Log page it is possible to create and view log files. Most of the log files contain digital
in and out and analog in and out signals in the SCU. These signals are described previously
under the respective pages. The log files are collected during time spans of different lengths
and sample times.
Figure 13-20: Log panel
The log files that can be obtained are described in Table 13-13.
414 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Table 13-13: Description of log files
Log file Description Content File name
Statistic Logs the signals status every fif- Operation modes, limit conditions statistic.log
teen minutes. and analog in signals (as presen- When the buffer is full, the con-
tation values). Header with serial tent is copied to old_statistic.log.
numbers of the SCU, RFPG and
cyclotron, version number of the
SCU software, and type of sys-
tem (MINItrace).
Event Logs a message when a specific Event message, time stamp. event.log
event occurs (error, interlock, etc.) The time stamp facilitates trou- When the buffer is full, the con-
ble-shooting by comparing to the tent is copied to old_event.log.
Milliseconds log.
Long Starts logging the signals when See the Statistic log. longTerm.log
term test a Long term test starts (see Sec- Only one file exist.
tion Long term test page on
page 424).
Five sec- Logs the signals status in a tem- Digital in, digital out, analog in SLOW_date_time
onds porary buffer every five seconds and analog out signals
for the past four hours.
The log file is then created manu-
ally by clicking Save log.
Millisec- Logs the signals in a temporary Digital in, digital out, analog in FAST_date_time
onds buffer every millisecond for the and analog out signals
past ten seconds.
The log file is then created manu-
ally by clicking Save log.
Sweep Starts logging the signal status Analog in signals (as presentation Sweep_date_time
when a Sweep run starts (see values) and the frequency. The
SectionSweep page on page423) same header as in the Statistic
log.
13 RF system 415
13-2 Overview
To download and view a log file:
1 Click Download file.
A new window shows the log files available. The example below shows Milliseconds log
files.
2 To view a log file, click the desired file.
3 To save the log file on the laptop, select File > Save As and choose a suitable location.
To move, copy or delete log files:
1 Type the address ftp://login@192.0.4.71/.
If the SCU file manager with the Log On As dialog does not appear, the network
parameters on the laptop might be wrong. To correct it, see Section Setting the TCP/IP
address and LAN parameters in the PC on page 400.
2 In the Log On As dialog, type service as username and the password (can be requested
from GE Online Center).
3 In the file manager, click log. The folders for the different log file types appear.
4 Click the desired folder to view the log files. The files can now be copied to other locations,
deleted, etc.
Note!
The log folders should be emptied regularly. Log files cannot be recorded if the memory
is full. Make sure the log files are backed up before deleting them.
416 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Config page
The Config page shows configuration parameters for the RF system.
Figure 13-21: Config panel
On the ALL USERS access level all parameters are read-only, that is none of the parameters
can be changed.
When logged in as SERVICE, some of the values can be changed. These values are shown
with black color. The read-only values have gray color.
CAUTION!
Do not change a parameter value unless the consequences are fully understood.
The parameter values for each system are unique. However, they can be adjusted if the
system performance tends to deviate from the specification.
For guidance on setting the configuration parameters, see Section 13-6-12-7 Setting the
configuration in a new SCU Gen II on page 489.
The parameters are described in Table 13-14.
13 RF system 417
13-2 Overview
Table 13-14: Configuration parameters and normal values
Parameter Description
Frequency RF output frequency
Phase Offset1 Adds an offset to match phase 90º output to GCU
Dee 1 Pickup Factor1 Ratio between Dee 1 voltage and Dee 1 voltage pickup (factory set)
Dee 1 Cable Factor1 Ratio between output and input of coaxial cable between pickup 1 and SCU (factory
set)
Set for 35kV Dee 11 Control voltage from GCU at 35 kV setting Dee 1 (factory set)
Fwd Power at 35 kV1 Forward power used at 35 kV (factory set)
Max Fwd Power Forward power at 10 V to GCU
Max Refl Power Reflected power at 10 V to GCU
Fwd Coupling Factor1 Ratio of RFPG forward output coupler (factory set)
Refl Coupling Factor1 Ratio of RFPG reflected output coupler (factory set)
Dee Voltage Detected1 Switch over point between START and TUNING mode
Dee Voltage Close1 Switch over point between internal and external loop
Dee Voltage OK1 Maximum allowed percentage below Dee voltage set to reach Dee Voltage OK
Dee Spark Detector DA1 Switch over point to detect sparks
Heater Voltage Max Upper limit for heater voltage alarm
Heater Voltage Min Lower limit for heater voltage alarm
Grid Voltage Max Upper limit for grid voltage alarm
Grid Voltage Min Lower limit for grid voltage alarm
Screen Voltage Max Upper limit for screen voltage alarm
Screen Voltage Min Lower limit for screen voltage alarm
Anode Voltage Max Upper limit for anode voltage alarm
Anode Voltage Min Lower limit for anode voltage alarm
Scale Factor Grid V Scale factor for grid voltage reading
Scale Factor Screen V Scale factor for screen voltage reading
Limit Anode Current DA Anode current limiting level (ACL)
418 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Parameter Description
Limit Refl Voltage DA Reflected power limiting level (RVL)
Limit Screen Current DA Screen current limiting level (SCL)
Modulator in alarm Modulator level that enables interlock if ACL, RVL or SCL
Limit Fwd Pwr Multipl Allowed additional anode current for every 8 kW forward power
Limit Refl Pwr Multipl Allowed subtracted anode current for every 8 kW reflected power
Standby Timeout Issues Standby Error if not STANDBY READY within the set time
Normal Mode Timeout Issues Normal mode Error if not Dee voltage within the set time
Time Base Cycle time used for sampling all internal parameters
RF Enable Pulses Number of Time Base units for RF Enable during pulse
RF Disable Pulses Number of Time Base units for RF Disable during pulse
Tuning Mode Delay Number of Time Base units until TUNING mode is generated
Spark Delay Number of Time Base units until SPARK mode is generated
Spark Restart Wait Number of Time Base units until restart of RF after SPARK mode
Dee Overshoot DA Comp Factory set parameter
Dee Overshoot DA Factory set parameter
Temperature Max Upper interlock limit for temperature in SCU. If set to 0 interlock is disabled.
Temperature Min Lower interlock limit for temperature in SCU. If set to 0 interlock is disabled.
Humidity Max Upper interlock limit for humidity in SCU. If set to 0 interlock is disabled.
Humidity Min Lower interlock limit for humidity in SCU. If set to 0 interlock is disabled.
DPA Fwd1 Forward power at 10 V from DPA
DPA Refl Reflected power at 10 V from DPA
R&S Powermeter att1 Attenuation factor used at manufacturing
1 The value can be changed. All other values are read-only. The consequences must be fully understood before
changing a value!
13 RF system 419
13-2 Overview
SCU Settings page

The SCU Settings page shows the present network addresses, serial numbers, time and date.
It is also possible to enter new values for these parameters, view and reset the operation time
counter and to reset the SCU.
Figure 13-22: SCU Settings panel
420 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Table 13-15: SCU settings parameters and buttons
Parameter Description Normal value
IP address Shows the present IP address. 192.0.4.71
Gateway Shows the present gateway address. 192.0.4.1
Subnet mask Shows the present subnet mask. 255.255.255.0
Set IP address Click to implement new addresses entered in the empty fields.
The SCU will reboot which takes about 30–60 s.
Note!
The network addresses should not be changed unless required to match another local network
configuration.
SCU serial number Shows the present SCU serial number. Can not be changed.
RFPG serial number Shows the present RFPG serial number.
Cyclotron serial number Shows the present cyclotron serial number.
Set Serial numbers Click to implement new numbers entered in the fields.
Note!
After replacement of the battery or the entire SCU, the RFPG and cyclotron serial numbers should
be set according to the systems at the site.
Set time Shows the current time.
Set date Shows the current date.
Set Time and date Click to implement new time and date entered in the empty fields.
Hour counter Number of hours the has been turned on since the last reset of the
hour counter.
Reset hour counter Resets the hour counter. Should be made after installation of a new
tube.
Reboot SCU Starts rebooting the SCU which takes about 30–60 s.
13 RF system 421
13-2 Overview
Test page
The Test page makes it possible to run the RF system without regulation (forward power loop
or Dee voltage loop). It is also possible to simulate interlocks in the hard-wired interlock circuits
RF inhibit 1 and 2, respectively, and override the TPSU door software interlock. These functions
can be used to test the safety system during installation and maintenance of the cyclotron.
CAUTION!
The consequences must be fully understood before using these functions. For more
information, contact GE Online Center.
Figure 13-23: Test panel
The Regulation indicator is normally lit (green color), meaning that the RF system regulation
is turned on. To turn off the regulation, click Turn on/off.
The Test relay 1 and Test relay 2 indicators are normally off (gray color), meaning that the
relays do not break the interlock circuits RF Inhibit 1 and 2, respectively.
To simulate an interlock in circuit RF Inhibit 1, click Turn on/off next to Test relay 1. The
indicator is lit (turns green). For RF Inhibit 2, click Turn on/off next to Test relay 2.
The TPSU Door intl indicator is normally off (gray color), meaning that the software override
of the TPSU door interlock is turned off. When turned on, the software interlock system believes
that the TPSU panel is in place even though it is removed. The hardware interlock system is
not affected.
To turn on the software interlock override, click Turn on/off. The indicator is lit (turns yellow).
The TPSU Door intl is turned off automatically after 15 minutes, if not turned off manually
before.
422 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Sweep page
The Sweep page makes it possible to run the RF system and log its behaviour while sweeping
the frequency, phase or Dee voltage.
Figure 13-24: Sweep panel
The sweep run requires a start and stop value for the selected parameter, number of steps
and the time per step. Any written comments will be stored in the log file.
Note!
A sweep run can be started only if the system is in STANDBY READY mode.
To start the sweep run, click Start sweep.
When the run is finished, click Download file. A new window appears where the log file
Sweep_date and time is available, see Table 13-13. The file contains analog in signals (as
presentation values) and the frequency.
13 RF system 423
13-2 Overview
Long term test page

The Long term test page makes it possible to run the RF system and log its behaviour every
15 minutes. The same data as in the Statistic.log file is collected.
Figure 13-25: Long term test panel
The Long term test does not require any input parameters. Any written comments will be
stored in the log file.
Note!
A Long term test can be run only if the system is in STANDBY READY mode.
To start the Long term test, click Start. The green Test Running indicator is lit.
To finish the test, click Stop. However, the test is aborted in advance if the system goes to
OFF mode or when the test has run for 24 h.
When the run is finished, click Download file. A new window appears where the log file
longTerm.log is available. Note that there is only one version. The file is a copy of the
Statistic.log, see Table 13-13.
13-2-4-7 Power-up sequence of the power amplifier tube

The tube amplifier must be powered up with the correct sequence of application of supplies
in order to ensure that excessive currents, voltages or power dissipations do not occur. This
is controlled and checked by the software in the SCU.
Furthermore, the software monitors cooling and safety switches. It also checks the levels of
the various voltages at all times and if a fault level is detected at any time (including time
during the power-up sequence), the voltages are removed from the tube amplifier and a fault
signal is indicated.
424 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Sequence description
The power-up sequence makes sure that the power supplies are energized in the correct
order and with the correct timing (Figure 13-26).
Sequence from the start:
1 TAU fan is started.
2 Heater voltage is applied for 60 seconds.
3 Grid voltage on.
4 Anode voltage on.
5 Screen voltage on.
(2 seconds delay between voltages 3 to 5.)
Figure 13-26: Power-up sequence

TUBE ON TUBE READY
60 s 2s
FAN ON HEATER ON GRID ON ANODE SCREEN

ON ON
When all power supplies have been applied to the tube successfully, the SCU switches to
STANDBY READY state.
If the start-up sequence has not finished within 120 seconds, the SCU generates an alarm
STANDBY ERROR. If so, there might also be other alarms which indicate the cause of this error.
During the opposite procedure, that is when the tube amplifier is powered down, the power
supplies are turned off in a particular sequence. The TAU fan runs for 5 minutes after power
has been switched off.
Alarms during the power-up sequence
Alarm enabling
Before fan and power supplies have been switched on, there are alarms activated from the
air switch and power supply monitors. To avoid interrupting the power-up sequence, the
alarms are disabled until the units have been switched on.
Alarm processing
If an alarm occurs during the start-up sequence or during operation, the power supplies are
turned off in a controlled way. The fault information is delivered to the SCU and GCU.
The fault signals require a reset signal to be sent from the GCU for the fault indications and
interlocks to be removed.
Power supplies monitoring and alarm

Monitoring signals for voltages and currents are fed to the SCU from the heater, grid, anode
and screen power supplies. All these signals are shown in the SCU web interface.
13 RF system 425
13-2 Overview
Status indicators
The status indicators in the SCU web interface for interlocks and power supplies related to
the power amplifier tube are described in Section Digital Out page on page 412.
13-2-4-8 RF operation mode sequences

The SCU is the main controller of the RFPG as well as it is directly engaged in control of the
various modes of RF operation.
Status check
The SCU continuously checks all the status signals which determine whether the RFPG may
be started or not.
The SCU first checks if there is an external interlock RF INHIBIT from the safety relays in the
Control Interface Unit (CIU). If so, the SCU will not allow the RFPG to be activated to an operation
status, not even to STANDBY.
Note!
RF INHIBIT will disable the RFPG not only via the SCU but also via a double relay system.
The SCU also checks the status of signals monitored inside the SCU and signals from the
Driver Power Amplifier (DPA).
If no faults or interlocks have been found, the SCU will accept a request STANDBY from the
GCU.
Start to STANDBY
Upon request STANDBY from the GCU, the software in the SCU starts the power-up sequence
of the tube amplifier power supplies (see Section 13-2-4-7 Power-up sequence of the power
amplifier tube on page 424).
When all power supplies have been started and the tube is ready for operation, the SCU
delivers STANDBY READY to the GCU.
If a fault occurs during the start-up sequence or later, the software generates an alarm and
the SCU aborts the start-up sequence.
RF operation modes
The RFPG must be in state STANDBY READY before any RF mode can be run. The RF system
can operate in three modes – NORMAL, PULSE and FIX:
• NORMAL is the automatic mode which is used for normal production. Only NORMAL
utilizes Dee voltage feedback (EXTERNAL LOOP).
• PULSE mode is used for service and troubleshooting; tuning must be done manually by
the operator.
• FIX mode is used for service and troubleshooting; tuning must be done manually by the
operator.
426 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
The System Controller is directly engaged in control of the RF modes and it works in close
association with the frequency source and modulator.
The RF operation sequence for NORMAL mode from STANDBY READY is described in detail in
Figure 13-27 and Table 13-16.
The sequence for PULSE and FIX modes is described in Table 13-17.
NORMAL mode
The following actions take place when NORMAL mode is started:
1 START mode
The SCU generates pulsed RF power to the DPA.
(Simultaneously, the RF frequency scans across the tuning range in order to find
resonance.)
The SCU continues to generate pulsed RF power until the signal DET LIMIT changes state.
It indicates that a Dee voltage above the detection level has been found. Consequently,
the SCU goes to TUNING mode
2 TUNING mode
The SCU makes RF ENABLE a continuous signal.
RFPG delivers continuous RF to the RF Cavity and the GCU controls the frequency in order
to match the RF Cavity.
When the RF cavity is being tuned closer to resonance, the Dee voltage feedback signal
approaches the value of the Dee voltage reference. The ratio of Dee voltage to Dee
voltage reference is computed. When this ratio becomes 60%, the SCU switches from
internal loop to external loop.
From this point, the RFPG operates with Dee voltage feedback. In the previous stages of
NORMAL mode, a fraction of the RFPG output power was feedback.
3 DEE VOLTS OK
When the tuning of the RF Cavity has progressed so far that the Dee voltage has reached
about 98% of the Dee voltage reference, the SCU generates DEE VOLTS OK.
4 ERROR
There is a timer set at 60 seconds, which runs during all three stages of the NORMAL
mode start procedure. If DEE VOLTS OK is not achieved within 60 seconds from NORMAL
mode was started, an alarm ERROR (ERROR IN NORMAL MODE) is generated. This signal
is used by the GCU.
FIX mode
FIX mode is very simple:
Upon the command FIX from the GCU the SCU generates continuous RF power to the DPA.
13 RF system 427
13-2 Overview
PULSE mode
PULSE mode is similar to FIX but the SCU generates pulsed RF power to the DPA.
SPARK
If the Dee voltage disappears once it has been detected (DET LIMIT has been present), the
SCU initiates a pause, during which RF output is switched off in order to allow the RF Cavity
to recover after a possible flashover. The duration of the pause is about 1 second. During the
pause, status SPARK is indicated on the SCU web interface. The RF is then restarted
automatically.
SPARK can be activated during any mode of RF operation.
Spark detection
If a spark occurs, DET LIMIT disappears and the following things happen almost simultaneously:
• The SCU immediately switches to internal loop.
• The SCU executes a spark interrupt routine.
If the Dee voltage has not returned within the Spark Delay time, the alarm SPARK will be
shown on the SCU web interface.
SPARK can be initiated not only by flashovers (arcing) in the RF cavity, but by any kind of
unexpected RF disturbances which cause the Dee voltage to fall to a low level.
Figure 13-27: Control system sequence in normal mode operation
RF ON Spark Restart RF OFF
RF output power
Detected dee voltage
Detection
limit
t
1 ms 9 ms 0.2–1 s
RF mode
STANDBY READY
START
TUNING
DEE VOLTS OK
SPARK
Time t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8
428 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
Table 13-16: Control system sequence in normal operation
Time Actions/decisions by RFPG and GCU Status Comments
t0 - STANDBY RFPG in standby mode.

READY Resonator not tuned.
t1 NORMAL mode command line from GCU START Frequency selected. Internal loop feedback.
goes low. RF driving pulses start (RFPG). mode Pulse level determined by safe operation of
RFPG, that is RVL and ACL may be limiting.
t1–t2 Fine tuning starts scan (GCU). START Resonator voltage below detection limit.
mode Resonator voltage below detection limit but
Fine tuning motion improves resonator tun- increasing.
ing (GCU). START
mode
t2 Pulsing stopped (RFPG). TUNING Resonator voltage above detection limit. DET
mode LIMIT has changed state.
t2–t3 RF output continuous (RFPG). Tuning be- TUNING PHASE LOAD signal developed in RFPG con-
comes feedback controlled (GCU). mode trols the RF frequency via GCU Internal loop.
t3 Resonator tuned (GCU). TUNING Amplitude control loop feedback switched

Resonator voltage feedback loop closed mode from RFPG output coupler (internal) to RF
when RFPG has decided that resonator is detector output (external). The control loop
tuned (RFPG). now acts to make the detected DEE voltage
equal to the DEE VOLT REF input from the
GCS.
t3–t4 RF drive power increased due to feedback TUNING RF drive power increases until detected RF
action (RFPG). mode is the same value as DEE VOLT REF input.
t4 Resonator voltage within ±1% of demanded DEE Detected RF signal within ±1% of DEE VOLT
value (RFPG). VOLTS REF input SIGNAL.
OK
t4–t5 Normal RF operation with full resonator DEE

voltage RF (RFPG). VOLTS
OK
t5 Spark in resonator. Resonator voltage disappears due to arcing.

Feedback switched to INTERNAL LOOP.
Driving stopped if necessary (RFPG). Decision made within RFPG after an ad-
justable delay as to whether RF drive is to be
stopped.
RF frequency is locked (GCS). Resonator tuning is assumed to be good

when spark occurs.
t5–t6 RF drive off for period of SPARK pause (RFPG). SPARK SPARK pause about 1 sec. determined within
RFPG.
13 RF system 429
13-2 Overview
Time Actions/decisions by RFPG and GCU Status Comments
t6 Restart (automatically). TUNING Feedback path switched to RF detector.

mode Tuned condition gives immediate resonator
response. Amplitude loop remains closed
with detected RF feedback.
t6–t7 RF drive power increased TUNING RF drive power increases until detected RF
(RFPG). mode is within ±1% of DEE VOLT REF input.
t7 Resonator voltage within ±1% (RFPG). DEE Detected RF signal within ±1% of DEE
VOLTS VOLT REF input. signal.
OK
t7–t8 Normal RF operation with full resonator DEE Detected RF signal within ±1% of DEE VOLT
voltage (RFPG). VOLTS REF input signal.
OK
t8 NORMAL mode goes high STANDBY RF drive removed.

(GCU). READY
Table 13-17: Control system sequence for PULSE and FIX modes
TIME ACTIONS/DECISIONS BY RFPG AND GCU STATUS COMMENTS
t0 - STANDBY Generator in Standby Mode

READY
t1 PULSE mode goes low. PULSE PULSE mode command received (GCS). Con-
trol loop is closed using forward amplitude
feedback and is inhibited from switching to
the detected RF feedback. Pulsing of RF drive
is enabled.
t2 PULSE mode goes high (GCS). STANDBY RF drive removed.

READY
t3 FIX mode goes low. FIX FIX mode command received (GCS). Control
loop is closed using forward amplitude
feedback and is inhibited from switching to
the detected RF feedback. Pulsing is inhibited.
t4 FIX mode goes high (GCU). STANDBY RF drive removed.

READY
430 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
13-2-4-9 Interconnection signals data

This section describes the signals in the connectors on the rear panel (Table 13-18).
Abbreviations:
AI = Analog In
AO = Analog Out
DI = Digital In
DO = Digital Out
Table 13-18: Pin assignments and signal names
Conn. Signal name Connected Type Comment

pin to
PLD/SKD PS / TB2
1 Screen 1 PWR Screen (GND)
2–4, Not connected 2–4, 7–8

7–8
5 0V(24V) 5 PWR 0V
6 +24V 6 PWR DC-IN
SKE TPSU / TB2
2 Not used 2
3 Not used 3
4 Not connected 4
5 ANODE_V 5 AI Anode V, 10 V max, Source Z 100 kΩ, scale

1 V/1000 V load Z 10 MΩ
6 ANODE_I 6 AI Anode I, 0-10 V, source Z 6kΩ (approx.), scale

1 V/amp with load Z of 220 kΩ
7 Not connected 7
8 SI+ 8 DI_PWR +5 V. Decoupling needed, from isolated switch,

normally closed in operation between pin 8 and 9.
9 SI- 9 DI
13 RF system 431
13-2 Overview

pin to
SKF GSPU / SKB
2 +15V 2 PWR +15 V @ 100 mA max
3 -15V 3 PWR -15 V @ 100 mA max
4 0V 4 PWR 0 V @ 200 mA max
5 +5V 5 PWR +5 V @ 100 mA max
6 EHT_CON_ON# 6 DO CMOS logic via diode. Anode power ON.
7 Screen_ON# 7 DO CMOS logic via diode
8 Grid_ON# 8 DO CMOS logic via diode
9 Heater_ON# 9 DO CMOS logic via diode
10 Fan_ON# 10 DO CMOS logic
11 Enable_SS_Relays 11 DO_PWR +5 V @ 100 mA max. Safety relays.
12 Not connected 12
13 Not connected 13
14 Grid_Volts 14 AI Scale: 5 mV / V from RFPG
15 Grid_Current 15 AI Scale: 40 V / A from RFPG
16 Screen_Volts 16 AI Scale: 5 mV / V from RFPG
17 Screen_Current 17 AI Scale: 20 V / A from RFPG
18 +24V 18 PWR +24 V @ 100 mA max
19 RF_Inhibit_1 19 DO Also SKG

(+24V)
20 RF_Inhibit_2 20 DO Also SKG

(+24V)
21–25 Not connected 21–25
432 13 RF system
13-2 Overview

pin to
SKG GCU / P9
2 Standby# 2 DI (24V)
3 Normal_Mode# 3 DI (24V)
4 Reset# 4 DI (24V)
5 Fix_Mode# 5 DI (24V)
6 Pulse_Mode# 6 DI (24V)
7 Freq_Load 7 DI (24V)
8 RF_Inhibit_1 8 DI (24V)
9 Standby_Ready# 9 DO
(24V)
10 Standby_Error 10 DO
(24V)
11 Start_mode# 11 DO
(24V)
12 Tuning_Mode# 12 DO
(24V)
13 Dee_Volts_OK# 13 DO
(24V)
14 Spark 14 DO
(24V)
15 Error# 15 DO
(24V)
16 GN# 16 DO Grid voltage

(24V)
17 SN# 17 DO Screen voltage

(24V)
18 EN# 18 DO Anode voltage

(24V)
19 HTL(+24V) 19 PWR 24V supply for GCS (*note), max 600mA
13 RF system 433
13-2 Overview

pin to
20 HN# 20 DO Heater voltage

(24V)
21 WFN# 21 DO Water flow voltage

(24V)
22 AFN# 22 DO Air flow voltage

(24V)
23 DIOK# 23 DO Door interlock voltage ok

(24V)
24 ESOK# 24 DO Earth stick voltage ok

(24V)
25 Not connected 25 DO Drive voltage limit

(24V)
26 RVL 26 DO Reflected voltage limit

(24V)
27 FREQ_CLK 27 DI (24V)
28 Not connected 28 DO
(24V)
29 FREQ_DATA 29 DI (24V)
30 Not connected 30 DO
(24V)
31 Cont_Fault 31 DO
(24V)
32 General_Fault 32 DO
(24V)
33 ACL 33 DO Anode current limit

(24V)
34 RF_Inhibit_2 34 DI (24V)
35 Not connected 35
36 Not connected 36
37 HTL(0V) 37 GND
434 13 RF system
13-2 Overview

pin to
SKM TAU/Water
flow switch
2 +15 V 2 PWR 0 Ω resistor
3 WF_OK# 3 DI Water flow status, isolated switch, normally closed
4 0V 4 PWR Water flow return
5–9 Not connected 5–9
SKH GCU / P10
2 DEE_Volt_Ref_- 2 AI 0–10 V diff. Dee voltage reference
3 DVR1_Return 3 GND Dee voltage 1
4 Not used 4
5 Screen_Current_Test 5 AO
6 FP_Return 6 GND Forward power
7 RP_Return 7 GND Reflected power
8 Phase_Load_Return 8 GND
9 DEE_Volt_Ref_+ 9 AO 0–10 V differential
10 DVR_Signal 10 AO
11 Anode_Current_Test 11 AO
12 Anode_Voltage_Test 12 AO Dee voltage
13 FP_Signal 13 AO
14 RP_Signal 14 AO Forward power
15 Phase_Load_Signal 15 AO Reflected power
13 RF system 435
13-2 Overview

pin to
SKK TAU / P2
2 Not connected 2
3 AFS 3 DI +24 V DC @ 100 mA open collector and 100 Ω series

for CAP-DR- & DI (5 V tolerant) for AFS (Air flow)
4 DIL 4 Door interlock
5 Not connected 5
6 DPA_V_SIGNAL 6 AI 0–10 V corresponds to 1200 W in DPA forward
7 DPA_Reflect_Power 7 AI 0–2.5 V corresponds to 250 W in DPA reflected.
8 Heater_V_MON 8 AI Max. 10 V AC/DC 21.3 kΩ input Z
9 Not connected 9 AI Not used
10 +5V 10 DI_PWR AFS return.
11 +5V 11 DI_PWR DIL return
12 Not connected 12
13 GND 13 GND Analog return.
SKA REF_DET 1 CYCL VACU- RF IN Coax cable (from Dee 1)

UM TANK
SKQ RF_FWD TAU / P9 RF IN Coax cable (from RFPG output coupler)
SKR RF_REFL TAU / P10 RF IN Coax cable (from RFPG output coupler)
SKC DPA_DRIVE TAU / P6 RF OUT Coax cable, 50 mW into 50 Ω
SKP LOAD_MATCH_1 TAU / P7 RF IN Coax cable (from grid pick-up)
SKN LOAD_MATCH_2 TAU / P8 RF IN Coax cable (from anode pick-up)
436 13 RF system
13-2 Overview
13-3 Overhaul of Tube Amplifier and RF system tuning
13-3-1 General
The Tube Amplifier Unit, TAU, operates two resonant circuits, the Grid circuit and the Anode
Circuit, both of them tuned in resonance with the operation frequency.
Should the operation frequency of the RF system be altered considerably, or should a

component which form part of the grid circuit or the anode circuit be replaced, the TAU may
need retuning. The Power Tube is such a component and a replacement is likely to affect the
tuning of the grid circuit as well as the tuning of the anode circuit.
Furthermore, there is the parameter Phase Set which can be set from the MSS Configuration
page. Phase Set defines the phase at which the tuning of the RF Cavity is in balance.
13-3-2 Grid circuit

The symptom of bad grid circuit tuning is:
• The RF system cannot deliver full RF output power and the DPA Reflected Power reads
a high value (>10 W). (Displayed on RFPG Measurement Module (SCU Gen I, or the front
display or SCU web interface (SCU Gen II).)
Tuning procedure
You need a flat head screwdriver, about 4 mm wide, and with a blade length of minimum
90 mm.
1 Start the RF system in NORMAL mode from the MSS.
2 Choose the normal Dee voltage setting.
3 On the SCU Measurement Module, select DPA Reflected Power.
4 On the front panel of the TAU, remove the screw marked “Grid Tuning”.
5 Insert the screwdriver straight through the hole in the panel. Find the tuning screw, the
end of which is located about 85 mm from the panel.
6 Very slowly turn the screwdriver any direction while observing the display of the
Measurement Module (SCU Gen I, or the front display or SCU web interface (SCU Gen II).
If the value shown tend to increase, turn the other direction. The proper grid circuit tuning
is the point where the DPA Reflected Power is minimum. DPA Reflected Power should be
adjusted for <5 W, and it is normally possible to achieve about 2 W when minimum.
Note!
5 W is shown as 0.5 on the Measurement Module (SCU Gen I)!
7 Should there be difficulties to find a well defined minimum of DPA reflected power,
decrease the Dee voltage level and try adjusting again.
8 Restore the screw to the TAU panel.
13 RF system 437
13-3-3 Phase set

The symptom of incorrect phase setting is:
• The Reflected Power reads a high value and the RF system might not be able to deliver
the required Dee voltage due to Reflected Voltage Limiting.
If there is a less severe mismatch the Reflected Power will still read comparatively high and
furthermore the Forward Power will read higher than normally for a fixed voltage.
The optimum setting of the phase is somewhat dependent upon the tuning state of the anode
circuit. Hence if the anode circuit has been retuned, Phase Set should be checked afterwards.
Tuning procedure
2 Choose Dee voltage set 35 kV.
3 Run the RF system and log the following parameters.
RF parameter Displayed on
Phase MSS
Forward Power MSS
Reflected Power MSS
Anode Current RFPG
DPA Forward Power RFPG
Dee Voltage MSS
4 Set the RF system to STANDBY.
5 Go to the MSS Configuration Page.
6 Change “Phase Set” +5 or -5 degrees.
7 Click “Save to GCS” and then return to the RF Page.
438 13 RF system
8 Repeat 1–3. Compare the readings.
RF parameter Criterion Expected reading
Forward Power Close to minimum 7.6–8.8 kW
Reflected Power Close to zero 0–0.3 kW
Anode Current Close to minimum 1.9–2.3 A
DPA Forward Power Close to minimum 75–140 W
Dee Voltage Dee Volts OK 35 kV
9 If the reflected power is lower, Phase Set was changed the right way. Basically the best
Phase Set is the setting which offers minimum Forward Power and zero Reflected Power.
However, also watch Anode Current and DPA Forward Power. Sometimes these
parameters will vary with Phase Set even though Forward Power and Reflected Power
do not change much.
10 Repeat 4–9.
Note!
If Anode Current and DPA Forward Power still read too high the anode circuit needs tuning.
See Section 13-3-4 Anode circuit on page 439.
13-3-4 Anode circuit

The symptom of poor anode circuit tuning is:
• The RF system cannot deliver full RF output power and the Anode Current is high. Anode
Current Limit may be lit intermittently or constantly.
Tuning the anode circuit is effected by moving the anode shorting plate. Moving the anode
shorting plate 1 mm will change the resonance frequency of the anode circuit by about
0.1 MHz. Moving it upwards means lowering the resonance frequency.
Note!
Try optimizing Phase Set before starting to retune the anode circuit.
See Section 13-3-3 Phase set on page 438. (Setting the phase is more easily performed than
tuning the anode circuit and may sometimes create good enough a function.)
Tuning procedure
2 Choose Dee voltage set 35 kV.
13 RF system 439
3 Run the RF system and log the following parameters.
RF parameter Displayed on
Phase MSS
Dee Voltage MSS
Forward Power MSS
Reflected Power MSS
Anode Current RFPG
DPA Forward Power RFPG
4 Set the RF system to STANDBY.
5 Shut down the RFPG. See Section 13-6-2 Shutting down the RFPG on page 447.
6 Remove the TAU front panel.
7 Remove the upper front cover inside the TAU as follows:
Disconnect the cable at P17. Undo the 18 screws around the edge of the cover. Repeatedly
undo each screw about a turn at a time until the cover comes off.
8 Measure and record the position of the connector clamp at the top of the anode circuit.
9 Undo the connector clamp. See Figure 13-30.
10 Carefully measure and record the space from the plate on which the tube socket is
mounted to the anode shorting plate.
11 By turning the four screws on top of the RFPG two turns clockwise or anti-clockwise, the
anode shorting plate moves 2 mm up or down.
12 Tighten the screws on the connector clamp. Ensure the clamp is restored to the previous
distance from the anode shorting plate.
Should the plate connector tend to become stretched, there are two screws at the back
of the connector clamp which will enable adjustment.
13 Put back the upper front cover. Tighten the screws about a turn at a time repeatedly
until the screws are fully tightened.
14 Reconnect the cable at P17.
15 Restore the TAU front panel.
16 At the mains distribution panel, switch on mains for RFPG high voltage section.
17 At the rear of the Control Cabinet, switch on the circuit breaker marked “RFPG”.
18 Repeat steps 1–3 above.
440 13 RF system
19 Compare the readings.
The criteria on optimum anode circuit tuning is:
RF parameter Criterion Expected reading
Forward Power Close to minimum 7.6–8.8 kW
Reflected Power Close to minimum 0–0.3 kW
Anode Current Close to minimum 1.9–2.3 A
DPA Forward Power Close to minimum 75–140 W
Phase (MSS) --- -20 deg. – +20 deg.
Dee Voltage Dee Volts OK 35 kV
20 If the anode current is lower, the adjustment was successful. If the readings are within
the limits indicated above and the “anode current limit” is not lit intermittently no further
adjustment is needed.
Otherwise repeat steps 4–19.
Should the readings be higher or “anode current limit” be lit more constantly, the anode
shorting plate should be adjusted the opposite direction from the original position.
Again repeat steps 4–19, but turn the screws on top of the RFPG the other way.
Note!
Phase set may need some readjustment after the anode circuit has been tuned.

There is no operator maintenance with respect to the RFPG.
13-5-1 RFPG SCU Gen I Measurement Module readout
Note!
This instruction only applies to SCU Gen I.
The planned maintenance protocol is found in Section 3-9-15 RFPG: SCU Gen I Measurement
Module readout (STANDBY/NORMAL mode) on page 110.
The RFPG SCU is the upper left unit in the RFPG. See Figure 13-28 below.
13 RF system 441
Figure 13-28: RFPG SCU Gen I (source and control unit)
RFPG SCU
13-5-1-1 Standard RFPG SCU Measurement Module readout

The standard RFPG SCU Measurement Module readout is performed by pressing the button
next to each and every one of the buttons on the SCU Measurement Module (see Figure 13-28).
The values listed in Table 13-19 are to be recorded twice:
1 Use the MSS RF System menu to set the RF system in STANDBY mode.
Record the values related to the RF system.
2 Use the MSS RF System menu to set the RF system in NORMAL mode.
One hour later: Repeat the above measurements:
442 13 RF system
3 Use the MSS RF System menu to set the RF system in STANDBY mode.
4 Use the MSS RF System menu to set the RF system in NORMAL mode.
Table 13-19: Standard RFPG SCU Measurement Module readout
DEE VOLT REF
DEE VOLT READ
DPA REFLECTED POWER
LOAD TUNING ERROR
RF FORWARD VOLTAGE
DPA FORWARD POWER
FORWARD POWER
REFLECTED POWER
ANODE VOLTAGE
ANODE CURRENT
GRID VOLTAGE
GRID CURRENT
SCREEN VOLTAGE
SCREEN CURRENT
HEATER VOLTAGE
13 RF system 443
13-5-1-2 Extended RFPG SCU Measurement Module and RF board readout

If specifically asked for (by for example OnLine Center personnel), please record all values
asked for in Section3-9-15 RFPG: SCU Gen I Measurement Module readout (STANDBY/NORMAL
mode) on page 110.
Note!
This is not a regular Planned Maintenance issue! Disregard this if a complete set of values is
not specifically asked for!
Regarding the RF board readout: Find the appropriate test points on the RF board, use a volt
meter and record the values in the table in Section 3-9-15 RFPG: SCU Gen I Measurement
Module readout (STANDBY/NORMAL mode) on page 110.
444 13 RF system
Table 13-20: Extended RFPG SCU RF board test points
RF DET (TP24)
DVR (TP15)
DVR REL (TP22)
DEE VOLT REF (TP4)
FV (TP16)
AM2 (TP3)
AM1 (TP2)
AM3 (TP21)
DVR OK (TP2)
FP (TP17)
RV (TP18)
RP (TP19)
DET LIMIT (TP6)
RF ENABLE (TP5)
PHASE (TP20)
+5V (TP11)
-5V (TP14)
+15V (TP7)
+12V (TP8)
-12V (TP10)
-15V (TP9)
GND (TP13)
+24V (TP12)
13 RF system 445
13-5-2 RFPG SCU Gen II measurement readout

The planned maintenance procedure for SCU Gen II (see Figure13-29) is found in Section3-9-16
RFPG: SCU Gen II measurement on page 116.
446 13 RF system
WARNING!
Always lock-out and tag-out power to the RFPG before opening any covers.
13-6-1 Spare parts requiring safety interlock test

The RFPG safety interlocks must be tested when a number of selected RFPG-related spare
parts have been replaced, see the list below.
For spare part numbers, refer to MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
- Contactor (TPSU)
- High voltage transformers 7.8kV 4A
- Relay 240V (RLY1,2) RFPG
- Door switch RFPG
- RFPG Contactor kit
- Circuit breaker 10A 1PHASE Type K
- High volts. rectifier 12 PCS
- Contactor
- CAC223-31011 EHT Assembly, MT
- Circuit breaker 3PH 40-100A SW1 RFPG
- GSPU Assy
- Anode current monitor board
- Tube controller board
- GCU I/O Backplane board
When other spare parts involving the RFPG, GCU, Control interface board, and external
interface box have been replaced, it is recommended to do the test.
For safety and interlocks test, see Chapter 18 Safety system.
13-6-2 Shutting down the RFPG

1 Turn off the MINItrace in the Master System, or turn off the RF system in the MINItrace
Service System (MSS).
2 Disconnect all mains power from the RFPG:
a Switch off and apply LOTO on the RFPG circuit breaker at the rear of the Control
Cabinet.
b Switch off and apply LOTO on the RFPG circuit breaker at the Mains Distribution
Panel.
13 RF system 447
13-6-3 Removing covers

To remove any of the outer panels turn the screws ¼ turn counter-clockwise.
WARNING!
If the rear panel of the TPSU is opened, the earth stick (ground hook) inside the panel
must be hooked on to one end of the high voltage fuse F1.
Always turn off power to the RFPG before opening any covers.
Note!
Make sure that the front TAU cover and the upper rear covers of the RFPG are in place when
the RFPG is on to fully ensure RF functionality.
13-6-4 Power tube replacement
13-6-4-1 Tools required

1 Power Tube Tool (supplied with Tube Amplifier Unit)
2 wrenches 7/8"
2 clamps
1 wrench 8 mm
1 wrench 10 mm
1 hex key 4 mm
1 hex key 5 mm
1 flat-head screwdriver 10 mm
1 flat-head screwdriver 5 mm
1 Phillips screwdriver No 2
adhesive tape
13-6-4-2 Disassembly procedures

1 Shut down the RFPG, see Section 13-6-2 Shutting down the RFPG on page 447.
2 Remove the rear panel of the TPSU.
3 Attach the earth stick (ground hook) to one end of the HV fuse F1.
4 On the water manifold of the cooling system, shut the valves for water to and from the
RFPG.
448 13 RF system
5 On the RFPG remove the panel behind the TAU.
6 Loosen the two water tubes marked IN and OUT at the top rear of the TAU. Be prepared
with a vessel and some absorbing material to collect any remaining water from the
loose tubing.
If required, it is also possible to clamp off the tubes to prevent any remaining water from
leaking out.
Note!
Mark the tubes to avoid confusion when reconnecting.
7 Drain the power tube by blowing compressed air into IN or OUT.
CAUTION! Maximum allowed air pressure
Do not exceed 0.35 MPa (50 psi) air pressure.
8 Remove the front panel of the TAU.
9 Remove the upper front cover inside the TAU as follows:
a Disconnect the cable at P17.
b Unscrew each of the 18 screws around the edge of the cover about one turn at a
time until the cover comes off.
10 Measure and record the position of the connector clamp at the top of the anode circuit.
(Note the distance from the clamp to the anode shorting plate).
11 Undo the screws and nuts on both sides of the connector clamp and remove the outer
half of the clamp.
12 Undo and remove the clamp at the bottom of the anode circuit.
13 Loosen the screw on the anode inductor halves and remove the anode inductor.
14 Remove the anode voltage lead (the small copper clamp) from the power tube.
15 Carefully loosen the water couplings on the power tube using two 7/8" wrenches.
Do not bend or stress the water connections of the tube.
Turn the nuts on the power tube itself. The brass couplings on the nylon tubes should
be held in a fixed position during loosening.
Be prepared with some absorbing material to remove any small amounts of water that
may come out of the water tubing.
16 Carefully pull the power tube upwards. Jiggling the tube back and forth a little will make
the tube come out of its socket more easily.
Note!
Wear gloves while handling the power tube to prevent it from getting stained.
13 RF system 449
17 Pull off the capacitor ring from the power tube.
18 Gently unwind the Teflon foil from the power tube.
Figure 13-30: Power Tube – Anode Circuit partially disassembled
19 Put the dismounted tube in a safe place, preferably in the manufacturers box.
450 13 RF system
13-6-4-3 Reassembly procedure

A special tool (Power Tube Tool CAC222-33018) is needed for inserting the power tube into
the socket . This tool is supplied with each system.
Figure 13-31: Power tube tool and anode circuit assembly
1 Dismount the spark gap bracket (see above: Dwg CAC222-31011-03-3, pos 57).
Note!
On some systems there is no spark gap bracket to dismount.
2 Fasten the screws (3) in the threaded holes on each side of the socket. Use the right hand
screw to keep the shorting arm off the socket. (Not shown above).
3 Unpack the new power tube.
Note!
Wear gloves while handling the power tube to prevent it from getting stained.
4 Gently put the new power tube in position in the socket.
The cooling lines should face the open front of the TAU. The cooling line marked “IN”
should face to the right and “OUT” to the left.
Push the power tube straight down as far as possible by hand.
5 Put the rubber pad (2) and the tool plate (4) on top of the power tube and mount the
washers and the nuts (1, 5). See Figure 13-31.
13 RF system 451
6 Push the power tube downwards by tightening the nuts slightly. Jiggle the power tube
to gently force it into the socket and then tighten the nuts further. Repeat until the power
tube is fully inserted in the socket. See Figure 13-32.
Note!
It is important that the power tube is inserted straight into the socket. Make sure to tighten
the nuts evenly on both sides.
7 Remove all parts of the power tube tool.
8 Restore the Teflon foil to the power tube:
a The Teflon must be clean and not damaged.
b Use a small piece of adhesive tape to attach the end of the Teflon to the power
tube.
c Wind the Teflon tightly around the power tube. The winding should be up against
the metal ring at the bottom of the tube’s metal jacket.
d Use a small piece of adhesive tape to attach the outer end of the Teflon.
Figure 13-32: Power tube and socket
9 Push on the capacitor ring.
452 13 RF system
10 Reconnect the cooling water tubes:
Do not bend or stress the water connections of the tube.
Use two 7/8" wrenches. Turn the nuts on the power tube itself. The brass couplings on
the nylon tubes should be held in a fixed position during tightening.
11 Reconnect the water tubing at the back of the TAU. Do not mix up IN and OUT. Refer to
“Water System Schematic” on drawing CAC222-31001-xx-1.
12 Remove any clamps from the water lines.
13 At the water manifold of the Cooling Water System, open the valves for water from and
to the RFPG.
14 Start the cooling system, if it is not already running.
15 Check for water leaks.
• The water connections on the power tube need careful inspection. Drops of water
may need several minutes to appear if there is a small leak.
• Run cooling water for half an hour to ensure there is no leakage within the TAU
before completing the reassembly.
16 Reconnect the anode voltage lead.
17 Screw the anode inductor halves in their positions.
18 Remount the clamp at the bottom of the anode inductor:
a Tighten the clamp slightly.
b Adjust the capacitor ring to a position as shown in Figure 13-32 (15 mm).
c Adjust the anode inductor halves. The openings should be the same at the front
and at the rear.
d Tighten the clamp. Make sure that the clamp act on all “fingers” of the anode inductor
and thus bringing all of them in good contact with the capacitor ring.
19 Remount the outer half of the connector clamp at the top of the anode inductor:
a Carefully restore the connector clamp to the position noted before disassembly.
b Tighten the screws and nuts.
20 Make sure the shorting arm has not been affected by the power tube replacement:
a Check that the spring loaded arm can move freely towards the power tube.
b Make sure that the arm touches both the anode (the metal ring on the power tube)
and the screen grid (the outer spring collet on the socket).
c Adjust the arm, if necessary.
13 RF system 453
21 Restore the spark gap bracket to its original position, see Figure 13-33.
Note!
On some systems there is no spark gap bracket to remount.
22 Adjust the gap from domed nut of the spark gap bracket to the capacitor ring to 4 mm,
see Figure 13-33.
Note!
On some systems there is no spark gap to adjust.
Figure 13-33: Spark gap distance and position
• Reinstall the upper front cover. Tighten the screws about a turn at a time until all
screws are fully tightened.
23 Reconnect the cable to P17.
24 Reinstall the panel at the back of the TAU.
25 At the back of the TPSU, restore the earth stick to its holder.
26 Reinstall the TPSU rear panel.
27 After replacing the power tube, log the reading of the hours counter on the rear of the
Source and Control Unit (SCU).
13-6-5 Start-up after power tube replacement

1 At the mains distribution panel, switch on mains for RFPG high voltage section.
2 At the rear of the Control Cabinet, switch on the circuit breaker marked “RFPG”.
454 13 RF system
3 On the front of PS Assy in the TAU, pull out the plunger of the door switch SW1.
CAUTION!
The RFPG can now be switched on without the TAU front panel in position. Do not
short-circuit the terminals of the power supplies on the PS Assy which are capable to
deliver high current.
4 At the MSS, select the RF system page and click STANDBY.
5 Wait until STANDBY READY is shown.
6 In order to verify proper function of the new power tube, the DC parameters of the tube
need to be checked as follows:
a By means of a DVM, make sure the DC-voltage at the terminals of the heater power
supply (PS2) on PS Assy is 7.7 V ±100 mV.
b Record the dc-parameter readings on RFPG Measurement Module (SCU Gen I), or
front display or SCU web interface (SCU Gen II):
DC parameter Expected reading Remark
Anode voltage 7.8 kV ±0.2 kV
Anode current 0.15 A ±0.05 A
Grid voltage -250 V ±5 V
Grid current -114 mA ±13 mA
Screen voltage 750 V ±10 V
Screen current 23 mA ±3 mA
Heater voltage 7.5–7.7 V Calibrate by means of

DVM reading above.
Any deviation from expected value needs to be inves-

tigated.
7 At the MSS RF system page, click OFF.
8 Restore the TAU front panel.
9 At the MSS, start the magnet system and start the RF system to STANDBY.
10 Set Dee voltage set at 30 kV.
11 Click NORMAL.
12 Wait for DEE VOLTS OK to be shown on the RF page.
13 Try to increase Dee voltage to the 35 kV setting.
13 RF system 455
14 Record the RF parameter readings on RFPG Measurement Module (SCU Gen I), or front
display or SCU web interface (SCU Gen II):
RF parameter Expected reading Remark
DPA Reflected Power <5 W RFPG shows <0.5
DPA Forward Power 100–40 W RFPG shows 10 - 14
Forward Power 7.6–8.4 kW
Reflected Power 0–0.3 kW
Anode Current 1.9–2.3 A
Grid Current -100–-80 mA
Screen Current 40–45 mA
Any deviation from expected value needs to be investi-

gated.
15 By increasing Dee voltage to about 39 kV, verify that the RFPG can deliver its specified
output 10 kW.
Note!
Sparks may occur initially when running on high Dee voltage.
RF parameter Expected reading Remark
DPA Reflected Power <5 W RFPG shows <0.5
DPA Forward Power 120–50 W RFPG shows 10 - 14
Forward Power 10.0 kW
Reflected Power 0–0.3 kW
Anode Current up to 2.3 A
Grid Current -100–-80 mA
Screen Current 50–60 mA
Any deviation from expected value needs to be investi-

gated.
16 If the RFPG proves not to be able to deliver its output power at any power level, see
Section 13-3 Overhaul of Tube Amplifier and RF system tuning on page 437.
456 13 RF system
13-6-6 DPA (Drive Power Amplifier) replacement
WARNING! Beryllium oxide
If inhaled, beryllium oxide might cause irritation to the lungs. In contact with the skin,
beryllium oxide might cause allergic responses, infections or mechanical injury.
Some components in the DPA contain beryllium oxide ceramic (see Figure 13-34). If these
components are damaged when changing DPAs, beryllium oxide might escape and cause
health problems. Use protective goggles and gloves when handling the DPA. Do not remove
the cover of the DPA.
Always handle used parts in accordance with federal, state and/or local regulations.
Figure 13-34: Parts in the DPA contaning beryllium oxide ceramic
13-6-6-1 Tools required

• General FE service tools
• A hex-key with one short leg
13 RF system 457
13-6-6-2 Disassembly procedures

DPA (Drive Power Amplifier) disassembly procedure
1. At the back of the Control Cabinet (CCAB):

Switch off circuit breaker RFPG. Apply LOTO,
see Section 3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the
2. Open lower front panel on RFPG. Switch main

circuit breaker SW1 to OFF. Apply LOTO in
MDP, see Section 3-5-6 LOTO procedures for
the MINItrace system on page 59.
3. Remove the front panel and back panel on

the TAU.
458 13 RF system
4. Close the upper RFPG water tap (pressure

side) in CSC (Cyclotron Support Cabinet).
Close the lower RFPG water tap (return side)
in CSC (Cyclotron Support Cabinet).
5. Return to the back of the TAU.

Get a bucket and some paper towels.
Open the lower pipe fitting (at the copper
pipe).
6. Open the upper pipe fitting.

Be prepared with bucket and towels: Some
water will leak from tube and pipes.
7. Blow gently with compressed air at the up-

per pipe and collect remaining water at the
lower pipe.
13 RF system 459
8. Remove the two BNC cables at P9 and P10.
9. Remove the back plate (hold by some 30 hex

screws!).
10. Undo the two screws holding the two copper

coils to the DPA.
460 13 RF system
11. Undo the two big hexagon screws holding

the DPA to the back plate.
12. Move to TAU front.

Remove all cables to the DPA:
• P20
• P21
• P22
• P23
13. Undo the two hex screws holding the DPA to

the TAU.
A hex-key with one short leg is needed.
14. Gently pull the DPA out. Make sure the coils
at the back are duly undone from the DPA
unit!
13 RF system 461

Perform the steps in the previous section in reverse order.
13-6-7 GSPU (Grid Screen Power Unit)

GSPU (Grid Screen Power Unit, see Figure 13-2) is a subunit of the RF Power Generator in
MINItrace, which generates voltages for the control grid and the screen grid of the RF power
tube.
For spare part number, refer to the spare parts listed for each subsystem in MINItrace Spare
The PETtrace system includes a GSPU which is similar but not identical and thus has another
part number! Note the following:
• A PETtrace GSPU must not be used in a MINItrace system.
• A MINItrace GSPU can be used in a PETtrace system.
13-6-8 Anode current monitor board
13-6-8-1 Introduction
The anode current measurement board within the TPSU of the MINItrace RFPG has been
replaced by a new design (Q2 2003). The new design is named anode current monitor board.
This board is compatible with the old one, but its design is more robust.
For spare part number, refer to the spare parts listed for each subsystem in MINItrace Spare
13-6-8-2 Disassembly
The RFPG operates at lethal high voltages up to 8 000 V.
Always lock-out and tag-out mains supply to the RFPG before opening any covers.
Do not operate the RFPG with any cover open.
High voltage capacitors are dangerous if charged to a high voltage.
462 13 RF system
Action Check
1. Turn off MINItrace in the Master System, or turn off the RF system in the
MINItrace Service System (MSS).
2. Isolate the RFPG from mains as follows:

A. At the rear of the Control Cabinet set the RFPG circuit breaker to off
and apply LOTO.
B. At the Mains Distribution Panel lock-out and tag-out mains power
supply for the RFPG.
3. Detach the lower rear panel of the RFPG by turning the screws ¼ turn
counter clockwise.
Do not touch anything within the TPSU!
Ensure that there is no high voltage by touching the earth stick (ground hook) of the TPSU
to the terminals of the capacitor C3 and to both sides of the high voltage fuse F1. Hook it
then on to the right hand side of the high voltage fuse F1. Keep the earth stick in this position
while work is going on within the RFPG.
4. NOTE!
Install a short-circuiting wire across the terminals of the high voltage
capacitor C3, in order to fully eliminate the unlikely risk of the capacitor
recharging while leads are disconnected at the circuit board.
Wire is furnished as part of the anode current monitor board spare part.
5. At the anode current monitor board within the TPSU, dismount the pro-
tective plate. Loosen by depressing the little hook on the top of the nylon
PCB supports (see Figure 13-35).
Disconnect all leads from TS1, TS2, TS3 and TS4. Label to leads to avoid
confusion when reconnecting.
TS 1 is hard to access while the board is installed and the lead connected
there might have to be disconnected after the board has been loosened.
In order to dismount the board, unscrew two screws and four nylon PCB
supports. Detach the board from the RFPG.
13-6-8-3 Assembly
Action Check
6. On the new anode current monitor board remove the protective plate.
Loosen by depressing the little hook on the top of the nylon PCB supports.
Unscrew the nuts holding the PCB-supports. See Figure 13-35.
13 RF system 463
Action Check
7. Install the new board as described below:

• Put the new board in its approximate mounting position within the
RFPG. Handle the board with care as R6–R13 are quite fragile.
• As TS1 will be somewhat hard to access when the new board is

fully installed, it is wise to reconnect the lead to TS1-2 before the
board is fixed.
• Fix the board by fitting washers and screws at the corners at the
left hand side of the board.
• Fit the threaded nylon PCB-supports (part of the new board) to the
other four mounting holes. Note: No washers to be used here.
• Reconnect all leads.
• Put the protective plate onto the ends of the nylon PCB-supports
and push inwards until it locks in position.
8. Check the reconnection of the leads.
9. Remove the short-circuiting wire from capacitor C3.
10. Restore the earth stick (ground hook).
11. Restore the lower rear panel of the RFPG.
12. Turn on mains for the RFPG at the Mains Distribution Panel.
Turn on the mains circuit breaker at the rear of the Control Cabinet.
13. Verify system operation.
Figure 13-35: Anode current monitor board protective plate with nylon PCB support
464 13 RF system
13-6-9 RF circuit board and SKQ/SKR low pass filter

A MINItrace RFPG delivered before Q2 2003 is equipped with an RF circuit board with spare
part no. 2223641. That spare part is now obsolete, and replaced by a new one.
The new circuit board brings about to improvements:
• A coding strip makes it impossible to insert the RF board in the wrong position.
• Improved MINItrace RFPG power reading through filtering of overtones. This is

accomplished through a slight component change on the RF board (resistor R39 changed
from 6.8 kΩ to 6.2 kΩ and R37 changed from 15 kΩ to 14 kΩ, see Figure 13-36) and the
introduction of two separate Low Pass filters (see Figure 13-37).
Figure 13-36: New components on RF circuit board
Figure 13-37: Low pass filters connected to inputs SKQ and SKR on the SCU
See Section 13-6-9-1 Instructions for the new RF circuit board and LP filters on page 466 for
instructions on how to implement the new RF circuit board and LP Filters.
13 RF system 465
13-6-9-1 Instructions for the new RF circuit board and LP filters

Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100)
• No special tools and test equipment.
• Field supplied materials: Standard hand tools.
Note!
All removed parts or waste that is radioactive shall be handled and disposed I/A/W local laws
and restrictions. Please refer to Appendix B General radiation safety aspects and Appendix C
MINItrace radiation safety aspects for further instructions during work with radioactive
equipment/parts.
Action Check
1. Turn off and apply LOTO on the RFPG mains power circuit breakers at
the rear of CCAB and the MDP.
For Lock-Out and Tag-Out (LOTO) procedures of the equipment, see
Section 3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the MINItrace system on page 59.
2. Insert low pass filters in series with the cable to inputs SKQ and SKR, see
Figure 13-36.
(If installed earlier, replace the old filters with the two new filters.)
3. Open the front door on the SCU.
CAUTION! Sharp edges on the door!
Ground yourself by an ESD field kit. Use the Card ejector to detach the
old RF board, place it in an antistatic bag. Take the new board out of its
antistatic bag and install it in the same position as the board you re-
moved.
Note!
The old RF circuit board should be disposed I/A/W local laws and restric-
tions.
4. Remove LOTO and turn on power to the RFPG.

Start up the Magnet to nominal current from the MSS (the “service lap-
top”). Cooling and vacuum should be OK.
Set the RFPG to standby mode and verify that you get: STANDBY READY.
466 13 RF system
Action Check
5. Set normal mode to 25 kV.

When Dee voltage is obtained, verify that your reading is 24.6–25.4 kV.
If you read less than 24.6 kV you probably have Anode Current Limiting
(ACL). Nevertheless, verify that you do not have ACL LED turned on at
the Measurement Module (MM) in the SCU. If that is the case, or you do
not reach 24.6 kV: Verify anode current and the Forward Power (FP) LED
on the MM.
If you have near or above maximum anode current, as viewed in Fig-
ure 13-38, you have anode current limiting. If that is a fact, you have to
adjust the anode impedance to a higher value (adjust the clamp down-
wards with approximately 3 mm).
Note!
If you do not obtain Dee voltage, you have to perform troubleshooting.
Figure 13-38: Anode current as a function of RF forward power
Anode current
(Ampere)
3.00
2.80
2.60
2.40
2.20
2.00
1.80
1.60
1.40
1.20
1.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 FP (kW)
13 RF system 467
Action Check
6. Set Dee voltage to 35 kV. The reading shall now be: 34.6–35.4 kV, about
8 kW FP, about 2.25 Amp anode current and less than 60 mA screen
current at the RFPG MM.
If the screen current is too high, check the anode voltage, preferably this
should be at least 7.5 kV.
If you do not obtain 34.6 kV or if you read anode currents above 2.3 Amp
with 8 kW FP you have to adjust the clamp downwards. If the screen
current is too high and anode current is less than 2.2 Amp at 8 kW FP,
try to adjust the clamp upwards. If anode current is above 2.2 Amp and
the screen current is above 60 mA you are in trouble, if you cannot set
a slightly higher anode voltage. Preferably the anode voltage should not
be above 8 kV at 35 kV Dee voltage.
7. Wipe the MINItrace clean from possible contamination that might have
occurred during implementation of spare part. Perform a production
test (verify that you read at least 34.6 kV of Dee voltage) and return
system to operator/customer.
13-6-10 Circuit board change in SCU Gen I

The purpose of this section is to detail the removal and reinstallation of circuit boards in the
Source and Control Unit (SCU). Prior to servicing the SCU, the following must be completed:
1 Turn off the RF system, see Section 13-6-2 Shutting down the RFPG on page 447.
2 Removal of outer covers, see Section 13-6-3 Removing covers on page 448:
• SCU cover (RFPG upper left front cover)
13-6-10-1 Tools
The following tools are required for servicing the SCU:
• Suitable equipment to prevent static voltage damage to circuit boards.
468 13 RF system
13-6-10-2 Circuit board exchange
Figure 13-39: Circuit boards in SCU Gen I
1 Locate the faulty circuit board.
2 Pull the circuit board remover lever (located at the lower end of the circuit board).
3 When the circuit board is loose, pull the circuit board out of the SCU.
13-6-10-3 Reassembly
1 Apply suitable equipment to prevent static voltage damage to circuit boards.
2 Insert the new circuit board in the SCU.
3 Make sure it is securely fastened.
13-6-10-4 Verify normal function

1 Switch on the RFPG circuit breaker on the Mains Distribution Panel.
2 Switch on the RFPG circuit breaker at the rear of the Control Cabinet (CCAB).
3 Check that the four LEDs on the RF board (the left-most circuit board in the SCU rack)
indicate that the supply voltages (+15V, –15V, +5V, +24V) are present.
4 From the MSS, check that all interlocks are OK.
5 At the MSS/RF SYSTEM page, click STANDBY.
6 Check that the proper starting sequence is performed.
13 RF system 469
7 Check the values shown on the Measurement Module of the SCU. The allowed deviations
are as follows:
a. HEATER VOLTAGE 7.5 V ± 0.2 V
b. GRID VOLTAGE -250 V ± 10 V
c. SCREEN VOLTAGE 750 V ± 20 V
d. SCREEN CURRENT 23 mA ± 3 mA
e. ANODE VOLTAGE 7800 V +400 V, -200 V
f. ANODE CURRENT 0.1 A ± 0.05 A
8 When STANDBY is indicated, use the arrow buttons to set the Dee voltage to 35 kV.
9 Click NORMAL.
10 Compare the RF parameters to previous run data at 35 kV.
11 Change Dee voltage to normal configuration value.
12 Switch off the RF and magnet.
13-6-11 SCU Gen II replacement

This section describes the following procedures:
• Backing up and restoring configuration files.
• Replacing the battery.
• Upgrading the SCU application software.
• Replacing a complete SCU Gen II.
Upgrading from SCU Gen I to SCU Gen II is described in Section 13-6-12 Replacing SCU Gen I
with SCU Gen II on page 478.
470 13 RF system
13-6-11-1 Spare parts

For spare part numbers, refer to the spare part list for sub system MT 225 SCU in MINItrace
Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100)).
13-6-11-2 Tools
The following tools are required for servicing the SCU:
• Flat-head screwdrivers, 3 and 8 mm
• Suitable equipment to prevent static voltage damage to circuit boards.
13-6-11-3 Backing up and restoring configuration files in SCU Gen II

We strongly recommend backing up the configuration files in the SCU regularly. If those files
are available and can be transferred to a replacement SCU, it will be much easier to start and
configure the RF system.
If the SCU cannot be accessed for backing up the files before the replacement, it is important
that up-to-date configuration values are available from previous back-ups.
The files should be backed up:
• after the MINItrace system has been installed (factory settings)
• after the acceptance test if any parameters have been changed
• after each planned maintenance
• when any of the parameters has been changed
• before replacing the SCU (if the SCU is accessible)
Backing up the configuration files

1 Remove the covers as described in Section 13-6-3 Removing covers on page 448.
2 Connect a straight-thru network cable between the laptop and a LAN switch. Use a
twisted cable if you connect directly to the rear of the SCU.
3 Create the following back-up folder on the laptop for storing the configuration files:
C:\backup\scu.
13 RF system 471
7 Copy the files cycloMT.cfg and scuMT.cfg from the Config folder to the back-up folder
C:\backup\scu on the laptop.
CycloMT.cfg will be used in the new SCU, scuMT.cfg is stored for backup only.
CAUTION!
Do not copy scuMT.cfg to another SCU. ScuMT.cfg is unique for each SCU and cannot be
used in other SCUs.
8 We also recommend copying the log files in the Log folder to the back-up folder. The
files are useful for future trouble-shooting and service.
Note!
The log folders should be emptied regularly. Log files cannot be recorded if the memory
is full. Make sure the log files are backed up before deleting them.
Restoring configuration file
CAUTION!
Do not copy scuMT.cfg to another SCU. ScuMT.cfg is unique for each SCU and cannot be
used in other SCUs.
After replacing the SCU, restore the backed up configuration files as follows:
1 Open the SCU file manager as described in step 2–5 in the previous section.
2 Delete cycloMT.cfg from the Config folder.
3 Copy the backed up version of cycloMT.cfg from the back-up folder to the Config folder.
4 To activate the configuration file, re-boot from the SCU web interface (see Section SCU
Settings page on page 420) or cycle the power to the SCU.
13-6-11-4 Replacing the battery

To replace the battery inside the SCU:
2 Apply suitable equipment to prevent static voltage damage to circuit boards.
3 Unscrew the six retaining screws on the SCU front panel using the small screwdriver
(see Figure 13-41).
472 13 RF system
4 Disconnect the front display cable behind the panel. The front panel should not be left
hanging in the cable only.
Figure 13-41: Removing the retaining screws
5 Note the orientation of the battery.
6 To remove the battery from the holder, press the retainer spring aside using the small
screwdriver (see Figure 13-42).
Figure 13-42: Battery inside the SCU
Battery (type CR2032)
Retainer spring
7 Insert the new battery in the holder with the plus pole facing up.
8 Reconnect the cable to the front display.
9 Fasten the front panel with the retaining screws.
13 RF system 473
10 Recycle or dispose of the old battery in accordance with local or country laws in order
to minimize potential effects on the environment and human health.
Note!
The time and date settings will be lost after the battery replacement. To set time and date,
see Section SCU Settings page on page 420.
13-6-11-5 Upgrading the SCU application software

The SCU application software is delivered on a CD.
For spare part number, refer to the spare parts list for sub system MT 225 SCU in MINItrace
The software upgrade is made in three steps:
1 Copying the file from the CD to the SCU.
2 Moving the file to the correct location in the SCU.
3 Re-booting the SCU.
Copying the file from the CD to the SCU

1 Before starting, note the SCU version number shown on the SCU front display.
5 If there is an nk.bin file on the top level (root) in the SCU file manager, delete the file.
6 Copy the nk.bin file on the CD to the top level in the SCU file manager.
474 13 RF system
Moving the file to the correct location in the SCU

1 In Windows, click Start and Run.
2 Type telnet 192.0.4.71 and click OK. The Telnet window appears.
Figure 13-43: Telnet window
3 Type service at the log-in prompt and press Enter.
4 Type the password and press Enter. The password can be requested from GE Online
Center.
5 At the prompt, type copy “\storage card\scu\nk.bin” “\storage card”. Press Enter.
6 Type exit and press Enter to exit Telnet.
Rebooting the SCU

1 Reboot the SCU to complete the software upgrade (see Section SCU Settings page on
page 420).
2 Check that the SCU version number shown on the display is the new one.
The software upgrade is now completed.
13-6-11-6 Replacing a complete SCU Gen II
Removing the SCU

Before removing the SCU, make sure that the configuration files are backed up (see
Section 13-6-11-3 Backing up and restoring configuration files in SCU Gen II on page 471.
2 Remove the RFPG upper right rear cover, see Section13-6-3 Removing covers on page448.
13 RF system 475
3 Unscrew the retaining screws for all connectors at the rear of the SCU using the
screwdriver (see Figure 13-44).
4 Disconnect the cables from the rear panel.
5 Unscrew the four retaining screws at the front of the SCU (see Figure 13-44).
Figure 13-44: Removing the SCU
6 Gently pull the SCU out of the cabinet.
7 When discarding an SCU, follow the federal, state and/or local regulations for disposal
of electrical and electronic equipment.
Installing the SCU

For spare part number, refer to the spare parts list for sub system MT 225 SCU in MINItrace
1 Carefully insert the SCU into the cabinet.
2 Fasten the SCU at the front of the cabinet with the four retaining screws.
3 Reconnect the cables to the rear panel.
Note!
Make sure that the cable labels match the markings on the rear panel.
4 Tighten the connector screws.
5 Restore the backed up configuration files as described in Section 13-6-11-3 Backing up

and restoring configuration files in SCU Gen II on page 471.
6 Fasten the upper right cover to the rear of the cabinet.
13-6-11-7 Verify normal function

1 Switch on the RFPG circuit breaker on the Mains Distribution Panel.
2 Switch on the RFPG circuit breaker at the rear of the Control Cabinet (CCAB).
476 13 RF system
3 Make sure that the SCU boots up as usual. See also Section Turning on power to the SCU
on page 399 and the subsequent sections.
4 From the MSS, check that all interlocks are OK.
5 At the MSS/RF SYSTEM page – click STANDBY.
6 Check that the normal starting sequence is performed.
7 Check the following values on the front display of the SCU or on the web interface. The
allowed deviations are as follows:
a. HEATER VOLTAGE 7.5 V ± 0.2 V
b. GRID VOLTAGE -250 V ± 10 V
c. SCREEN VOLTAGE 750 V ± 20 V
d. SCREEN CURRENT 23 mA ± 3 mA
e. ANODE VOLTAGE 7800 V +400 V, -200 V
f. ANODE CURRENT 0.1 A ± 0.05 A
8 When STANDBY is indicated, use the arrow buttons to set the Dee Voltage to 35 kV.
9 Click NORMAL.
10 Compare the RF parameters to previous run data at 35 kV.
11 Change Dee voltage to normal configuration value.
12 Switch off the RF and magnet.
Create and back up log files

Perform and log the following runs (see Section Log page on page 414 for log file instructions):
1 Run at 35 kV. Create a Milliseconds log.
2 Go to STANDBY READY. Create a Five seconds log.
3 Download the Statistics log, the Milliseconds log and the Five seconds log.
4 Save the log files in the backup folder on the laptop, C:\backup\scu.
Back up SCU configuration files

Back up the two config files CycloMT.cfg and ScuMT.cfg in the SCU to the back-up folder
C:\backup\scu on the laptop (see Section Backing up the configuration files on page 471). Make
a back-up whenever changing the SCU configuration!
Note!
Do not overwrite ScuMT.cfg-files that belong to other SCUs.
13 RF system 477
13-6-12 Replacing SCU Gen I with SCU Gen II

SCU Gen II provides extended functions for monitoring and setting RF parameters, and for
creating log files. SCU Gen II also has less spare parts than SCU Gen I.
SCU Gen II replaces SCU Gen I in case of obsolete spare parts for SCU Gen I.
Figure 13-45: SCU Gen I and Gen II
SCU Gen I SCU Gen II
13-6-12-1 Tools and material

• MINItrace NSCU upgrade kit
• Tie wraps
13-6-12-2 How to use the adapter cables in MINItrace NSCU upgrade kit
There are two different versions of SCU Gen I. One version has Edac 516 connectors on the
rear panel, the other one has D-Sub connectors (Figure 13-46).
The adapter cables in the upgrade kit should ONLY be used if SCU Gen I has Edac 516
connectors. This is described further on in the upgrade procedure in Section Connecting Edac
516 – D-Sub adapter cables on page 483.
478 13 RF system
Figure 13-46: SCU Gen I versions
13-6-12-3 Removing SCU Gen I

To remove SCU Gen I:
1 IMPORTANT! If SCU Gen I is functioning, record all values shown on the Measurement
Module on the old SCU before turning it off (Figure 13-47). The values will be used when
setting the configuration parameter in SCU Gen II. If the SCU is not working, use the most
recently documented values.
Figure 13-47: Measurement Module
2 Remove the TPSU front panel (Figure 13-48).
3 Switch off the TPSU front switch (Figure 13-48).
13 RF system 479
4 Switch off the RFPG circuit breaker at the rear of the CCAB (Figure 13-48).
Figure 13-48: TPSU and RFPG CB power off
5 Apply LOTO on the RFPG, see Section 3-5-6 LOTO procedures for the MINItrace system
on page 59.
6 Remove both upper rear covers on the RFPG using a screwdriver.
7 Disconnect all cables from the rear panel on the SCU. If necessary, use a screwdriver to
loosen retaining screws (Figure 13-49).
Note!
Any low-pass filters on position SKQ and SKR shall NOT be moved to the new SCU
(Figure 13-50)!
Note!
The illustration shows a unit with D-Sub connectors. There are also units with
square-shaped Edac 516 connectors (Figure 13-46).
480 13 RF system
8 On the front panel, unscrew the two upper screws first (Figure 13-49). This is important
because the SCU does not rest on rails!
9 Unscrew the two lower screws while pressing against the front panel with the hand to
prevent the SCU from hanging down (Figure 13-49).
10 Pull out the SCU.
Figure 13-49: Removing SCU Gen I
Figure 13-50: Low-pass filters on SCU Gen I
13 RF system 481
13-6-12-4 Installing SCU Gen II

To install SCU Gen II (see Figure 13-51):
1 Move the existing cage nuts on the cabinet front and add the four new nuts included in
the kit.
2 Insert the SCU in the lower position and fasten it using the retaining screws.
3 Fasten the blind plate in the upper position using the screws and washers included in
the kit.
Figure 13-51: Installing SCU Gen II
482 13 RF system
13-6-12-5 Routing the cables in the cabinet

It is usually necessary to release the cable bundles and rearrange the cables so that they
reach the rear of SCU Gen II.
Disassembling the cable bundles

1 Locate the vertical cable duct in the center at the rear of the RFPG (Figure 13-52).
2 Remove the metal cover using your hand (Figure 13-52).
3 Carefully cut the tie wraps using the cutting pliers (Figure 13-52).
CAUTION!
Make sure no cables are cut by accident.
Figure 13-52: Rearranging cables
Connecting Edac 516 – D-Sub adapter cables

Observe that this section is relevant ONLY if SCU Gen I had Edac 516 connectors on the rear
panel (Figure 13-53). If so, connect the adapter cables included in the upgrade kit according
to the instruction below.
If SCU Gen I had D-Sub connectors, ignore this section and go to Section Connecting the
cables on page 486.
13 RF system 483
Figure 13-53: Edac 516 connectors
1 Connect the cables in the upgrade kit according to Table 13-21.
CAUTION!
Wrong connection of the cables might damage the SCU or other parts.
Make sure that the cable markings match!
2 Tighten the Edac 516 retaining screws fully while pressing the connectors towards each
other (Figure 13-54). Pay attention to the keying in the connectors.
Table 13-21: Upgrade kit cable connections
Cable in kit1 Connected from/to
5248729 (CAB225-31280) SCU: SKF Cable: CAA221-31027
5248843 (CAC225-31281) SCU: SKK Cable: CAC221-31029
5248739 (CAB225-31283) SCU: PLD/SKD Cable: CAA221-31035
5248836 (CAB225-31284) SCU: SKE Cable: CAA221-31036
5248839 (CAB225-31285) SCU: SKM Cable: CAA221-31037
1 New cable part numbers introduced 2014. The new numbers are shown in boldface and the old numbers in
brackets.
Note!
The D-Sub cables to SKG and SKH should also be connected to the rear panel on the new
SCU. However, the ground cable (green/yellow) will not be reused.
484 13 RF system
Figure 13-54: Connecting extension cables
IMPORTANT! Make sure that the

keying in the male and female con-
nectors match to prevent them from
being connected 180º wrong.
13 RF system 485
Connecting the cables

1 Rearrange the cables so that all connectors reach the sockets at the rear of the SCU
Gen II.
2 Attach all connectors to the rear panel (Figure 13-55). If necessary, use a screw driver to
tighten the D-Sub connectors.
Note!
Do NOT move any low-pass filters from the old SCU to SCU Gen II (Figure 13-50). SCU Gen II
shall NOT have low-pass filters.
CAUTION!
Wrong connection of the cables might damage the SCU or other parts.
Make sure that the cable markings match!
Figure 13-55: Attaching connectors
486 13 RF system
3 If the network consists of coaxial cables, skip this step!
Connect the RJ45 cable (CAB225-31286) between the LAN socket on the SCU and a free
socket in the network switch in CCAB (Figure 13-56).
• Route the cable inside the cabinets as shown in the illustration.
• Route the cable through the holes in the cabinet roofs and in the cable duct.
Figure 13-56: Routing the network cable
4 Bundle the cables using tie wraps and fit them into the cable duct again.
Do not pull the cables too hard! Use suitable exit holes along the metal cable duct.
If the existing holes are not sufficient, make new holes using a saw.
5 Make sure that no cable risks being pinched against sharp edges on the cable duct.
13 RF system 487
6 Attach the covers to the cable duct. If required, secure the covers with tie wraps.
7 Fasten the rear covers on the RFPG.
13-6-12-6 Starting up SCU Gen II
Connecting a laptop to the SCU

If the SCU is connected to the network switch in CCAB, as described previously in this
instruction, the laptop can also be connected to the network switch.
If the SCU is not connected to the Ethernet network or if there is no such network (coaxial
cables instead), the laptop can be connected directly to the rear of the SCU.
To connect the laptop to the SCU:
1 Remove the rear cover required to get access to the network switch (CCAB door) or the
SCU (upper right-hand cover).
2 Connect the Ethernet port on the laptop to either the network switch or the SCU as
follows:
• To the network switch using a straight-thru RJ45 cable. Make sure that the SCU is
connected to the network.
• To the LAN socket at the rear of the SCU using a twisted RJ45 cable.
3 Fasten the cover.
Turning on power to the SCU

1 Remove the LOTO devices.
2 Switch on (push upwards) the TPSU front switch.
3 Fasten the TPSU front panel.
4 Switch on (push upwards) the RFPG circuit breaker at the rear of the CCAB. The SCU and
RFPG starts up which takes about 40–60 seconds.
5 Check that the Main menu appears on the front display on the SCU (see Figure 13-9).
6 Make sure that the IP address stored in the SCU is 192.0.4.71 by selecting More > IP
address > Read IP on the front display.
Note!
192.0.4.71 is the default address. It can be changed if required for matching another local
network address configuration.
488 13 RF system
Starting the SCU web interface

2 Type http://192.0.4.71/www/ and press Enter.
The Main page in the SCU web interface appears in a few seconds.
If the Main page does not appear, the configuration of network parameters on the laptop
might be wrong. To correct it, see Section Setting the TCP/IP address and LAN parameters in
the PC on page 400.
13-6-12-7 Setting the configuration in a new SCU Gen II
Introduction
Due to small differences in calibration of electronics and signal filtering, the new SCU (SCU
Gen II) might measure Dee voltages and RF power slightly different than the old SCU (SCU
Gen I). (This is similar to when replacing the RF board in SCU Gen I.) The difference might cause
that the real Dee voltages used for beam irradiation changes a few percent compared to the
SCU Gen I. The beam properties, such as ion source efficiency and beam width, then also
change slightly. Beam tuning might then be necessary to reach the same working point as
before. If so, the expected tuning is to update Dee voltage ~±2 kV.
It is recommended to use cyclotron data from the near past as reference when upgrading
to SCU Gen II. Such data can be found in production log files, production reports and PM
protocols. Primarily, the RF parameters and beam properties are recommended to be used
for comparison. Additional beam tuning might be necessary. However, the upgrade can also
be done without history references.
Preparation
Prepare the following before starting the configuration:
• Get the following parameters from the configuration page accelerator in the MSS:
Parameter Value
Dee_scale
• Get the following parameters:
Parameter Number
RFPG serial number
Cyclotron serial number
SCU IP address1
1 If other than standard address for standard addresses of cyclotron network 192.0.4.XX, the default address will
do.
• Make sure there is a back-up folder for configuration files, C:\backup\scu, on the laptop.
13 RF system 489
Calculate configuration values

Calculate new values according to Table 13-22.
Table 13-22: Configuration values
Parameter Value/calculation
Fwd Power at 35 kV 8.5 kW (will be changed as described later)
Dee 1 Pickup Factor 19.00 × Dee_scale
Dee 1 Cable Factor 0.53
Set for 35 kV Dee 1 1709 / Dee_scale
Settings
1 Log on to the SERVICE level in the SCU web interface.
2 On the SCU settings page, set the following:
a IP address
b RFPG serial number
c Cyclotron serial number
d Time and Date
SCU/RFPG tuning
Adjust and tune the RFPG as follows (internal loop adjustment):
1 Update the Config page in the SCU web interface (see Section Config page on page 417)
with the calculated values in Table 13-22.
2 Click Save changes when finished.
3 Start the RFPG at 35 kV and NORMAL status.
4 Go to the Main page in the SCU web interface.
5 Note the value for Fwd Pwr.
6 Go the Config page in the SCU web interface.
7 Enter the Fwd Pwr value in the field for Fwd Power at 35kV.
8 Click Save changes.
9 Record the values for the RF parameters and beam properties and compare with the
values at 35 kV recorded just before the SCU replacement.
If the parameter values for the working system could not be recorded before the SCU
replacement, choose a suitable Dee voltage setting from a previous PM.
490 13 RF system
Create and back up log files

Perform and log the following runs for future reference (see Section Log page on page 414 for
log file instructions):
1 Run at 35 kV.
• Create a Milliseconds log.
• Fill in the values from the SCU web interface Main page in Table 13-23.
2 Go to STANDBY READY.
• Create a Five seconds log.
• Fill in the values from the SCU web interface Main page in Table 13-23.
3 Download the Statistics log, the Milliseconds log and the Five seconds log.
4 Save the log files in the backup folder on the laptop, C:\backup\scu.
Table 13-23: SCU web interface parameters
SCU web interface, Main page RFPG Status
Parameter Unit Standby Ready 35 kV
DEE Ref In kV
DEE 1 kV
Mtch ph 90 º
DPA Fwd W
DPA Refl W
Fwd Pwr kW
Refl Pwr kW
Anode V kV
Anode C A
Grid V V
Grid C mA
Screen V V
Screen C mA
Heater V V
13 RF system 491
Back up SCU configuration files

Back up the two configuration files CycloMT.cfg and ScuMT.cfg located in the SCU to the
back-up folder C:\backup\scu on the laptop.
Note!
Do not overwrite ScuMT.cfg-files that belong to other SCUs.
For instructions, see Section Backing up the configuration files on page 471.
Whenever changing the SCU configuration, make a back-up and store it appropriately.
Beam verification
Make a suitable test irradiation from the service laptop or the Master station.
If applicable data exist, compare the ion source output and beam characteristics (beam width,
transmission properties) with the situation just before the SCU replacement. Change the Dee
voltages if necessary.

Not available in this issue of the manual.

The drawings listed in Table 13-24 are included in direction MINItrace Service Manual –
Drawings and Parts Lists (dir. 2233001-100).
Table 13-24: RFPG drawings and parts lists
Drawing Parts lists
Dee Ass’y CAC 202-31001-xx-2 CAC 202-36001-xx-2
RF Cable CAC 202-31007-xx-2
RF Pick-up Ass’y CAC 202-31011-xx-4
RF-Feed Through Ass’y CAC 202-31020-xx-2 CAC 202-36020

There are no RFPG OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) documents.
492 13 RF system
14 EXTRACTION SYSTEM

The extraction system is based on the stripping-foil principle. The two electrons of the
accelerated negative ions (H-) are stripped off during passage through the extraction foil. The
particle charge changes from negative to positive during the passage (H+, proton), thus
changing the particle orbit from left bending to right bending in the magnet field. The position
of the extraction foil defines the direction of the external beam and is adjustable to allow
steering of the external beam into a selection of isotope production targets.
One or two (optional) foil holder assemblies guided by a beam orbit-shaped rail provides a
flexible extraction mechanism. The extraction system has two extraction modes:
• Single-beam extraction: one beam is guided to one out of five target positions.
• Dual-beam extraction (optional): two beams are guided simultaneously to two out of six
target positions (Note that the second beam is always directed onto target number six).
14-2 Overview
Figure 14-1: Extraction system
The extraction units move along a common curved guide plate. Each extraction unit carries
a foil holder. The guide plate is shaped in such a way that the position of the foil, regardless
of which beam exit is chosen, follows the curvature of the beam orbit at the final energy.
14 Extraction system 493

14-2 Overview
The single extraction drive unit moves the single extraction foil holder along the guide plate,
guiding the extracted beam to one of five exit ports.
The dual extraction drive units move the dual extraction foil holder along the guide plate, and
radially, guiding the extracted beam to the sixth exit port.
The drive units, which include motor and position potentiometer, are placed on the outside
of the vacuum chamber. The drive shafts penetrate the vacuum chamber wall by a double
vacuum seal arrangement.
Microswitches define the operating range of the extraction system. The GCU (General Control
Unit) is used to (via the MSS, MINItrace Service System) manually recalibrate the extraction
positioning after maintenance. The microswitches are used as references. Centering of the
beam in each target is performed by the GCU. Current readings from the beam collimators
are converted to fine-adjustment signals to the drive unit.
The foil carousel and the extraction foils are radioactive after production runs.
Always wear protective clothing, gloves and goggles.
Always monitor radiation levels before removing parts.
—
14-3 Single extraction

Figure 14-2: The single extraction mechanism
494 14 Extraction system


The single extraction foil holder is attached to a movable arm, which slides along a guide
plate, in order to find the correct position for each target. A spring in one direction and a
motor-controlled wire in the other control the movement of the arm.
The drive unit contains motor, two limit sensors and a potentiometer for indication of the
position. The foil holder itself carries two extraction foils and can be flipped in position for
each foil by a brackets mounted on the guide plate near both end positions.
The software in the GCS controls the movement of foil holder arm. The movement can be
calibrated and the foil position can be flipped from the MSS.
The foil holder can be mounted in position or taken out in a few seconds.
For instructions about how to load new foils, see Section 14-8-4 Dual extraction unit on
page 503.
Always wear protective clothing, foot protection (shoes with steel toe cap), gloves and
goggles.
—
14-3-4 Controls and displays

—

14-4 Dual extraction

The optional dual extraction mechanism is mounted on the same guide plate as the single
extraction unit.
Figure 14-3: The dual extraction mechanism

The dual extraction foil holder is attached to a movable arm and can be moved in two
directions, sideways and in or out closer or longer from the ion source. All in order to find the
best position for the target.
One drive unit, together with a spring, moves the foil holder sideways. An other drive unit,
also together with a spring, moves the foil holder in or out.
The drive units contains motor, two limit sensors and a potentiometer for indication of the
position. The dual extraction foil holder only contains one extraction foil. The software in the
GCS controls the movement of foil holder. From the MSS the movement can be calibrated.
The foil holder can be mounted in position or taken out in a few seconds.
For instructions about how to load new foils, see Section 14-8-3 Replacing the single extraction
unit foils on page 499.

14-4 Dual extraction
goggles.
—

—
14-5 Electrical interface

Two circuit boards provide the electrical interconnections between the extraction system
and the GCU: one board is located on the helium cooling system (Accelerator Connection
board) and the other is located in the CSC (Accelerator Support Connector board).

—

—
—

—

Check number of used foils at the Master System, Maintenance-Statistics.

See Section 3-9-5 Extraction on page 92.

14-8 Disassembly/reassembly
goggles.

• Standard tool kit
• Special tools kit CAC000-31011 (see ME-text foil assembly instruction)
• Ohm-meter
• Tweezers
• Gloves
• Container for foil holders
• Disposal bag for consumed extraction foils
• Lead glass
• Vacuum grease type Apiezon T
14-8-2 Opening and closing the vacuum chamber
14-8-2-1 Open the vacuum chamber

1 Turn off the cyclotron from the Master System or the MINItrace Service System (MSS).
2 See instructions in Section 10-7-1 Open the vacuum chamber on page 295.

14-8-2-2 Close the vacuum chamber

1 Make a final visual check of the extraction system.
2 Check that no tools or cleaning tissues are left in the vacuum chamber or on the magnet
yoke.
3 Wipe off the chamber O-ring with your finger (gloves on!).
4 Apply a thin layer of vacuum grease to the O-ring if necessary.
5 Close the vacuum chamber, see the instructions provided in Section 10-7-3 Closing the
vacuum chamber on page 299.
14-8-3 Replacing the single extraction unit foils
14-8-3-1 Tools
Graphite foils 2.2 µm (400-600 µg/cm2)
Forceps (included in the special tools kit CAC000-31011)
Razor blade (included in the special tools kit CAC000-31011)
Screwdriver
Cardboard or plastic plate
Plastic gloves

14-8-3-2 Removing the single extraction foil holder
The extraction foils are extremely fragile. Handle with care.
Do not touch the foils with bare hands.
Do not blow or vacuum clean in the vicinity of the foils.
Figure 14-4: Single extraction unit
To remove the foil holder:
1 Pull the foil holder off from the foil shaft.
2 Place the foil holder in the container.

14-8-3-3 Removing the used extraction foil
Figure 14-5: Single extraction foil holder
Numbers printed in bold type refer to drawing CAC204-31004 above.
1 Loosen the retaining screw 4.
2 Remove the screw 4, washer 5, and the foil retainer 2.
3 Use a pair of tweezers to remove the worn out extraction foils 1.
4 Place the extraction foils in a disposal bag for radioactive waste.

14-8-3-4 Cutting and inserting two new foils

1 Cut the foils by pressing with a sharp razor blade against a cardboard, as shown in
Figure 14-6. Dimensions are 21±0.5 × 11,5±0.5 mm.
Note!
The foils are extremely fragile and can only be cut with a pressing motion NOT sawing.
Figure 14-6: Cutting single extraction foils
1 2 3 4
2 Position the foil holder as shown in Figure 14-7 (A).
3 Place the foils in the gap between the retainer and the holder using a forceps.
4 Tighten the screw.
5 Turn the foil assembly upside down, as shown in Figure 14-7 (B). Then loosen the screw
to let the foils align with the foil holder edge.
Figure 14-7: Position the foil holder
A B
6 Tighten the screw and then remove the excessive foil material outside of the foilholder.

14-8-3-5 Reinstalling the foil holder

1 Push the foil holder onto on the foil shaft.
2 Check that the foil holder is not grounded by using a standard Ohm-meter:
a Measure between the cable shoe and the vacuum chamber.
b The resistance should be approximately 20 kΩ.
c Loosen the screw and remove the cable shoe.
d Check that the resistance between foil holder and vacuum chamber is at least
500 kΩ.
e Reattach the cable shoe and tighten the screw.
14-8-4 Dual extraction unit
14-8-4-1 General
The two halves of the dual extraction foil holder are held together by knurled brass knobs
and a threaded steel rod. The knobs are machined to fit over the raised center section of the
holder. A C-clip fits into the groove in the recess at both ends of the assembly. When you
loosen the knurled knob on the threaded end of the rod, the C-clip tension spreads the two
halves of the holder, creating a gap to hold the foil.
Do NOT remove either knob, or the assembly will fly apart.
Figure 14-8: Dual extraction foil holder
14-8-4-2 Removing the foil holder
Remove the foil holder by pulling it out of the guide tube. It is kept in place by a spring-loaded
screw. Place the foil holder in the container.

14-8-4-3 Replacing the extraction foil

1 Loosen the knob at the threaded end of the rod.
2 Shift the rod to create an even gap across the holder.
3 Use the forceps to pull the old foil out of the holder.
Place the used extraction foil in a disposal bag for radioactive waste.
Cut the foils by pressing a sharp razor blade against the cardboard or plastic plate.
CAUTION!
The extraction foils are extremely fragile. Handle with care. Do NOT saw the blade back
and forth.
Cut one 9 mm long piece of foil from the strip for the dual extraction holder. (Refer to drawing
CAC204-34077-xx-4 for foil dimensions.)
Figure 14-9: Cutting foils
9 mm x 16 mm piece of foil
Carefully insert the new extraction foil into the foil holder:
1 If necessary, use the tip of the screwdriver blade to lift the corner of the foil.
2 Slide the back part of a pair of forceps beneath the center of the foil.
3 Insert the foil into the gap and center it in the opening.

4 Use the edge of the metal bar to gently even the foil with the edge of the holder.
Figure 14-10: New foil into foil holder
Squeeze the two halves of the foil holder together, then tighten the knob.
Figure 14-11: Tighten the knob
Make a final check of the extraction foils in the foil holder. Use an optical magnifier in to
see if there are cracks in the extraction foils.
14-8-4-4 Reinstalling the foil holder

1 Push the foil holder into the guide tube until it snaps in place.
2 Check that the foil holder is not grounded by using a standard Ohm-meter:
a Measure between the cable shoe and the vacuum chamber.
b The resistance should be approximately 20 kΩ.
c Loosen the screw and remove the cable shoe.
d Check that the resistance between foil holder and vacuum chamber is at least
500 kΩ.
e Reattach the cable shoe and tighten the screw.
f Verify that the resistance between the cable shoe and the vacuum chamber still is
20 kΩ.

14-9 Calibration of the extraction system motors

Calibration of the foil holder, and balance motors in the extraction system is done from the
MSS (MINItrace Service System), see Chapter 19 MINItrace Service System version 2.x (MSS)
software. The calibration is done in the following steps:
1 From the Extraction page, in the MSS set all drive units (Extraction motor 1, Extraction
motor 2 and Balance) to 50%.
2 From the Motor Calibration page select Balance.
3 Select Calibrate (for Balance).
4 After the calibration of the balance go to the Extraction page again.
5 Set the Balance Motor to 50% once more.
6 Go back to the Calibrate Motor page.
7 Select Motor 2.
8 Select Calibrate (for Motor 2).
9 After the calibration of Motor 2 is finished, select Motor 1.
10 Select Calibrate (for Motor 1).
Calibration is finished.

—

—

15 TARGETS AND RADIOCHEMISTRY SYSTEM
15-1 System overview

The targets are mounted on a flange at the front of the cyclotron. There are five standard
target positions (#1–5) and one optional (#6).
The target media is brought to the target through tubes from the Target Support Cabinet
(TSC).
After production, the radioactive media is brought to the hot cell(s) through tubes.
Cooling of each target is provided by two systems:
• Water cooling system.
• Helium cooling system.
Note!
The 18F- Nb 25 target only requires water cooling.
15-2 Target Support Cabinet (TSC)

The Target Support Cabinet houses the Liquid Target Fillers (LTF) and the helium cooling
compressor.
Note that the helium cooling compressor is a part of the target system.
15-3 Targets – theory of operation

When a particle beam has passed the selected extraction foil, it will hit the corresponding
target at the cyclotron beam exit. The beam enters the target chamber through a double-foil
assembly, which is a part of the target. The MINItrace cyclotron has 5+1 target ports. They
are used for the following targets:
• 18F- Nb 25 / 18F- (3.9 mm, 6 mm and 12 mm)
• 11CO
2
• 15O
• 13N
At target-port 5 there can be a “dump”-target mounted. The dump-target is used during

Beam diagnostics, see Chapter 16 Beam diagnostics.
Target-port 6 is optional and reserved for Dual-beam. (Discontinued.)
15 Targets and radiochemistry system 507

15-3 Targets – theory of operation
The gas targets comprises a target body, a front flange and a helium cooling flange. The
liquid targets comprises a rear flange with a silver body insert, a helium cooling flange and
a front flange (18F- and 13N targets, 3.9 mm, 6 mm and 12 mm) or a rear flange, a niobium
body and a front flange (18F- Nb 25 targets). The front flange will guide the target into correct
position of the cyclotron target insulated connection bayonet. The bayonet mechanism
assures rapid and simple mounting and dismounting of the target.
All target services, cooling water and high speed recirculation helium gas for foil cooling are
delivered to the target through quick connections.
Note!
The 18F- Nb 25 target only requires water cooling.
Figure 15-1: Target ports
15-4 Helium cooling system
15-4-1 Main parts
Note!
The 18F- Nb 25 target requires no helium cooling.
508 15 Targets and radiochemistry system

The helium cooling system is a closed system for cooling of the target foils. A high-flow helium
jet flows between the foils of each target. Heat from the foils is transferred to the helium gas.
In a heat exchanger, the helium gas heat is dissipated to a cooling water circuit.
The system includes the piping and valves for helium gas distribution, a heat exchanger, and
a compressor to make the helium gas to circulate in the system at high speed.
The helium cooling system comprises the following main parts:
1 Helium gas cylinder
2 Compressor, located at the Target Support Cabinet. See Figure 15-2.
3 Helium cooling assembly, located beneath the magnet. See Figure 15-3.
Figure 15-2: Helium cooling compressor
Figure 15-3: Helium cooling assembly


The purpose of the helium cooling system is to efficiently cool the target foils. A high-flow
helium jet flows between the foils of each target. Heat from the foils is transferred to the
helium gas. In a heat exchanger, the heat is finally dissipated to a cooling water circuit.
A block diagram of the helium cooling system is shown in Figure 15-4. Figure 15-3 shows the
components on the helium cooling assembly.

Figure 15-4: Helium cooling flow diagram
The helium flow is divided into two circuits: target 1 to 5 and target 6. The compressor
maintains a high gas flow through the targets. A pressure transducer (23) monitors the
pressure of the cooled gas. The targets are connected to the helium cooling system by solenoid
valves during beam operation.
A filter in the return line from the targets removes water from the helium. When necessary,
helium is refilled from the gas bottle.
The GCU controls the solenoid valves and monitors the pressure signal via interface relays
for the solenoid valves in the CSC.

WARNING!
Vent the helium tubing before servicing the helium cooling compressor.
The helium cooling tubing and the filter can contain fragments of radioactiv foils which
should be removed from the workspace as soon as possible to reduce hand/finger dose.
Dispose of the foils in accordance with federal, state and/or other local regulations for
radioactive waste.

A pressure transducer (item 23 in Figure 15-4) monitors the pressure of the cooled gas.
See also Section 15-5-1-2 Helium cooling system leak check on page 514.


For target maintenance instructions, refer to MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide (dir. 2232995).
15-5-1 Overhaul of helium cooling system
Note!
If the system is only equipped with 18F- Nb 25 targets, maintenace on the helium cooling system
is not necessary.
15-5-1-1 Filter
1 Empty any water contents of the filter body by opening the bottom screw slightly.
2 Check if the filter body is dirty. If necessary, unscrew the filter body and clean or replace
the filter.
Figure 15-5: Helium cooling system

15-5-1-2 Helium cooling system leak check

1 On the Service laptop, select target 1. The helium cooling system is automatically started.
2 Check that the helium gas pressure rises to 18 psi.
3 If the pressure falls under 16 psi, the system is refilled from the helium gas bottle (see
Figure 15-4). The time between each refill should not be shorter than 2 minutes.
4 If the time between each refill is shorter than 2 minutes, check the helium cooling system
for leaks.
15-5-2 Replace transfer line (Tefzel tube) to hot cell

The transfer lines (Tefzel™ tubes) that deliver the product from liquid targets (18F and 13N) to
the hot cells have a finite life span, and must be periodically changed (see MINItrace Qilin
Operator Guide (dir. 2232995) for details).
A set of 8 uniquely marked spares with every active product line are run during installation.
The lines run through a plastic conduit with shallow bends, to facilitate the future replacement
of spares.
When the system is running short of spare transfer lines (Tefzel tubes), a new set of lines must
be inserted. This procedure is a part of Planned Maintenance.
The lines run through a plastic conduit with shallow bends, to facilitate the replacement of
spares.
Note!
Remember to mark the ends of each line before you pull the lines.
1 Tape the end of the polyurethane or Tefzel tubing, to prevent any debris from entering
it while you push/pull it to its destination.
2 Fish a line through the conduits between the cyclotron room and the hot lab.
3 Pull all the lines and spares between the rooms.
Note!
Do not use excessive force! Avoid pulling in one single Tefzel tube, since it may be deformed
(reduced inner diameter).
4 Decide which line(s) to you will use after PM, and label both ends with a piece of masking
tape.
5 Run 8 spares, for a total of 9 lines for each target on the system.
Table 15-1: Transfer line (Tefzel tube) to hot cell
From To Material Notes
Hot lab Hot lab conduit 1/16" Tefzel Refer to the system pipe work drawing.
Run 8 spares, for a total of 9 lines for each target on the
system.

WARNING! Radioactive gases
Following a production run, the target and associated tubing contain radioactive gas.
15-6-1 Spare parts

For spare parts and spare parts numbers, refer to the spare parts listed for each sub systems
in MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
15-6-2 PEEK tubing connections

1 Check that the tube end is not damaged. If necessary, cut the tube a few millimeters.
2 Insert the tube into the connector until it passes the shoulder inside the tip, and extends
beyond the outer tip of the connector by 1 to 2 mm.
3 Screw the threaded end of the connector into the threaded hole on the target or coupling.
Figure 15-6: Peek tubing connections
1. 2.

15-6-3 Targets
For disassembly and reassembly instructions for targets, refer to MINItrace Qilin Operator
Guide (dir. 2232995).
15-6-3-1 Target rear flange quick connectors
CAUTION!
There will always be some water spillage when opening up the water cooling circuits.
Always keep a bucket and a cloth nearby to catch any spilled water.
Preparations
goggles.
1 Close the water valves for TARG S, TARG and TARG D (dual systems only) in the CSC
cabinet.
2 Disconnect the target from the MSS.
3 Remove the target from the cyclotron system. If necessary, place the target in a lead
container to decay before starting to work on it.

Removing and mounting target rear flange quick connectors

1 Unscrew the quick connectors from the rear flange of the target using an open-ended
wrench.
The quick connectors are sealed with Loctite 242 or similar, so some force might be
necessary when unscrewing them.
CAUTION!
Be careful not to damage the threading in the aluminum rear flange.
2 Apply Loctite 242 or similar to the threads of the new quick connectors and screw them
into the rear flange by hand.
Note!
• Make sure the quick couplings do not protrude more than 17.5 mm from the rear
flange.
• Make sure to orientate the quick couplings so that the opening devices are easy to
access.
Finishing off
If the water cooling tubes are to be replaces as well, proceed to Section 15-6-7 Target water
cooling on page 521.
1 Attach the target to the cyclotron system and connect the water cooling tubes to the
rear flange quick connectors.
2 Open the water valves for TARG S, TARG and TARG D (dual systems only) in the CSC
cabinet.
3 Start the water-cooling by selecting the applicable target in the MSS. Check for water
leaks, especially around the couplings. Tighten further, if necessary.

15-6-4 Reconfiguration of targets

When the targets are reconfigured its important to do the same configuration both in the
Master System and the MSS (Service System). If the configurations are different in the Master
System and the Service System, there will be an error message on the Master during start up
procedure. The error message can be one of these:
– Master internal fault in start unit, wrong target type
– Master internal fault in start unit, wrong process-id at the Master system
– Master internal fault in start unit, wrong chem type at the Master system
If you do a reconfiguration from the MSS (Service System) you need to press “Save to GCS”
on the CONFIG PARAMETERS menu, otherwise you do not save the new configuration.
15-6-4-1 Configuration from Master System

For detailed information, refer to MINItrace Master System Administration (dir. 2232997-100).
Remember to log out as User and then log in as Manager.
15-6-4-2 Configuration from Service System

For a detailed information, see Section 19-6 Configuration on page 601.

15-6-5 Liquid Target Fillers

The Liquid Target Fillers (LTF) are used for automated and remote controlled filling of the liquid
targets. In addition, the use of LTFs minimizes loss of the expensive target water.
Figure 15-7: LTF

15-6-5-1 LTF disassembly procedures

The 3-way valve assy and the syringe are replaceable. If any other part fail, the complete
LTF-unit has to be replaced.
For spare part numbers, refer to MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
Proceed like this to replace the 3-way valve assy:
1 Make sure the target is disconnected, this is done from the MSS.
2 Unscrew the red liquid-connections on the 3-way valve.
3 Remove the two compressed air tubes by pressing the blue shoulders and pull out the
tube.
4 Carefully unscrew the syringe.
5 Unscrew the two screws holding the valve assy.
If you, for some reason, need to disassemble the Valve assy, please mark the position of the
brass-coupling as its possible to reassemble it the wrong way.
15-6-5-2 LTF reassembly procedure

Proceed this way to reassemble the valve assy:
1 Attach the valve assy, but do not tighten the screws, the unit should be a little bit loose
so it can be aligned with the syringe.
2 Carefully screw in the syringe, and tighten only by hand.
3 Connect the two compressed air tubes. Push them in and verify that the blue shoulder
comes out a few millimeters.
4 Screw the two red liquid connections to the 3-way valve.

15-6-5-3 Performance check and adjustments

The syringe will be filled with about 1.0–2.5 ml of liquid, depending on target. There is an
adjustable stop on the pneumatic cylinder rod where the amount of liquid can be set. 24 mm
movement means 1 ml.
Also the syringe fill and empty times can be adjusted. For 1 ml the fill time should be about
10 seconds and the empty time about 4 seconds. Too fast filling could pop the needle out of
the vial and too slow filling means insufficient water to the target. For more details about
fill/empty times, see MINItrace Qilin Installation Manual (dir. 2232994-100).
15-6-6 Valve panel
WARNING! Radioactive area
The valve panel is located down at the left-hand side of the targets, inside the shield doors.
If any of the Valve assys need to be replaced, this is the procedure:
1 Disconnect the target from from the MSS.
2 Unscrew the red liquid connections on the valve.
3 Remove the two compressed air tubes by pressing the blue shoulders and pull out the
tube.
4 Unscrew the two screws holding the valve assy.
Replace with a new valve in the opposite order.
On the Valve Panel you also find the PEEK filters. Refer to MINItrace Qilin Operator Guide
(dir. 2232995).
15-6-7 Target water cooling
CAUTION!
There will always be some water spillage when opening up the water cooling circuits.
Always keep a bucket and a cloth nearby to catch any spilled water.
15-6-7-1 Tubes
Preparations
cabinet.
2 Disconnect the targets from the MSS.
3 Remove all radioactive targets from the cyclotron system and place in a lead container
to avoid extra dose.

Replacing target water cooling tubes

1 Remove the old tubes from the routed raceway in the shield plastic.
2 Disconnect the tubes from the manifold by pushing down the ring on the connector and
pulling out the tube.
3 Plug the connectors on the manifold using the supplied stop plugs.
4 Mount the new quick connections on the new tubes by inserting the tube into the ferrule
nut and then attaching a quick connector fitting. Use a wrench or similar tool to tighten
the coupling firmly.
5 Label one connector “IN” and the other “OUT”.
6 Route the new tubes behind the retaining screws in the shield plastic.
7 Cut the tubes to appropriate length.
Note!
Make sure to leave enough slack to move the manifold for service access.
8 Mount the check valve on the return line (OUT), see Section 15-6-7-2 Check valve on
page 522.
9 Remove the plugs from the manifold and connect the new tubes according to labelling.
Finishing off
If the target rear flange quick connectors are to be replaces as well, proceed to Section 15-6-3-1
Target rear flange quick connectors on page 516.
1 Attach the target(s) to the cyclotron system and connect the water cooling tubes to the
cabinet.
15-6-7-2 Check valve

Preparations
cabinet.
2 Disconnect the targets from the MSS.
3 Remove all radioactive targets from the cyclotron system and place in a lead container
to avoid extra dose.

Replacing target water cooling check valves

The target water cooling check valve is located on the return side, normally close to the
cooling water manifold.
1 Unscrew the old check valve from the target water cooling line.
2 Pay attention to the marking on the valve and make sure to mount the new check valve
with the arrow pointing towards the manifold. Tighten firmly.
Finishing off
1 Attach the target(s) to the cyclotron system and connect the water cooling tubes to the
cabinet.
15-6-8 Helium cooling compressor
The helium cooling compressor weighs 25 kg. Two people are needed when lifting it.

15-6-9 Helium cooling compressor diaphragm (membrane)
15-6-9-1 Tools
• Torque wrench
Figure 15-8: Disassembly of helium cooling compressor
15-6-9-2 Disassembly procedure

Item numbers in bold type see Figure 15-8. The disassembly of one pump section is described
below.
WARNING!
Vent the helium tubing before servicing the helium cooling compressor.
The helium cooling tubing and the filter can contain fragments of radioactiv foils which
should be removed from the workspace as soon as possible to reduce hand/finger dose.
Dispose of the foils in accordance with federal, state and/or other local regulations for
radioactive waste.

1 Shut down the cyclotron from the MINItrace Service System (MSS).
2 Close the helium supply used for the helium cooling system.
3 Switch off the circuit breaker for the helium compressor at the Cyclotron Support Cabinet
(CB4).
4 Vent the helium lines to remove pressure by click EMPTY in the He-cooling-box from the
MSS.
5 Mark the tubes to the helium cooling compressor and disconnect the tubes from the
compressor.
6 Remove the five cover retaining screws and lift off the top cover.
7 Remove the gasket 2. Clean with water.
8 Remove the filter/muffler elements 3 and the filter element 4. Wash the filter elements
with isopropanol.
9 Loosen four socket cap screws and remove the pump head 5.
10 Loosen two Phillips screws and remove the retainer plate 10.
11 Remove the diaphragm 11.
12 Clean the valves 8 with water.

1 Clean the surfaces where the diaphragm is placed, use isopropanol.
2 Place the new diaphragm on the connecting rod.
3 Place the retainer plate 10 over the center of the diaphragm. Fasten the Phillips screws
and tighten to 3.4 Nm (30 lbf*in).

4 Mount the pump head 5. Fasten the socket cap screws and tighten to 10.2–11.3 Nm
(90–100 lbf*in).
5 Insert the filter elements 3, 4.
6 Place the gasket 2 and top cover 1 on the pump head. Fasten the cover retaining screws.
7 Open the helium gas supply.
8 Fill the helium cooling system from the MSS as described in the next section.
15-6-10 Helium cooling filling

This section describes how to fill the helium cooling system after service of the helium cooling
system or target system.
If the helium cooling circuit is filled with only air or just a portion of helium there is a possibility
that the air will become radioactive ozone. The ozone will damage O-rings and membrane
in the helium cooling circuit. The purpose of the helium filling routine is therefore to make
sure that there is only helium in the circuit.
15-6-10-1 Filling the helium cooling system

1 At the MINItrace Service System (MSS), MAIN MENU, click on Target 1 to access the
TARGET window for the first target (13N-target shown in illustration).
2 Flush the helium cooling circuit by clicking Flush.
3 Fill the helium cooling circuit with helium by clicking Fill.

4 Empty the helium cooling circuit by clicking Empty.
5 Repeat the Flush-Fill-Empty-sequence three times, but end with a Fill, to make sure that
the helium-system is free from air.
6 Repeat steps 2–7 for all target positions to make sure that all targets are filled with helium
only.
7 Select one target and check that the pressure is OK (see Section 15-5-1-2 Helium cooling
system leak check on page 514).
8 Unselect targets.
9 Click MAIN MENU to exit from the TARGET window.
15-7 How to add an 18F target option to MINItrace

This instruction includes three steps.
• Assembly instruction
• Guidance how to configure the tracer
• Test instruction for the new target option.
All removed parts or waste that is radioactive must be handled and disposed of according
to federal, state, or local laws and restrictions.
Action Check
1. Shut down the cyclotron.
Note!
Keep the following in mind before, during and after work with radioactive equipment.
• Plan your work; in other words think first then take the actions.
• Measure the dose rate and calculate how long you can work.
• Keep as long distance as possible from radioactive area.
• Keep track of the time you spend in the radiation area.
• Stay as short time as possible in the radiation area, to reduce the accumulated dose.
• If you run in to troubles, walk away and sort it out.
• Use protection if possible, however you shall always wear protective goggles, gloves,
TLD ring, TLC badge and personal radiation monitor.

• After performed actions, compare actual pick up of dose with estimated dose.
1 If dose rate and working conditions are satisfying. Continue with work as described
in op. 2 to last op.
2 If dose rate and working conditions are not satisfying, apply necessary safety
precautions before further action. Then continue with work as described in op. 2 to
final op.
Action Check
All numbers inside ( ) refers to pos. balloons on drawing CAC281-31018
2. Shut off the helium and water-cooling supplies for the target
cooling.
3. Shut off compressed air to the LTF and the cooling.
4. Cut off vacuum and ventilate.
5. Open the magnet door to the vacuum chamber.
6. Dismount the blind flange on the position where the new target
is going to be mounted.
7. Check that the sealing area is clean, and that the O-ring surface
is free from scratches.
8. Put the O-ring (7), washer (5)

and mounting flange (4) in
place, tighten with screws (15).
O-ring should be greased with
a small amount of Apiezon-M.
9. Mount the collimator (3) on the rails with screws (14) and
washers (16).
10. Adjust the collimators with the tool, see Section 16-3-1-3 Install
the collimator and resize the opening on page 550.
11. Slide the shield onto the target and fasten cover with nylon
screw. The screw facing upward when the connectors are
facing towards you.

Action Check
12. Gently insert the end of the

target into the mounting
flange. Turn to fit.
13. Disconnect all tubes and wires to the LTF panel. Mark them
with destination.
14. Dismount the LTF panel from the cabinet. Note that all media
to the LTF panel must be shut off, helium, compressed air etc.
Put the panel on a suitable plane surface.
15. Fasten the dispenser assys on The LTF panel with three hex
screws and washers.
The two dispensers for the 18F should be positioned as shown

in picture.
Mount the six magnetic valves in position 7, 8, 9 and 13, 14, 15
counted from the right. Remove the cap and fasten the valves
with 2 screws.

Action Check
16.
The General Valves should be positioned as shown in picture.

The valves are fastened from the back of the panel with two
screws each. Fasten the pressure transducer in the upper posi-
tion. Loosen the screws, put the valve in place and tighten the
screws.

Action Check
17.
The D-Sub for 18F is in position 3. Connect electrical wires ac-

cording to diagram CAC208-54002. Adjust the stroke on the
piston by loosening the retainer and put it so that the stroke
stops at 48 mm.

Action Check
Connect the air tubes to the actuators and cylinders according

to diagram CAC208-31018. Note the flow direction through the
restrictor. Note the way that the T-pieces are positioned. The
T-piece for gas inlet to the General Valves are connected to
valve 2 and 5. Be gentle when bending tubes and follow instruc-
tions for mounting swagelok connections.

Action Check
Remove plug from air connector. Connect Tefzel tube to General

Valve no: 4.
18. Remove valve panel CAC281-31005. Mark all connections and

tubes with tape to secure that they get in the right location
when reassembling.

Action Check
19.
Fasten the 2-way valve assy on the target panel with the wing
screw. Fasten connectors for trap assy and gently push the
assy on place. Note The 3-way valve is positioned on the panel
on older machines. On newer machines it is positioned in the
hotcell. Fasten the PEEK cross with two screws and distances
on the panel. Fasten the connectors to the check valves push
the valve in place, note that the arrow on the valve should face
uppwards. The tubes are connected according to CAC208-
31018 and instructions below.

Action Check
20. Peek connections information

The 18F- target system use PEEK tubes between the Liquid
Target filler and the target. The LTF also has additional PEEK
tubing and connections. Usually, the 1/16" PEEK tubes uses the
same Swagelok connectors as the 1/16" Tefzel tubes, but the
PEEK tubes also use connections like the one show below, to
provide quick method to disconnect the target lines from the
LTF. The LTF vials also use needles with a similar fitting. Alter-
nate PEEK tubing connection. Insert the tube into the connector,
until it passes the shoulder inside the tip, and extends beyond
the outer tip of the connector by a millimeter or two.
Tube extends 1 or 2 mm past tip
Screw the threaded end of the connector into the coupling or

threaded LTF Component and tighten it with your fingers.
Screw threaded tips into coupling.

When tightened into place, the screws act as retainers.
21. Put the LTF panel back on its place in the cabinet. Start with
connect the marked wires and tubes you disconnected before
loosing the LTF panel.

Action Check
22. Make the tube connections between the valve panel and the
LTF. All destination valve connectors are clearly marked with
the same label names as the source connectors. Do not push
all the tubes/lines through at once. Push and connect one
tube/line at a time to prevent mistakes.
1 Choose an LTF source connection and push its tube
through the TSC shield penetration.
2 Cut a small piece, about 5–10 mm, at the end of the tube.
There may be some dirt from the shielding inside it.
3 Connect the tube to the destination connector.
Make the Tefzel lines between the LTF panel and the cor-
responding valve panel connector. Refer to drawing
CAC600-17000.
4 Choose an LTF source connection and push its tube

through the TSC/shield penetration.
5 Cut a small piece, about 5–10 mm, at the end of the tube.
There may be some dirt from the shielding inside it.
6 Connect the tube to the destination connector.
Make the PEEK line connections between the LTF and the valve
panel. Refer to drawing CAC208-31018.
Do not bend the PEEK lines; they may be cracked.
23.
Add one water valve and one helium valve to the target cooling
manifold, on the target position you have chosen. Connect the
signal cable from the valves on the connection panel. Refer to
wiring diagram CAC200-54001.

Action Check
24. Connect the tubes to water and to the helium on the valves.
Mount the connectors on the target side on the tubes. The
water tubes shall be 40 mm shorter. Note the connectors with
backing valve are for the water. Make sure that the flow direc-
tion is correct. Pressure is on the outer connections, return on
the inner connections on each block. The black tubes are for
helium and the blue is for water.
25. Lead the PEEK tubes from the valve panel in the raceway up
to the target. Connect with the PEEK connectors. Finger-tighten.
Note the length on 0.75 PEEK tube from trap assy to target shall
be 3 m long.
26. Connect the target current sensor on the connection panel and
lead it in the raceway up to the target. Use the screws as retain-
ers. Refer to wiring diagram CAC200-54001.
27. Put cable 5457134 (904783) in the cable duct on top of the cy-
clotron. Connect to CSC connection board P11 and LTF P3.
28. Wipe the cyclotron clean from possible contamination that

might have occurred during implementation of spare part.
Perform a production test and return system to operator/cus-
tomer.
29. After changing target positions the tracer must be reconfig-

ured.
To perform a change of the tracer configuration, perform as
follows:
The Master database must be reconfigured. Logging in as user
manager and running the available utility program tracer-
config configures the database; these steps are described in
MINItrace Service Manual – Master System (dir. 2232999-
100)/MINItrace Qilin Master System – PC Lynx – Software Man-
ual (dir. 5324838-100).
The control systems GCS must be reconfigured. The GCS is
configured using the MINItrace Service System (MSS); these
steps are described in Section15-6-4 Reconfiguration of targets
on page 518.
Note that the max beam current should be set to 50 µA on
the 12 mm Gen II target and 35 µA on the 6 mm target and
3.9 mm target.

Action Check
30. Testing the new target
Test of the He-cooling-system

Open He 5 bar to the target panel. Press “FILL” on the service
laptop and check that the system is filling up. Press FLUSH and
check that the system is flushing and press “EMPTY” and check
that the system is emptying. The “Empty, Flush, Fill”-sequence
must be repeated twice in order to prevent air from being in
the He-cooling loop. Air in the He-cooling circuit might create
ozone that will destroy the rubber O-rings in the cooling circuit.
Check that the system is tight, see ITEM 31 below. The easiest
way is to look at the pressure reading on the target side. The
pressure should not decrease more than 1 psi/10 minutes.
31. Leak test of MINItrace F18 OPTION

TOOLS
- Service laptop, MSS
- Leak detecting equipment
- SWAGELOK instruction
- Instruction to mount PEEK connections

Action Check
Leak test of target system

1 Check outer gas circles by opening the valve and fill with
first 2.5 bar then shut off. Check that the pressure is con-
stant. Proceed with the 5 bar and 25 bar circles. If pressure
drop occurs, leak check the connections with leak check
spray. NOTE that the tubes must be plugged at the ma-
chine so you get a closed loop.
2 “CONNECT” the new target at the service laptop.
3 Start the water-cooling by choosing “SELECT TARGET” for

the new target. Control that the indications for He and
Water turn green. Press “UNSELECT TARGET” and check
that the flow indication turns yellow. There are two water
circuits, one for target 1–5 and one for target 6. Check that
the indications are matching each circuit. Check that the
circuits can be run in parallel, by “SELECTING” one target
on each circuit, if the configuration makes it possible, that
is if you have a target mounted in port 6. Check that the
valves are functioning in a correct manner. Check the floor,
manifolds and connections for water leaks.
4 Open valve 1B to target with 25 bar helium. Fill target with

gas, shut off valve. Check pressure level. Wait for 10 min-
utes. The pressure drop is not to exceed 20 psi (or
2 psi/minute).
5 Fill helium cooling circuit, shut off valve. Wait 10 min check
pressure drop.
6 Put two vials with 16O water on the LTF-panel.
7 “SELECT” the new target on the laptop.
8 Fill the new target by choosing “FILL WITH O16 WATER”

on the service laptop. Check that all sequences are run.
The tip should be filled from the vial, and then emptied
back in the vial, then filled again and then the target is
filled. Check that it is the right dispenser that is connected.
Check the area for water leaks.
9 Choose “EMTPY TO OUTLET” on the laptop. Now the target

should be emptied to the hot cell. Check that a vial is
connected to the outlet.
10 Do the same procedure as in the previous step but now

with the dispenser for 18O water. Select “FILL WITH O18
WATER”.


Table 15-2: Target system manufacturer's documents
Helium cooling Oilless diaphragm compressor GAST See the GAST Operation & Mainte-
compressor nance Technical Manual in MINItrace
Service Manual – OEM Manuals
(dir. 2233002-100).

16 BEAM DIAGNOSTICS
16-1 Introduction
The beam diagnostic system monitors the beam current at different positions in the cyclotron
and the target system in order to control the beam from the ion source to the target. The
beam diagnostic system consists of the following elements:
• The internal flip-in type of probe at a small radius, close to the center of the cyclotron
that gives information about the beam current in the IN-position.
• The extraction foils, single and optional dual extraction, where the current from the
stripped-off electrons are monitored
• The up/down collimators at each beam exit which monitors the beam position by giving
feedback to the diagnostic system. They also define the beam boundaries.
• The target bodies which monitors the beam current. A filter-box outside the vacuum
chamber filters the beam current signal from unwanted RF.
• The Beam Current Analyzer (BCA), located in the GCU, where the current from the different
readings is analyzed.
Figure 16-1: Diagnostic system
16 Beam diagnostics 541

16-1 Introduction
The flip-in probe, the extraction foils and the beam collimators are radioactive after
production runs.
Always wear protective clothing, gloves and goggles.
Always monitor radiation levels before removing parts.
16-2 Theory of operation
16-2-1 Flip-in probe

The flip-in probe functions as a “beam current valve”. In closed position (PROBE IN) the probe
also can monitor the intercepted beam current.
A coil drives the mechanism for the probe motion. To activate the probe an external current
source drives the coil and together with the magnet field, this generates a force on which
brings the probe into the beam path. Consequently, the probe will not work if the main magnet
field is not activated.
A signal to the GCU monitors the IN-position of the probe. The probe will automatically fall
back into OUT-position when the current through the coil disappears.
The beam current information coming from the probe verifies that the beam current is at the
expected value and sufficient for isotope production. A satisfactory beam current level on
the probe verifies that most of the accelerator subsystems work normally and that the
condition of the ion source is good.
16-2-2 Extraction foils

The extraction foils are insulated from ground in order to enable measuring of stripped of
electron current. The monitored electron current is negative and will be twice as high as the
measured extracted beam current, due to the fact that two electrons must leave each H- ion
to form a proton.
Also see Chapter 14 Extraction system.
16-2-3 Collimators
At each of the six beam exits on the cyclotron vacuum chamber, a pair of beam collimators
is mounted. The beam collimators have two functions:
• Defining the beam boundaries
The size of the hole in the collimator defines the outer boundary of the beam and
consequently also the size of the beam spot hitting the target foils. The intercepted beam
will be picked up by the collimators and represents a small portion of the total target
current.
542 16 Beam diagnostics

• Monitoring of the beam position
The collimators are insulated from ground. The BCA (Beam Current Analyzer) measures
possible unbalance in intercepted beam currents on the upper and lower collimator and
also corrects the position of the beam until the collimators read the same value.
16-2-4 Targets
The targets are insulated from ground in order to enable measuring of the isotope beam
current. Also see Chapter 15 Targets and radiochemistry system.
16-2-5 Beam Current Analyzer (BCA)

Table 16-1: BCA specifications
Number of inputs 32 channels
Input current range 0 ±200 µA
Read-out accuracy ±1% ±10 nA
For a detailed description of the BCA, see Chapter 7 General control unit.

16-3-1 Collimators
As a part of Planned Maintenance, the beam collimator openings are measured (vertically
and horizontally) and adjusted if needed.
Figure 16-2 shows
• all collimators
• close-up of a collimator in target position 1–5.
• close-up of optional collimator in target position 6.
CAUTION!
Always wear clean cotton or non-powdered examination gloves when working in the
chamber. Take care NOT to scratch the interior surfaces of the chamber.

WARNING! Radioactivity
Always measure the radioactivity when you open the vacuum chamber door, to know
how long you can stay in the chamber area. Follow the dose limit regulations in the
country.
Figure 16-2: Collimators and collimator openings

16-3-1-1 Checking the collimators

1 Vent the chamber.
2 Shut off the system (if on) and open the shield doors.
3 Locate the ion source tool box (often stored in the empty TSC cabinet) and take out the
paper burner target and the collimator adjustment tool.
Figure 16-3: Paper burner target
4 Remove the first target from the target mount, and replace it with the paper burner
target. Leave the cooling lines attached to the original target.
5 Attach the target’s current sensing line to the paper burner target. Make sure the paper
burner is firmly seated in the bayonet mount.
You can only leave targets in place in the shield area if you have not bombarded it yet.
If you have already bombarded the target, you must remove it and store it inside lead
shielding.
6 Close the shield doors and press PUMP to start the vacuum system.
7 Attach the service laptop to the MSS port on the CSC panel. Go to the MAGNET SYSTEM
page and click ON to turn on the magnet.
8 Set the current to 132 Amps. (Type in a value, do not use the arrows.)
9 Open the BEAM CONTROL page.
Password: scxscx
10 Click RF STANDBY and then PROBE IN.
11 Set the Foil holder 1 position to the value shown for the corresponding target position
in the Configuration Parameters window.

12 When the RF SYSTEM standby goes to the Ready state, click on RF NORMAL.
Wait for Dee volts OK to stabilize. (No sparking allowed during this test.) If necessary,
return to Section 13-3 Overhaul of Tube Amplifier and RF system tuning on page 437 and
condition the system.
13 Click ion source GAS ON.
Make sure the RF SYSTEM window still shows Dee volt, ok.
14 Select ION SOURCE (IS ON) and set the Ion source to 100 mA. Wait for Dee volts to stabilize.
15 Adjust the ion source current to about 4 microamps on the probe, because the paper
burner does NOT have cooling water lines.
16 Make the paper targets out of business cards while waiting for the Dee volts to stabilize:
a Cut a business card in half, width-wise.
b Measure from the lower right corner of the card.
c Draw a horizontal line 19.5 mm above the bottom edge of the card.
d Draw a vertical line 19.5 mm from the right edge of the card.
e Make about 6 cards per system target, including the dummy port.
Figure 16-4: Paper crosshair dimensions
Wear gloves and protective eye wear, and use forceps to install the target papers. Use
tools to shift the paper burner target to a new port, and to adjust the collimator blades.
Do not touch the collimator blades or bombarded paper burner target with your (gloved)
hands.
17 Click PROBE OUT.
18 Tune the magnet to produce the highest foil 1 reading.
Click the MAGNET UP and DOWN arrow keys to optimize the foil 1 current reading.

19 Adjust the foil holder positions in small steps (10 to 20%) while watching the waveform
on the BEAM CONTROL page.
a Click the Foil holder 1 pos UP arrow to shift all current to the upper collimator.
b Record the upper foil 1 position value shown in the Foil 1 number: field.
c Click the Foil holder 1 pos DOWN arrow shift all current to the lower collimator.
d Record the lower foil 1 position value shown in the Foil 1 number: field.
e Type the first value into the Foil 1 number: field.
20 Click PROBE IN.
21 Click IS OFF and then RF STANDBY.
WARNING!
Take care! The magnet is still ON. Remove all credit cards and mechanical watches. Use
forceps to insert and remove the paper targets.
22 Write the target number, burn trial number and date along the top of the card.
23 Open the left shield door and insert the paper target into the bottom of the burner with
the cross facing the beam.
24 Close the left shield door.
25 Click RF NORMAL and then GAS ON.
26 Click IS ON.
Use the same IS current as before.
27 Click PROBE IN.
Read the probe current; make sure RF Frequency is the same as before. Wait for the Dee
volts to stabilize.
28 Click PROBE OUT.
You should see all the beam current on the upper collimator.
29 Type/enter the foil 1 position value you recorded for the lower collimator value into the
Foil 1 number: field, to switch the current to the lower collimator.
30 Type the upper collimator value, then type the lower collimator value into the field 3 or
4 times for each value, to sweep the beam back and forth between the collimators.
You may need to experiment with the number of times you enter the values. The number
of times needed to sweep the beam across the collimator blades will increase as the
paper thickness increases. Try not to over burn (blacken) the paper. It is better to under
burn than over burn the paper target.

31 Click PROBE IN and then IS OFF.
Wear gloves and protective eyewear when you open the target shield door and remove
the paper. Always neasure the activity when you open the shield door and vacuum
chamber doors.
32 Use forceps to remove the paper from the paper burner target.
33 See Figure 16-5. Examine the burn mark.
• The burn mark on a liquid target should be centered horizontally, but slightly lower
than center on the vertical axis.
• The burn mark on a gas target should be centered directly over the crosshair.
The paper is radioactive (carbon isotope). Do not touch the paper with bare hands. Store
the papers in a lead container for at least 2 hours. If possible, leave the paper in the
container over night.
Figure 16-5: Paper target burn mark
34 Repeat the test two or three more times at the current target location, to check for
consistency, before moving on to the next target port.
• IF the beam is too far above or below the horizontal line, proceed to Section 16-3-1-2
Reposition the collimator opening on page 549.
• IF the beam position changes each time you repeat the test, call support.

35 Test each occupied target port on the system, including position five (proton target). Use
a tool to shift the Paper Burner from one position to the next.
Remember, the paper burner target becomes increasingly radioactive the longer you
use it. Always use a tool to move the paper burner from one target port to another. When
you finish the test, store the paper burner in a lead container.
16-3-1-2 Reposition the collimator opening

Follow the procedure in this section to reposition the collimator to raise or lower the point
where the beam strikes the target, without changing the collimator diameter.
Liquid targets are pressurized with helium to increase the boiling point of the target liquid.
The gas forms a bubble at the top of the target chamber. The collimator is positioned to direct
the beam below the center point of the target, to avoid this bubble.
On gas targets, the collimator is positioned to direct the beam to the center of the target.
1 Measure the collimator opening with calipers to determine the factory setting. The
standard collimator diameter is about 6 mm, but could be as large as 8 mm.
2 Look at the burn mark on the paper target.
• IF the top of the liquid target burn mark -or- the center of the gas target burn mark
falls below the horizontal line, raise the entire collimator.
• IF the bottom of the burn mark -or- the center of the gas target burn mark falls
above the horizontal line, lower the entire collimator.
3 Determine the distance the beam needs to move.
a Measure the distance between the actual and optimal burn mark location.
b Divide this value in half (refer to the example below).

4 Use metric drill bits to reposition the collimator while maintaining the original diameter.
Remember to keep the drill bits perpendicular to the angled target port when you insert
them into the collimator opening to make the adjustments. (See Figure 16-2 and the
example, below.)
Example:
The burn mark is 2 mm too high, and the collimator diameter is 6 mm. To shift the
collimator down 1 mm:
a Loosen the bottom collimator blade.
b Insert a 7 mm drill bit into the opening, move the bottom blade against the bit and
tighten into place.
c Loosen the top collimator blade.
d Insert a 6 mm drill into the opening and move the top blade against the bit.
e Tighten the top collimator blade.
16-3-1-3 Install the collimator and resize the opening

Follow this procedure only if the collimator blades are loose or you added another target
option to the system during installation.
Wear gloves and protective eyewear when you open the target shield door and remove
the paper. Always neasure the activity when you open the shield door and vacuum
chamber doors.
1 Press vent on the CSC panel to release vacuum.
2 Click SYSTEM OFF on the BEAM CONTROL page to shutdown the cyclotron in an orderly
manner.
3 Remove paper burner target from the target bayonet mount.

4 See Figure 16-6. Attach the collimator adjustment tool to the bayonet mount.
The 3 mm center pin slides in and out of the adjustment tool.
Figure 16-6: Collimator adjustment tool
5 Use a 3 mm hex wrench to loosely fasten the collimator blades into place.
6 Use calipers to measure interior diameter of the collimator. Start with the standard
collimator opening of 6 mm in diameter.
7 Slide the center pin in and out of the tool while you make the adjustment.
• Slide the pin into the tool to check the center of the collimator blade opening.
• Slide the pin out while you reposition the blades.
8 After you size the collimator opening, remove the collimator adjustment tool, and replace
it with the paper burner target.
9 Close the vacuum chamber door.
10 Place a new paper target into the paper burner, and close the shield door.
11 Press pump on CSC panel to start vacuum.
12 Open the MAGNET SYSTEM page.
13 Click on to turn on the magnet.

14 Set the current to 132 Amps. (Type in a value, do not use the arrows.)
Make sure current goes up to 150, stays there, then goes back to the set value. Otherwise
the beam may not reach the target.
15 Open the BEAM CONTROL page.
Password: scxscx
16 When Vacuum is OK on the BEAM CONTROL page, click RF NORMAL.
17 Click GAS ON.
18 Click IS ON.
Use the same IS current as in step 14.
16-3-1-4 Replacing collimators
Removing the collimators

1 Shut down the MINItrace system from the Master System.
2 Logout from the Master System.
3 Open the vacuum chamber. See Section 10-7-1 Open the vacuum chamber on page 295.
WARNING! Radiation
Internal parts of the vacuum chamber are radioactive after production runs.
Always use protective clothing, gloves and goggles.
4 Locate the collimator that needs to be replaced.

5 Remove the two upper and the two lower screws and washers. See Figure 16-7.
Figure 16-7: Removing the collimators
6 Remove the collimator.
Mounting the collimators
Note!
If you are replacing tantalum collimators with graphite collimators, the isolators also need to
be replaced. See Section 16-3-1-5 Replacing isolators (graphite collimators) on page 554.
1 Insert the new collimator in its place.
Make sure the collimators are placed according to Figure 16-8.
Figure 16-8: Mounting the collimators
2 Fasten the new collimators with the two upper and the two lower screws and washers.
Note!
Be careful not to overtighten the screws when fastening graphite collimators. The graphite
collimators are brittle and might break.
3 Check with a multimeter, adjusted to measure resistance, that the collimator is connected
to the GCU. The multimeter will show 20 kΩ if things are correctly connected.

4 Keep the multimeter connected as in the previous step. Check on the MSS screen that
there is a vertical bar coming up on the diagnostic page.
5 Close the vacuum chamber, refer to the instructions provided in Section 10-7-3 Closing
the vacuum chamber on page 299.
16-3-1-5 Replacing isolators (graphite collimators)
Figure 16-9: Replacing isolators

Start by removing the collimators for the dual option, if fitted on the system.
Removing dual option isolators

1 Remove the screws on the left and right L-profiles.
2 Remove the left rail isolator screws, isolators and rail.
3 Remove the right rail isolator screws, isolators and rail.
4 If necessary, remove the capton signal wires.
Continue with replacing the single option isolators before fitting new dual option isolators.
Removing and mounting single option isolators

Remove one isolator at a time. Start with the left rail.
1 Remove the screw on the left rail L-profile.
Note!
It might be necessary to remove one of the screws that holds the L-profile to the chamber
wall to get better access to the screw that holds the rail.
2 Remove the upper isolator screw and remove the isolator.
3 Fit a new isolator. See Figure 16-10.
Note!
Be careful when tightening the screw on the new isolator. The isolators are brittle.
Figure 16-10: Placement of the assymetrical isolators

4 Remove the lower isolator screw and remove the isolator.
5 Fit a new isolator. See Figure 16-10.
Note!
6 Mount the rail to the L-profile.
7 Remount the screws that holds the L-profile to the chamber wall, if removed.
8 Repeat the above steps on the right side.
Mounting dual option isolators

1 Mount the left rail upper isolator. See Figure 16-10.
Note!
2 Mount the left rail lower isolator. See Figure 16-10.
Note!
3 Mount the rail to the L-profile.
4 Repeat the above steps on the right side.
5 Reconnect the capton wires, if removed.
6 When both upper and lower rails are fitted, check that the upper and lower rail does not
collide. See Figure 16-11. Adjust if necessary.
7 Proceed to Section16-3-1-1 Checking the collimators on page545 to check the collimators.
Figure 16-11: Checking space between rails

16-3-2 Flip-in probe

Check the function of the flip-in probe:
1 Move (by hand) the coil until the probe is in its PROBE IN position, and let it return by itself.
2 When the probe has find back to its PROBE OUT position, measure the distance to
38–40 mm between the pole valley and the probe, see Figure 16-12.
If the distance is out of tolerance, loosen carefully the two (one on each side) allen screws
and turn the coil while the probe is kept at the correct distance. Tighten the screws and check
the function again.
Figure 16-12: Probe in and probe out

16-3-3 Extraction foils
Check that the foil holder is not grounded by using a standard Ohm-meter:
1 Measure between the cable shoe and the vacuum chamber.
2 The resistance should be approximately 20 kΩ.
3 Loosen the screw and remove the cable shoe.
4 Check that the resistance between foil holder and vacuum chamber is at least 500 kΩ.
5 Reattach the cable shoe and tighten the screw.
16-3-4 Checking the targets

Check each target as follows:
1 Disconnect the current monitoring wire.
2 Measure leak resistance to ground. Should be more than 1 MΩ.
3 Reconnect the current wire.
4 Check readout of target current:
a Connect the negative probe of the multi-meter to ground and the positive probe to
a target.
b Set the multi-meter for resistance measurement.
c At the MSS–Read the current for Target 1, Target 2, Target 3, Target 4, Target 5,
Target 6 and check that the MSS shows the same values, that is ~10 µA.
d On the multi-meter check readout to be typical 20.0 kΩ.

17 RADIATION SHIELD

The integrated radiation shield consists of a stationary section with an internal cavity matched
to the size of the cyclotron. The front section is split in the middle, forming a left and a
corresponding right door. Hinges support each door and the motion (open-close) is done by
motor actuators controlled from a hand pendant.
The roller bearing hinges are of virtually non-friction type and the necessary force to drive
the door is low and limited to avoid any risk of pinch hazard.
For target maintenance, only the left door has to be opened.
WARNING! Fall hazard
Working on parts on top of the radiation shield or standing on a ladder involves potential
fall hazard.
Use secured ladder and safety harness.
For instructions on using ladder and safety harness, refer to Section 17-7 Ladder and climbing
safety on page 564.
17-2 Radiation shield door control

1 Connect the door pendant control to the DOOR PENDANT CONTROL connector in the
CSC. See Figure 17-1.
2 Press the Left Door Open and Right Door Open switches to fully open the radiation
shield. Press the close-switches for closing the doors.
17 Radiation shield 559

Figure 17-1: Door pendant control
Left door open Left door close
Right door open Right door close
Personal injury can be caused when the radiation shield doors move.
The door pendant control must be disconnected from the CSC during service on the
cyclotron.
WARNING! Radiation inside
Always monitor radiation levels when opening the radiation shield.
560 17 Radiation shield

17-3 Door motors

The door motors are attached to the top of the shield and open/close the doors. It is no
possibility to do any adjustments of the motors.
Figure 17-2: Door motor
17-4 Warning light on cyclotron top

In the center, on the top of the radiation shield, there is a warning light. This unit will indicate
if the magnet is on and also if the radiation is on. The warning light will only operate when
the cyclotron and radiation shield doors are closed. There are two switches that indicate if
the shield doors are closed.
Figure 17-3: Warning light

17-4 Warning light on cyclotron top
17-5 Waste gas system

The waste gas system is a delayed line consisting of a built-in waste gas pipe in the rear fixed
part of the radiation shield. The manifold (including valves) for the waste gas is installed to
left inner side of the niche in the left fixed shield. The built-in pipe has its outlet on the top of
the shield, eventually connected to a ventilation system.
Figure 17-4: Waste gas manifold

17-5 Waste gas system
17-6 Cyclotron maintenance shield assembly

The Cyclotron Maintenance Shield Ass’y (No 2284713) is a free-standing lead shield to apply
in front of the targets during maintenance. See Figure 17-5.
Figure 17-5: Cyclotron maintenance shield ass’y

17-6 Cyclotron maintenance shield assembly
17-7 Ladder and climbing safety
17-7-1 Securing the foldable combination ladder
Note!
A foldable combination ladder is included in the MINItrace delivery from October 2013.
The ladder should be found hanging close to the cyclotron.
Note!
Maximum allowed load on the ladder: 150 kg
To secure the ladder:
1 Slide the two adapters onto the door handles.
2 Unfold the ladder and raise it against the shield.

3 Make sure that the ladder step (second step from the top) is fully secured in the adapters.
Note!
The topmost step must not be used for securing the ladder.
17-7-2 Anchoring the safety harness

Mind the following when using the safety harness:
• Use the two safety wires on top of the shield to anchor the harness, see Figure 17-6.
• Hold on to the ladder when reaching for a safety wire to anchor the harness.
• When anchoring the harness, always use the closest securing point located in a straight
line of pull compared to where you are working.
Figure 17-6: Safety harness anchoring wires
Safety harness anchoring wires

18 SAFETY SYSTEM

This chapter gives an overview of the cyclotron interlock safety system and instructions for
testing it.
The cyclotron includes a number of hard-wired interlock systems to guarantee safe system
operation for the personnel.
The drawing principal diagram over safety interlock and other CIB signals (CAC000-51001)
includes the following safety interlocks:
• Safety interlock A and B (radiation shield or vault door switches)
• External interlocks for delivery from the targets
• Safety interlocks for individual subsystems
• RF inhibit
Machine protection is provided by an extensive use of interlock signals. The interlock functions
are designed to protect the equipment in most operating situations and in cases of
malfunction.
The cyclotron system is however only a part of a total PET system and some of the safety
systems must be provided by the customer. These safety systems may include facility services
such as, ventilation, fire protection and customer-supplied power and water systems
connected to the cyclotron.
As the cyclotron systems are sold in a wide range of countries with different regulations, it is
not possible to recommend safety systems applicable everywhere.
Note!
It is assumed that all personnel working with the equipment has participated in adequate
training to acquire the necessary knowledge of the risks involved and how to plan the work to
reduce the possible risks.
Lethal voltage of up to 250 V AC is present within the control cabinets.
18 Safety system 567

Figure 18-1: Interlock signals from magnet door and shield doors
568 18 Safety system


The GCU (in the Control Cabinet) collects and distributes the different safety interlock signals:
• Two door micro switches (left and right door) on the radiation shield indicate if the shield
doors are open or closed, see Figure 18-2. If the system is run from the Master System,
there is no power from the PSARC or RFPG, or to the ion source gas valve if the doors
are open.
• Magnet door micro switch. Indicates if the magnet door is open. There is no power to
PSARC and RF is inhibited if the magnet door is open.
• Signals from the GCU to the BEAM ON/PSMC ON warning light on the top of the cyclotron,
see Figure 18-2. These signals could also be used by the customer for several warning
signs.
• A software controlled maintenance signal from the MSS (MINItrace Service System) allows
full operation of either PSARC or RFPG for service purposes.
• A Start PSARC signal from the GCU, generated by software. Allows main power to the
PSARC.
• A standby or inhibit signal from the GCU to the RF.
• A 24 V-signal from the GCU to the ion source gas valve.
• Five extra interlock signals to the GCU board. Could be used by the customer for various
devices. They can also generates messages on the Master screen.

18-4 Interlock switches and warning lights
18-4-1 Warning lights and shield door switches

The warning light is located on the top of the cyclotron, see Figure 18-2. For testing the warning
lights, see Section 18-5-3-5 Warning lights on page 576.
The shield door switches are located below the warning light.
Figure 18-2: Warning lights and shield door switches

18-4 Interlock switches and warning lights
18-4-2 Magnet door switch and ion source gas switch

The magnet door switch is located on the magnet below the vacuum chamber and the ion
source gas valve is placed in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (on the right side of the Water
manifold), see Figure 18-3.
Figure 18-3: Magnet door switch and ion source gas valve
18-5 Test instructions

This section describes how to test safety interlocks:
• Radiation shield or vault door switches (radiation safety)
• Warning lights
• RFPG panel switches and shorting stick
• RF inhibit external interlocks
Note!
The RFPG safety interlocks must be tested when a number of selected RFPG-related spare parts
have been replaced, see Section 13-6-1 Spare parts requiring safety interlock test on page 447.
18-5-1 Related drawings

Refer to the following drawing(s) found in MINItrace Service Manual – Drawings and Parts Lists
(dir. 2233001-100):
• CAC000-51001 Principle Diagram over Safety Interlock & Customer Signals

18-5-2 Preparation
Lethal voltage of up to 250 V AC is present within the control cabinets.
WARNING!
1 Disconnect any external safety interlock system before starting the test.
2 • Connect the External interlock switch box (see Figure 18-4) to the Customer Interface
Connector on top of the CSC.
• Set both switches on the box to CLOSE.
Figure 18-4: External interlock switch box
3 Set the status of the cyclotron system as follows:
• Radiation shield and magnet doors closed.
• Water cooling turned on.
• Vacuum turned on.
• Magnet set to 132 A.

18-5-3 Radiation shield or vault door interlocks (radiation safety)

This procedure tests the interlocks on the radiation shield. It also tests the RF INHIBIT function
and warning lights.
The procedures are different for SCU Gen II and SCU Gen I (see Figure 18-5).
Figure 18-5: SCU Gen II and Gen I safety indicators
SCU Gen II front panel SCU Gen I front panel
SCU Gen II web interface, Main

page
Tube controller board Interface board 1

Earth Alarm (LED 5) RF Inhibit (LED 2)
EHT Normal (LED 13)
RF Inhibit and Earth Stick

OK indicators
18-5-3-1 Radiation shield door switches

1 On the Beam Control page in the MINItrace Service System (MSS), start the ion source.
2 Verify that the PSARC P ON LED on the GCU front panel is lit (green).
3 Open the left radiation shield door.
4 Verify that the LEDs RAD SH OK, BEAM ALLOW and PSARC P ON on the GCU front panel
are turned off.
5 Verify that both the gas flow and PSARC shut off.
6 Verify that the error messages “IS: Safety Door open”, “IS: PSARC fault”, “IS: HV Relay fault”
and “Safety: Safety Door open” appear on the MSS.

7 Close the radiation shield door.
8 Repeat step 1 to step 7 for the right radiation shield door.
18-5-3-2 External interlock switch box SW2

1 On the Beam control page in the MSS, start the ion source.
3 Open SW2 on the External interlock switch box.
4 Verify that the LEDs BEAM ALLOW and PSARC P ON on the GCU front panel are turned
off.
6 Verify that the error messages “IS: Safety Door open”, “IS: PSARC fault”, “IS: HV Relay fault”
and “Safety: Safety Door open” appear on the MSS.
7 While SW2 still is open:
SCU Gen II: On the Main page in the SCU web interface, check that RF Inhibit 1 and/or
RF Inhibit 2 are lit (green).
SCU Gen I: On Interface board 1, check that LED 2 (RF INHIBIT) is turned off.
8 Go to the Ion source page in the MSS.
9 SCU Gen II: On the Main page in the SCU web interface, check that RF Inhibit 1 and/or
RF Inhibit 2 are turned off.
SCU Gen I: On Interface board 1, check that LED 2 (RF INHIBIT) is lit.
10 Close SW2 on the External interlock switch box.
18-5-3-3 External interlock switch box SW1

1 On the Beam control page in the MSS, start the ion source.
3 Open SW1 on the External interlock switch box.
4 Verify that the LEDs RAD SH OK and PSARC P ON on the GCU front panel are turned off.
6 Verify that the error messages “IS: PSARC fault” and “IS: HV Relay fault” appear on the
MSS.

7 While SW1 still is open:
SCU Gen II: On the Main page in the SCU web interface, check that RF Inhibit 1 and/or
RF Inhibit 2 are lit (green).
SCU Gen I: On Interface board 1, check that LED 2 (RF INHIBIT) is turned off.
10 Close SW1 on the External interlock switch box.
18-5-3-4 System interlock

1 On the RF page in the MSS, verify that all SYSTEM INTERLOCK indicators are green.
2 Start the RF in Stand By.
4 Verify that the IS MAINT LED on the GCU front panel is lit (green).
5 On the Ion source page, under SYSTEM INTERLOCK indicators, verify that RF is yellow
and the rest are green.
6 Verify that it is not possible to turn on the ion source (ion source gas is though possible).
7 Open one of the radiation shield doors.
8 Verify that the RF shuts down and error messages “RF can not set standby mode” and
“Safety: Safety Door open” appear on the MSS.
9 Close the radiation shield door.

10 Turn the systems off.
11 Re-connect any customer safety system that was disconnected before the test.
• Tighten the terminal screws thoroughly.
• Verify the function of the customer safety system.
12 If there are no customer safety system to re-connect, the External interlock switch box
can remain in the Customer Interface Connector.
• Verify that SW1 and SW2 on the External interlock switch box are in position CLOSE.
18-5-3-5 Warning lights

This procedure is used to verify the function of the warning lights on top of the cyclotron (see
Figure 18-2):
1 On the Beam control page in the MSS, click SYSTEM OFF to make sure that the magnet,
ion source and RF are turned off.
2 Verify that both warning lights are turned off.
3 Click MAGNET ON.
4 Verify that the lower warning light (magnet ON) is lit.
5 Make sure that the vacuum is OK.
6 Make sure that the radiation shield door is closed.
7 Set the magnet current to 130 A.
8 Start beam by clicking buttons in the following order:
a RF STANDBY
The system should reach Standby Ready after about 1–2 min.
b RF NORMAL
c PROBE IN
d GAS ON
e IS ON
9 Verify that the upper warning light (beam ON) also is lit.
10 Click SYSTEM OFF to finish the test.

18-5-4 RFPG interlocks

The procedures test the function of the TPSU interlocks in the RFPG; the mechanical function
of the switches and the hard-wired interlock circuit.
18-5-4-1 Mechanical function of switches

1 Turn off the mains power to RFPG and apply LOTO on the circuit breaker(s) at the Mains
Distribution Panel (MDP). For LOTO instructions, refer to MINItrace Service Manual –
Maintenance (dir. 2233000-100).
2 Remove the TPSU front and rear panels.
3 Check that the switches for the front panel, rear panel and earth stick moves freely and
do not risk getting stuck.
4 Make sure that the earth cables to the panels are attached.
5 Fasten the front and rear panels.

18-5-4-2 Switch functions in the interlock circuit

This procedure tests the TPSU panel switches (front panel, rear panel and earth stick) by
switching them off, one at a time, and checking that the following indicators respond:
• SCU Gen II: Earth Stick OK in the SCU web interface.
• SCU Gen I: LED 5 (EARTH ALARM) on the Tube controller board.
The indicators are lit only when all three switches are pressed in (see Figure 18-6).

page

EHT Normal (LED 13)

OK indicators
230 V mains voltage is present on the panel microswitches, terminals, circuit breakers,
and contactors behind the RFPG front panel. Components behind the rear panel operate
lethal high voltage.
Two qualified persons are required when working with the RFPG turned on and the panels
off. Use electricity-proof rubber gloves.
Make sure that the RFPG is in Off state.
Do not touch high voltage components even if the RFPG is turned off.

WARNING!
Do not leave the RFPG unattended with the panels off.
Make sure that the RFPG is connected to mains, the TPSU SW 1 is ON and the RFPG state is
OFF.
Front panel test

1 Remove the TPSU front panel.
2 Check that the indicator is turned off (Earth Stick OK for SCU Gen II or LED 5 (EARTH
ALARM) for SCU Gen I).
3 Fasten the front panel before the rear panel test.
Rear panel test

1 Remove the TPSU rear panel.
3 Leave the rear panel off.
Earth stick test

1 Take the earth stick out of its holder and place it on the right-hand side of fuse F1.
2 Fasten the rear panel.
4 Remove the rear panel again and put the earth stick back in its holder.
5 Fasten the rear panel.
18-5-4-3 Hard-wired interlock circuit
230 V mains voltage is present on the panel microswitches, terminals, circuit breakers,
and contactors behind the RFPG front panel. Components behind the rear panel operate
lethal high voltage.
Two qualified persons are required when working with the RFPG turned on and the panels
off. Use electricity-proof rubber gloves.
Make sure that the RFPG is in Off state.
Do not touch high voltage components even if the RFPG is turned off.

WARNING!
Do not leave the RFPG unattended with the panels off.
SCU Gen II systems

This instruction applies to RFPG systems which have SCU Gen II (see Figure 18-6).
1 On the Main page in the SCU web interface, check that Earth Stick OK is lit (green).
2 Remove the TPSU front.
3 Check that Earth Stick OK is turned off.
4 On the Test page, click Turn on/off for TPSU Door intl. (You must be logged in as SERVICE.)
The indicator turns yellow and the interlock is ignored.
5 Check that Earth Stick OK is lit (green).
The processor now believes that the panel is in place eventhough it has been removed.
6 Start Standby.
Fan, heater PS and grid PS will start in sequence.
7 After 1 1/2 minutes, check that all PS have switched off.
8 On the MSS RF page, check that anode power supply is yellow.
9 On the Main page in the SCU web interface, check that SCU status is OFF.

10 On the Digital out page, check that EN is turned off.
(The system status is now OFF. The figure below is only an example showing system
status DEE VOLTAGE OK.)
11 On the Test page, click Turn on/off for TPSU Door intl. The indicator is turned off and
the interlock activated.
12 Check that Earth Stick OK is turned off.
13 Fasten the TPSU front panel by tightening the screws.
SCU Gen I systems

This instruction applies to RFPG systems which have SCU Gen I (see Figure 18-6).
CAUTION!
Use suitable devices for protection against electrostatic discharge (ESD) when handling
the circuit boards.
1 Switch off the power.
2 Pull out the Tube controller board.

3 Set DIP switch SW2, position 1, to ON.
Figure 18-9: Tube controller board
4 Insert the board and turn on the power.
5 On the Tube controller board, check that LED 5 (EARTH ALARM) is turned off.
6 Loosen the screws at bottom of the TPSU front panel.
7 Check that LED 5 is lit.
The processor now believes that the panel is in place even though it has been removed.
8 Start Standby.
Fan, heater PS and grid PS will start in sequence.
9 After 1 1/2 minutes, check that all PS have switched off.
10 On the Interface board 1, check that LED 13 (EHT NORMAL) is lit.
12 Switch off the power.
13 Pull out the Tube controller board.

14 Reset DIP switch SW2, position 1, to OFF.
15 Fasten the TPSU front panel by tightening the screws.
18-5-5 RF inhibit external interlocks

The procedures test the processor controlled and hard-wired external interlocks.
The procedures are different for SCU Gen II and SCU Gen I (see Figure 18-10).

page

EHT Normal (LED 13)

OK indicators
18-5-5-1 Processor controlled external interlocks

1 Turn on mains power to the RFPG.
2 Turn on the cooling system, if not already done.
3 On the MSS RF page, set Standby.
4 Check that the RFPG can reach STANDBY READY.
5 On the MSS RF page, set Off.

6 On the water manifold, close one of the water circuits for the RF cavity.
9 Check that the RFPG cannot be started.
11 Open the water circuit.
18-5-5-2 Hard-wired external interlocks
SCU Gen II systems

This instruction applies to RFPG systems which have SCU Gen II (see Figure 18-10).
1 Turn on the cooling system, if not already done.
3 Check that the RFPG reaches STANDBY READY.
4 On the Test page, click Turn on/off for Test relay 1. (You must be logged in as SERVICE.)
The indicator is lit (green).
6 On the Main page in the SCU web interface, check that the SCU status is OFF.

7 On the Digital out page, check that EN is turned off.
(The system status is now OFF. The figure below is only an example showing system
status DEE VOLTAGE OK.)
8 On the Test page, click Turn on/off for Test relay 1.
The test relay and indicator is turned off.
9 Repeat step 2 to step 8 for Test relay 2.
SCU Gen I systems

This instruction applies to RFPG systems which have SCU Gen I (see Figure 18-10).
CAUTION!
Use suitable devices for protection against electrostatic discharge (ESD) when handling
the circuit boards.
1 Turn off the mains circuit breaker on the RFPG.
2 On the water manifold, close one of the water circuits for the RF cavity.
3 Pull out Interface board 1.

4 Set DIP switch SW2, position 7, to ON.
Figure 18-13: Interface board 1
5 Insert the board.
6 Turn on the mains circuit breaker on the RFPG.
7 On Interface board 1, check that LED 2 (RF INHIBIT) is turned off.
The processor in the RFPG now believes that all conditions for start are met eventhough
the water circuit still is shut off.
The fan and possibly the heater power supply will start.
9 Check that the RFPG does not reach STANDBY READY and that after about 1½ minute
all power supplies are turned off (the fan runs).
10 On the MSS RF page, check that heater power supply or grid power supply is yellow.
12 Turn off the mains circuit breaker on the RFPG.

13 Pull out Interface board 1.
14 Reset DIP switch SW2, position 7, to OFF.
15 Insert the board.
16 Turn on the mains circuit breaker on the RFPG.
17 On the water manifold, open the water circuit for the RF cavity.
18 On Interface board 1, check that LED 2 now is turned off.
20 Check that the RFPG can be started normally.

19 MINITRACE SERVICE SYSTEM VERSION 2.X (MSS) SOFTWARE
19-1 Introduction
This chapter describes the MINItrace Service System from version 2.x (MSS) software version
for Microsoft™ Windows™ 7 released in 2014.
Figure 19-1: MSS subsystem control
Note!
The MSS software version that was discontinued in 2014 is described in Appendix D The
MINItrace Service System (MSS) software.
MINItrace Service System (MSS) is a software running on a laptop. MSS makes it possible for
the service engineer to manually control the accelerator, the targets and the radiochemistry
subsystems. MSS is intended for setting and monitoring parameters, trouble-shooting,
configuration, and for user administration.
This chapter contains the following:
• Service laptop setup
• Software installation
• Software description
Note!
Before 2014, the laptop was not included in all cyclotron deliveries.
MSS controls the General Control System (GCS) via commands transferred over serial cables.
19 MINItrace Service System version 2.x (MSS) software 589

19-1 Introduction
19-2 Service laptop setup
19-2-1 Introduction
The following sections describe how to connect and set up the laptop.
The service laptop can be connected to the General Control System (GCS) or the Cyclotron
Support Cabinet (CSC).
For details regarding the operation of the service laptop, refer to the accompanying operator
manual.
Installation of the MINItrace Service System (MSS) software is described in Section 19-3 MSS
software installation on page 594.
19-2-2 Initial communication and system setup

The first time the service laptop is used it is necessary to set parameters for USB port
communication, power and networks.
To set the USB port parameters:
1 Install the USB-to-RS232 adapter using the instructions and CD supplied with the adapter.
If there is no driver for Microsoft Windows 7 supplied, download the driver from the
adapter manufacturer's web site.
The adapter should be connected to a free USB port on the service laptop when requested.
2 In the Control Panel of the laptop, open Device Manager.
3 Double-click Ports (COM & LPT).
590 19 MINItrace Service System version 2.x (MSS) software

4 The installed port will appear as USB-to-Serial Com. Port (COM1). Any printer or parallel
ports can be ignored.
5 Right-click USB-to-Serial Com. Port and select Properties.
6 Click the Port Settings tab. Make sure tha the settings are correct: Baud Rate 9600, Data
bits 8, Parity None, Stop bits 1 and Flow control None, see Figure 19-2.
Figure 19-2: COM port properties window
7 Click OK to close the Device Manager window.
To set power and network parameters:
1 In the Control Panel of the laptop, open System and Security.
2 Select Power Options.
3 Under Select a power plan, select Balanced (or Dell is preselected), and click Change
plan settings.

4 In the power options window, select Never in all selections boxes.
Figure 19-3: Power options window
5 Click Save changes to close the window.
6 In the Control Panel, open Network and Sharing Center.
7 Disable all network connections and close the window.
19-2-3 Connect and disconnect the service laptop to the cyclotron
19-2-3-1 Connect the service laptop
Equipment
Cables to use:
• 9-pin straight RS232 D-Sub cable
• USB-to-RS232 adapter

Hardware connections
1 Connect the USB-to-RS232 adapter and the RS232 cable between a USB port on the
service laptop and the GCU port on the GCU or CSC.
Note!
If the service laptop is equipped with a serial port, the adapter is not required.
Figure 19-4: GCU Gen II
Software connection
It is assumed that MINItrace Service System is installed.
1 Check that the service laptop is connected as described in Section Hardware connections
on page 593.
2 Switch on the service laptop.
3 Select LOCAL mode. Check system condition on the Master System and select Service
System control in the Maintenance menu. If the Master System is down or not connected,
LOCAL mode is automatically active.
Note!
The system returns to the Master within 6 minutes if connection with the Service System
is not established. See also below.
4 On the laptop desktop, click the MSS icon.
The MSS main window is opened.
Unsuccessful connection
The following happens after selecting Service System control at the Master System if
connection with the Service System is not established, or if connection is interrupted:
Elapsed time Action
1 minute Heating of any oven is turned off and air cooling of oven starts.
6 minutes Master System regains control.

19-2-3-2 Disconnect the service laptop

To avoid any system disturbances the Service System software must be shut down before
the service laptop is turned off.
1 In the MSS main window, click Navigation > Exit to close the application.
2 Turn off the service laptop.
3 The Master System automatically regains control within a few seconds, if connected.
19-2-4 Software and service laptop spare parts

See MINItrace Spare Parts Catalog (dir. 2380006-100).
To order a spare part, contact the local GE Healthcare service representative.
19-3 MSS software installation

For MINItrace Qilin Software release 2.1 or later, refer to the release note for the software
release you are installing. In that case the instructions in this section can be ignored.
The MSS software is pre-installed on the service laptop delivered with the system. The MSS
software is also included in the delivery on a CD.
This section describes how to install the MSS software on the laptop; the first time on an
empty laptop and to upgrade an existing installation.
Note!
Leaving the service laptop unattended a short period during the installation might abort or
cancel the installation procedure due to security functions in the operating system.
19-3-1 First-time installation
Note!
If the previous MSS version has been used before this installation, back up the configuration
parameters on a file before disconnecting MSS (see Section D-3-12 Configuration parameters
menu on page 741). The file will be a useful reference when setting up the configuration
parameters with MINItrace Service System.
To install the software on the service laptop the first time:
1 Reboot the laptop.
2 Insert the MSS CD into the CD drive.
3 The installation program should start automatically. Click Run setup.exe in the dialog
that appears.
If not, run the file setup.exe on the CD.
4 Installation of Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 takes place, if this add-on is not already
installed on the laptop.

5 The database installation starts. Click Accept in the license agreement dialog.
The installation takes 15–20 minutes.
6 When User Account Control appears, click Yes.
7 Wait until the black terminal window is closed (might take a few minutes).
8 When the MSS Setup dialog appears, follow the instructions and click Next.
9 Choose Complete installation. Click Next. The installation might take a few minutes.
10 At User Account Control, click Yes.
11 Wait until the installation is completed.
12 Close the MSS application by selecting Navigation > Exit.
The installation is completed and an icon appears on the desktop.
19-3-2 Upgrading MSS

To upgrade the MSS software:
1 Uninstall the previous version.
3 Insert the MSS CD into the CD drive.
4 The installation program should start automatically. Click Run setup.exe in the dialog
that appears.
If not, run the file setup.exe on the CD.
5 When the MSS Setup dialog appears, follow the instructions and click Next.
6 Choose Complete installation. Click Next. The installation might take a few minutes.
7 Wait until the installation is completed.
8 Close the MSS application by selecting Navigation > Exit.
The installation is completed and an icon appears on the desktop.

19-4 Main window

MSS is started by clicking the MINItrace Service System icon on the desktop.
The MSS main window is opened.
Figure 19-5: MSS main window
Note!
It is possible to magnify the screen in Windows 7 Professional. Click the Start icon and select
All Programs>Accessories>Ease of Access>Magnifier.
19-4-1 Menu bar
Menu Selection Description
Navigation Logout Log out the current user.
Exit Exit MSS.
View Action log Show or hide the action log.
Log view Open a more detailed action log with several filtering
options.
Help About Show information about software versions for MSS

and cyclotron control software.
For more detailed information, click Details....

19-4 Main window
19-4-2 Task selection

The main tasks are selected by clicking the button and viewed in the pane below.
Task Description
Administration Create user accounts, set up system options, and export and import
default configuration values
Configuration Configure GCS and targets, and export and import configuration
values
Subsystem control Control and monitor the subsystems
19-4-3 Action log

The Action log at the bottom of the screen shows different types of action messages.
Click Action log to select messages for User events (= user actions) and/or Xcs events (=
system actions).
To filter the messages according to severity, select Info, Warning, Error or Fatal. By selecting
Debug all messages are shown.
Figure 19-6: Action log
19-4-4 Status bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the main window. It shows which user is logged in
and the GCS status. The GCS status indicator is green when connected and yellow when
disconnected.

19-4 Main window
19-5 Administration
In the Administration pane it is possible to create, modify or delete user accounts.
When logging in the first time, there is only one user: SysAdmin (Administrator). The default
password is pw.
Figure 19-7: Log in as SysAdmin
The user SysAdmin is allowed to administrate users, set system options and export/import
default configurations.

19-5 Administration
19-5-1 User administration

User accounts are created, modified and deleted in the User administration pane.
Figure 19-8: User administration pane
When a user account is created or modified, the following information is requested:
Full name User's full name
Login name User's login name (6–12 characters, A-Z, a–z, 0–9. Space is not
allowed.)
Password User's password (6–12 characters, A-Z, a–z, 0–9. Space is not
allowed.)
Confirm password Confirm password
Account expire date None, or enter a date when the user account expires
Password expire date None, or enter a date when the user password expires
Failed login attempts Shows number of incorrect login attempts. The counter is reset
after a correct login.
Locked The user account is locked, by administrator or the system.

Unselect to unlock.

19-5 Administration
There are four categories with different task access levels. See Table 19-1. A user can have
a combination of categories assigned to get increased access rights.
Table 19-1: User access categories
User access category Administration Configuration Subsystem con- Subsystem con-

trol with beam trol without
beam
Advanced Service Operator — — X —
Basic Service Configurator — X X —
Basic Service Operator — — — X
System Administrator X — — —
Click Save to save any changes or click Cancel to quit without saving.

19-5 Administration
19-5-2 System options

In the System options pane, a number of system parameters are set.
• In COM port settings, the GCS communication parameters are set. See Section 19-2-2
Initial communication and system setup on page 590.
• In Availability, GCS use/not used is set.
Figure 19-9: System options pane
19-5-3 Default configuration

In the Default configuration pane (see Figure 19-9), a selected set of system configuration
values can be exported.
It is also possible to import a system configuration from a separate file.
19-6 Configuration
Before running the cyclotron, a number of parameters must be set in the Configuration task,
for example, the positions of the targets and the host address for the Master System. This is
normally done at the factory.
Note!
The configuration parameters given in the following sections are typical values and might vary
between sites.

19-6 Configuration
The user logged in must have access to the Configuration task (see Table 19-1).
The Configuration task contains three options:
• GCS (accelerator)
• Target
• Export
• Import
Figure 19-10: Configuration options
The options contain the following tabs:
Option Description
GCS Configuration of:

Magnet
RF
Ion source
Extraction
Foil diary
Global
Target Configuration of six targets
Export Export of configuration
Import Import of configuration
Description of the Configuration pane:
• The left column shows the current configuration values.
• In the Edit column, the values can be changed.

19-6 Configuration
• If a value is changed, the cell is highlighted until the value is saved.
• A red exclamation mark indicates an invalid value.
Figure 19-11: Configuration pane
Next to the bottom right corner of the pane there are four buttons:
Button Description
History Opens a window where a historical configuration, stored in the

database, can be retrieved. The values become valid when clicking
Save.
Default Restores the default GCS configuration. The values become valid
when clicking Save.
Save Opens a window where the updated parameter values can be saved
to the GCS with name and date label.
Close Closes the GCS configuration pane.

19-6 Configuration
19-6-1 Configuration – GCS

The Configuration – GCS pane provides indicator and entry fields for a number of accelerator
system parameters:
• Magnet
• RF
• Ion source
• Extraction
• Foil diary
• Global
19-6-1-1 Magnet
Figure 19-12: Magnet tab
Table 19-2: Magnet system parameters
Parameter Description Typ. value
Max current on PSMC Maximum limit for magnet current 150 A
Thold Time to stay at maximum current when the magnet is ramping 30 s
Istep Ramping speed 2.0 A/s
Iproton PSMC current when the cyclotron is producing ≈ 134 A
Increasing current ≈ 40 mA

19-6 Configuration
19-6-1-2 RF
Figure 19-13: RF tab
Table 19-3: RF system parameters
U Dee Operating Dee voltage 35 kV
Scan start pos (frequency) Scanning start position for frequency 70%
Dee scale factor Scaling factor, conversion of Dee voltage, read signal into true kilo- 244
volts, shown to the operator
Phase offset 2
19-6-1-3 Ion source
Figure 19-14: Ion source tab
Table 19-4: Ion system parameters
Operation time Time that the ion source has been used [Ah]
Lifetime Maximum length of time that the ion source can be used 1000 Ah
Max arc current Maximum current of the ion source power supply 2000 mA
Startup arc current Start-up arc current 100 mA

19-6 Configuration
19-6-1-4 Extraction
Figure 19-15: Extraction tab
Table 19-5: Extraction system parameters
I probe startup Maximum current for the flip-in probe at ion beam startup 15 µA
Probe/foil loss max Maximum ion beam loss between flip-in probe and active foil 80%
Foil/target loss max Maximum ion beam loss between active foil and active target 20%
19-6-1-5 Foil diary
Figure 19-16: Foil diary tab
Table 19-6: Foil diary parameters
Maximum foil wear Maximum foil lifetime 2.0 mAh
19-6-1-6 Global
Figure 19-17: Global tab

19-6 Configuration
Table 19-7: Global parameters
Ethernet port no Ethernet port number 3456
Master TCP/IP address Master System TCP/IP address 192.0.4.30
19-6-2 Configuration – Target

The Configuration – Target pane consists of the following columns:
• Target position 1–6 on cyclotron. Choice of new target type and choice of tracers –
indication/entry fields for the target system parameters.
• Type of target and tracers on selected position.
• Change of target and tracer at the target position.
• Edit target parameters.
Figure 19-18: Configuration – Target

19-6 Configuration
19-6-2-1 Change target and tracer

Initially, the default configuration values for the selected target are used.
• Click Change to open the Select target and Select tracers lists. The desired target and
tracer for the target position can be selected from these lists. The content of the Select
tracers list depends on the target selected.
• Click Save to assign the selected target and tracers to the target position.
Figure 19-19: Select target and tracer
19-6-2-2 Edit target

When clicking Edit, a list of target configuration parameters is shown.
The current parameter values are shown in the left column and changes are made in the Edit
column.
Figure 19-20: Edit target and tracer

19-6 Configuration
At the bottom right corner there are four buttons as described below.
Button Description
History Disabled in this context
Default Load the default configuration parameters from the database
Save Save the configuration parameters to the GCS
Close Exit the target parameters window
19-6-2-3 18F- target parameters

Selected target: 18F-
In the Configuration target menu for 18F- target, the target parameters can be changed.
Figure 19-21: 18F- target pane
Table 19-8: 18F- target parameters
18F- 18F-12 mm
3.9 mm and Gen II
6 mm 18F- Nb 25
Ltf id 2 or 3 2 or 3
Max pressure Maximum pressure allowed 400 psi 400 psi
Min pressure1 Minimum pressure allowed for the high pressure 250 psi 250 psi
Set pressure Minimum allowed low pressure 035 psi 035 psi
Delta pressure Minimum pressure increase allowed during filling 10 psi 8 psi2
16 psi3

19-6 Configuration
18F- 18F- 12 mm
3.9 mm and Gen II
6 mm 18F- Nb 25
Max leak pressure Maximum variation of target pressure during leak check 95% 95%
Fill time Time needed to fill the target 10 s 20 s
Stabilize time Time to stabilize pressure 05 s 05 s
Empty time Time to empty the target 180 s 180 s
Leak time Time to leak check 030 s 030 s
Dry time Time to dry the target 020 min 020 min
Max beam current4 Maximum beam current allowed 045 µA 060 µA

(includes a 10 µA margin for intermittent over shoot)
Receiving unit intl 1 GCS interlocks 1–5 1–5
Receiving unit intl 2 GCS interlocks 1–5 1–5
1 This value is used to detect a possible leak in the target during production. There is a restriction mounted in the
high pressure supply line. This causes the pressure to drop even if the leak is very small.
2 18F- 12 mm Gen II
3 18F- Nb 25
4 This value is typically set 10 μA higher than the maximum allowed beam on target. This is because the beam
otherwise is turned off if the target current would temporarily higher (slight overshoot in the regulation or similar).
For example, the 18F- Nb 25 target is maximally allowed for 50 μA. Still the value is configured to 60 μA to prevent
a temporary current level above 50 μA to shut the system down.

19-6 Configuration
19-6-2-4 13N target parameters

Selected target: 13N
In the Configuration target menu for 13N target, the target parameters can be changed.
Figure 19-22: 13N target pane
Table 19-9: 13N target parameters
Ltf id 1
Max pressure Maximum pressure allowed 150 psi
Min pressure Minimum pressure allowed 045 psi
Delta pressure Minimum pressure increase allowed during filling 10 psi
Max leak pressure Maximum variation of target pressure during leak 20%
check
Fill time Time needed to fill the target 10 s
Stabilize time Time to stabilize pressure 05 s
Empty time Time to empty the target 120 s
Leak time Time for leak test 030 s
Dry time Time to dry the target 030 min
Max beam current Maximum beam current allowed 045 µA

(includes a 10 µA margin for intermittent over
shoot)
Recieving unit intl GCS interlocks 1–5

19-6 Configuration
19-6-2-5 11CO target parameters

2
Selected target: 11CO2
In the Configuration target menu for 11CO2 target, tracers can be selected and the target
parameters be changed.
The 11CO2 produced can either be delivered directly or purified.
Figure 19-23: 11CO2 target pane
Table 19-10: 11CO2 target parameters
Fill pressure Pressure for filled target 145 psi
Delta pressure Maximum pressure decrease allowed during fill- 20 psi

ing
Max empty pressure Pressure when target is empty 05 psi
Max leak pressure Maximum variation of target pressure during leak 20 psi
check
Fill time Time to fill the target 10 s
Flush time Time to flush the target 040 s
Leak time Time to leak check the target 020 s

19-6 Configuration
Transport time Time to transport activity from trap 130 s
Activate trap time Time to keep trap heated 010 min

shoot)
Receiving unit intl di- GCS interlocks for direct production 1–5
rect
Receiving unit intl GCS interlocks for purified production 1–5

purified
19-6-2-6 15O target parameters

Selected target: 15O
In the Configuration target menu for 15O target, tracers can be selected and the target
parameters be changed.
The 15O is produced in the chemical form of H215O.
Figure 19-24: 15O target pane
Table 19-11: 15O target parameters
Fill pressure Pressure for filled target 140 psi
Delta pressure Maximum pressure decrease allowed during fill- 30 psi

ing

19-6 Configuration
Max empty pressure Pressure when target is empty 20 psi
Max leak pressure Maximum variation of target pressure during leak 20 psi
check
Fill time Time to fill the target 05 s
Flush time Time to flush the target 060 s
Leak time Time to leak check the target 020 s
Transport time Time V2 and V3 is open 030 s

shoot)
Revieving unit intl GCS interlocks 1–5
19-6-2-7 Dummy proton target and Empty

It is possible to select Dummy proton and Empty as targets. These are not any production
targets and no configuration can be made.
• Dummy proton – dummy target used for maintenance.
• Empty – selected when the target position is empty (no target).
19-6-3 Configuration – Export and Import

Configuration – Export is used for exporting the current configuration data from GCS and
target configuration including tracers. The data can be used for analysis or as back-up. The
data is exported to an XML-file.
Configuration – Import is used for importing a previously exported configuration file to the
GCS.

19-6 Configuration
19-7 Subsystem control

The Subsystem control task is used for controlling and monitoring the subsystems.
Figure 19-25: Subsystem control pane
The following options are available by clicking the respective part of the cyclotron image:
• Magnet system
• RF system (click one of the Dees)
• Ion source (and gas handling system) (click the center of the cyclotron)
• Extraction and diagnostic system
• Vacuum and cooling system
• Motor calibration
• Beam control
• Target 1–6
When clicking a subsystem, the corresponding window is opened. Several subsystem windows
can be open at the same time, but all subsystems cannot be run simultaneously due to
conflicts.

Table 19-12: Subsystem control options
Option Function
Target number 1–6 Controls the corresponding target and chemistry system.
Magnet Controls the magnet system, including the magnet power supply.
Extraction and Diag- Controls the extraction and diagnostic system, including the flip-in
nostics probe and the different foil options.
Ion source Controls the ion source, including the ion source power supply and
ion source gas.
RF Controls the RF system, including control of the Dee voltage and

the tuning of frequency.
Vacuum and Cooling Controls the vacuum and cooling system.
Beam control Controls and shows status of different subsystems so it is possible

to produce an ion beam.
Motor calibration Calibrates foil holder positions.
19-7-1 Expandable fields

Some indicator fields are expandable to make reading easier. These fields have a small triangle
in the upper right corner. The fields are expanded by clicking in the field.
Expandable indicator field Expanded field

19-7-2 Magnet system

during acceleration. The magnet system also focuses the beam. The Magnet Power Supply
(PSMC) can be left powered on when closing the window.
Figure 19-26: Magnet window
The Magnet window contains the following:
• Magnet control and indicator section – indicator and entry fields for current and voltage.
Also includes buttons for simple control of magnet power, and a status indicator.
• Status section – indicators for status and interlocks.
• GCS interlock section – indicators external interlocks.
• Buttons:
- Reset – resets magnet error, provided the error has been corrected.
- System Off – turns off all subsystems (not vacuum and cooling).
- Close – exits the Magnet window.
19-7-2-1 Magnet section
Figure 19-27: Magnet section

Table 19-13: Magnet section – controls and indicators
Indicator Type/color Value Description
Indicator/Button On/Off Controls/shows PSMC state. Signal from

contactor inside PSMC:
On = Starts the PSMC.
Off = Ramps PSMC down to 5 A and shuts
down.
Voltage Indicator field ≈ 80 V Shows the magnet voltage.
Current Indicator field Typ. 135 A Shows the magnet current.
Set Entry field/Button Enter the new current value and click Set.
Ramps the current first to 150 A, waits 30 s
and then ramps current to entered value
(max. current and wait time configurable).
-+ Button Changes the value in 0.01 increments (left

mouse button) or 0.10 increments (right
mouse button).
19-7-2-2 Magnet status section

This section shows the magnet system status. Status is shown by green or yellow indicators.
If an error or interlock occurs, the corresponding indicator changes from green to yellow.
Figure 19-28: Magnet status section
Table 19-14: Magnet status section – indicators
Indicator Color Description
Main power Green/Yellow Yellow if main power is not on.
Magnet door Green/Yellow Yellow if magnet door is open.
Magnet water flow Green/Yellow Yellow if the water flow (water manifold) to the magnet is
missing.
Magnet overtempera- Green/Yellow Yellow if the magnet is overheated, t > 75°C.

ture

Internal interlock Green/Yellow Yellow if any of the following internal interlock fails:
Freewheel diode overtemp, Low water Flow, Door open, Diode
heatsink overtemp, Chassis overtemp, IGBT heatsink overtemp,
H.F. diode overtemp, Switch reg. DCCT failure, IGBT driver failure,
Switch regulator supply failure, IGBT driver failure, or Overcur-
rent.
Internal warning Green/Yellow Yellow if any of the following internal warning fails:
AC undervoltage, Excessive current ripple, or Ground leak cur-
rent.
19-7-2-3 GCS interlock section

Five external interlock indicators for the GCS are shown. Green indicator means OK, yellow
means NOT OK. The external interlocks are defined by the customer and connected to MSS
via the Customer Interface Connector (CIC).
The interlocks can, for example, be used on hotcell doors for controlled delivery of tracers.
The interlocks have to be configured for each tracer type. If the configuration parameter is
0, the interlocks can be defined by the customer.
Figure 19-29: GCS interlock section
19-7-3 RF system
The RF system pulls out the ions from the ion source and accelerates the particles by the so
called “Dees”. The Dees also form a resonating circuit which is tuned by motor-driven
capacitors, called “flaps”.
To make sure that the ion source is off, a maintenance relay will be set when entering this
menu, and reset when closing this window.

Figure 19-30: RF window
The RF window contains the following:
• State and mode section – status indicators and buttons for control of the RF system:
- Normal – starts the RF system with Dee voltage as entered in the Dee voltage
section.
- Standby – sets the RF system in STANDBY mode.
- Off – shuts down the RF system.
- Fix – sets the RF system in TEST mode with continuous output proportional to the
Dee voltage reference (Set Dee voltage).
Note!
TEST mode – the flaps must be adjusted manually.
- Pulse – sets the RF system in TEST mode with pulsed output, with amplitude
proportional to the Dee voltage reference (Set Dee voltage).
Note!
TEST mode – the flaps must be adjusted manually.
Only one of the modes OFF/STANDBY/NORMAL/FIX/PULSE can be active at a time. When

changing modes, the STANDBY mode must be selected in between.
• Dee voltage section – indicator and entry fields for the Dee voltage.
• RF parameters section – indicator fields for RF power.
• Phase and frequency section – indicator fields for the frequency and phase.
• GCS interlock section – indicators for external interlocks.

• RF status section – indicators for subsystem states and interlocks.
• Configuration parameters section – indicator fields showing default values for Dee
voltage, phase and frequency start position. The default values can not be changed from
this menu.
• Buttons:
- Reset – resets RF errors, provided the error has been corrected.
- System Off – turns off all subsystems.
- Close – exits the RF window.
19-7-3-1 RF status section

This section shows the RF system status. The RF status is shown by green or yellow indicators.
If an error or interlock occurs, the corresponding indicator changes from green to yellow. If
two or more errors occur, only the first error will be shown.
This section also includes system interlock indicators. The system interlock indicators are
green under normal conditions, and change to yellow if an interlock condition occurs. These
interlocks are only relevant for this window. If any of the system interlock requirements is not
fulfilled, the corresponding system interlock shows the causing error and the RF system can
not be turned on.
Figure 19-31: RF status section
Table 19-15: RF status section – indicators
RFPG
Standby ready Green/Yellow Yellow when RFPG is off. Yellow if error occurs or interlock is active
during start-up or operation; RFPG goes to OFF.
Standby error Green/Yellow Yellow if an error or time-out (120 s) occur upon STANDBY request.
Grid power supply Green/Yellow Yellow if a grid power supply error occurs. RFPG goes to OFF.

Screen power supply Green/Yellow Yellow if a screen power supply error occurs. RFPG goes to OFF.
Anode power supply Green/Yellow Yellow if overcurrent or overvoltage error in anode PS. RFPG goes
to OFF.
Heater power supply Green/Yellow Yellow if a heater power supply error occurs.
Waterflow Green/Yellow Yellow if the internal RFPG water flow is missing or the water flow is
too low.
Anode current limit Green/Yellow Yellow if momentary limit of RFPG output power because anode
current rises above allowed level. Can occur when tuning at start-
up.
TAU air flow Green/Yellow Yellow if fans in the TAU are not OK. RFPG goes to OFF.
TAU front cover Green/Yellow Yellow if the front cover of the TAU is not closed. RFPG goes to OFF.
TPSU safety switches Green/Yellow Yellow if TPSU cover panel is loose, grounding stick is not in holder,
HV transformer temperatureis > 140°C. RFPG goes to OFF.
SCU processor Green/Yellow Yellow if a SCU processor fault occurs. RFPG goes to OFF.
SCU power supply Green/Yellow Yellow if the SCU power supply is not OK. RFPG goes to OFF.
Reflected voltage Green/Yellow Yellow if output power limiting caused by RF cavity tuning error (can
limit occur occasionally).
RF cavity
Water flow Green/Yellow Yellow if RF cavity water flow is not OK. (If any of the two separate
water circuits is not OK.)
System interlock
Vacuum ok Green/Yellow Yellow if vacuum not OK. (Not below Penning LOW LEVEL set point,
4×10-5 mbar)
Magnet > 50 A Green/Yellow Yellow if magnet current is OFF or below 50 A.

Ion source off Green/Yellow Yellow if the ion source is ON.
Gas off Green/Yellow Yellow if the ion source gas is ON.
19-7-3-2 Dee voltage section

The Dee voltage section controls the Dee voltage.
Figure 19-32: Dee voltage section
Table 19-16: Dee voltage section – controls and indicators
Control/indicator Type Value Description
Dee Indicator field Typ. 35 kV Shows Dee voltage.

(NORMAL mode)
Set Dee Entry field/Button Typ. 35 kV Enter Dee voltage (kV) and click Set Dee.
(NORMAL mode)
-+ Button Change the voltage in 0.1 kV increments (left

mouse button) or 1.0 kV increments (right
mouse button).
19-7-3-3 RF state and mode section

This section shows the RF system and RF function mode.
Figure 19-33: State and mode section

Table 19-17: RF state and mode section – controls and indicators
State Button Normal/ Shows RF system mode, see Section 19-7-3

Indicator Standby/ RF system on page 619.
Off/
Fix/
Pulse
Function mode Indicator StartMode In NORMAL mode, RF system looking for

(scans) resonance.
TuningMode In NORMAL mode, RF system under tuning

procedure.
DeeVoltageOk In NORMAL mode, RF operation OK.
DeeVoltNotOk In NORMAL mode, instantaneous deviation

from the reference Dee voltage.
Sparks In all modes, RF system discharge.
StandbyError If error or time out (120 s) occur during start-

up of the RFPG when entering Standby mode.
StandbyReady RFPG is ready for RF operation.
WarmUp After Standby mode has been selected and

during 60 s the RFPG is warmed up after en-
tering STANDBY mode.
ErrInNormMode In NORMAL mode, if reference Dee voltage

is not reached within 60 s.
Off RFPG is off.
Pulse PULSED mode active, pulsed RF signal.
Fix FIX mode active, continuous RF signal.
19-7-3-4 RF parameters section
Figure 19-34: RF parameters section
This section shows the RF Forward and Reflected power. The values are updated continuously.

Table 19-18: RF parameters section – indicators
Forward power Indicator field Typ. 8–8.5 kW Shows RF power output.

(Dee voltage ≈ 35 kV)
Reflected power Indicator field Typ. 0–0.4 kW Shows RF power that has been reflected
from the resonator. This value can reach up
to 1 kW if the resonator is not properly tuned.
19-7-3-5 Phase and frequency section
Figure 19-35: Phase and frequency section
To be able to control the frequency manually, the RFPG must be in OFF, STANDBY, FIX or PULSE
mode.
Indicators are shown with both a meter and/or a value.
Table 19-19: Phase and frequency section – controls and indicators
Phase Indicator field Shows the RF resonator status. Showed value

should be close to “Phase offset” when the
resonator is properly tuned. In PULSE mode
this indicator is put out of operation.
Phase offset Indicator field
Set (Phase offset) Entry field/Button Type a value and click Set. The phase
changes to the new value.
Frequency Indicator field and Typ. 35–65% Shows the frequency position.
meter
Set (Frequency) Entry field/Button Type a value and click Set. The frequency
changes to the new value.


mouse button) or 1.0 increments (right mouse
button).
Save to configuration Button Save the set value for frequency start posi-
tion to configuration area.
19-7-3-6 Configuration parameters section

In the Configuration parameters section the default values for the Dee voltage, Start frequency
and Phase are shown. Dee voltage and phase parameters are default values which cannot
be changed from this section.
Figure 19-36: Configuration parameters section

See Section 19-7-2-3 GCS interlock section on page 619.
19-7-4 Ion source system

The ion source system generates ions produced by the ion source. The gas handling system
supplies the ion source with gas. In this system, hydrogen gas is used.
The Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC) and the gas handing system should be turned off (closed)
when closing the window.
To be sure that the RF system is off, a maintenance relay will be set when entering this window
and reset when closing the window.

Figure 19-37: Ion source window
The Ion source window contains the following:
• Ion source section – indicator and entry fields for current, voltage and gas flow. Buttons
for simple control of the Ion Source Power Supply, and status indicators for subsystems
and system interlocks indicators are also included.
• Gas status section – controls the gas handling system.
• Buttons:
- Reset – resets ion source errors, provided the error has been corrected.
- System Off – turns off all subsystems (not Vacuum & Cooling).
- Close – exits the Ion source system window.

19-7-4-1 Ion source section
Figure 19-38: Ion source section
Table 19-20: Ion source section – controls and indicators
Indicator/Button On/Off On = Start the ion source with arc current 0.

(PSARC)
Off = Shuts off the ion source. (PSARC)
(Indicator feedback from contactor in CCAB.)
Gas status Indicator field Proton/Off Shows the gas flow, read out from the ion
source mass flow controller.
Gas On/Off Indicator/Button Gas On/Gas Off Turns/shows the ion source gas flow on/off.
Arc voltage Indicator field 0–1300 V Shows the PSARC voltage.
Arc current Indicator field 0–2000 mA Shows the PSARC current.
Set (arc current) Entry field/Button Enter the new current value and click Set.
The PSARC then changes the arc current.
-+ Button Changes the value in 1 increments (left

mouse button) or 10 increments (right mouse
button).
Cathode op time Indicator field Shows how long time [Ah] the ion source
cathodes have been operating.
Catodes replaced Button Sets the cathode operation time to zero, after
confirmation.
The lower part of the window shows the ion source and gas handling system status. The ion
source and gas handling status is shown by green or yellow indicators. If an error or interlock
occur the corresponding indicator changes from green to yellow.

The window also includes system interlock indicators. The system interlock indicators are
green under normal condition, and change to yellow if an interlock condition occurs. If any
of the system interlock requirements is not fulfilled, the corresponding system interlock shows
the causing error and the ion source can not be turned on. These interlocks are only relevant
for this window.
Figure 19-39: Status and System interlocks section
Table 19-21: Status and System interlocks section – indicators
Status
Water flow Green/Yellow Yellow if ion source water flow is not OK.
High voltage Green/Yellow Yellow if no high voltage.
No faults Green/Yellow Yellow if a PSARC error occurs.
System interlock
Vacuum ok Green/Yellow Yellow if vacuum is not OK. Chamber pressure is not OK.
Magnet > 50 A Green/Yellow Yellow if magnet system is OFF or below 50 A.
RF off or standby Green/Yellow Yellow if RF system is not in OFF state.

19-7-5 Extraction and diagnostics system

The extraction system removes the electrons from the negative ions at the extraction radius
in the accelerator, through stripping foils. The accelerator is normally equipped with one foil
holder with two foils. At foil replacement the complete holder is replaced and the replacement
must be recorded in the foil diary, kept by the GCS.
The diagnostic system measures the particle beam current at different sections of the
accelerator. At this security level, no beam may be produced, so when testing this system an
external current source, such as a multi-meter in resistance measurement mode, has to be
used.

Figure 19-40: Extraction and diagnostics window
The Extraction and diagnostics window contains the following:
• Beam current section – indicator fields and meters for probe current, foil 1 current, foil 2
current, and target 1 to 6 current. Includes indicator fields for the four beam collimators.
Also includes buttons for simple control of the flip-in probe, and a status indicator.
• Extraction section – indicator field, entry field and indicator meter for foil holder position.
Also includes indicator and entry fields for foil number and foil wear, and buttons for
simple control of the foils.
• BCA power section – indication of BCA status.
• GCS interlock section – indication of external interlocks.
• Buttons:
- Reset – resets BCA power errors, provided the error has been corrected.
- System Off – turns off all subsystems (not Vacuum & Cooling).
- Close – exits the Extraction and diagnostic window.

19-7-5-1 Beam current section
Figure 19-41: Beam current section
Table 19-22: Beam current controls and indicators
Control/indicator Type/color Value Description
Probe Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to the probe.
Foil 1 Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to the foil.
Foil 2 Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to the dump.
Target 1 Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to target 1.





Indicator field In/Out Shows the position of the flip-in probe.
(Probe status)
Probe In Button Will move the flip-in probe to beam measur-

ing position and block the beam.
Probe Out Button Will move the flip-in probe to inactive posi-
tion and allow beam extraction.

Coll. 1U Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to collima-
tor 1U.
Coll. 1L Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to collimator 1L.
Coll. 2U Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to collima-
tor 2U.
Coll. 2L Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current ≠ 0 µA if an

meter external source is connected to collimator 2L.
Note!
Collimator current indicates stray-beam when irradiating realated target. A well-tuned MINItrace
cyclotron has approximately the same value on each collimator pair.
19-7-5-2 Extraction section
Figure 19-42: Extraction section
Table 19-23: Extraction section – controls and indicators
Balance Indicator field 0–100% Shows balance (pivot) position.
Set (Balance) Entry field 0–100% Sets balance position to entered value.
Foil holder 1 pos Indicator field and 0–100% Shows foil holder 1 position.
meter
meter
Set (foil holder posi- Entry field 0–100% Enter the new position [%] and click Set. The
tion) foil holder moves to the new position.

button).

Max foil wear Indicator field mAh Shows maximum allowed foil wear.
Set (Max foil wear) Entry field mAh Sends the entered maximum foil wear, in
mAh, to the GCS. The max. foil wear is the
same for all foils. The present maximum al-
lowed foil wear value is shown.
Foil number Indicator field 1 or 2 Shows active foil for foil holder 1.
Foil 1 (foil holder 1) Indicator field 0–[operator config- Number of mAh that the foil has been used.
ured] mAh
ured] mAh
ured] mAh
Change foil Button Change foil 1 to foil 2. When foil 2 is reached,

the GCS will not allow another foil change
until foils replaced has been confirmed.
Foils replaced Button Sets wear of both foils to zero (foil holder 1)
and resets the foil diary kept by the GCS, after
the user has confirmed replacement.
19-7-5-3 BCA power section

BCA power indicator shows the status of the Beam Current Analyzer (BCA). The status is shown
by a green or yellow indicator. If an error or interlock occurs the indicator changes from green
to yellow.
The Reset button resets a BCA power error, provided the cause of the error has been corrected.
Figure 19-43: BCA power indicator
Table 19-24: BCA power indicator
BCA power Green/Yellow Yellow if BCA board power below ± 10 V.


19-7-6 Vacuum and cooling system

The cooling system removes the generated heat from the different subsystems in the
accelerator. The cooling system can be turned on or off, and possible errors can be detected.
To turn off the cooling system, the ion source, RF and magnet subsystems must be in state
off.
The vacuum system maintains the evacuated state of the cyclotron vacuum chamber.
Figure 19-44: Vaccum and Cooling window
The Vacuum and Cooling window contains the following:
• Vacuum system section – indicator fields for chamber and backing pressure, status
indicators for subsystem state and interlocks, and a reset button.
• Cooling system section – a status indicator.
• Buttons:
- Close – exits the Vacuum and Cooling window.

19-7-6-1 Vacuum system section
Figure 19-45: Vacuum system section
Table 19-25: Vacuum system section – controls and indicators
Chamber pressure Indicator field Typ. Shows the cyclotron vacuum chamber
7.0×10-7 mbar pressure.
Backing pressure Indicator field Typ. Shows the cyclotron vacuum backing pres-
1.0×10-2 mbar sure.
Vacuum OK Indicator Green/Yellow Shows vacuum system status.

Green if below Penning LOW LEVEL set point,
4×10-5 mbar.
Chamber closed Indicator Green/Yellow Yellow if the vacuum chamber is not closed.
Reset vacuum error Button Resets vacuum errors, provided the errors
have been corrected.
19-7-6-2 Cooling system section
Figure 19-46: Cooling system section
This section shows the cooling system status. If an error (or interlock) occurs the indicator
changes from green to yellow.
Table 19-26: Cooling system section – indicator
Pump is running Indicator Yellow if main cooling pump is off.

Green/Yellow

19-7-7 Beam control system

Ion beam can be produced from this window.
WARNING!
Make sure that no personnel is present in the cyclotron room before entering this menu.
Check that the beam will be directed into a target before turning on the accelerator.
To open this window, the user needs to be logged in as user access category Advanced
Service Operator (see Table 19-1). Otherwise, Beam control in the Subsystem control task
will be prohibited.
Figure 19-47: Beam control window
The Beam control window contains the following:
• Vacuum section – an on/off-button and status indicator for vacuum, and indicator field
for chamber pressure.
• Targets section – indicator field for the target pressures.
• Magnet section – an on/off-button and status indicator for magnet, and indicator and
entry field for current.
• RF section – buttons and indicator fields for RF modes, function modes, and Dee voltage
and frequency.
• Ion source section – an on/off-button and status indicator for PSARC, indicator and entry
fields for arc current and voltage. Also includes on/off buttons and status indicator for
gas.

• GCS interlock section – indicators for external interlocks. There are also indicators for
cooling and the Vault door.
• Beam current section – indicator fields and meters for current on probe, foil 1 and 2, and
targets 1–6, and collimators. Also includes an in/out-buttons and status indicator for
probe.
• Extraction section – indicator field, indicator meter and entry field for foil holders and
balance positions, and indicator field for foil number. Also includes a button for changing
foil.
• Configuration section – indicator fields for magnet current, Dee voltages, and frequency,
and entry and indicator fields for foil holder, balance positions and a button for saving
foil positions to the GCS.
• Buttons:
- Save all to GCS – saves the set parameters (entry fields): Dee voltage, foil positions
and magnet current, to GCS. When saving the parameters the ion source must be
OFF and RF must be in STANDBY mode.
- System Off – turns off all subsystems (not water cooling).
- Close – if beam is ON, user will be informed that beam will be shut off when exiting
the Beam control window.
• Indicators:
- Cooling on – indicator for cooling on/off
- Vault door – indicator for vault door interlock.
19-7-7-1 Vacuum and Targets sections
Figure 19-48: Vacuum and Targets sections

Table 19-27: Vacuum and Target sections – controls and indicators
Vacuum
Indicator/Button On/Off Turns On or Off vacuum.

Green/Yellow Yellow if chamber pressure above 4×10-5.
Chamber pressure Indicator field Typ. 7×10-7 Shows the chamber pressure.
mbar
Targets
Target position Indicator field 1–6 Shows selected target.
Target pressure Indicator field Shows the target pressure.
19-7-7-2 Magnet, RF system and Ion source sections
Figure 19-49: Magnet, RF system and Ion source sections
Table 19-28: Magnet, RF system and Ion source sections – indicators and controls
Magnet
Indicator/Button On/Off Controls/shows PSMC state. Signal from

Green/Yellow contactor inside PSMC:
On = Starts the PSMC.
Off = Ramps PSMC down to 5 A and shuts
down.
Set Entry field/Button Enter the new current value and click Set.
Ramps the current first to 150 A, waits 30 s
and then ramps current to entered value
(max. current and wait time configurable).

mouse button) or 0.10 increments (right
mouse button).

RF
Normal/Standby/Off Indicator/Button Off/ Controls/shows the RF system state.

Standby/
Normal
Function mode Indicator StartMode/ See Section 19-7-3 RF system on page 619.
TuningMode/
DeeVoltOk/
DeeVoltNotOk/
Sparks/
StandbyError/
StandbyReady/
WarmUp/
ErrInNormMode/
Off
Dee voltage Indicator field Typ. 35 kV Shows the Dee voltage.
Set Dee V Entry field/Button Enter Dee voltage (kV) and click Set.
Frequency Indicator field Shows frequency.
Set frequency Entry field/Button Enter the new start frequency and click Set.

button).
Ion source
Indicator/Button On/Off Controls/shows the ion source state.

Green/Yellow
Gas On/Off Indicator/Button Gas On/Gas Off Turns/shows the ion source gas flow on/off.
Arc voltage Indicator field 0–1300 V Shows the PSARC voltage.
Arc current Indicator field 0–2000 mA Shows the PSARC current.
Set (arc current) Entry field/Button Enter the new current value and click Set.
The PSARC then changes the arc current.
-+ Button Changes the value in 1 increments (left

mouse button) or 10 increments (right mouse
button).
Gas status Indicator field Proton/Off Shows the gas flow, read out from the ion
source mass flow controller.

19-7-7-3 Beam current section
Figure 19-50: Beam current section
Table 19-29: Beam current section– controls and indicators
Indicator Type Value Description
Probe Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on the flip-in probe.
meter
Foil 1 Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on Foil 1.
meter
Foil 2 Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on Foil 2.
meter
Target 1 Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on target 1.
meter
meter
meter
meter
meter
meter
Probe In Button - Controls the flip-in probe position.
Probe Out Button - Controls the flip-in probe position.
Out Indicator field In/Out Shows the flip-in probe position.

(Probe status)
Coll 1U Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on Collimator 1U.
meter

Indicator Type Value Description
Coll 1L Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on Collimator 1L.
meter
Coll 2U Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on Collimator 2U.
meter
Coll 2L Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on Collimator 2L.
meter
19-7-7-4 Extraction section
Figure 19-51: Extraction section
Table 19-30: Extraction section – controls and indicators
Balance Indicator field 0–100% Shows balance (pivot) position.
Set (Balance) Entry field 0–100% Sets balance position to entered value.
meter
meter
Set (foil holder posi- Entry field 0–100% Enter the new position [%] and click Set. The
tion) foil holder moves to the new position.

button).
Foil number Indicator field 1 or 2 Shows active foil for foil holder 1.
Change foil 1/2 Button Change foil 1 to foil 2. When foil 2 is reached,
the GCS will not allow another foil change
until foils replaced has been confirmed.

19-7-7-5 Configuration section

The Configuration section can, with the Parameters drop-down button, be expanded or
collapsed.
Figure 19-52: Configuration section
Table 19-31: Configuration section – controls and indicators
Configuration
Parameters Drop-down button Expands/collapses the section.
Magnet current Indicator field ≈ 134 A Shows configured value for magnet
current.
Dee voltage Indicator field ≈ 35 kV Shows configured value for Dee voltage.
Frequency Indicator field ≈ 70% Shows configured value for start frequen-
cy.

Target 1 pos. Indicator field ≈ 15% Shows configured value, target 1 foil
holder 1 position.
holder 1 position.
holder 1 position.
holder 1 position.
holder 1 position.
holder 2 position.
Set new Entry field For each target, entered value sets foil
holder position for later saving.
Balance pos. Indicator field ≈ 5% Shows configured value for balance po-
sition. (5% is park position.)
Set new Entry field Entered value sets foil balance position
for later saving.
Save new tar- Button Saves the foil positions to GCS.

get pos
19-7-7-6 GCS and vault door interlock and cooling section

Five external interlock indicators for the GCS, one for cooling and one for vault door are shown.
Green indicator means OK, yellow means NOT OK. If any of the external interlocks are not
OK, the RF and the ion source are turned off. The external interlocks are defined by the
customer and connected to MSS via the Customer Interface Connector (CIC).
If the Cooling on indicator is green, the cooling pump is running. If it is yellow, the pump is
off.
Figure 19-53: GCS and safety door interlocks and cooling section

19-7-8 Motor calibration system

In the Motor calibration window, the flap-, foil holder- and balance (Pivot) servo motor
positions are calibrated. Each servo motor must operate within a certain range.
The position of the servo within the limits, is monitored by means of a variable voltage from
a potentiometer on the servo motor unit. The control system calibrates this position information
and normalizes the actual signal from the servo motor unit so that position 0% is indicated
when the servo is at the lower limit and 100% at the higher limit.
Figure 19-54: Motor calibration window
The Motor calibration window contains the following:
• Motor selection section – buttons for calibrating the motors.
• Foil holder 1/2 position section – indicator fields and meters for the two foil holders, and
drive current indicator fields.
• Balance position section – indicator field and meters for the balance position, and drive
current indicator field.
• Foil number indication – indicator for active foil for foil holder 1.
• Buttons:
- Close – exits the Motor calibration window.
Table 19-32: Motor calibration window – controls and indicators
Foil holder 1 Radio button Selects Foil holder 1 motor.
Foil holder 2 Radio button Selects Foil holder 2 motor.

Balance Radio button Selects balance motor.
Calibrate Button Calibrate Foil holder Calibrates the selected motor. (If no motor
1 motor has been previously calibrated, this function
Calibrate Foil holder automatically calibrates all motors.)
2 motor
Calibrate Balance
motor
Foil holder 1 position Indicator field and 0–100% Shows the Foil holder 1 position.
meter
Foil holder 2 position Indicator field and 0–100% Shows the Foil holder 2 position.
meter
Balance position Indicator field and 0–100% Shows the balance position.
meter
Foil number Indicator field 1 or 2 Shows the active foil for foil holder 1.
Current Indicator field mA Shows drive current for moving motor.

19-7-9 18F- Nb 25 and 18F- (3.9 mm, 6 mm and 12 mm Gen II) targets
In the 18F- target, radioactive 18F-F is produced from 18O-H2O.
Figure 19-55: 18F- Nb 25 target control window

Figure 19-56: 18F- target control window (3.9 mm, 6 mm and 12 mm Gen II targets)
The 18F-target control and 18F- Nb 25 target control windows contain the following:
• Target and vacuum section – indicator fields for the target type, the target position, the
vacuum chamber pressure and the target pressure.
• Water cooling section
• 18F- 3.9 mm, 6 mm and 12 mm Gen II targets only: Helium cooling section – buttons for
simple control of the helium cooling, the helium and the water cooling valves, a status
indicator and control button for the helium compressor, and an indication of the helium
pressure.
• 18F- extraction section – buttons for simple control of the valves, and buttons and
indications for the pumps.
• GCS interlock section– indicators for external interlocks.

• Buttons:
- Connect On/Off – Off = disconnects when target needs service. On = connects

target after service.
- Select – target is prepared for beam.
- Unselect – cooling for the target is turned off.
- Fill H2-16O – fills the target with 16O water according to the filling parameters.
- Fill H2-18O – fills the target with 18O water according to the filling parameters.
- Empty to Outlet 1 – empties the target to outlet 1.
- Empty to Outlet 2 – empties the target to outlet 2.
- Dry to Outlet 1 – He-gas flows through the target for a preset time to dry the target,
target open to outlet 1.
- Dry to Outlet 2 – He-gas flows through the target for a preset time to dry the target,
target open to outlet 2.
- Stop dry – stops drying target before the preset time is reached.
- Close – exits the target window.
19-7-9-1 18F- target and vacuum section
Figure 19-57: 18F- target and vacuum section
Table 19-33: 18F- target and vacuum section – indicators
Target type and tar- Text Target 18F- or Shows selected target and position number.
get position N Target 18F- Nb 25
at target position N
Indicator Connect On/ Shows the target state.

Green/Yellow Connect Off
Connect

Vacuum Indicator field ≈ 7.0 E-7 mbar Shows the vacuum chamber pressure.
Indicator field and 0–500 psi Shows target pressure.

meter
19-7-9-2 18F- water and helium cooling section

The water and helium cooling section controls the target related cooling systems.
Note!
18F- Nb 25 targets are water cooled only and has, therefore, no helium cooling section.
The water and helium cooling status indicators are either green or yellow. If an error or
interlock occur, the corresponding indicator changes from green to yellow.
Figure 19-58: 18F- water and helium cooling section
Table 19-34: 18F- water and helium section – cooling controls and indicators
Water cooling
Water cooling Indicator On/Off Yellow if water flow is not on or too low.
Green/Yellow

(Water cooling valve) Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls status of the helium and
Green/Yellow water cooling valves. These valves are con-
trolled by the same signal and always have
the same status.
To change status on the valves, click one of
the valves. Green = Open.
He cooling (3.9 mm, 6 mm and 12 mm Gen II targets only)
Fill Button Click button to fill the helium cooling system

to a predefined pressure.
Empty Button Click button to empty the helium cooling

system.
Flush Button Click button to flush the helium cooling sys-

tem.
(He cooling inlet Indicator Open/Close Shows open or close.

valve) Green/Yellow Green = Open.
(He cooling outlet Indicator Open/Close Shows open or close.

(He cooling loop Indicator Open/Close Shows open or close.

Button On/Off Click button to turn the helium compressor

on.
Pressure Indicator Shows the compressor pressure.

Green/Yellow Too low/too high = yellow. Normal = green.
Indicator field Shows the compressor pressure.

(He cooling valve) Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls status of the helium and
Green/Yellow water cooling valves. These valves are con-
the same status.
To change status on the valves, click one of
the valves. Green = Open.
19-7-9-3 18F- extraction section
Figure 19-59: 18F- extraction section
Table 19-35: 18F- extraction section – controls and indicators
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of the valve 1a.
1a
Green/Yellow
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of the valve 1b.
1b
Green/Yellow
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of the valve 2a.
2a
Green/Yellow
Indicator and button Open/Open/Close Shows state of valve 2b path.

2b
Green/Green/Yellow Green = path open
Indicator and button Open/Open/Close Shows state of valve 3 path.

3

4

Static indicator Water bottle for deionized water on Liquid

Target Filler.
Static indicator Water bottle for enriched 18O-water on Liquid

Target Filler.
Indicator/Button Syringe pump for filling of target. Click the

syringe to operate the pump.
Static indicator Vented sterile filter.


19-7-10 13N target

In the 13N target 13N-NOx is produced from 16O-H2O.
Figure 19-60: 13N target control window
The 13N target control window contains of the following:
• Target and vacuum section – indicator fields for the target type, the target position, the
• Water and helium cooling section – buttons for simple control of the helium cooling, the
helium and the water cooling valves, a status indicator for the helium compressor, and
an indication of the helium pressure. See Section 19-7-9-2 18F- water and helium cooling
section on page 649.
• 13N target extraction section – buttons for simple control of the valves, and buttons and
indications for the pumps.
• GCS interlock section – indicators for external subsystem states and interlocks.

• Buttons:
- Connect On/Off – Off = disconnect when target needs service. On = connects target
after service.
- Fill – fills the target according to the filling parameters.
- Empty – empties the target to the hot cell.
- Dry – He-gas flows through the target for a present time to dry the target.
- Stop dry – stops drying target before the preset time is reached.
19-7-10-1 13N target and vacuum section
Figure 19-61: 13N target and vacuum section
Table 19-36: 13N target and vacuum section – indicators
Target type and tar- Text Target 13N at target Shows selected target and position number.
get position N position N

Connect
Indicator field and 0–500 psi Shows target pressure.

meter

19-7-10-2 13N extraction section
Figure 19-62: 13N extraction section
Table 19-37: 13N extraction section – controls and indicators
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of the valve 1.
1
Green/Yellow
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of the valve 2.
2
Green/Yellow

3

Target Filler.
Indicator/Button Syringe pump for filling of target.


19-7-11 11CO target

2
In the 11CO2 target, radioactive 11C-CO2 is produced.
Figure 19-63: 11CO2 target control window
The 11CO2 target control window contains the following:
• Target and vacuum section – indicator field for the target type, the target position, the
• 11CO production section – indicator field for the oven temperatures. It also includes
2
buttons for simple control of the valves and the oven, and status indicators for the oven.

• Buttons:
after service.
- Select target – target is prepared for beam.
- Unselect target – cooling for target is turned off.
- Empty – empties target to the chemistry system.
- Close – exits the 11CO2 target window.
19-7-11-1 11CO target and vacuum section

2
The target and vacuum section controls the target system state and shows vacuum chamber
pressure.
Figure 19-64: 11CO2 target and vacuum section
Table 19-38: 11CO2 target and vacuum section – controls and indicators
Target type and posi- Text Target 11CO2 at tar- Shows selected target and position number.
tion get position N

Connect
Indicator field and Typ. 150 psi Shows target pressure.

meter
Vacuum Indicator field Typ. 7.0E-7 mbar Shows the chamber pressure.
(10-7)

19-7-11-2 11CO production section

2
This section shows the different options in the chemistry process system to produce radioactive
CO2.
Figure 19-65: 11CO2 production section
The oven status is also shown with different colors on the column and the heating elements,
as follows:
• COLD – all white.
• WARMING UP – orange elements and white column.
• WARM – all orange.
• COOLING DOWN – orange column and white elements.
• IDLE – all grey (this status only appears at control system start-up).
Table 19-39: 11CO2 production section – controls and indicators
Valves
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of valve 1.

1
Green/Yellow To change status on the valve, click the cor-
responding valve symbol.

2
Green/Yellow

3
Green/Yellow

4
Green/Yellow

5
Green/Yellow


6
Green/Yellow
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of valve 7. Valve
7
Green/Yellow for air-cooling of the oven.
Oven
Indicator Warm/ Shows oven status.

Orange/White Cold/
Warming up/
Cooling down/
Idle
Indicator field Shows oven temperature.
On Button Click button to turn on the oven.
Off Button Click button to turn off the oven.


19-7-12 15O target

In the 15O target, radioactive 15O is produced in the chemical form of 15O-H2O.
Figure 19-66: 15O target control window
The 15O target control window contains the following
• 15O production section – indicator field for the oven temperatures. It also includes buttons
for simple control of the valves and the oven, and status indicators for the oven.

• Buttons:
after service.
- Unselect – cooling for target is turned off.
- Empty – empties target to the chemistry system.
- Close – exits the 15O target window.
19-7-12-1 15O target and vacuum section

The target and vacuum section controls the target system state and shows vacuum chamber
pressure.
Figure 19-67: 15O target and vacuum section
Table 19-40: 15O target and vacuum section – controls and indicators
Target type and posi- Text Target 15O at target Shows selected target and position number.
tion position N

Connect
Indicator field and Typ. 150 psi Shows target pressure.

meter
Vacuum Indicator field 7.0E-9 mbar (10-9 ) Shows the chamber pressure.

19-7-12-2 15O production section

This section shows the different options in the chemistry process system to produce radioactive
O2, CO, CO2 and H2O.
Figure 19-68: 15O production section
In the 15O-production section the valve status is shown either green indicating that the
corresponding valve is open or yellow indicating that the valve is closed. The oven status is
also shown with different colors on the column and the heating elements, see
Section 19-7-11-2 11CO2 production section on page 658.
The oven status is also shown with different colors on the column and the heating elements,
as follows:
• COLD – all white.
• WARMING UP – orange elements and white column.
• WARM – all orange.
• COOLING DOWN – orange column and white elements.
• IDLE – all grey (this status only appears at CCS start-up).
Table 19-41: 15O production section – controls and indicators
Valves

1 Green/Yellow To change status on the valve, click the cor-
responding valve symbol.
Indicator and button Open/Close Shows and controls state of valves 2.

2
Green/Yellow When clicking one of the valves, both
changes status.


3
Green/Yellow
Oven
Indicator Warm/ Shows oven status.

Orange/White Cold/
Warming up/
Cooling down/
Idle
Indicator field Shows oven temperature.
On Button Click button to turn on the oven.
Off Button Click button to turn off the oven.
Other components (optional)
Static indicator 15O-H O absorption.

2

19-7-13 Dummy target

This target is used for testing of the beam. In the Configuration menu the target can be set
as a Dummy target for Proton.
Figure 19-69: Dummy target control window

The Dummy target control window contains the following:
• Buttons:
after service.
19-7-13-1 Dummy target and vacuum section
Figure 19-70: Dummy target and vacuum section
Table 19-42: Dummy target and vacuum section – controls and indicators
Target
Target type and tar- Text Target Proton at tar- Shows selected target and position number.
get position N get position N

Connect
Vacuum
Vacuum Indicator field 7.0 E-7 mbar Shows the vacuum chamber pressure.


19-7-14 Exit
To exit MSS, click Exit before switching off and disconnecting the service laptop. See
Section 19-4 Main window on page 596.

APPENDIX A RISK ASSESSMENT (RA)
Before starting any installation or service operations, read and understand all applicable RAs.
All RAs are available for GE personnel in GenSuite. Non-GE personnel can request RAs from
the local GE service representative.
Local site specific procedures can also apply.
1 Go to http://ge.gensuite.com and log in, or register if you are a first-time user.
2 Select GE Healthcare EHS and Uppsala SWE, HCS, GEHC.
3 Search and open Risk Assessment (RA).
4 Select the desired RA (Installation/Service: ...).
Available RAs:
• Installation/Service: Chemical hazards
• Installation/Service: Compressed gas hazards
• Installation/Service: Electrical hazards
• Installation/Service: Ergonomic hazards
• Installation/Service: Explosion hazards
• Installation/Service: Fall hazards
• Installation/Service: High pressure hazards
• Installation/Service: Lone working hazards
• Installation/Service: Magnetic field hazards
• Installation/Service: Pinch hazards
• Installation/Service: Puncture and cut hazards
• Installation/Service: Radiation hazards
• Installation/Service: Slip and trip hazards
• Installation/Service: Thermal hazards
A Risk Assessment (RA) 667

• Installation/Service: Work on customer sites
• Installation/Service: Confined space hazards
• Installation/Service: Rigging hazards
668 A Risk Assessment (RA)

APPENDIX B GENERAL RADIATION SAFETY ASPECTS
B-1 Radiation basics
B-1-1 Object of this chapter

The object of this chapter is to summarize the basics of radiation, particularly radiation
involved in Positron Emission Tomography (PET) tracer production.
Note!
B-1-2 What is radiation?

An atomic nucleus consists of protons and neutrons where the number of protons tells which
element it is. Carbon, for example, always has 6 protons in the nucleus. Within one and the
same element the number of neutrons varies, and this number determines the isotopes of
the element. All elements have isotopes.
A function of the neutrons is to keep the protons together. If the number of the neutrons
versus the number of protons is well balanced, the isotope is stable. 12C is an example of a
stable nucleus. If there is excess or deficiency of neutrons, the nucleus is unstable and will
eventually release a particle or two at the same time. This is called radioactive decay. 11C
(deficiency of neutrons) and 14C (excess of neutrons) are examples of unstable isotopes. These
isotopes are called radioactive isotopes.
A nucleus that is unstable has excess energy. This energy is released through radioactive
decay and the energy is emitted as radiation. Radiation hitting human tissue might cause
significant injuries, depending on the type of the radiation, amount of energy, etc.
The atomic nuclei are also called nuclides. Radioactive nuclides are called radio nuclides
which is the correct name of a radioactive element.
B-1-3 Radiation types

There are different types of radioactive decay, which in turn create radiation that is
characteristic of the decay. In PET tracer production, alpha-, beta-, gamma- and neutron
radiation are the most important ones.
B-1-3-1 Alpha radiation

Alpha decay occurs in heavy particles only. At the decay, a particle called alpha particle is
thrown out of the nucleus. The alpha particle consists of two protons and two neutrons and
has thereby positive charge. The alpha particle is identical with the nucleus of a helium atom.
B General radiation safety aspects 669

The alpha particle only reaches a few centimeters in air, and is completely stopped by the
human skin. Consequently, alpha particles are harmless as long as they are kept outside the
human body. If alpha particles get into the body, they deposit their entire energy in a small
tissue volume and may cause significant injuries. Therefore, alpha radiation is the most
dangerous if the radioactive substance gets into the body.
B-1-3-2 Beta radiation

In case of excess of neutrons, the nucleus can decay by emitting a beta minus (ß-) particle.
This particle has a negative charge and is identical with an electron. 14C and 90Sr are examples
of radio nuclides decaying through this path. ß--radiation reaches up to 2 cm in human tissue.
In case of deficiency of neutrons, a beta plus (ß+) particle is emitted. This particle is positively
charged and is called positron. 11C and 18F are examples of radio nuclides emitting ß+-radiation.
A ß+-particle reacting with a ß--particle yields gamma radiation with an energy of 511 keV.
This is the PET tracer and PET scanner key process. See Table B-4.
B-1-3-3 Gamma radiation

After an alpha- or a beta decay in a radio nuclide, there is usually an excess of energy left.
This energy is emitted by the nuclide as electromagnetic radiation. This radiation is called
gamma radiation.
The energy in gamma radiation is carried by electromagnetic waves as photons. The shorter
wavelength, the higher is the energy of the photons. Gamma radiation, which has the shortest
wavelength of all, therefore has the largest energy content and power of penetration.
60Coand 137Cs are examples of beta decaying radio nuclides, where the gamma radiation
usually is used.
B-1-3-4 Neutron radiation

Neutron radiation is particle radiation where the particles are neutrons. The properties of the
radiation are highly dependent of the energy of the neutrons.
B-1-4 Radioactivity
The intensity of the radiation from a radioactive source depends on the number of nuclei
decaying per time unit. The more decays the more radiation is emitted.
Radioactivity means number of decays per second of a certain amount of a radioactive

material. The SI-unit is Becquerel (Bq).
1 Bq = 1 decay per second
Another commonly used unit is Curie (Ci), or rather mCi.
1 mCi = 37 MBq
670 B General radiation safety aspects

B-1-5 Radioactive half-life

The activity of a radiation source decreases as the radio nuclides decay. The half-life is the
time during which half of the radio nuclides decay. The half-life is different for all substances.
The half-lifes of the most common PET radioisotopes (PET tracers) are found in Table B-4.
B-2 Measuring radiation
B-2-1 Measurement quantities
B-2-1-1 Dose
The unit of activity, Bq, does not say anything about the risks caused by a radiation source.
To describe the risks, a quantity is needed which tells about the amount of radiation energy
absorbed by tissues, and the extent of biological harm involved. This quantity is known as
radiation dose, or merely dose in everyday language. The basic unit of radiation dose is
sievert (Sv). The most commonly used unit is mSv.
B-2-1-2 Dose rate

The dose rate illustrates the intensity of radiation, that is, the radiation dose received in a
specific time, for example in an hour. Dose rate is usually given in mSv/h.
B-2-1-3 Absorbed dose

Absorbed dose expresses the amount of radiation, or energy, absorbed by a material. The
basic unit is Joule/kilogram, which is also called Gray (Gy).
B-2-1-4 Dose equivalent

Different types of radiation behave in tissue in different ways. For example, 1 Gy of alpha
radiation causes much more damage than 1 Gy of gamma radiation. The degree of biological
risks caused by different types of radiation is taken into account by multiplying the absorbed
dose by a quality factor, unique for the radiation type in question. The dose equivalent per
unit of time is given in mSv/h. The quality factor of gamma radiation is 1, which is the lowest
factor used. A heavy alpha particle has the quality factor 20, the highest factor used.
B-2-1-5 Effective dose equivalent

The radiation sensitivity for different organs in the body varies. Tissues with proliferating cells,
like the bone marrow, are generally more radiation sensitive than for example the liver. To
take this effect into account, the organs in the body have different weight factors. The effective
dose equivalent is equal to the dose equivalent multiplied by the weight factor, and the basic
unit is mSv.
B-2-2 Dose monitoring

All personnel working in areas with ionization radiation hazards must wear adequate dose
monitoring devices in accordance to national laws and regulations. Specific requirements
may call for additional dose monitoring devices in order to support the personnel in minimizing
the exposure to radiation.

The local organization is responsible for providing adequate training so that the personnel
fully understand the used monitoring instrumentation, and that the instrumentation is
calibrated on a regular basis.
B-2-2-1 Film dosimeter

Film dosimeter is a cheap and simple way to measure the radiation dose of a person based
on darkening of a piece of film when it is exposed to radiation. The casing of a film dosimeter
is lightproof but radiation naturally passes through it and exposes the film. By using different
filters in the casing, developing the film and measuring the degree of darkness once a month
it is possible to estimate the radiation dose the person has received. Every time the film is
checked a new film replaces it.
B-2-2-2 TLD
The Thermal Luminescence Dosimeter (TLD) resembles the film dosimeter and are rather
small and easy to carry. However, the TLD contains three tablets made of a radiation sensitive
material. The radiation causes a change in the energy state of the electrons in this material.
The charged energy can be released in the form of light pulses and measured in a reader
unit. The TLD is more sensitive and accurate than a film dosimeter and it is immediately usable
after reading.
B-2-2-3 Luxel OSL whole body dosimeter

The optically stimulated luminescence (OSL) dosimeter from Luxel™ measures radiation
exposure due to X-ray, beta, and gamma radiation through a thin layer of aluminum oxide
and different filters. The dosimeter is enclosed in a water-resistant blister pack. After use, the
dosimeter is sent off and stimulated with a blue-laser causing it to become luminescent. This
luminescence is proportional to the amount of the radiation exposed to the dosimeter during
use. This luminescence is measured and a report of the exposure results is generated.
B-2-2-4 Hand/finger dosimeter

Since the radiation dose limits for the hands and the fingers are quite different from the rest
of the body, there are also specific hand- and finger dosimeters. They are usually of TLD type
which makes them light and easy to tape securely to the fingers.
B-2-2-5 Alarm dosimeter

There are digital alarm dosimeters of about the size of a pocket calculator. They are quite
easy to carry, and the accumulated dose can be checked at any time. Some dosimeters also
measure the dose rate. One can also specify an alarm limit, whereby the dosimeter sounds
an alarm when the dose rate exceeds the limit, or gives a warning when a predefined dose
is reached.

B-2-2-6 Gas detector

Detectors with gas as detector material are widely used in hand-held instruments and in
stationary instruments. The gas detector is basically a capacitor – two electrodes with different
potentials. When ionization radiation hits the detector, it ionizes the gas yielding positive ions
and negative, free electrons. This creates a current through the detector which can be
measured either as pulses or in a DC-mode. Examples of gas detectors are the Geiger-Müller
counter, the ionization chamber and the proportional counter.
B-2-2-7 Scintillation detector

A scintillator is a material that emits light when absorbing ionization radiation. The light hits
a light sensitive material which in turn emits electrons. The electron flow is amplified in a
photo multiplicator and then measured in an electronic unit. These instruments are usually
hand-held or stationary.
B-2-2-8 Energy discrimination

Some digital dose monitors have an energy discrimination facility to enable separation of
low energy gamma radiation (affects skin dose) from high energy gamma radiation (affects
body dose).
B-2-3 Dose exposure (European/US/GE)

In general, the local organization is required to keep track on the accumulated dose of the
personnel and to take actions if necessary. The personnel have to be classified in accordance
to the national health regulations and undergo regular medical examinations in accordance
to the requirements.
The main intention with radiation safety work is to limit the dose exposure to personnel in
general. However, the national regulation specifies maximum annual dose limits. Allowable
maximum dose rates are not specified but it is recommendable for the local organization to
establish rules to guide the personnel in the daily work.
The following information is referring to European and US guide lines and may not be
applicable in all countries. Find the accurate specifications in the national regulations.
Note!
The quantity is effective dose equivalent, see Section B-2-1-4 Dose equivalent on page 671.

Table B-1: European dose exposure limits
Body dose exposure Maximum annual dose 50 mSv

Maximum dose over a 5 year peri- 100 mSv
od
Maximum life dose 500 mSv
Finger dose exposure Maximum annual dose 500 mSv
Skin dose exposure Maximum annual dose 500 mSv
Note!
Low energy gamma exposure to be
considered.
Eye dose exposure Maximum annual dose 150 mSv
Table B-2: US dose exposure limits
Whole body dose exposure Maximum annual dose 50 mSv [5 Rem]

Maximum life dose 50 x (N–18) mSV
(N is age in years) [5 x (N–18) Rem]
Finger/Skin dose exposure Maximum annual dose 500 mSv

[50 Rem]

[15 Rem]
Table B-3: GE Healthcare dose exposure limits (constraint levels from 2010)
Body dose exposure Maximum annual dose 10 mSv

Maximum life dose 500 mSv
Finger dose exposure Maximum annual dose 250 mSv
Skin dose exposure Maximum annual dose 100 mSv
Note!
Low energy gamma exposure to be
considered.

B-3 Reducing exposure to radiation

To reduce the risk of acute or long-term injuries, the radiation exposure should be kept as
low as possible. The local organization must see to that personnel working in areas with
ionization radiation knows have to organize the work in order to reduce their exposure.
B-3-1 Planning the work

In the daily work the service personnel has to make the final decision if the work can be
performed or not. If the personnel is not sure about the actual state, the work has to be
delayed until no uncertainty remains.
When the decision is made to commence the service action, the following check list will be
an example of good practice in the work planning:
• Estimate time of presence in the radioactive zone.
• Define the main position of your body, hands and head during the service intervention.
• Measure the dose rate in those positions with and without low energy filter.
• Calculate the dose exposure for the different areas and take final decision about
commencement of work.
Note!
Also see the job safety analysis section. It provides a possible radiation scenario for each main
PM task. Please consult that column to be able to distinguish between a normal and an abnormal
dose rate.
B-3-2 General guidelines

This section provides guidelines for working in an environment with ionization radiation in
order to reduce the exposure.
B-3-2-1 Preparation
• Always wear required PPE (personal protection equipment) such as safety shoes (note
that a safety shoe steel cap can not become radioactive), shoe covers, full body lab coat,
safety glasses (with side shields) or face shield, protective gloves, and always wear
required personal radiation measuring devices (see AppendixC MINItrace radiation safety
aspects).

Figure B-1: Minimum required personal protection
• Always get approval for entry from responsible radiation safety officer on site.
• Never enter an area where risks of radiation hazards exist until the risks have been
clarified.
• Always monitor the working area with hand-held or stationary instruments.
• After isotope production, wait for at least two hours before entering the cyclotron room.
Always let the system cool down as long time as possible before start of work on the
system.
• When working with open radiation sources (e.g. liquids) use hot cells with proper
ventilation.
• Plan the work action carefully, prepare with adequate tools and arrange possible
protective shielding.
B-3-2-2 During the work

• Keep distance to radiation sources – gamma radiation decreases by the square of the
distance. Use long tools.
• Never touch used target foils – always use pair of tweezers.
• Never bring cyclotron components out from a cyclotron room.
• Never machine or otherwise treat components and material coming from a cyclotron
room.
• Always keep the exposure time as short as possible.
• Remove any radioactive liquid from the protective clothing immediately.

B-3-2-3 When the work is completed

• Always check for contamination on hands, clothes, shoes, etc. after terminated work.
• Remove contaminated clothes and put them into plastic bags. If a dosimeter by any
chance indicates that an article of clothing is contaminated, mark and leave that article
of clothing on site (treat that article of clothing the same way as an old but active target,
that is, in an area dedicated for radioactive parts.) Check it at the next convenient
opportunity.
• If the skin is contaminated, clean the area immediately with soap and water.
B-3-2-4 Dose calculations after the work

After performed service actions:
• Use the digital personal dose-monitoring instrument and read the actual pick up of dose.
• Compare actual pick up of dose and compare with estimated dose.
• Record your exposure of the day in a way established by your local GE Service
organization and/or in accordance to national/local laws and regulations.
B-3-3 Protective shielding

As long as radioactive substances are carefully isolated from the environment by shielding,
they do not cause any harm or health risks at all.
B-3-3-1 Alpha radiation

Alpha radiation is harmless as long as the radiating substance is outside the body. The alpha
radiation is blocked totally with a sheet of paper. Therefore, it will not pass through clothing,
or not even through the outermost layer of dead skin cells. Even in the air, alpha radiation
cannot travel more than a few centimeters.
B-3-3-2 Beta radiation

Beta radiation is easily stopped by almost any material. A large part of the radiation stops
at clothing. It will penetrate the top layer of bare skin but not any deeper. Plastic plates are
often used for blocking beta radiation, for example in safety goggles.
B-3-3-3 Gamma radiation

Gamma radiation is more difficult to stop since it is an electromagnetic wave. It passes
through the body without problems, with decreased intensity though. Only quite thick layers
attenuate gamma radiation. The denser material the more attenuation.
Lead is an excellent material for stopping gamma radiation. The same holds for steel and
concrete, even though not as effective as lead. Lead is often used in small vial containers, in
Hot Cell walls and in bench-top shielding. Concrete is most commonly used in cyclotron vault
walls.

B-3-3-4 Half Value Layer (HVL)

The half value layer (HVL) is the thickness of a layer, which reduces the intensity of the gamma
radiation to the half. For example, for gamma radiation from 18F the HVL of lead is 4.5 mm.
The thickness of the lead in hot cell walls should be at least 5 cm, which reduces the intensity
with 99.95 percent. The corresponding HVLs for steel, concrete and water are 11 mm, 25 mm
and 50 mm respectively.
B-4 Common PET tracers

The table below shows the properties of the most commonly used tracers in PET.
Table B-4: Properties of common PET tracers
Tracer Half-life [min] Type of radiation Medical application
Carbon-11 20.5 β+Max (980 keV) Used in methionine
Nitrogen-13 10 β+Max (1.20 MeV) Used in NH3
Oxygen-15 2 β+Max (1.73 MeV)
Fluorine-18 110 β+Max (634 keV) Used in Fluoro-deoxy-

glucose (FDG)
Gallium-68 68 β+Max (1.90 keV) Neuroendocrine tu-

mors

B-4 Common PET tracers
APPENDIX C MINITRACE RADIATION SAFETY ASPECTS
C-1 Object of this section

The object of this chapter is to discuss the specific radiation safety issues associated with
maintaining the MINItrace cyclotron.
Note!
It is assumed that you are familiar with the content of the Appendix B General radiation safety
aspects.
Note!
C-2 MINItrace radiation basics
C-2-1 Radioactive/non-radioactive zones
C-2-1-1 Radioactive zone

The cyclotron system consists of the cyclotron with the ancillary necessary systems in order
to form a working particle accelerator. The main components are:
• the cyclotron magnet
• vacuum chamber containing the RF resonators
• ion source
• extraction system
The targets where the nuclear reactions take place during irradiation are connected to the
vacuum chamber.
The targets are the main source of radiation during irradiation (requires massive radiation
shielding) and after terminated irradiation when the targets are heavily radioactive by induced
radioactivity. Most of the components close to the accelerated orbiting ion beam will pick up
radiation.
All radioactive subsystems are located in the cyclotron room, which is provided with all
necessary safety systems to eliminate risks.
C-2-1-2 Non-radioactive zone

All electronic devices, control systems and power supplies for the cyclotron is located in a
non-radioactive area. Work in this area will not expose the staff to radiation.
C MINItrace radiation safety aspects 679

C-2-2 Radiation during cyclotron beam operation

During cyclotron beam operation there is gamma radiation and neutron radiation.
C-2-2-1 Prompt gamma radiation

Prompt target gamma radiation is emanating from the target during irradiation.
C-2-2-2 Attenuation of prompt gamma radiation

The gamma attenuation calls for high dense materials. In this system this is provided by
10 cm of lead embracing the target area and the high-density material in the cyclotron
integrated radiation shield.
C-2-2-3 Capture gamma radiation

Capture gamma radiation is generated when the neutrons are captured in nuclei. The gamma
energy demands on the type of nuclei.
Examples (capturing matter/gamma energy):
• Boron/ approx. 0.3 MeV
• Hydrogen/ 2 MeV
• Iron/ approx. 7 MeV
C-2-2-4 Attenuation of capture gamma radiation

The capture gamma radiation is attenuated in the vault walls (or the optional radiation shield).
C-2-2-5 Neutron radiation

P-n reaction in target will generate heavy neutron flux around the target during irradiation.
Note!
The neutron production will only exist during cyclotron beam operation.
The plastic material in front of the targets moderates the energy of the neutrons, but it does
not stop them. The neutrons are finally captured in the vault walls (or the optional radiation
shield).
680 C MINItrace radiation safety aspects

C-2-3 Radiation after cyclotron beam operation

After cyclotron beam operation, the product is to be transferred to the final processing area
or the final destination.
C-2-3-1 The target

The active content of the target is described in Table C-1.
Table C-1: Active contents in targets
Target material Half-life Comments
Liquids 18F 110 min The 18F isotope has a relatively long half-life and proba-
bility for high radioactivity (1–4 Ci total target content)
calls for special attention. Droplets of 18F fluoride can be
a very strong point radioactive source and is also at-
tached very hard to unprotected skin. Always carry pro-
tecting gloves and check for possible contamination
thoroughly.
13N 10.5 min The maximum radioactivity of 13N isotope in the target
will be in the range of 100–150 mCi.
Gases 11C 20.5 min The target can contain up to 1 Ci of radioactivity for both
(11C or 15O, de- isotopes.
pending on 15O 2 min Possible leaks will raise the activity level in the surround-
option) ing air and does not present radiation hazards in form
of point sources.
Note that the 15O gas from the target may be trans-
formed into 15O water vapor (by means of an oven).
Maximum level of radioactivity is 50 mCi.
The active content of the target will disappear in about 1 minute after delivery. Some residual
isotopes will always be residing in the target after the delivery. The amount of residual activity
will vary, depending on several parameters such as target condition, target filter condition,
blocked transfer lines etc.
Under extreme circumstances (clogged transfer line) all produced isotopes may still be left
in the target. Normal conditions for an 18F target will be 3–5% residual activity. Most of this
activity will leave the target on a second rinse. Therefore, the rinsing water coming from a
target may contain radioactivity and has to be handled as a normal target delivery (target
content to be transferred to a hot cell or another shielded area).

The target is contained inside the integrated radiation shielding and will not present any
hazards to the environment as long as the shield is sealed.
C-2-3-2 Target Support Cabinet (TSC)

The Target Support Cabinet (TSC) is located outside the Radiation Shield and normally free of
radioactivity. However, the TSC is a potential radioactive hazard (as indicated on Warning
Labels) under the following circumstances:
• In case of a single target foil rupture, radioactivity (and possibly ruptured target foils
fragments) might mix with the helium cooling gas. The helium gas (as well as target foil
fragments) will spread throughout the helium cooling system piping and helium cooling
compressor heads, situated at the bottom of the TSC.
The amount of radioactivity depends on several parameters, such as type of isotope,

production time and beam current.
The worst condition scenario is related to a carbon-11 production, where 1000 mCi of
activity could reside inside the target in the end of a production. A single Target Foil
rupture during these conditions could push activity in the range of 200 mCi back into
the helium cooling compressors, resulting in an estimated dose rate of about 1 mSv/h
at a distance of 1 m from the helium cooling compressors.
• In case of leaks or ruptures of the target foils, the most likely is a double target foil
rupture. During such a failure, the target content (and possibly ruptured target foils
fragments) will rush into the Vacuum Chamber and reside there until the operator decides
to take further actions. Consequently, there is a low probability that radioactivity will be
pushed into the helium cooling compressors.
• In case of an LTF (Liquid Target Filler) valve malfunction in the Target Support Cabinet,
radioactivity may spread in the LTF mechanisms (valves, pipes, syringes).
Labels indicate that the TSC and the helium cooling compressor is a potential radiation hazard.
Always wear Personal Alarm Dosimeter to get prompt notice of radiation!
C-2-3-3 Target transfer lines

The produced isotopes will be transported in transfer lines. The lines have to be shielded
accordingly to protect the environment against radioactive exposure.
Under normal conditions the maximum dose rates will only be present during delivery of the
products. Nevertheless, the safety strategy should always consider problems in the transfer
of the radioactive product such as a blockage of the line.
The worst case scenario is that the total activity will be distributed evenly in the whole system
volume, making the transport line a corresponding “radioactive line source” with a distributed
activity proportional to the transfer line volume per length unit.

C-2-3-4 Leakage
Leakage in the transfer lines will be avoided by using tubing and piping with adequate quality
and minimization or prohibition of connection and joints.
To ensure full safety for possible leaks, the transfer lines can be put in a conduit ending in a
safe environment. The conduit will pick up the radioactivity and guide it to a safe place (hot
cell or other shielded area).
Possible leaks in a gas target will raise the activity level in the surrounding air and does not
present radiation hazards in form of point sources.
C-2-3-5 The hot cell

Radiation handling and synthesis processes will normally take place in a lead shielded hot
cell.
Besides the radioactive substance from the target, note the following:
• Activity as aerosol (very small “droplets” of 18F fluoride, 15H2O or 13NH3) might appear
in the helium gas evacuating from product vial in the hot cell.
• The helium gas, used to push the radioactive substance from the target to the hot cell,
is not radioactive.
C-2-4 Remaining induced activity
C-2-4-1 Induced activity in the cyclotron

A mixture of radioactive isotopes will be formed in the cyclotron (mainly neutron activation).
All isotopes have different cross-sections and half-lives. After a weekend of cool down most
of the low energy gamma radiation has disappeared.
Wait for at least two hours before entering the cyclotron room after isotope production.
The low energy gamma radiation may reach very high levels. Therefore, it is necessary to
closely monitor radiation levels when entering the work area.
C-2-4-2 Induced activity in the air

The neutrons that penetrate the plastic in front of the targets will produce some radioactivity
in the air. This problem is solved by sufficient ventilation of the target area. Besides, the half-life
of this radioactivity is short.
C-2-5 Waste
C-2-5-1 Waste gas system

The outlet of the target helium cooling system is connected to the waste gas system
The MINItrace waste gas system consists of a waste container (or another secluded room of
some kind). Some sites use a delay pipe. The output of the waste gas system can be directly
connected to a ventilation system if required.

C-2-5-2 Recovery of enriched 18O-water

Tritium will be formed in the enriched water during irradiation. The long half-life of the tritium
(12.26 years) will lead to accumulation of tritium activity in the water proportional to beam
exposure (time and intensity). The radioactivity of the water is in the range of 1–10 μCi
(37–370 kBq).
Wear gloves to avoid getting recovered enriched 18O-water on unprotected skin.
C-2-5-3 Ultra sonic treatment

The treatment of possible radioactive matters (such as target components) by ultra sonic
technique may dissolve small amounts of radioactive matters in the treatment agent.
Always search for possible contamination and treat spill accordingly. If a dosimeter by any
chance indicates that an article of clothing is contaminated, mark and leave that article of
clothing on site (treat that article of clothing the same way as an old but active target, that
is, in an area dedicated for radioactive parts.) Check it at the next convenient opportunity.
C-3 Measuring MINItrace associated radiation

This section provides some practical examples of measuring devices suitable when working
with GE cyclotron equipment.
C-3-1 Badge (film/TLD/Luxel OSL) whole body dosimeter

Badges of this kind are usually provided by the national/local institute of radiation protection,
since the staff has to wear adequate dose monitoring devices in accordance to national/local
laws and regulations.
Figure C-1: TLD badge
Figure C-2: Luxel OSL badge

C-3-2 Hand/finger dosimeter

Dosimeters of this kind are usually provided by the national/local institute of radiation
protection, since the staff has to wear adequate dose monitoring devices in accordance to
national/local laws and regulations. They are usually of TLD type which makes them light and
easy to tape securely to the fingers. They are usually provided in the form of a light plastic
ring that easily slips on a finger.
Figure C-3: TLD ring
C-3-3 Personal radiation monitor

A lot of manufacturers offer these instruments, see table below.
Table C-2: Examples of personal alarm dosimeters
Manufacturer Model
RADOS RAD-50S Personal Radiation Monitor (Sievert version)
RADOS RAD-50S Personal Radiation Monitor (REM version — used in USA)
NUMERIS MGP DMC 2000XB
Figure C-4: RAD-50S Personal radiation monitor

C-3-4 Digital dose monitor (dose rate, accumulated dose, energy discrimination)
A lot of manufacturers offer these instruments, see table below. For information on standard
personal radiation monitors, see also Table C-2.
Table C-3: Examples of digital dose monitors
Manufacturer Model
RADOS RDS–120 Universal Survey Meter
FAG FH 40F1
EG&G BERTHOLD Portable Contamination Monitor LB122
Note that some digital dose monitors have an energy discrimination facility to enable
separation of low energy gamma radiation (affects skin dose) from high energy gamma
radiation (affects body dose).
Figure C-5: RDS–120 Universal survey meter
The illustrations below shows other examples of radiation measuring devices.
Figure C-6: Portable contamination monitor
Figure C-7: Neutron survey meter
Note!
For all common purposes, a standard personal radiation monitor as described in Section C-3-3
Personal radiation monitor on page 685 will be sufficient.

C-4 Reducing exposure to radiation when working with MINItrace

The commercial use of cyclotrons will exert pressure on the service staff to repair the
equipment as soon as possible. This will always be a dilemma for the staff, and the only cure
to this is to be proactive by a good PM program to limit possible emergency service actions
as much as possible. All work in the radioactive zone has to be in accordance to
recommendation given in this document.
C-4-1 User responsibility

The user of the system must have legal approval for the actual activities in the facility and
that the work is done in accordance to the given authorization. That also implies that the user
of the equipment has the ultimate responsibility for the staff in the facility. That implies a
radiation safety organization requiring an assigned responsible person for handling all issues
regarding radiation safety in the facility.
External maintenance staff must not enter any classified area in the users premises
without approval from the radiation safety officer on site.
C-4-2 Protective shielding
C-4-2-1 Radiation shield

The gamma attenuation calls for high dense materials. In this system this is provided by
10 cm of lead embracing the target area and the high-density material in the cyclotron
integrated radiation shield.
C-4-2-2 Shielding of target area

See Section C-4-2-1 Radiation shield on page 687 above.
C-4-2-3 Target shield tool

The target shield tool is also known as Bench Radiation Shield (BRS). The main objective for
the target shield tool for protection during target service but will also be of help during other
service actions of radioactive parts. The shield should be made of at least 50 mm lead walls
(downwards as well) and preferably be equipped with a lead glass for safe inspection of the
components inside the shield.

Figure C-8: Target shield tool
MINItrace cyclotron maintenance shield ass'y to apply in front of targets

Apply this lead shield (available as a spare part) in front of the targets (five cm of lead reduces
the radiation to 1/5).
Figure C-9: Maintenance shield assy to apply in front of targets

Lead container with removable lid

It is the user responsibility to provide storage and possible deposit of radioactive parts and
matters.
In order to reduce the radiation from the target foils, a small lead container, with wall thickness
40–50 mm, with removable lid is recommended.
Normally other vendors provide such lead containers.
Note!
It is strongly recommended to store the target foils separately. Contamination of the target
foils is in the order of magnitudes higher than any other possible waste from the cyclotron
system.
Marking of radioactive waste

Marking of radioactive waste is recommendable in order to improve handling of radioactive
matters.
Hot cell
The hot cell should provide adequate radiation attenuation in order to provide safe working
conditions for staff on the outside of the hot cell. The specification of the hot cell depends on
what type and amount of isotope is going to be processed.
A hot cell usually is furnished with a transparent window (high dense glass) for inspection
purposes. Sometimes there are manipulators for interactive work inside the hot cell.
Normally other vendors provide the hot cells.
In the process to specify a hot cell at least the following areas of interest should be considered:
• Walls equal to 60 mm of lead (or more)
• Controlled ventilation
• Size of lead glass
• Entry safety (locked with radiation inside)
• Isotope delivery interlocking (verification system that hot cell is closed before delivery of
isotopes)
• Radioactive emission
• Handling of waste products
• Tight floor to handle spill during the processing
• Suitable conduits into the cell (size, position, etc.)

APPENDIX D THE MINITRACE SERVICE SYSTEM (MSS) SOFTWARE
D-1 Introduction
This chapter describes the MINItrace Service System (MSS) software version for Microsoft™
Windows™ XP which was discontinued 2014.
Figure D-1: Main menu
Note!
The next version of the service system software has a different structure and user interface,
and is described in Chapter 19 MINItrace Service System version 2.x (MSS) software.
The MSS consists of the MSS software package running on a laptop, called service laptop.
The laptop can be connected to the General Control System (GCS).
The MSS makes it possible for the service engineer to control the accelerator, the different
targets and the radiochemistry subsystems. It is intended for trouble-shooting, and for running
the accelerator in a flexible way to set and monitor different parameters. The software controls
the GCS via commands transferred over serial cables.
The user interface is a graphical package which shows a schematic picture of the accelerator,
the targets and the radiochemistry subsystems, and all related parameters.
The MSS software and communication cables are included in the cyclotron delivery. The
laptop should be provided by the customer for cyclotron systems delivered with the MSS
software version that was discontinued 2014.
The following sections describe the service laptop and its connections to the cyclotron, the
MSS software and its structure.
D The MINItrace Service System (MSS) software 691

D-1 Introduction
D-2 Connect and disconnect the service laptop to the cyclotron system
The service laptop used for the MSS should have Microsoft™ Windows™ 2000 or Windows™
XP installed. It should also have a 3.5" drive, external or internal, to allow for software
installation.
A service laptop that is equipped with USB ports for communication also requires the
USB-to-RS232 adapter supplied for connection to the control system.
For installation of the MSS software on the laptop, see Section D-4 Software installation on
page 750.
For details regarding the operation of the laptop, refer to the accompanying operator manual.
D-2-1 Connect the MSS
D-2-1-1 Equipment
The equipment required:
• 9-pin straight RS232 D-Sub cable
• USB-to-RS232 adapter
D-2-1-2 Hardware connection

Connect the USB-to-RS232 adapter and RS232 cable from a USB port on the service laptop
to the GCU as follows:
• GCU Gen I: Port P3 on the rear panel, or the MSS port on the CSC
• GCU Gen II: The MSS port on the front panel or on the CSC
Note!
If the service laptop is equipped with a serial port, the adapter is not required.
Figure D-2: GCU Gen I and Gen II

Gen I Gen II
692 D The MINItrace Service System (MSS) software

D-2-1-3 Software connection

1 Check that the service laptop is connected as described in Section D-2-1-2 Hardware
connection on page 692.
2 Switch on the service laptop.
3 Select LOCAL mode. Check system condition on the Master System and select Local in
the Maintenance menu. If the Master System is down or not connected, LOCAL mode is
automatically active.
Note!
The system returns to the Master System within 6 minutes if connection with the MSS is
not established. See also below.
4 Click the MSS icon on the laptop desktop to start the MSS software.
The MSS main menu appears.
Unsuccessful connection
The following happens after selecting Local at the Master System, if connection with MSS is
not established, or if connection is interrupted:
Elapsed time Action
10 seconds The beam is turned off, if turned on from MSS.
1 minute Oven heating turned off, air cooling of oven OC1A starts, which is audible.
6 minutes Master regains control.
Communication setup
The GCS is controlled by commands transferred via serial communication.
When starting the MSS software, the service laptop is automatically configured as in Table D-1
below.
Table D-1: Service laptop configuration
Serial port COM1
Baud rate 19200
Parity No
Databits 8
Stop bit 1

D-2-2 Disconnect the MSS

To avoid any system disturbances the MSS software must be shut down before the service
laptop is turned off.
1 Go to the main menu and click MAIN MENU in the active menu.
2 Exit to DOS. In the main menu, click Exit.
3 Turn off the service laptop.
4 The Master System automatically regains control within a few seconds, if connected.
D-3 Software functions

This section describes the MSS software. Current releases of the MSS software and the software
loaded into the GCS are indicated in the MSS Main menu, see Figure D-3.
To select a function, click the desired button. Entry fields are provided for input of numerical
values. To enter a value, set the cursor to the entry field, enter the number and press RETURN.
Indicator fields provide readout values for different parameters.
D-3-1 Main menu

The Main menu shown at program start includes buttons to select these submenus:
• Magnet System menu
• RF System menu (click on the “RF” text)
• Ion Source and Gas Handling System menu (click the center of the cyclotron)
• Diagnostic and Extraction System menu (click the extraction rail)
• Vacuum and Cooling System menu
• Motor Calibration menu
• Beam Control menu
• Target 1–6 menus
• Configuration Parameters menus
• Change Passwords menu
• Exit
Each menu choice will replace the Main menu with the related submenu. Only one menu can
be active at a time.

Table D-2: Main menu options
Main menu option Function
Magnet Controls the magnet system, including the Magnet Power Supply.
RF Controls the RF system, including control of the Dee voltage and

the tuning of frequency.
Ion source Controls the ion source, including the Ion Source Power Supply and
ion source gas.
Extraction, Diagnos- Controls the extraction and diagnostic system, including the flip-
tics in probe and the different foil options.
Vacuum & Cooling Status for vacuum and cooling system.
Beam Control Controls and indicates status of different subsystems so it is possi-

ble to produce an ion beam.
Target Number 1–6 Controls the corresponding target and chemistry system.
Motor Calibration Calibrates foil holder positions.
Config Parameters Configuration and storage of system parameters.
Change Passwords Enables authorized user to change passwords.
Exit Quits the program.

Figure D-3: Main menu
D-3-1-1 Message window

Messages and questions are shown in this window. These messages can be acknowledged
with the YES, NO or ACK buttons when shown, otherwise they disappear within about
10 seconds. The Message window is included in all submenus.
Figure D-4: Message window

D-3-2 Magnet system menu

during acceleration. The magnet system also focuses the beam.
The Magnet Power Supply (PSMC) can be on when leaving the page.
Figure D-5: Magnet system menu
The Magnet System menu consists of these windows:
• Control and indicator window – indicator and entry fields for current and voltage. Also
includes buttons for simple control of magnet power, and a status indicator.
• Status window – “LEDs” for indication of subsystem states and interlocks.
• Message window – shows messages, see Section D-3-1-1 Message window on page 696.
• Safety window – “LEDs” for indication of external interlocks, see Section D-3-2-3 Safety
window on page 699.
In addition, two buttons are shown in the Magnet System menu:
1 SYSTEM OFF, turns off all subsystems.
2 MAIN MENU, exit from the Magnet System menu and return to the Main menu.

D-3-2-1 Magnet control and indicator window
Figure D-6: Magnet controls and indicators
Table D-3: Magnet controls and indicators
Voltage Indicator field ≈ 80 V Shows the magnet voltage.
Set Current Entry field Move the cursor to this field, enter a new
current value and press RETURN. Ramps the
current first to 150 A, waits 60 s and then
ramps current to entered value (max. cur-
rent and wait time configurable).
Buttons/blue Change the magnet current in 0.01 A incre-

ments (upper mouse button) or 0.1 A incre-
ments (lower mouse button).
Button/blue Starts the PSMC.
Button/blue Ramps PSMC down to 1 A and shuts down.
Magnet State Indicator/white ON/OFF Shows PSMC state. Signal from contactor
inside PSMC.
D-3-2-2 Magnet status window

This window shows the magnet system status. Status is shown by indicators which are either
green or yellow. If an error or interlock occurs, the corresponding indicator changes from
green to yellow.
The magnet status window also includes a RESET button which resets magnet error, provided
the error has been corrected.

Figure D-7: Magnet status window
Table D-4: Magnet status indicators
main power Green/yellow Yellow if main power is not on.
magnet door Green/yellow Yellow if magnet door is open.
magnet water flow Green/yellow Yellow if the water flow (water manifold) to the magnet is missing.
magnet overtemper- Green/yellow Yellow if the Magnet is overheated (t>75°C).

ature
internal interlock Green/yellow Yellow if some of the following internal interlock fails:
Freewheel diode overtemp, Low water Flow, Door open, Diode
heatsink overtemp, Chassis overtemp, IGBT heatsink overtemp, H.F.
diode overtemp, Switch reg. DCCT failure, IGBT driver failure, Switch
regulator supply failure, IGBT driver failure and Overcurrent.
internal warning Green/yellow Yellow if some of the following internal warning fails:
AC undervoltage, Excessive current ripple and Ground leak current.
D-3-2-3 Safety window

Five external interlocks for the GCS (called Safety 1–5) are shown in the Magnet System menu,
green/OK or Yellow/NOT OK. The safety interlock may be used for safety delivering of tracers,
and have to be config. The external interlocks have to be configured for each tracer type, if
config parameter is 0 the interlocks may be defined by the customer. The interlocks are
connected to the MSS via the Customer Interface Connector (CIC).
Figure D-8: Magnet safety window

D-3-3 RF system menu

The RF system pulls out the ions from the ion source and accelerates the particles by the so
called “Dees”.
The RF system should be turned off before leaving the menu.
To make sure that the ion source is off, a maintenance relay will be set when entering this
menu, and resets when leaving this menu.
Figure D-9: RF system menu
The RF System menu comprises the following windows:
• Status window – “LEDs” for indication of subsystems and interlocks. Also includes System
Interlock indicators.
window on page 699.
• Dee voltage control and indicator window – indicator and entry fields for the Dee voltages,
and two status indicators.
• Frequency and RF power indicator window – indicator fields and meters for the frequency
and phase and indicator fields for the RF power.
• Configuration value window – indicator fields showing default values for Dee voltage,
phase and frequency start position.

In addition, seven buttons are shown in the RF System menu:
1 NORMAL, starts the RF system with Dee voltage as entered in the Dee voltage window.
2 OFF, shuts down the RF system.
3 STANDBY, sets the RF system in STANDBY mode.
4 FIX, sets the RF system in TEST mode with continuous output proportional to the Dee
voltage reference (Set Dee voltage).
Note!
TEST mode – the frequency must be adjusted manually.
5 PULSE, sets the RF system in TEST mode with pulsed output, with amplitude proportional
to the Dee voltage reference (Set Dee voltage).
Note!
TEST mode – the frequency must be adjusted manually.
7 MAIN MENU, exit from the RF system menu and return to the Main menu.
Only one of the modes OFF/STANDBY/NORMAL/FIX/PULSE can be active at a time. When

changing modes, the STANDBY mode must be selected in between.
D-3-3-1 RF system status window

This window shows the RF system status. The RF status is shown by indicators which are
either green or yellow. If an error or interlock occurs the corresponding indicator changes
from green to yellow.
This window also includes system interlock indicators. The system interlock indicators are
green under normal condition, and change to yellow if an interlock condition occurs. These
interlocks are only relevant for this menu. If any of the system interlock requirements is not
fulfilled, the corresponding system interlock will show the causing error and the RF system
cannot be turned on.
The RF Status window includes a RESET button which resets RF error.

Figure D-10: RF system status window
Table D-5: RF system status indicators
RF CAVITY
water flow Green/yellow Yellow if RF cavity water flow is not OK. (If any of the two separate
water circuits is not OK.)
RFPG STATUS
standby ready Green/yellow Yellow when RFPG off. Yellow if error occurs or interlock is active
during start-up or operation; RFPG goes to OFF.
standby error Green/yellow Yellow if time-out (120 sec) upon STANDBY request.
grid power supply Green/yellow Yellow if a grid power supply error occurs. RFPG goes to OFF.
screen power supply Green/yellow Yellow if a screen power supply error occurs. RFPG goes to OFF.
anode power supply Green/yellow Yellow if overcurrent or overvoltage error in anode PS. RFPG goes
to OFF.
heater power supply Green/yellow Yellow if a heater power supply error occurs.
water flow Green/yellow Yellow if the internal RFPG water flow is missing or the water flow is
to low.

anode current limit Green/yellow Yellow if momentary limitation of RFPG output power because anode
current exceeds the permissible level. Can occur when tuning at
start-up.
TAU air flow Green/yellow Yellow if fan in the TAU are not OK. RFPG goes to OFF.
TAU front cover Green/yellow Yellow if the front cover of the TAU is not closed. RFPG goes to OFF.
TPSU safety switches Green/yellow Yellow if TPSU cover panel loose, grounding stick not in holder, HV
transformer temperature > 140°C. RFPG goes to OFF.
SCU processor Green/yellow Yellow if a SCU processor fault occurs. RFPG goes to OFF.
SCU power supply Green/yellow Yellow if the SCU power supply is not OK. RFPG goes to OFF.
refl. voltage limit Green/yellow Yellow if output power limiting caused by RF Cavity tuning error (may
occur occasionally).
SYSTEM INTERLOCK
Green/yellow Yellow if vacuum not OK. (Not below Penning LOW LEVEL set point,
4×10-5 mbar)
Green/yellow Yellow if magnet current is OFF or below 50 A.
Green/yellow Yellow if the ion source is ON.
Green/yellow Yellow if the ion source gas is ON.
D-3-3-2 RF message window

Messages and questions are shown in this window, see Figure D-9. These messages must be
acknowledged with the ACK, YES or NO buttons when shown, otherwise they disappear within
10 seconds (approximately).

D-3-3-3 Dee voltage control and indicator window

The Dee Voltage window controls the Dee voltage and indicates system state.
Figure D-11: Dee voltage controls and indicators
Table D-6: Dee voltage controls and indicators
RF State Indicator/white STANDBY/ Shows RF system mode.

PULSE/
NORMAL/
FIX/
OFF
Dee Voltage Indicator field Typ. 35 kV Shows Dee voltage.

(Normal Mode)
Set Dee Voltage Entry field Typ. 35 kV Place cursor in field, enter Dee voltage (kV)
(Normal Mode) and press RETURN.
Buttons/blue Change the Dee Voltage in 0.1 kV increments

(upper mouse button) or 1 kV increments
(lower mouse button).

RF Function Mode Indicator/white start mode In normal mode, the RF system looks for
(scans) resonance.
tuning mode In normal mode, RF system under tuning

procedure.
Dee volt. ok In normal mode, RF operation OK.
Dee volt not ok In normal mode, instantaneous deviation

from the reference Dee voltage.
sparks In all modes, RF system discharge.
standby error 120 seconds time-out after STANDBY re-

quest.
standby ready RFPG is ready for RF operation.
warm up After standby mode has been selected and

during 60 s. the RFPG is warmed up after
entering standby mode.
err. in norm. mode In normal mode, if reference Dee voltage is

not reached within 60 sec.
off RFPG is off.
pulse Pulsed mode active, pulsed RF signal.
fix Fix mode active, continuous RF signal.
D-3-3-4 Frequency control and RF power window
Figure D-12: Frequency control and RF power windows
To be able to control the frequency manually the RFPG must be in OFF, STANDBY, FIX or PULSE
mode, see previous section.
In the frequency control and RF Power Indicator window, indicators are shown with both an
indicator meter and a value or just shown with a value.

Table D-7: Frequency controls and indicators
Note: 0% defined frequency = 100.5 MHz; 100% defined frequency = 101.5 MHz
Frequency Indicator field and Typ. 35–65% Shows the frequency position.
meter
Set Frequency Entry field Move the cursor to this field, enter a value
and press RETURN. The frequency changes
to the new value
Buttons/blue Change the frequency in 0.1% increments

(upper mouse button) or 1% increments
(lower mouse button).
Button to save fre- Save the “set value” for frequency start posi-
quency tion to config area.
Phase Indicator field and Shows the RF resonator status. Showed value
meter should be close to “set phase offset” when
the resonator is properly tuned. In pulse
mode this indicator is put out of operation.
Set Phase offset Entry field Move the cursor to this field, enter a value
and press RETURN. The phase changes to
the new value
Forw. power Indicator field Typ. 8–8.5 kW Shows RF power output.

(Dee voltage ≈ 35 kV)
Refl. power Indicator field Typ. 0–0.4 kW Shows RF power that has been reflected
from the resonator. This indicated value can
reach up to 1 kW if the resonator is not
properly tuned.
D-3-3-5 Configuration value window

In the Configuration value window the default value for the Dee voltage, Start Frequency and
Phase. Dee voltage and phase parameters are default values which cannot be changed from
this window.
Figure D-13: Configuration Value window

D-3-4 Ion source and gas handling system menu

The ion source system generates ions produced by the ion source. The gas handling system
supplies the ion source with gas. In this system hydrogen gas is used.
The Ion Source Power Supply (PSARC) and the gas handing system should be turned off (closed)
when leaving the menu.
To be sure that RF system is off, a maintenance relay will be set, when entering this menu
and reset when leaving this menu.
Figure D-14: Ion source and gas handling system menu
The Ion Source and Gas Handling System menu consists of these windows:
• Control and indicator window – indicator and entry fields for current, voltage and gas
flow. Also includes buttons for simple control of the Ion Source Power Supply and the
gas handling system. Includes status indicators for both systems.
• Status window – “LEDs” for indication of subsystem states and interlocks. Also includes
system interlocks indicators.
window on page 699.

In addition, two buttons are shown in the Ion Source and Gas Handling System menu:
2 MAIN MENU, exit from the Ion Source menu and return to the Main menu. Checks also
if the gas flow and the PSARC are turned off, otherwise a message will be shown.
D-3-4-1 Ion source and gas handling control and indicator window
Figure D-15: Ion source and gas handling control and indicator window
Table D-8: Ion source and gas handling controls and indicators
Button/blue Start the ion source with arc current 0.

(PSARC)
Button/blue Shuts off the ion source. (PSARC)
PSARC Status Indicator/white ON/OFF Shows PSARC state. Feedback from contac-
tor in CAB 3.
Voltage Indicator field 0–1300 V Shows the PSARC voltage.
Current Indicator field 0–2000 mA Shows the PSARC current.
Set Current Entry field Place cursor in field, enter new current value
and press return. The PSARC then changes
the arc current.
Buttons/blue Fine adjust arc current in 1 mA (arrow up) or

10 mA (arrow down) steps.
Cathode operation Indicator field Shows how long time [Ah] the ion source
time cathodes have been operating.

Button/blue Turns on the ion source gas.
Button/blue Turns off the ion source gas.
Gas Status Indicator/white GAS ON/GAS OFF Shows gas state.
Button/blue Sets the cathode operation time to zero.
D-3-4-2 Ion source and gas handling system status window

This window shows the ion source status. The ion source status is shown by indicators which
are either green or yellow. If an error or interlock occur the corresponding indicator changes
This window also includes system interlock indicators. The system interlock indicators are
green under normal condition, and change to yellow if an interlock condition occurs. If any
of the System Interlock requirements is not fulfilled, the corresponding System Interlock will
show the causing error and the ion source cannot be turned on. These Interlocks are only
relevant for this menu.
The Ion Source and Gas Handling Status window includes a RESET button which resets ion
source and gas handling errors, provided the errors are rectified.
Figure D-16: Ion source and gas handling system status window

Table D-9: Ion source and gas handling system status indicators
SYSTEM INTERLOCK
Green/yellow Yellow if magnet system is OFF or below 50 A.
Green/yellow Yellow if vacuum is not OK. Chamber pressure is not OK.
Green/yellow Yellow if RF system is not in OFF state.
STATUS
water flow Green/yellow Yellow if ion source water flow is not OK.
high voltage Green/yellow Yellow if no high voltage.
no faults Green/yellow Yellow if a PSARC error occurs.
D-3-5 Diagnostic and extraction system menu

The extraction system removes the electrons from the negative ions at the extraction radius
in the accelerator, by using stripping foils. The accelerator is equipped with one foil holder
with two foils and one foil holder with one foil. At foil replacement the complete holder is
replaced and the replacement must be stored in the foil diary, kept by the GCS.
The diagnostic system measures the particle beam current at different sections of the
accelerator. At this security level no beam may be produced, so when testing this system an
external current source, such as a multi-meter in resistance measurement mode, has to be
used.

Figure D-17: Diagnostic and extraction system menu
The Diagnostic and Extraction menu consists of these windows:
• Diagnostic System window – indicator fields and meters for probe current, foil 1 current,
foil 2 current, and target 1 to 6 current. Includes indicator fields for the four beam
collimators. Also includes buttons for simple control of the flip-in probe, and a status
indicator.
• Extraction System window – indicator field, entry field and indicator meter for foil holder
position. Also includes indicator and entry fields for foil number and foil wear, and buttons
for simple control of the foils.
• Status window – a “LED” for indication of subsystem states and interlocks.
window on page 699.
In addition, two buttons are shown in the Diagnostic and Extraction System menu:
2 MAIN MENU, exit from the Diagnostic and Extraction System menu and return to the
Main menu.

D-3-5-1 Diagnostic system window
Figure D-18: Diagnostic system window
See Table D-10 for explanation of diagnostic system controls and indicators.
Table D-10: Diagnostic system controls and indicators
Probe Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-
meter ternal source is connected to the probe.
Foil 1 Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-
meter ternal source is connected to the foil.
Foil 2 Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-
meter ternal source is connected to the dump
Target 1 Indicator field and 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-
meter ternal source is connected to target 1.
Probe Status Indicator/white IN/OUT Shows the position of the flip-in probe.
Button/blue Will move the flip-in probe to beam measur-

ing position and block the beam.

Button/blue Will move the flip-in probe to inactive posi-

tion and allow beam extraction.
Coll. 1U Indicator field 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-

ternal source is connected to collimator 1U.
Coll. 1L Indicator field 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-

ternal source is connected to collimator 1L.
Coll. 2U Indicator field 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-

ternal source is connected to collimator 2U.
Coll. 2L Indicator field 0–200 µA Normally 0 µA. Shows current 0 µA if an ex-

ternal source is connected to collimator 2L.
Note!
Collimator current indicates stray-beam when irradiating realated target. A well-tuned machine
will have approximately the same value on each collimator pair.
D-3-5-2 Extraction system window
Figure D-19: Extraction system window
Table D-11: Extraction system controls and indicators
Balance Indicator field 0–100% Shows balance (pivot) position
Set (Balance) Entry field Sets balance position to entered value
Foil holder 1 position Indicator field and 0–100% Shows foil holder 1 position.
meter
meter

Set foil holder posi- Entry field Place cursor in field, enter new position [%]
tion and press return. The foil holder moves to
the new position.
Buttons/blue Fine adjust foil holder and balance position

by clicking. 0.1% (upper mouse button) or 1%
(lower mouse button) steps
Max. foil wear Set Entry field Sends the entered max. foil wear, in mAh, to
the GCS. The max. foil wear is the same for
all foils. The present max. foil wear value is
shown.
Present wear Foil 1 Indicator field 0-operator config- Number of mAh that the foil has been used.
ured mAh
Present wear Foil 2 Indicator field 0-operator config- Number of mAh that the foil has been used.
ured mAh
Foil number Indicator field 1 or 2 Shows which foil that is active in the foil
holder.
Button/blue Sets wear of both foils to zero (foil holder 1)

and reset the foil diary kept by the GCS, after
the user has confirmed the replacement.
Button/blue Change foil # 1 to foil # 2. When foil # 2 is

reached, the GCS will not allow another foil
change until foils replaced has been request-
ed.

D-3-5-3 Diagnostic and extraction system status window

This window shows the status of the Beam Current Analyzer (BCA). The status is shown by an
indicator which is either green or yellow. If an error or interlock occurs the indicator changes
The Diagnostic and Extraction Status window includes a RESET button which resets a BCA
power error, provided the cause of the error has been corrected.
Figure D-20: Diagnostic and extraction status window
Table D-12: Diagnostic and extraction status indicators
BCA power Green/yellow Yellow if BCA board power below ±10 V.
D-3-6 Vacuum and cooling system menu

The cooling system removes the generated heat from the different subsystems in the
accelerator. The Cooling System can be turned on or off, and possible errors may be detected.
To turn off the cooling system, the subsystems ion source, RF and magnet must be in state
off.
The vacuum system maintains the evacuated state of the cyclotron vacuum chamber.

Figure D-21: Vacuum and cooling system menu
The Vacuum and Cooling System menu contains these windows:
• Vacuum control and indicator window – indicator fields for chamber and backing pressure,
and a status indicator.
• Vacuum Status window – a “LED” for indication of subsystem state.
• Cooling control and indicator window – buttons for simple control of the Cooling system
and a status indicator.
• Vacuum Status window – “LEDs” for indication of subsystem state and interlocks. Also
includes System Interlock indicators.
In addition, two buttons are shown in the Vacuum and Cooling System menu:
2 MAIN MENU, exit from the Vacuum and Cooling System menu and return to the Main
menu.

D-3-6-1 Vacuum control and indicator window
Figure D-22: Vacuum control and indicator window
Table D-13: Vacuum controls and indicators
Chamber pressure Indicator field Typical 7.0x10-7 Shows the cyclotron vacuum chamber
mbar pressure.
Backing pressure Indicator field Typical 1.0x10-2 Shows the cyclotron vacuum backing pres-
mbar sure.
Vacuum State Indicator/white OK/NOK Shows vacuum system status.

OK if below Penning LOW LEVEL set point,
4x10-5 mbar.
D-3-6-2 Vacuum status window

This window shows the vacuum system status. The vacuum status is shown by an indicator
which is either green or yellow. If an error or interlock occurs the corresponding indicator
changes from green to yellow.
The Vacuum System Status window includes a RESET button which resets vacuum errors,
provided the errors are rectified.
Figure D-23: Vacuum status window
Table D-14: Vacuum status indicators
Chamber closed Green/yellow Yellow if the vacuum chamber is not closed.

D-3-6-3 Cooling control and indicator window
Figure D-24: Cooling status window
This window shows the cooling water system status. The status is shown by indicators which
are either green or yellow. If an error or interlock occurs the corresponding indicator changes
Table D-15: Cooling status indicators
STATUS
pump running Green/yellow Yellow if main cooling pump is off.
D-3-7 Motor calibration menu

In the Motor Calibration menu, the foil holder- and balance (Pivot) servo motor positions are
calibrated. Each servo motor must operate within a certain range.
The position of the servo within the limits, is monitored by means of a variable voltage from
a potentiometer on the servo motor unit. The control system shall be capable of calibrating
this position information, that is it shall normalize the actual signal from the servo motor unit
so that position 0% is indicated when the servo is at the lower limit and 100% at the higher
limit.

Figure D-25: Motor calibration menu
The Motor Calibration menu consists of these windows:
• Control and indicator window – provides numerical values and indicator meters for foil
holders and Balance positions. Also includes buttons for calibration of the motors, a
status indicator and current indicators.
• Status window – a “LED” for indication of subsystem state.
In addition, two buttons are shown in the Motor Calibration menu:
2 MAIN MENU, exit from the Motor Calibration menu and return to the Main menu.

D-3-7-1 Motor control and indicator window
Figure D-26: Motor control and indicator window
Table D-16: Motor controls and indicators
Button/blue Selects Foil holder 1 motor.
Button/blue Selects Foil holder 2 motor.
Button/blue Selects Balance motor.
Selected motor Indicator/white Foil holder 1 Shows the selected motor.

Foil holder 2
Balance
Button/blue Calibrates the selected motor. (If no motor

has been previously calibrated, use of this
function will automatically calibrate all mo-
tors.)
Foil holder 1, 2 posi- Indicator field and 0–100% Shows the foil holder 1, 2 position.
tion meter

Balance position Indicator field and 0–100% Shows the balance position.
meter
Foil number Indicator field 1 or 2 Shows the active foil for foil holder 1.
Current Indicator field Shows drive current for moving motor.
D-3-7-2 Motor status window

The Motor status is shown by an indicator which is either green or yellow. If an error occurs,
the indicator changes from green to yellow.
The Motor Status window includes a RESET button which resets a motor error, provided the
cause of the error has been corrected.
Figure D-27: Motor status window
Table D-17: Motor status indicators
power on Green/yellow Yellow if DC motor board power not ok.

D-3-8 Beam control menu

Ion beam can be produced from this menu.
WARNING!
Make sure that no personnel is present in the cyclotron room before entering this menu.
Check that the beam will be directed into a target before turning on the accelerator.
Figure D-28: Beam control – password
To enter this menu, enter the correct password and click the OK button. If the password is
incorrect, a message “WRONG PASSWORD, try again?” is written in the Message window.
The CANCEL button can be selected to exit from the Beam Control menu and return to the
Main menu.

Figure D-29: Beam control menu
The Beam Control menu consists of these windows:
• Vacuum Indicator window – indicator field for chamber pressure and a status indicator.
• Target Pressure window – one indicator field for the target pressures.
• Cooling Indicator window – a status indicator.
• Magnet control and indicator window – indicator and entry field for current, and a status
indicator.
• RF system control and indicator window – indicator and entry fields for Dee voltages,
Frequency and status indicators.
• Beam control and indicator window – indications and entry fields for probe current, foil
1 current, foil 2 current, target 1 to 6 current and collimator currents.
• Extraction control and indicator window – indicator field, indicator meter and entry field
for foil holder and balance positions, and indicator fields for foil number.
• Ion Source control and indicator window – indicator and entry fields for current and
voltage. Also includes a status indicator.

• Configuration Parameters window – indicator fields for magnet current and Dee voltages,
and entry and indicator fields for foil holder and balance positions.
• Safety window contains “LEDs” for indication of external interlocks, see Section D-3-2-3
Safety window on page 699.
In addition, sixteen buttons are shown in the Beam Control menu:
1 MAGNET ON, starts the magnet.
2 MAGNET OFF, shuts down the magnet.
3 RF NORMAL, sets the RF system to NORMAL mode.
4 RF STANDBY, sets the RF system to STANDBY mode.
5 RF OFF, shuts down the RF system.
6 IS ON, start the ion source with arc current 0.
7 IS OFF, shuts down the ion source.
8 GAS ON, sets gas flow on.
9 GAS OFF, turns the gas flow off.
10 PROBE IN, will move the probe to beam measuring position.
11 PROBE OUT, will move the probe to inactive position.
12 Change foil, will change the foil # 1 to foil # 2.
13 Save new target pos, saves the foil positions for the different target positions to the GCS.
14 Save all to GCS, saves the set parameters (entry fields): Dee voltage, magnet current,
frequency and foil positions, to GCS. When saving the parameters the ion source must
be OFF and RF must be in STANDBY mode.
16 MAIN MENU:
a If the beam is ON, the user must verify that the beam can remain ON before returning
to the Main menu.
b If the beam is OFF, sets the RF system in STANDBY mode, shuts down the ion source
and returns to the Main menu.
If the set parameters have not been stored explicitly, the user will be prompted to
store parameters before exiting this page.

D-3-8-1 Vacuum, cooling and particle indicator windows
Figure D-30: Vacuum, target and cooling windows
Table D-18: Vacuum, target and cooling indicators
VACUUM
Indicator: OK/NOK Yellow if chamber pressure above 4x10-5.

green/yellow
Chamber pressure Indicator field Typ 7x10-7 mbar Shows the chamber pressure.
COOLING
Indicator: ON/OFF Yellow if cooling pump is off.

green/yellow
TARGET
Target Position Indicator field 1-6 Shows selected target.
Target Pressure Indicator field Shows the Target pressure.
D-3-8-2 Magnet, RF system and ion source indicator and control windows
Figure D-31: Magnet, RF system and ion source indicator and control windows

Table D-19: Magnet, RF system and ion source indicator and control windows
MAGNET
Indicator: ON/OFF Shows PSMC state.

green/yellow
Set Entry field Place cursor in field, enter magnet current

(A). Press RETURN. The PSMC ramps current
first to 150 A, waits 60 s, then ramps to en-
tered value.
Buttons/blue Fine adjust magnet current.
RF SYSTEM
Indicator: OFF/ Shows the RF system status.

yellow/ STANDBY/
green/ NORMAL
green
State Indicator/white start mode/ See description of RF System menu

tuning mode/
dee volt. ok/
dee volt. not ok/
sparks/
standby error/
standby ready
warm up/
err. in norm.mode/
off
Dee Indicator field Typ. 35 kV Shows Dee Voltage.
Set Dee V Entry field Place cursor in field, enter Dee voltage (kV)
and press RETURN.
Buttons/blue Click to fine adjust Dee voltage.
Frequency Indicator field Shows frequency.
Set Freq Entry field Place cursor in field, enter start frequency
and press RETURN.
Buttons/blue Click to fine adjust frequency.

ION SOURCE
Indicator: ON/OFF Shows the ion source status.

Green/yellow
Voltage Indicator field 0–1300 V Shows the PSARC voltage.
Current Indicator field 0–2000 mA Shows the PSARC current.
Set Entry field Place cursor in field, enter new current value
and press return. The PSARC then changes
the arc current.
Buttons/blue Fine adjust arc current.
state Indicator/white GAS ON/GAS OFF Shows gas state.
D-3-8-3 Beam control and indicator window
Figure D-32: Beam control and indicator window
Table D-20: Beam control and indicator window
Probe current Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on the flip-in probe.
meter
Foil 1 current Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on foil 1.
meter
Foil 2 current Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on foil 2.
meter
Target 1 current Indicator field and 0–100 µA Shows the beam current on target 1.
meter
meter

meter
meter
meter
meter
Probe status Indicator/white IN/OUT Shows the flip-in probe position.
Coll 1U Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on collimator 1U.
meter
Coll 1L Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on collimator 1L.
meter
Coll 2U Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on collimator 2U.
meter
Coll 2L Indicator field and 0–10 µA Shows the beam current on collimator 2L.
meter
D-3-8-4 Extraction control and indicator window
Figure D-33: Extraction control and indicator window

Table D-21: Extraction control and indicator window
Balance Indicator field 0–100% Shows balance (pivot) position
Set (Balance) Entry field 0–100% Sets balance position to entered value
Buttons/blue Use up- and down arrows for fine-adjusting.
meter
meter
Set (foil holder pos.) Entry field 0–100% Place cursor in field, enter new position [%]
and press return. The foil holder moves to
the new position.
Buttons/blue Fine adjust foil holder position by clicking.
Foil number Indicator field 1or 2 Shows active foil for foil holder 1.
D-3-8-5 Configuration parameters and target pressure window
Figure D-34: Configuration parameters and target pressure window
Table D-22: Configuration parameters target pressure control and indicators
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
Magnet Current Indicator field ≈ 134 A Shows default value for proton magnet cur-
rent.
Dee Voltage Indicator field ≈ 35 kV Shows default value for Dee voltage.
Frequency Indicator field ≈ 70% Shows default value for start frequency.

Foil holder position
Tar.1, pos. Indicator field ≈ 15% Shows default value, target 1 foil holder 1
position.
position.
position.
position.
position.
position.
Set new Entry field For each target, entered value will set foil
holder position for later saving.
Balance, pos. Indicator field ≈ 5% Shows default value for balance position.
(5% is park position.)
Set new Entry field Entered value will set foil balance position
for later saving.

D-3-9 18F- target menu

In this target, radioactive 18F-F is produced out of 18O-H2O.
Figure D-35: 18F-- Target menu
The 18F--target menu consists of these sections and windows:
• Target and Vacuum section – indicator fields for the target type, the target position, the
• Water and Helium cooling section – buttons for simple control of the helium cooling, the
helium and the water cooling valves, a status indicator for the helium compressor, a
bargraph for the helium pressure and a “LED” for indication of a flow error. Also includes
a Water cooling Status window which shows a “LED” for indication of an water flow error.
• 18F- extraction section – buttons for simple control of the valves.
window on page 699.
In addition, twelve buttons are shown in the 18F--target menu:
1 CONNECT TARGET – connects target after service.
2 DISCONNECT TARGET – used when the target needs service.
3 SELECT TARGET – target will be ready for beam.

4 UNSELECT TARGET – cooling for the target will be turned off.
5 FILL TARGET WITH H218O – fills the target with enriched 18O-water.
6 FILL TARGET WITH H216O – fills the target with 16O-water.
7 EMPTY TARGET TO OUTLET1 – empties the target to outlet 1.
8 EMPTY TARGET TO OUTLET2 – empties the target to outlet 2.
9 DRY TARGET TO OUTLET1 – He-gas flows through the target for a present time to dry
the target, target open to outlet 1.
10 DRY TARGET TO OUTLET2 – He-gas flows through the target for a present time to dry
the target, target open to outlet 2.
11 STOP DRYING – stops drying target before the preset time is reached.
12 MAIN MENU – exits from the 18F--target menu and return to the Main menu.
D-3-9-1 Target and vacuum section
Figure D-36: Target and vacuum section
Table D-23: Target and vacuum controls and indicators
TARGET
Target type Indicator field 18F--target Shows selected target.
Target position Indicator field pos: 1–6 Shows the slot number in which this target
is installed.
Target Status Indicator/white CONNECTED/ Shows the target state.

DISCONNECTED
Target pressure Indicator field 150 psi Shows target pressure.
VACUUM

D-3-9-2 Water and helium cooling section
Figure D-37: Water and helium cooling section
At the top of this section the water cooling status indicators is shown. This indicator is either
green or yellow. If an error or interlock occur, the corresponding indicator changes from green
to yellow.
Table D-24: Water cooling status indicator
Indicator Type/color Description
Water cooling
Water flow Green/yellow Shows selected target.
The remaining part of this section shows Water and Helium cooling controls and indicators.
Table D-25: Water and helium cooling controls and indicators
He cooling
Button/blue Click to fill the helium cooling system to pre-

defined pressure (18 psi).
Button/blue Click to empty the helium cooling system.
Button/blue Click to flush the helium cooling system.

He cooling inlet valve Indicator OPEN/CLOSE Shows open or close.

Green/yellow Green = Open
He cooling outlet Indicator OPEN/CLOSE Shows open or close.

valve Green/yellow Green = Open
He cooling loop valve Indicator OPEN/CLOSE Shows open or close.

Green/yellow Green = Open
Button/blue Click to turn helium compressor on.
Button/blue Click to turn helium compressor off.
Indicator/white ON/OFF Shows the helium compressor status.
Pressure Indicator meter Shows the compressor pressure.

Too low/high = Yellow
Normal = Green
He Cooling valve Indicator and button OPEN/CLOSE Shows and controls status of the helium and
Green/yellow water cooling valves. These valves are con-
the same status.
To change status on the valves, use the
Water Cooling valve mouse and click one of the valves. Green =
Open.

D-3-9-3 18F- extraction section
Figure D-38: 18F- extraction section
Table D-26: 18F- production section controls and indicators
Valve 1a Indicator, button OPEN/OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 1a path.

Green/green/yellow To change state of the Valve, click on the
valve.
Green = path open
Valve 1b Indicator, button OPEN/OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 1b path.

valve.
Green = path open
Valve 2a Indicator, button OPEN/OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 2a path.

valve.
Green = path open

Valve 2b Indicator, button OPEN/OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 2b path.

valve.
Green = path open
Valve 3 Indicator, button OPEN/OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 3 path.

valve.
Green = path open
Valve 4 Indicator, button OPEN/OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 4 path.

valve.
Green = path open

Target Fillers.
Static indicator Water bottle for enriched 18O-water on Liquid

Target Filler.
Button, indicator Syringe for filling of target.

To change state of the syringe, click on the
syringe.
FILL TARGET/FILL SYRINGE
Static indicator Vented sterile filter

D-3-10 13N target menu

In this target 13N-NOx is produced from 16O-H2O.
Figure D-39: 13N target menu
The 13N target menu – consists of these sections and windows:
• Target and Vacuum section – indicator fields for the target type, the target position, the
vacuum chamber pressure and the target pressure. See Section D-3-9-1 Target and
vacuum section on page 732.
Helium and the water cooling valves, a status indicator for the helium compressor and
an indicator meter for the helium pressure. Also includes a Water Cooling Status window
which shows a “LED” for indication of an water flow error, see Section D-3-9-2 Water
and helium cooling section on page 733.
• 13N extraction section – buttons for simple control of the valves. Safety window contains
“LEDs” for indication of external interlocks, see SectionD-3-2-3 Safety window on page699.
In addition, nine buttons are shown in the 13N-target menu:
1 CONNECT TARGET – connects target after service.
2 DISCONNECT TARGET – used when the target needs service.
3 SELECT TARGET – target will be ready for beam.

4 UNSELECT TARGET – cooling for the target will be turned off.
5 FILL TARGET – fills the target.
6 EMPTY TARGET – empties the target to the hot cell.
7 DRY TARGET – He-gas flows through the target for a present time to dry the target.
8 STOP DRYING – stops drying target before the preset time is reached.
9 MAIN MENU – exits from the 13N-target menu and return to the Main menu.
D-3-10-1 13N extraction section
Figure D-40: 13N extraction section
Table D-27: 13N production section controls and indicators
Valve 1 Indicator, button OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 1 path.

Green/green/yellow To change state of the valve, click the valve
to open/close a path.
Green = path open
Valve 2 Indicator, button OPEN/CLOSE Shows state of Valve 2 path.

Green/green/yellow To change state of the valve, click the valve
Green = path open

Valve 3 Indicator, button OPEN/OPEN/ Shows state of Valve 3 path.

Green/green/yellow CLOSE To change state of the valve, click the valve
Green = path open

Target Fillers.
Button, indicator Syringe for filling of target.

To change state of the syringe, click on the
syringe.
FILL TARGET/FILL SYRINGE

D-3-11 Proton target menu

This target is used for testing of the beam.
Figure D-41: Proton target menu
The Proton target menu consists of these sections and windows:
• Target and Vacuum section – indicator fields for the target type, the target position and
the vacuum chamber pressure. See Section D-3-9-1 Target and vacuum section on
page 732.
helium and the water cooling valves, a status indicator for the helium compressor, an
indicator meter for the helium pressure and a “LED” for indication of a flow error. Also
includes a Water Cooling Status window which shows a “LED” for indication of an water
flow error, see Section D-3-9-2 Water and helium cooling section on page 733.
window on page 699.

In addition, five buttons are shown in the Proton target menu.
1 CONNECT TARGET, connects target after service.
2 DISCONNECT TARGET, used when the target needs service.
3 SELECT TARGET, target will be ready for beam.
4 UNSELECT TARGET, cooling for the target will be turned off.
5 MAIN MENU, exit from the Proton-target menu and return to the Main menu.
D-3-12 Configuration parameters menu

Before the MINItrace system can be started, a number of parameters must be correctly
configured, for example, the positions of the targets and the host address for the Master
System must be defined.
Figure D-42: Configuration parameters password

The configuration Parameters menu consists of 6 pages:
1 Page 1 – Config Parameters, Accelerator
2 Page 2 – Config Parameters, Target
3 Page 2a – Config Parameters 11C
4 Page 2b – Config Parameters 15O
5 Page 2c – Config Parameters 13N
6 Page 2d – Config Parameters 18F-
A Password window is opened when Config parameters is selected. To gain access to the
configuration pages you must enter the correct password and click the OK button. If the
wrong password is entered, the message “WRONG PASSWORD, try again?” is shown in the
Message window.
Click Cancel to return to the Main menu.
D-3-12-1 Page 1 - Config Parameters, Accelerator

The Configuration Parameters, Accelerator menu consists of these windows:
• Magnet System, RF System, Extraction System, Ion Source System, Global and Foil diary
Configuration windows – contain indication/entry fields for the accelerator system
parameters.
• Message window – shows messages. These messages can be acknowledged with the
ACK, YES or NO buttons when shown, otherwise they disappear within about 10 seconds.
See Section D-3-1-1 Message window on page 696.
In addition, six buttons are shown in the Config Parameters, Accelerator menu:
1 Get from GCS, loads the configuration parameters from GCS.
2 Save to GCS, saves the configuration parameters to GCS.
3 Get from file, loads the configuration parameters from a file.
4 Save to file, saves the configuration parameters to a file.
5 NEXT PAGE, change menu to Config Parameters, Chemistry.
6 MAIN MENU, exit from the Config Parameters, Accelerator menu and return to the Main
menu.

Figure D-43: Page 1 - Config Parameters, Accelerator
Table D-28: Page 1 – Config Parameters, Accelerator
Parameter Description Typical value
Magnet system
itop Maximum limit for magnet current 150 A
thold Time to stay at maximum current when the Magnet is 60 s

ramping
istep Ramping speed 1 A/s
iproton Current when the cyclotron is producing ≈ 134 A
increasing current ≈ 40 mA
RF system
U Dee Operating Dee voltage 35 kV
scan start pos (frequency) Scanning start position for frequency 70%
Dee scale Scaling factor, conversion of Dee voltage 205
phase set 2

Parameter Description Typical value
Ion source system
is operation time Time that this ion source has been used [Ah]
is life length Maximum length of time that this ion source can be used 1000 Ah
max arc current Maximum current of the Ion Source Power Supply 2000 A
startup arc current 50 A
Extraction system
i probe start up Maximum current for the flip-in probe at ion beam start 15 µA
up
probe/foil loss max Maximum Ion Beam loss between flip-in probe and active 80%
foil
foil/target loss max Maximum Ion Beam loss between active foil and active 20%
target
Parameter Description Rec. value
Global
ethernet port num Etheternet port number (Check/etc/services on master) 3456
master TCP IP addr Master System TCP/IP address (Check/etc/hosts on 192.0.4.30

master)
Foil diary
maximum foil wear Maximum foil lifetime 2.0 mAh
D-3-12-2 Page 2 – Config Parameters, Target

The Configuration Parameters, Target menu consists of these windows:
• Target position, Choice of new target type and Current type windows – contain
indication/entry fields for the target system parameters.

In addition, three buttons are shown in the Config Parameters, Target menu:
1 PREVIOUS PAGE, change menu to Config Parameters, Chemistry.
2 Config, change menu to selected target.
3 MAIN MENU, exit from the Config Parameters, Target menu and return to the Main menu.
Figure D-44: Page2 – Config Parameters, Target
Table D-29: Page2 – Config Parameters, Target
Parameter Description Rec.value
Target position
Number Physical target position (entry field) 1–6
Choice of target type
11C Choice of target type after choice of target position

number
15O
13N
18F-

Parameter Description Rec.value
dummy
none
Choise of tracers
Choice of tracer after choice of target type (the content

of this window depends on the choise of target type).
D-3-12-3 Page 2c – Config Parameters, 13N
Figure D-45: Page 2c – Config Parameters, 13N
The Configuration Parameters, 13N menu consists of these windows:
Target position, Target type, Target address and parameters GCS windows – contain
indication/entry fields for the 13N Config parameters.
Message window – shows messages. These messages can be acknowledged with the ACK,
YES or NO buttons when shown, otherwise they disappear within about 10 seconds. See
Section D-3-1-1 Message window on page 696.

In addition, six buttons are shown in the Config Parameters, 13N menu:
3 PREVIOUS PAGE, change menu to Config Parameters, 15O.
6 MAIN MENU, exit from the Config Parameters, 13N menu and return to the Main menu.
Table D-30: Page 2c – Config Parameters, 13N
Parameter Description Rec. value
Target position Physical target position 1-6
Target type The configured target type
Target address GCS
ltf id 1
Parameters GCS
max pressure Maximum pressure allowed 150 psi
min pressure Minimum allowable target pressure 45 psi
delta pressure Minimum allowable pressure variation in this target 10 psi
max leak pressure ± tolerance on change of target pressure at leak check 20 psi
fill time Time needed to fill the target 10 s
stabilize time Waiting time for pressure equilibrium 5s
empty time Time to empty the target 120 s
leak time Time for leak test 30 s
dry time Time to dry the target 30 min
max beam current Maximum beam current for the target 45 µA

D-3-12-4 Page 2d – Config Parameters, 18F-
Figure D-46: Page 2d – Config Parameters, 18F-
The Configuration Parameters, 18F- menu consists of these windows:
• Target position, Target type, Target address and parameters GCS windows – contain
indication/entry fields for the 18F- Config parameters.
In addition, six buttons are shown in the Config Parameters, 18F- menu:
3 PREVIOUS PAGE, change menu to Config parameters, 13N.
6 MAIN MENU, exit from the Config Parameters, 18F- menu and return to the Main menu.

Table D-31: Page 2d - Config Parameters, 18F-
Parameter Description Rec.value Rec.value

18F- standard 18F- Gen II
Target position Physical target position 1 1
Target type The configurated target type
Target address GCS
LTF id 2 or 3 2 or 3
Parameters GCS
max pressure Maximum pressure allowed 400 psi 400 psi
min pressure1 Minimum pressure allowed for the high 250 psi 250 psi
pressure
set pressure Minimum allowed low pressure 35 psi 35 psi
delta pressure Min. press. incr. allowed as target gets filled 10 psi 8 psi
max leak pressure Pressure must not drop below this level dur- 95% 95%
ing leak check
fill time Time needed to fill the target 10 s 20 s
stabilize time Waiting time for pressure equilibrium 5s 5s
empty time Empty sequence duration 180 s 180 s
leak time Time for leak testing 30 s 30 s
dry time Time for drying of the Target 20 min 20 min
max beam current2 Maximum allowable beam on target 45 µA 60 µA
1 Note: This value is used to detect a possible leak in the target during production. There is a restriction mounted
in the high pressure supplyline. This will cause the pressure to drop even if the leak is very small.
2 Note: This value is typically set 10 µA higher than the maximum allowed beam on target. This is due to the fact
that the beam will otherwise be turned off in case the target current would temporarily be at a higher value (slight
overshoot in the regulation or similar).
For example the 18F- Gen II target is maximally allowed for 50 µA, still the value is configured to 60µA to prevent
a temporary current level above 50 µA to shut the system down.
D-3-13 Change password

Two different passwords are used. These passwords can be changed in this menu. The
password indicator shows which password that is selected.
To enter the Beam Control menu, password 1, and Configuration Parameters menu,
password 2, the user must enter the correct password.

Figure D-47: Change password
The procedure for changing passwords is described below:
1 Click Beam Control Page or Configuration parameters.
If Beam Control Page is selected indicator is shown.
If Configuration parameters is selected indicator is shown.
2 Enter the old password: xxxxxx
3 Enter the new password: xxxxxx (six characters)
4 Verify the new password: xxxxxx
D-3-14 Exit
To return to the Master System from the laptop PC, click Exit before switching off and
disconnecting the laptop PC – see Chapter 1 Introduction.
D-4 Software installation

This section describes the files required to run the MSS software, and the software directories.
Read the section carefully before software installation.
To install the MSS software, follow the instructions in Setup Instructions MSS included in the
software package.

D-4-1 Start-up files
Figure D-48: MSS directories
D-4-2 MSS software files

The following software files must be installed into the directories C:\MINITRAC\EYES and
C:\MINITRAC\MSS before the MSS software can be run. For more detailed information about
these files see Section D-5 MSS software structure on page 752.
The files located in the EYES directory are installed from the EyeOnLine license floppy disk.
For information about the EyeOnLine program see Section D-5 MSS software structure on
page 752.
C:\MINITRAC\EYES files:
• EYEONLIN.EXE
• EOL_S.EXE
• MET_SHEL.EXE
• EYECOM.EXE
• SYSTEM08.FNT
• SYSTEM16.FNT
• INSTALL2.BAT
• RECALL2.BAT

C:\MINITRAC\MSS files:
• MINI01**.DYN (** = 00-08, 10-14, 16-21 and 23-25)
• MINI01**.PIX (** = 00-08, 10-14, 16-21 and 23-25)
• MINI0***.SLB (*** = 000, 001, 004, 005, 006, 007, 020, 021, 022, 110, 111 and 112)
• MINI.INI
• MINI.PAR
• PASSWORD.DAT
• GEM_CONF.DAT
• MAIN_MSS.EXE
• MSS.BAT
• NONE.BAT
The file ERROR.LOG will be created when the MSS software are running.
D-5 MSS software structure
D-5-1 Introduction
The MSS software runs as a separate program on the service laptop connected to the GCS.
The MSS software is written in C, using EyesCream™ and Asynch Manager as tools. EyeOnLine
is used for communication between the application program and EyesCream. Asynch Manager
is used for serial communication.

D-5-2 Software security levels

The MSS enables the user to control the accelerator, the targets and the radiochemistry
subsystems and to store parameters for later use in normal tracer production. The MSS
software has three security levels:
First level Gives access to the accelerator, the different targets and the radio-
chemistry system. Each subsystem may be controlled independently
of the others.
Subsystem parameters may be read and set, with the normal inter-
lock system always active. At this level no beam can be produced.
This level contains a menu for each accelerator subsystem and for
each target, including connected chemistry processes.
Second level Accessible only when entering a correct password.

Gives the user control over the complete accelerator by reading
and setting all parameters. Parameters saved at this level will be
used for accelerator control in the normal tracer production. In this
mode it is possible to produce beam, so utmost care must be
taken by the user to prevent damage to equipment or injury to
personnel.
Third level Accessible only when entering a correct password. The user can
change the passwords.
Gives access to the configuration parameters defined for later use
at production, using the Master system. The installation positions
of the six different Targets, all connected hardware addresses and
the host address for the Master, is also defined at this level.
All parameters must be stored before the GCS can work properly.
The parameters may also be stored in a file.
All set parameters are input fields. When clicking Save to GCS, the new parameter values are
transferred to the GCS.
All commands are entered by clicking with the mouse. Messages from GCS is queued.
D-5-3 MSS system files

This section lists the various system files used by the MSS software.
Table D-32: MSS main files
File Description
MAIN_MSS.EXE The application program
MINI.INI The color palette
MINI.PAR A standard table
PASSWORD.DAT The two passwords used in the system, stored as cipher.

File Description
GEM_CONF.DAT When reading or saving configuration parameters from/to a

file, this is the file name used. If it does not exist at reading, an
error message is shown. If it does not exist at writing, it is cre-
ated.
For saving the configuration parameters, it is recommended
to back up this file.
MSS.BAT Start-up file when running the cyclotron system.
NONE.BAT Allows the user to look at different menus without being con-
nected to the system.
ERROR.LOG At runtime, all messages shown are logged in this file, together
with time for program start and program exit.
All messages are added, which after a time of using the system
might create a too large file. In this case, it may be deleted or
renamed. If the file does not exist at program start it is created.
EYEONLIN The runtime EyeOnLine
EOL_S.EXE EyeOnline for high DOS
MET_SHEL.EXE Graphic module for EOL_S
Table D-33: MSS picture layout files
File Description
MINI0100.PIX Main menu
MINI0101.PIX Magnet System menu
MINI0102.PIX RF System menu
MINI0103.PIX Ion Source and Gas Handling System menu
MINI0104.PIX Extraction and Diagnostics System menu
MINI0105.PIX Vacuum and Cooling System menu
MINI0106.PIX Motor Calibration menu
MINI0107.PIX 18F- target menu
MINI0108.PIX 13N target menu
MINI0110.PIX 15O target menu
MINI0111.PIX 11C target menu
MINI0112.PIX Dummy target menu

File Description
MINI0113.PIX Change password
MINI0114.PIX Config. Parameters, Accelerator system
MINI0116.PIX Config. 18F- target
MINI0117.PIX Config. 13N target
MINI0118.PIX Config. 15O target
MINI0119.PIX Config. 11C target
MINI0120.PIX Beam Control menu
MINI0123.PIX Password for Beam Control menu
MINI0124.PIX Password for Config. Parameters
MINI0125.PIX Config. Target Position
Table D-34: MSS picture dynamical objects
File Description
MINI0100.DYN Main menu
MINI0101.DYN Magnet System menu
MINI0102.DYN RF System menu
MINI0103.DYN Ion Source and Gas Handling System menu
MINI0104.DYN Extractionand Diagnostics System menu
MINI0105.DYN Vacuum and Cooling System menu
MINI0106.DYN Motor Calibration menu
MINI0107.DYN 18F- target menu
MINI0108.DYN 13N target menu
MINI0110.DYN 15O target menu
MINI0111.DYN 11C target menu
MINI0112.DYN Dummy target menu
MINI0113.DYN Change password
MINI0114.DYN Config. Parameters, Accelerator system

File Description
MINI0116.DYN Config. 18F- target
MINI0117.DYN Config. 13N target
MINI0118.DYN Config. 15O target
MINI0119.DYN Config. 11C targett
MINI0121.DYN Beam Control menu
MINI0123.DYN Password for Beam Control menu
MINI0124.DYN Password for Config. Parameters
MINI0125.DYN Config. Target Position
The SLB-files contain symbol libraries:
Table D-35: MSS SLB-files
File Description
MINI0000.SLB Contains different characters
MINI0110.SLB Contains symbols used in MSS

D-5-4 Start-up software

To start the MSS application on the service laptop, one of the BAT-files are called, including
start of the EyeOnline.
The MSS software can be run in two different modes. These modes are chosen by clicking
the desired icon on the desktop as decribed below.
• MSS – enables communication with the cyclotron system.
• NONE – only to look at different menus without being connected to the GCS.

GE, GE Monogram, Imagination at work, GENtrace, MINItrace, PETtrace, and FASTlab
For local office contact information, visit are trademarks of General Electric Company.
www.gehealthcare.com/en/about/contact-us All third party trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2019 General Electric Company – All rights reserved.
GEMS PET Systems AB All goods and services are sold subject to the terms and conditions of sale of the
company within GE Healthcare which supplies them. A copy of these terms and
Box 15024, Husbyborg conditions is available on request. Contact your local GE Healthcare representative
SE-750 15 Uppsala for the most current information.
Sweden GEMS PET Systems AB, going to market as GE Healthcare.
www.gehealthcare.com
imagination at work

2233000-100 Rev 18 MINItrace Service Manual - Maintenance

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2233000-100 Rev 18 MINItrace Service Manual - Maintenance

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

Rev Date Reason for change

18 August 26, Sec 19-2-2: Baud rate changed.

15 December 17, Chapter 1: Product name change information added.

Rev Date Reason for change

Rev Date Reason for change

11 October 19, Sec 2-8-3: Values J and M updated. [PCR 12-127]

Rev Date Reason for change

9 July 7, 2010 Table 2-1: Softwares updated.

8 November 30, Ch 15:

7 May 12, 2009 Ch 12:

Rev Date Reason for change

4 June 04, 2007 General: All fonts changed to GEinspira.

Rev Date Reason for change

2 March 12, 2004 Ch 1:

1C July 8, 2003 Ch 6: Sec 6-2 Lock-out and Tag-out warning rephrased.

Rev Date Reason for change

1B June 14, 2003 Ch 2: FRUs removed/added. Cyclotron tools added.

1A January 14, Table 2: Dose Monitor (Rem version) added.

1 December 14, Ch 2, 3, 4, 10, 12, 14 updated.

0H October 10, A few improvements:

Rev Date Reason for change

0G September 13, A number of chapters thoroughly updated:

0F February 14, Ch 2 Preventive Maintenance: Updated.

0D September 28, Ch 4 – to be Field Validated.

0C August 13, Ch 4 is still just a draft – to be reviewed.

Rev Date Reason for change

0B June 30, 2000 Ch 4 Preventive Maintenance added (to be reviewed).

0A June 14, 2000 Ch 3 MINItrace Radiation Safety Aspects: Illustrations added.

0 June 1, 2000 Initial document release.

INTERNET UPDATES: COMMON DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY

3 Select manual type.

Internet updates: Common Documentation Library 13

2 SAFETY INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 27

3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 29

3-9-9 Compressed air moisture trap .......................................................................................... 97

4 SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................. 125

5 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................. 127

6 GENERAL CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................................................. 161

7 GENERAL CONTROL UNIT ....................................................................................... 163

7-3-6 Disassembly/reassembly .................................................................................................... 226

8 CYCLOTRON SUPPORT CABINET, CSC (POWER/COOLING/VACUUM) .............. 255

9 COOLING WATER SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 263

10 VACUUM SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 283

11 ION SOURCE AND CENTRAL REGION .................................................................... 331

12 MAGNET SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 369

13 RF SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 385

13-2-2 RFPG SCU functions .............................................................................................................. 388

14 EXTRACTION SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 493

14-5-4 Controls and displays ........................................................................................................... 497

15 TARGETS AND RADIOCHEMISTRY SYSTEM ........................................................... 507

16 BEAM DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................................ 541

16-3 Planned maintenance .................................................................................................................... 543

17 RADIATION SHIELD .................................................................................................. 559

18 SAFETY SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 567

19 MINITRACE SERVICE SYSTEM VERSION 2.X (MSS) SOFTWARE .......................... 589

19-5 Administration .................................................................................................................................... 598

A RISK ASSESSMENT (RA) ............................................................................................ 667

B GENERAL RADIATION SAFETY ASPECTS ............................................................... 669

C MINITRACE RADIATION SAFETY ASPECTS ............................................................ 679

C-2-2 Radiation during cyclotron beam operation .............................................................. 680

D THE MINITRACE SERVICE SYSTEM (MSS) SOFTWARE .......................................... 691

This manual applies to the following cyclotron systems:

• MINItrace (discontinued in 2014)